MiCOM P437 Technical Manual

MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device

P437/EN M/R-11-A
Version
P437 -311 -412/413 -650
Technical Manual
General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual

All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).
WARNING
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present
in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices,
incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and
cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the P437 must be isolated. Where
stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be
employed.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED)
(permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM) can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the P437. Schneider
Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this P437 must be in accordance with the manual. If any
other modification is made without the express permission of Schneider
Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this P437 depends on appropriate shipping and
handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful
operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this P437.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the warnings in Chapter 5, (p. 5-1),
Chapter 10, (p. 10-1), Chapter 11, (p. 11-1) and Chapter 12, (p. 121) and with the content of Chapter 14, (p. 14-1), before working on the
equipment. If the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty,
and may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the P437
and of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety

engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize
equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with
safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
This operating manual gives instructions for installation, commissioning and
operation of the P437. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office of Schneider Electric
and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on
the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely
from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of
the operating manual.
Changes after going to press
P437
Table of Contents
1
Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.1
Overview .....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2
General Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3
Global Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4
Design .........................................................................................................................1-7
1.5
Configurable Function Keys ........................................................................................ 1-8
1.6
Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 1-9
1.7
Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-10
1.8
Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-11
Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1
Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2
General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1
General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2
Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................2-3
2.3
Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1
Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2
Routine Tests .................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.4
Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.1
Measuring Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.2
Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.3
IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.4
Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.4.5
Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.4.6
Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-11
2.4.7
Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-12
2.4.8
BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.5
Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.1
Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-13
2.5.2
PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.3
Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.4
IEC Communication Interface ...................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.5
IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6
Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.7
Settings Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-17
2.7.1
Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.7.2
Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.3
Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-17
2.7.4
Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.7.5
Power Directional Protection ....................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.8
Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.8.1
Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.8.2
Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.8.3
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-20
2.9
Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-21
2.9.1
Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-21
2.9.2
Phase Currents System ............................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.9.3
Residual Current ..........................................................................................................................................2-21
2.9.4
Phase-to-Ground Voltages and Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ...........................................................2-21
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Table of Contents
2.10
Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-22
2.10.1
Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-22
2.11
Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-24
2.12
Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-25
2.12.1
Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.12.2
General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.12.3
Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-27
Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1
Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3
Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, Selection of the
Control Point (Function Group LOC) ............................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-5
3.3.2
Fault Panel .....................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.3
Overload Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.4
Configurable Clear Key .................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4
Serial Interfaces .......................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1
PC Interface (Function Group PC) .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.4.2
Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-10
3.4.3
Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-19
3.4.4
InterMiCOM Protective Interfaces (Function Groups COMM3, COMM4) ........................................................3-21
3.4.5
Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) .......................................... 3-26
3.5
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-38
3.6
Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-39
3.6.1
Configuration of Function Keys with a Single Function ................................................................................ 3-39
3.6.2
Configuration of Function Keys with Menu Jump Lists ................................................................................. 3-39
3.6.3
Configuration of the READ Key .................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.6.4
Operating Mode of the Function Keys ..........................................................................................................3-39
3.6.5
Handling Keys ..............................................................................................................................................3-39
3.7
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-41
3.8
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-43
3.8.1
Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-44
3.8.2
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the PT 100 Analog Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-47
3.9
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-49
3.10
Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-52
3.10.1
General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-52
3.10.2
BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-54
3.10.3
Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.10.4
Output of External Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-64
3.11
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-65
3.11.1
Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.11.2
Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-65
3.11.3
Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-66
3.12
Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-69
3.12.1
Conditioning of the Measured Variables ...................................................................................................... 3-69
3.12.2
Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.12.3
Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-87
3.12.4
Current Flow Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 3-88
3.12.5
Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................... 3-89
3.12.6
Multiple Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 3-91
3.12.7
Blocked/Faulty ............................................................................................................................................. 3-92
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Table of Contents
P437
3.12.8
Monitoring and Processing of CB Status Signals ..........................................................................................3-92
3.12.9
Close Command .......................................................................................................................................... 3-94
3.12.10
Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ............................................................................................................. 3-96
3.12.11
Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................. 3-104
3.12.12
Resetting Actions .......................................................................................................................................3-106
3.12.13
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-109
3.12.14
Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-110
3.13
Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-111
3.14
Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-113
3.14.1
Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-113
3.14.2
Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-113
3.14.3
Signal ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-113
3.14.4
Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-114
3.14.5
Monitoring Signal Memory .........................................................................................................................3-115
3.14.6
Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-115
3.15
Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-116
3.16
Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-117
3.17
Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-118
3.17.1
Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-118
3.17.2
Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-119
3.18
Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-120
3.18.1
Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-120
3.18.2
Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-120
3.18.3
Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-120
3.18.4
Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.19
Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-122
3.19.1
Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-122
3.19.2
Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-123
3.19.3
Selection of the Measuring Loop for Determining Fault Data .................................................................... 3-124
3.19.4
Acquisition of Short Circuit Data ................................................................................................................3-126
3.19.5
Acquisition of Fault Location ......................................................................................................................3-128
3.19.6
Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................3-129
3.20
Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-130
3.20.1
Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-130
3.20.2
Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-131
3.20.3
Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-131
3.20.4
Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-132
3.20.5
Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-133
3.21
Distance Protection (Function Group DIST) ............................................................. 3-135
3.21.1
Fault Detection Logic .................................................................................................................................3-135
3.21.2
Selection of Measured Values ....................................................................................................................3-148
3.21.3
Distance and Directional Measurement .....................................................................................................3-153
3.21.4
Impedance-Time Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-172
3.21.5
Distance Protection Trip Signals ................................................................................................................ 3-176
3.21.6
Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1 ..............................................................................................................3-181
3.22
Power Swing Blocking (Function Group PSB) .......................................................... 3-183
3.22.1
Measurement ............................................................................................................................................ 3-183
3.22.2
Power Swing Detection ..............................................................................................................................3-184
3.22.3
Load Blinding .............................................................................................................................................3-185
3.22.4
Behavior with a Short-Circuit Fault During a Power Swing Event .............................................................. 3-188
3.22.5
PSB Blocking ..............................................................................................................................................3-189
3.22.6
Out-of-Step Tripping .................................................................................................................................. 3-191
3.22.7
Enhanced Counting-Based Trip Logic ........................................................................................................ 3-191
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Table of Contents
3.23
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) ......................................... 3-197
3.23.1
Current Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-197
3.23.2
Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-198
3.23.3
Phase-Sequence Monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 3-200
3.23.4
Fuse Failure Monitoring of Phase-to-Ground Voltages ............................................................................... 3-201
3.23.5
Fuse Failure Monitoring of the Reference Voltage ..................................................................................3-205
3.24
Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection (Function Group BUOC) ................................ 3-206
3.25
Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) ............................................. 3-208
3.25.1
Decision Line dead ................................................................................................................................. 3-210
3.26
Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG) .............................................................3-212
3.26.1
Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................3-212
3.26.2
Readiness of Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................................3-212
3.26.3
Three-Ended Line Application .................................................................................................................... 3-214
3.26.4
Monitoring the Transmission Section .........................................................................................................3-215
3.26.5
Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-216
3.26.6
Transient Blocking ..................................................................................................................................... 3-216
3.26.7
Protective Signaling Operating Modes .......................................................................................................3-217
3.26.8
Measuring Zone Extension of Zone 1 of Distance Protection .................................................................... 3-232
3.26.9
Weak-Infeed Logic ..................................................................................................................................... 3-232
3.26.10
Echo Function ............................................................................................................................................ 3-236
3.26.11
Testing the Communication Channels ....................................................................................................... 3-238
3.27
Auto-Reclosing Control in the P437 (Function Group ARC) ..................................... 3-240
3.27.1
ARC Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................3-240
3.27.2
Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function ..................................................................................................3-241
3.27.3
ARC Blocked .............................................................................................................................................. 3-243
3.27.4
ARC Tripping Times ................................................................................................................................... 3-244
3.27.5
Starting the ARC Cycle .............................................................................................................................. 3-245
3.27.6
High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) ..................................................................................................................... 3-245
3.27.7
Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in the P437 ...................................................................................................3-257
3.27.8
Rapid Reclosure (RRC) ...............................................................................................................................3-259
3.27.9
Secondary Fault Treatment in the P437 .................................................................................................... 3-261
3.27.10
Parallel Blocking in the P437 ..................................................................................................................... 3-263
3.27.11
Zone Extension in the P437 .......................................................................................................................3-266
3.27.12
Control Using External Auto-Reclosing Control ..........................................................................................3-268
3.27.13
General ARC Control Functions in the P437 ...............................................................................................3-269
3.27.14
ARC Counters in the P437 ......................................................................................................................... 3-272
3.28
Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) ............................................ 3-273
3.28.1
Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function .................................................................................................. 3-273
3.28.2
ASC Readiness and Blocking ..................................................................................................................... 3-275
3.28.3
Close Request ............................................................................................................................................3-276
3.28.4
ASC Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................3-278
3.28.5
Continuous Synchronism Check ................................................................................................................ 3-278
3.28.6
Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions ................................................................................... 3-279
3.28.7
Considering the CB Close Time ..................................................................................................................3-280
3.28.8
Voltage-Checked Close Enable .................................................................................................................. 3-281
3.28.9
Synchronism-Checked Close Enable ..........................................................................................................3-284
3.28.10
Voltage/Synchronism-Checked Close Enable .............................................................................................3-287
3.28.11
Testing the ASC Function .......................................................................................................................... 3-287
3.28.12
ASC Counters .............................................................................................................................................3-289
3.29
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection (Function Group GFSC) ............................... 3-290
3.29.1
Disabling or Enabling Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection ................................................................... 3-290
3.29.2
Measured Values from the Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection ........................................................... 3-291
3.29.3
Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection ......................................................................................... 3-292
3.29.4
Starting ......................................................................................................................................................3-293
3.29.5
Directional Tripping ................................................................................................................................... 3-294
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Table of Contents
P437
3.29.6
Improved Directional Measurement for Series-Compensated Line Applications xyz ................................. 3-295
3.29.7
Improved Phase Selection ......................................................................................................................... 3-297
3.29.8
Voltage-Dependent or Current-Dependent Tripping ..................................................................................3-299
3.29.9
Non-Directional Tripping ............................................................................................................................3-306
3.29.10
Counters .................................................................................................................................................... 3-307
3.29.11
Monitoring the Measured Values ............................................................................................................... 3-308
3.30
Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling (Function Group GSCSG) ............3-309
3.30.1
Disabling or Enabling Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling ................................................... 3-309
3.30.2
Readiness of Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling .................................................................3-310
3.30.3
Communication Link Faulty Signal .............................................................................................................3-313
3.30.4
Tripping Time ............................................................................................................................................ 3-314
3.30.5
3.30.6
Transient Blocking ..................................................................................................................................... 3-315
3.30.7
Operating Modes of Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling and the Communication Channel . 3-315
3.30.8
Signal Comparison Release Scheme ..........................................................................................................3-316
3.30.9
Signal Comparison Blocking Scheme .........................................................................................................3-317
3.30.10
Weak-Infeed Logic ..................................................................................................................................... 3-318
3.30.11
Trip Mode .................................................................................................................................................. 3-319
3.30.12
Echo Function ............................................................................................................................................ 3-320
3.30.13
Testing the Communication Channel .........................................................................................................3-321
3.31
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC) ................................3-323
3.31.1
Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-323
3.31.2
Monitoring the Maximum Phase Current ................................................................................................... 3-323
3.31.3
Negative-Sequence Current Stages ...........................................................................................................3-324
3.31.4
Residual Current Stages ............................................................................................................................ 3-326
3.31.5
Hold-Time Logic for Intermittent Ground Faults ........................................................................................ 3-335
3.32
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT) ................................. 3-338
3.32.1
Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection .................................................................................................... 3-338
3.32.2
Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-339
3.32.3
Enable Thresholds ..................................................................................................................................... 3-343
3.32.4
Phase Current Stage ..................................................................................................................................3-344
3.32.5
Negative-Sequence Current Stage ............................................................................................................ 3-346
3.32.6
Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage .............................................................. 3-348
3.32.7
Residual Current Stage ..............................................................................................................................3-348
3.32.8
Holding Time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-349
3.33
Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) .......................................... 3-351
3.33.1
Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-351
3.33.2
Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-351
3.33.3
Coolant Temperature Effect ...................................................................................................................... 3-352
3.33.4
Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition ..................3-353
3.33.5
Relative Replica .........................................................................................................................................3-353
3.33.6
Absolute Replica ........................................................................................................................................3-354
3.33.7
Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-355
3.33.8
Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-356
3.33.9
Trip ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-356
3.33.10
Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-356
3.33.11
Resetting ................................................................................................................................................... 3-357
3.34
Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ......................................3-359
3.34.1
Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-359
3.34.2
V<> Protection Readiness .........................................................................................................................3-359
3.34.3
Minimum Current Monitoring .....................................................................................................................3-360
3.34.4
Monitoring the Phase Voltages .................................................................................................................. 3-361
3.34.5
Monitoring the Positive- and Negative-Sequence Voltages ....................................................................... 3-366
3.34.6
Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ..................................................................................3-370
3.34.7
Monitoring the Reference Voltage ............................................................................................................. 3-370
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3.35
Table of Contents
Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-373
3.35.1
Disabling or Enabling Over/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-373
3.35.2
Selecting the Measuring Voltage ............................................................................................................... 3-374
3.35.3
Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time ............................................................................................. 3-375
3.35.4
Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-375
3.35.5
3.35.6
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-376
3.35.7
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (f/t) ................................ 3-376
3.35.8
fmin-/fmax Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-379
3.36
Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>) ............................................... 3-380
3.36.1
Disabling and Enabling P<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-380
3.36.2
Power Determination .................................................................................................................................3-380
3.36.3
Power Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................3-381
3.36.4
Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................... 3-382
3.36.5
Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ...................................................................... 3-383
3.36.6
Reactive Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................3-384
3.36.7
Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded .................................................................. 3-385
3.36.8
Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..............................................................3-386
3.36.9
Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ................................................................ 3-388
3.36.10
Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..........................................................3-391
3.36.11
Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ............................................................ 3-392
3.36.12
Starting Signal with Direction .................................................................................................................... 3-395
3.37
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) ........................................ 3-396
3.37.1
Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection .........................................................................3-396
3.37.2
Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-397
3.37.3
Detecting a CB Tripping .............................................................................................................................3-397
3.37.4
Current Flow Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 3-398
3.37.5
Evaluation of CB Status Signals .................................................................................................................3-399
3.37.6
Startup Criteria ..........................................................................................................................................3-400
3.37.7
Timer Stages and Output Logic ................................................................................................................. 3-400
3.37.8
Trip Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-402
3.37.9
Starting Trigger ......................................................................................................................................... 3-404
3.37.10
Fault Behind CB Protection ........................................................................................................................ 3-404
3.37.11
CB Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................................................ 3-405
3.38
Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) .................................................. 3-406
3.38.1
Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................................3-406
3.38.2
Variants ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-406
3.38.3
CB Wear Characteristic ..............................................................................................................................3-407
3.38.4
Calculating the CB Wear State .................................................................................................................. 3-408
3.38.5
Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-408
3.38.6
Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................................3-408
3.38.7
Pole-Selective Counter Values and Measured Values ................................................................................ 3-410
3.38.8
Resetting Measured Values ....................................................................................................................... 3-411
3.38.9
Setting Measured Values ........................................................................................................................... 3-411
3.38.10
Monitoring the Number of CB Operations ..................................................................................................3-413
3.38.11
Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-413
3.38.12
Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-414
3.39
Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-415
3.39.1
Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function ................................................................................. 3-415
3.39.2
Monitoring Phase Currents and Phase Voltages ........................................................................................ 3-415
3.39.3
Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ..................................................................................3-418
3.39.4
Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-419
3.39.5
Monitoring the Reference Voltage ............................................................................................................. 3-420
3.39.6
Monitoring the Measured PT 100 Temperature Value ............................................................................ 3-421
3.40
Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-422

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Table of Contents
P437
3.41
Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) ..................................................................3-430
3.41.1
Enable/Disable the Counting Function .......................................................................................................3-430
3.41.2
Debouncing ............................................................................................................................................... 3-430
3.41.3
Counting Function ..................................................................................................................................... 3-430
3.41.4
Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface ...............................................................3-431
3.41.5
Counter Values Reset ................................................................................................................................ 3-431
Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1
Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2
Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1
Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4
4.3
Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-6
Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

5.1
Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-3
5.2
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-4
5.3
Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1
Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-5
5.3.2
Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-5
5.3.3
Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-5
5.3.4
Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-5
5.4
Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-12
5.6
Connection ................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.1
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-13
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIGB Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.6.3
Connecting the Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.7
Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-19
5.7.1
Location Diagrams P437 412/413 ...............................................................................................................5-19
5.7.2
Terminal Connection Diagrams P437412/413 ............................................................................................ 5-19
Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1
Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................6-1
6.2
Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1
Text Display ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2
Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3
Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.4
Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3
Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4
Display Panels .............................................................................................................6-6
6.5
Menu Tree and Data Points ......................................................................................... 6-7
6.6
List Data Points ........................................................................................................... 6-8
6.7
Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ......................................................... 6-9
6.8
Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 6-10
6.8.1
Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx ................................................................................................ 6-11
6.9
Changing Between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-14
6.10
Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-15
6.11
Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-16
6.11.1
Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.11.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-17
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10
6.11.3
Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-18
6.11.4
Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.11.5
List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.11.6
Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.11.7
Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.11.8
Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-29
6.11.9
Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-31
Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1
Paramete rs .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1
D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.2
C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.1.3
F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s ............................................................................................................................ 7-88
Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

8.1
Operat ion ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1
C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2
C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-127
8.1.3
O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-146
8.2
E vent s ................................................................................................................... 8-147
8.2.1
E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-147
8.2.2
M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-153
8.2.3
E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-160
IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

9.1
Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2
9.2
IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3
Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4
SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.1
General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.2
External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.3
External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.5
Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.6
GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-7
9.6.1
System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.7
GOOSE Subscribing .....................................................................................................9-9
9.7.1
Mapped Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.8
Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-12
9.8.1
System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.9
Controls .....................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.1
Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.2
Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.10
Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-15
9.11
Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-16
9.11.1
System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-16
Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2
Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.1
Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.2
Tests ............................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.3
Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Table of Contents
P437
10.2.4
Checking the Output Relays ........................................................................................................................ 10-6
10.2.5
Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals ....................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.6
Checking the Protection Function ................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.7
Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-21
11
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1
12
Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1
Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2
12.2
Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-4
12.3
Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-5
12.4
Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-6
12.5
Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6
Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 12-8
13
Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1
14
Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1
15
Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1
A1
Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1
A2
Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1
A3
Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4
A5
Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A4.1
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)

.................................................................................................................................. A4-1
A4.1.1
Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9
A4.2.1
Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
P437 Version History ........................................................................................ A5-1
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10
Table of Contents
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
1
Application and Scope
1.1
Overview
The P437 distance protection device has been designed for selective short-circuit
protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection of transmission lines
and cables in medium-, high- and extra-high-voltage systems. The systems can
be solidly-grounded or resistance grounded.
Fig. 1-1: P437 in a 84 TE sized case.
The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the P437 enable the user
to cover a wide range of applications in the line protection. The relevant
protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in
order to adapt the protection device to varying system operation conditions.
The P437 is equipped with a large number of protection functions. These can be
individually configured and cancelled.
All main functions are individually configurable. The user can adapt the P437
flexibly to the scope of protection required in each particular application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes
it possible to accommodate special applications.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-1
P437
1 Application and Scope
Protection functions
P437
ANSI
IEC 61850
Function
group
Function
21
DisPDISn
DIST
Distance protection
Overcurrent and undervoltage starting
Underimpedance starting with adjustable load

blinding
Polygonal (quadrilateral) or circular tripping

characteristics
Six distance zones, one zone for special

applications
Eight timer stages, including two backup stages
Directional voltage memory
68
RPSB1
PSB
Power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping
30/ 74
AlmGGIO1
MCMON
Measuring-circuit monitoring
50TD P/ DtpPhs- /
N
DtpEftPTCOx
BUOC
Backup overcurrent protection
50/ 27
SofPhs- /
SofEftPSOF1
SOTF
Switch on to fault protection
85 - 21
PsgPhsPSCH1
PSIG
Protective signaling
79
RREC1
ARC
Auto-reclosing control
25
RSYN1
ASC
Automatic synchronism check
()
67 N
GfsResPTOC1
/ PTOV1 /
RDIR1
GFSC
Ground fault short circuit protection
85 67N
PsgGfsPSCH1
GFCSG
Ground fault short circuit protection signaling
50TD P/ DtpPhs- /
DTOC
Q/ N
DtpEft- /
DtpNgsPTCOx
Definite-time overcurrent protection, four stages,

phase-selective
51 P/ Q/ ItpPhs- /
N
ItpEft- /
ItpNgsPTCOx
IDMT
Inverse-time overcurrent protection, single-stage,

phase-selective
49
THERM
Thermal overload protection
27/ 59/ VtpPhs- /

47 P/ Q/ VtpNgs- /
N
VtpPss- /
VtpRefPTyVx
V<>
Over- /Undervoltage Protection
81
f<>
Over- /Underfrequency protection
1-2
ThmPTTR1
FrqPTyFx
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Protection functions
P437
ANSI
IEC 61850
32
PdpAct- /
P<>
PdpRealPDyPx
Directional power protection
50/ 62
BF
RBRFx
CBF
Circuit breaker failure protection
LIMIT
Limit value monitoring
PloGGIOx
LOGIC /
LOG_2
Programmable logic
PHAR1
MAIN
Inrush stabilization
LGC
Function
group
Function
Communication functions
ANSI
IEC 61850
P437
Function
group
Function
16S
COMM1,
COMM2
2 communication interfaces serial, RS 422 / 485 or

fiber optic
()
CLK
IRIGB
Time synchronization IRIG-B
()
COMM3,
COMM4
Protection communication interface InterMiCOM,

serial, RS 422/485, or FO
()
IEC
Communication interface Ethernet
()
GOOSE
IEC 61850
()
16E
16E
GosGGIOx
Measured value functions, binary inputs and outputs

ANSI
IEC 61850
P437
Function
group
Function
INP
4 to 20 optical coupler inputs
()
OUTP
8 to 30 output relays
()
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-3
P437
Measured value functions, analog inputs and outputs

ANSI
IEC 61850
Function
group
Mmuxxx
26
RtdGGIO1
MEASI
IdcGGIO1
MEASO
P437
Function
Measuring
RTD input
()
1 Measuring data input 20 mA, one settable input

value
()
2 Measuring data output 20 mA, two settable

output values
()
Miscellaneous functions
ANSI
P437
IEC 61850
Function
group
Function
F_KEY
4 configurable function keys
LLN0.SGCB
PSS
Parameter subset selection
PTRCx /
RDRE1
FT_RC
Fault recording
= Standard; () = Ordering option.
For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.
16S
COMM1
16S
COMM2
Self
Monitoring
CLK
IRIGB
16E
IEC
Communication to SCADA/
substation control/ RTU/modem, via RS485
or fiber optics using IEC 60870-5-101,
-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier, or via RJ45
or fiber optics using IEC 61850.
LIMIT
Recording
and data
acquisition
Overload Rec.
Metering
Fault Rec.
Vref
21
DIST
50/27
SOTF
MCMON
51P,N
BUOC
50/51 P,Q,N
DTOC
51/67 P,Q,N
IDMT
67N
GFSC
79
ARC
25
ASC
49
THERM
32
P<>
27/59 P,Q,N
V<>
50BF/62
CBF
I
V
IN,par
81 O/U
f<>
85-67N
GFCSG
85-21
PSIG
68
PSB
LGC
LOGIC
LGC
LOG_2
Scheme signaling
77
InterMiCOM
serial
COUNT
conventional
26
MEASI
MEASO
Always Available
Optional
Distance Protection
MiCOM P437
Fig. 1-2: Functional diagram.
1-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1.2
P437
General Functions
Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except
for ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the
specific application requirements. Unused or cancelled function groups are
hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be
included in or excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch
"General Functions" of the menu tree.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-5
P437
1.3
Global Functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P437 is
equipped with the following global functions:
System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing

and operation
Operating data recording

(time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording
Ground fault data acquisition
Ground fault recording

Fault recording
(time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three
phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
1-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1.4
P437
Design
The P437 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-7
P437
1.5
Configurable Function Keys

To the right of the text display, there are six freely configurable function keys
available. These may be used for easy control operation access.
1-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1.6
P437
Inputs and Outputs

The following inputs and outputs are available with the basic device:
1 current measuring input
4 or 5 voltage measuring inputs
8 output relays, freely-configurable
4 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler)
Depending on the order options (Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)) there are several more
modules available. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)) give an
overview of the combinations of modules that are technically possible. The
module list (Section 4.3, (p. 4-6)) details the designations that appear in the
location diagrams.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can
be set.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to
250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate
threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As
an option there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to
60 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input (on the analog module Y(4I)) is lead-compensated and
balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
by 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured variable can be
output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-9
P437
1.7
1-10
Control and Display
Local control panel with an LC display containing 4 20 alphanumeric

characters.
23 LED indicators, 18 of which allow freely configurable function

assignment for the colors red and green. Furthermore there are various
operating modes and flashing functions available.
PC interface.
One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation

control system (optional).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1.8
P437
Information Interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first channel of the communication interfaces (COMM1), the P437 can
be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. This
channel is optionally available with a switchable protocol (per IEC 608705103,
IEC 8705101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier).
The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per
IEC 608705103 only) is designed for remote control.
As an order option, there is an Ethernet interface for communication per
IEC 61850 available instead of channel 1.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished via one of the
communication protocols or by using the optional IRIGB input.
A direct link to one or two other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by
applying the optional InterMiCOM interfaces (COMM3, COMM4).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1-11
P437
1-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2
Technical Data
2.1
Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P437, version -311 -412/413 -650.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated P437 Distance Protection Device has been designed
and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 6025526
and EN 6025527 and with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive
issued by the Council of the European Community.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-1
P437
2 Technical Data
2.2
General Data
2.2.1
General Device Data
Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
Flush-mounted case for 19 cabinets and for control panels.
Vertical 30.
Installation Position
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52 for the front panel.
Flush-mounted case:
IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)

IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection
Surface-mounted case:
IP 50 for the case

IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Section 4.2, (p. 4-4)), and the location and
terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)).
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1 to COMM4
Fiber (X7, X8 and X31, X32 and X36, X37)
F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 608742 (for plastic fibers), or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 60874101 (for
glass fibers).
(ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
Wire leads (X9, X10, X33, X38)
IRIG-B Interface (X11)
2-2
M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm.

BNC plug
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Communication interface IEC 61850
Fiber (X7, X8)
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 6087410 (for
glass fibers).
(ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
Fiber (X13)
SC connector per IEC 60874144 (for glass fibers)
Wire leads (X12)
RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.
Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs)
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 4 mm, or:
Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4.
Other inputs and outputs
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm, or:
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances
2.2.2
Per EN 60255-27.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range
-5C to +55C [+23F to +131F].
Limit temperature range
Operation: -25C to +55C [-13F to +131F].
Storage and transport: -25C to +70C [-13F to +158F].
Ambient Humidity Range
75 % relative humidity (annual mean).
56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40C [104F].
Condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-3
P437
2 Technical Data
2.3
Tests
2.3.1
Type Tests
Type Tests
All tests per EN 60255-26.
2.3.1.1
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test
Per EN 60255-22-1, Class III.
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV.
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV.
Test duration: > 2 s.
Source impedance: 200 .
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2 and IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 4.
Contact discharge
Single discharges: > 10.
Holding time: > 5 s.
Test voltage: 8 kV.
Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330 .
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 6100043 and ENV 50204, severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides.
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m.
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %.
Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100%.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per EN 61000-44 and IEC 60255224, severity levels 3 and 4.
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns.
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns.
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV.
Burst duration:15 ms.
Burst period: 300 ms.
Burst frequency: 5 kHz.
Source impedance: 50 .
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255227, Class A:
2-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Phase-to-phase
RMS value 150 V.
Coupling resistance 100 .
Coupling capacitor 0.1 F, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
RMS value 300 V.
Coupling resistance 220 .
Coupling capacitor 0.47 F, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps].
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-45 and EN 60255-225, insulation class 4.
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical
lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s.
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s.
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV.
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min.
Source impedance: 12 / 42 .
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Per EN 61000-4-6 and EN 60255-226, severity level 3.
Test voltage: 10 V.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
Test frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per EN 60255-11.
2.3.1.2
12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per EN 60255-27.
Front time: 1.2 s
Time to half-value: 50 s
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-5
P437
2.3.1.3
2 Technical Data
Environmental tests
Temperature Stability Test

Per IEC 60068-2-1
-25C (-13F) storage (96 hours)
-40C (-40F) operation (96 hours)
Per IEC 60068-2-2
+85C (185F) storage (96 hours)
+85C (185F) operation (96 hours)
Per IEC 60068-2-14
Change of temperature, 5 cycles, 1C / min rate of change
Ambient Humidity Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-3
56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40C (104F)
Per IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, cyclic (12 + 12 hours)

93 % relative humidity, +25C +55C (77F 131F)
Corrosive Environment Tests

Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
2.3.1.4
21 days at 75% relative humidity and 30C (86F) with exposure to

elevated concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2.
Mechanical Robustness 1
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and

frame)
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, and
60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport
10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
2-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
2.3.1.5
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical Robustness 2
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and

frame)
Surface-mounted case
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 2.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm, and
60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport
10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 2:
10 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
15 g for 11 ms.
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 2.
Frequency range
2.3.2
5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s, 3 x 1 cycle.
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-1.
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-7
P437
2 Technical Data
Additional Thermal Test
2-8
100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.4
Inputs and Outputs
2.4.1
Measuring Inputs
Current Measuring Inputs
Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable).
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom.
Load rating:
continuous: 20 A,
for 10 s: 150 A,
for 1 s: 500 A.
Nominal surge current: 1250 A.
Voltage Measuring Inputs
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable).
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC.
Load rating:
continuous: 150 V AC
for 10 s: 300 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable).
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-9
P437
2.4.2
2 Technical Data
Binary Signal Inputs

Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option
18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V.
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively low for VA < 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively high for VA > 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
Special variant 72 V: Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC.
Power consumption per input
18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W 30%,
VA > 110 V DC: VA 5 mA 30%.
Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA 5 mA 30%.
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where
a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
IRIGB Interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp
Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Direct Current Input
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
Input load: 100
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
Resistance Thermometer
Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module).
2.4.6
Value range: 40.0C to +215.0C (40F to +419F).
3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted.
Open-circuit monitoring: > +215C and < -40C ( > +419F and
< -40F).
Direct Current Output
Output current: 0 to 20 mA
Maximum permissible load: 500
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-11
P437
2.4.7
2 Technical Data
Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X(4H)
All other modules
with high-break contacts, applicable to

DC circuits only.
Rated voltage:
250 V DC
250 V DC, 250 V AC.
Continuous
current:
10 A
5A
Short-duration
current:
Making capacity:
Breaking capacity:
250 A for 0.03 s,
30 A for 3 s
30 A
30 A for 0.5 s.
1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms.
7500 W resistive or 30 A at
250 V DC,
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/

R = 40 ms,
Maximum values: 30 A and

300 V DC.
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4.
2500 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or

10 A at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A and
300 V DC.
Operating time:
less than 0.2 ms
less than 5 ms
Reset time:
less than 8 ms
less than 5 ms
2.4.8
BCD Measured Data Output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.5
Interfaces
2.5.1
Local Control Panel

Input or output
With 13 keys and a 4 20 character liquid crystal display (LCD).
State and fault signals
2.5.2
PC Interface
2.5.3
23 LED indicators (5 permanently assigned, 18 freely configurable).
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Serial Communication Interface

The communication modules can be provided with up to four communication
channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1, 3 and 4 may either be
equipped to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to
connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on
IEC 870-5103, IEC 608705101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
Transmission rate: 300 Baud to 64.0 kBaud (adjustable via setting

parameter CO MM1: Bau d r ate).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol

based on IEC 60870-5-103.
Transmission rate: 300 Baud to 57.6 kBaud (adjustable via setting

parameter CO MM2: Bau d r ate).
Communication interfaces COMM3 and COMM4 (InterMiCOM protective

interfaces) permit end-end channel-aided digital communication schemes to be
configured for real time protective signaling between two protection devices.
Transmission rate: 600 baud to 19200 baud (adjustable via setting

parameter C O MM3: Baud r ate or C OMM4 : Bau d rat e, respectively).
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Wire Leads
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m

Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection
Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m

(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at
both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-13
P437
2 Technical Data
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm

Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m

2.5.4
IEC Communication Interface

Ethernet-based communications per IEC 61850:
Wire Leads
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
Optical Fiber (100 Mbit/s)
ST connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
2-14
Optical output: min. 18.85 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm
Optical input: max. 12 dBm
Optical output: min. 15 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
SC connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
2.5.5
Optical output: min. 23.5 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm
Optical output: min. 20 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm
IRIGB Interface
B122 format
Amplitude modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD- coded variable data (daily)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-15
P437
2.6
2 Technical Data
Information Output
Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter Information and Control
Functions.
2-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.7
Settings Typical Characteristic Data
2.7.1
Main Function
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Distance Protection
Minimum fault detection time: 7 ms
Fault detector reset time 30 ms 10 ms
Directional sensitivity up to 2 s after fault detection:
Directional sensitivity after 2 s after fault detection and for switching on to

fault: 200 mV 10%
Shortest tripping time: approx. 17 ms
Fault detection and measurement resetting ratio: 0.95
Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold

operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms,
approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8fold operate value):
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal

value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
45 ms, approx. 30 ms
Resetting ratio for V<>:
2.7.5
1% to 10% (adjustable)
Power Directional Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8fold operate value): 60 ms, approx. 50 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal

value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for P>, Q>: 0.05 to 0.95 (adjustable)
Resetting ratio for P<, Q<: 1.05 to 20 (adjustable)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-17
P437
2 Technical Data
2.8
Deviations
2.8.1
Deviations of the Operate Values
2.8.1.1
Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2

%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
2.8.1.2
Distance Protection
Starting V<, VNG>, VNG>>: 3%
Starting I>, I>>, IN>:
Setting range 0.1 to 0.25 Inom: 5%
Setting range > 0.25 Inom: 3%
Starting Z< at K = 0, 30, 60, 90: 5%
Impedance Measurement Z<
2.8.1.3
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Deviation at K = 0, 90: 3%
Deviation at K = 30, 60: 5%
Directional Determination: 3
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
2.8.1.4
Deviation: 3 %
Overcurrent-Time Protection
Operate values I>, IN>
2.8.1.5
Deviation: 5%
Thermal Overload Protection

Operate value
2.8.1.6
Deviation: 5%
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate values
2.8.1.7
V<>, Vpos<>: 1% (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
VNG>, Vneg>: 1% (in the range > 0.3 Vnom)
Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>
2-18
30 mHz (f
nom
= 50 Hz)
40 mHz (f
nom
= 60 Hz)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Operate values df/dt
2.8.1.8
0.1 Hz/s (f
nom
= 50 or 60 Hz)
Power Directional Protection

Operate values P<>, Q<>
2.8.1.9
Direct Current Input
2.8.1.10
Deviation: 1 %
Resistance Thermometer
2.8.1.11
Deviation: 5 %
Deviation: 2C
Analog Measured Data Output
Deviation: 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load
1%
2.8.2
Deviations of the Timer Stages
2.8.2.1
Definitions
Reference conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2

%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
2.8.2.2
Definite-time stages
2.8.2.3
Deviation: 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I 2 Iref: 5% + 10 to 25 ms
For extremely inverse IEC characteristics and for thermal overload

characteristics: 7.5% + 10 to 20 ms
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-19
P437
2 Technical Data
2.8.3
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
2.8.3.1
Definitions
Reference conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion

2%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
2.8.3.2
Operating Data Measurement

Measuring input currents
Deviation: 1%
Measuring input voltages
Deviation: 0.5%
Internally formed resultant current and negative-sequence system

current
Deviation: 2%
Internally formed neutral-point displacement voltage and voltages of

positive- and negative-sequence systems
Deviation: 2%
Active and reactive power / active and reactive energy
Deviation: 2% when cos = 0.7
Deviation: 5% when cos = 0.3
Load angle
Deviation: 1
Frequency
2.8.3.3
Deviation: 10 mHz
Fault Data
Short-circuit current and voltage
Deviation: 3%
Short-circuit impedance, reactance, and fault location
2.8.3.4
Deviation: 5%
Internal Clock
With free running internal clock
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min)
Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface
2-20
1 ms
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.9
Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
2.9.1
Time Resolution
2.9.2
20 sampled values per period
Phase Currents System

Dynamic range
100 Inom or 25 Inom
Amplitude resolution
2.9.3
at Inom = 1 A: 6.1 mArms or 1.5 mArms
at Inom = 5 A: 30.5 mArms or 7.6 mArms
Residual Current
Dynamic range
16 Inom
2.9.4
at Inom = 1 A: 1.0 mArms
at Inom = 5 A: 4.9 mArms
Phase-to-Ground Voltages and Neutral-Point Displacement

Voltage
Dynamic range
150 V
9.2 mVrms
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-21
P437
2 Technical Data
2.10
Recording Functions
2.10.1
Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating Data Memory

Scope for signals
All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
The 1000 most recent signals.
Monitoring Signal Memory

Scope for signals
All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals
All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
200 entries per overload event.
Ground Fault Memory

Number
The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals
All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals.
Depth for signals
200 entries per ground fault event.
Fault Memory
Number
The 8 most recent faults.
Scope for signals and fault values
2-22
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals.
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Depth for signals and fault values
200 entries per fault event
max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;

820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s
(for fnom = 60 Hz).
Resolution of the Recorded Data
As per Section 2.9, (p. 2-21), with maximum current dynamic ranges
(100 Inom / 16 IN,nom)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-23
P437
2.11
2 Technical Data
Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
24 to 60 V DC or 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option).
Operating range for direct voltage
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom.
Operating range for alternating voltage
0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom.
Nominal burden
where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
Start-up peak current
< 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time
2-24
50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC (upper range supply)
50 ms for interruption of VA 60 V DC (lower range supply)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.12
Current Transformer Specifications
2.12.1
Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 600441 and IEC 600446
standards:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-25
P437
2 Technical Data
Ipn
Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT
Isn
Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
Ipsc
Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current
Kssc
Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:

K ssc =
I psc
I pn
Iref
Reference current of IDMT protection element
Rbn
Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Pbn
Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pbn = Rbn I sn
Rb
Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Pb
Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pb = Rb I sn
Rct
Secondary winding resistance of the CT
Pct
Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for

secondary rated current:
2
Pct = Rct I sn
Vsal
Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
Vk
Rated knee point voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
nn
Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
nb
Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT:

nb = nn
Rct + Rbn
Rct + Rb
= nn
Pct + Pbn
Pct + Pb
Rl
One-way lead resistance from CT to relay
Rrel
Resistive burden of relays CT input
Tp
Primary time constant (primary system time constant)
(System) angular frequency
Xp/Rp Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio):

Xp
Rp
Kd
= Tp
Dimensioning factor for the CT
Kemp Relay specific, empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT
2-26
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.12.2
General Equations
The current transformer can be dimensioned
either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 600441, 2.3.4:
V sal K d K ssc I sn (Rct + Rb)
or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to

IEC 600441, 2.3.3, as follows:
nn K d K ssc
Rct + Rb
Rct + Rbn
= K d K ssc
Pct + Pb
Pct + Pbn
The relation between both methods is given as follows:

V sal = nn (
Pbn
I sn
+ I sn Rct )
The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows:
For phase-to-ground faults: Rb = 2 Rl + Rrel
For phase-to-phase faults: Rb = Rl + Rrel
The wire lead burden is calculated as:

Rl =
l
A
= specific conductor resistance

(e.g. for copper 0.021 mm/m = 2.110-8 m, at 75C)
l = wire length
A = wire cross section
The MiCOM Px3x input CT burden Rrel is less than 20 m, independent of the set
nominal current (1A or 5A). Usually this relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 600441, 2.3.12 is lower than
the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 600441, 2.3.4. It is
not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but for standard core
material the following relations applies:
VK0.85Vsal for class 5P CTs, and
VK0.75Vsal for class 10P CTs, respectively.
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to

avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value, instead of the required overdimensioning factor Kd:
K d = K max 1 +
Xp
Rp
= 1 + Tp
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to consider an empirically

determined dimensioning factor Kd=Kemp such that the appropriate operation of
the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. This factor
depends on application and relay type, as outlined in the following.
2.12.3
Distance Protection
For the P437, the empirical dimensioning factor Kd = Kemp can be taken from the
following diagram, which shows three practical curves:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-27
P437
2 Technical Data
Curve A (red): Choosing Kemp according to this line assures that transient
CT saturation practically does not affect distance protection: Distance
(instantaneous) zone trip is assured within 0/+40 ms for up to 95% of the
set zone reach.
Curve B (blue): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT

saturation to slightly affect distance protection: Distance (instantaneous)
zone trip is assured within 0/+50 ms for up to 90% of the set zone reach.
Curve C (green): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT

saturation to affect distance protection: Distance zone trip is assured for up
to 85% of the set zone reach.
30
A
25
20
15
B
K emp
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Xp / R p
As per IEC 60255-121 (draft 2011), the following 4 fault conditions have to be
checked to determine the required CT dimensioning.
A
DIST
1
Fig. 2-1: Check conditions.
2-28
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
Case 1:
Close-up backward short-circuit (security case)

Acceptance criteria: Stable backward direction decision, no trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Case 2:
Close-up forward short-circuit (dependability case)

Acceptance criterion: Instantaneous trip with less than 1 period add. delay
Required Kemp = 1.5
Case 3:
Short-circuit at 80% of Zone 1 reach limit (dependability case)

Acceptance criterion: Trip with less than 3 periods add. delay
Select required Kemp per curve B
Case 4:
Short-circuit at 110% of Zone 1 reach limit (security case)

Acceptance criterion: Correct time delayed zone 2 trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Depending on the fault location, different maximum short-circuit currents and

primary system X/R ratios apply! Therefore the required CT dimensioning has to
be calculated separately for all 4 cases. The biggest sizing from all 4 cases then
has to be used.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2-29
P437
2-30
2 Technical Data
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3
Operation
3.1
Modular Structure
The P437, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P30 family of devices. The
device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware
modules. The figure below shows the basic hardware structure of the P437.
EDIT MODE
Processor module
Analog
module
Digital
busbus
module
Voltages
Currents
Binary I/O module
Signals
Commands
Signals
Commands
Signals
Commands
Measured data
Power supply module
Analog bus module
Transformer module
HEALTHY
C
Analog I/O module
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
Analog I/O module
Local control module
Protection interface
InterMiCOM
Communic. module
Communication
interface(s)
PC interface
Signals
Commands
Commands Auxiliary voltage

Signals
D5Z5201C
Fig. 3-1: Basic hardware structure.
External analog quantities and binary quantities electrically isolated are

converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X.
The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary
signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or
combinations of these.
The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which
supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the
analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus
module. The optional transient ground fault module N evaluates the measured
variables according to the transient ground fault evaluation scheme.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary
signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the
binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-1
P437
3 Operation
The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication

interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation
control system and for remote access respectively a protection communication
interface for the transfer of digital information between two protection devices.
The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable. It encompasses all control and display
elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program S1.
3-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P437:
Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel)
PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
Parameters Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P437, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P437 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
Operation Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
Events Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the users choice. All settings and signals of the P437 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
DataModelExplorer. The Addresses document (being part of the
DataModelExplorer) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P437.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P437 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-3
P437
3.3
3 Operation
Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value

Panels, Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)
When the graphic display has been fitted then the layout of a bay with its
switchgear units will be shown on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel usually consists of
one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor from the PC
Access Software MiCOM S1 and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it can be
sub-divided into up to eight pages. The graphic display also permits the display
of the Event Panel and the configurable Signal Panel. When the text display has
been fitted the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote).
In addition the P437 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured
values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or if activated the
Operation Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of
overload or ground fault events, the display will automatically switch to the
Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel
remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued (LOC: Param. change
e nabl.) it will be cancelled after the time period, defined by setting LOC: Holdtime for Panels has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up.
3-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.3.1
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for
Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
S1 1
LOC:
Autom. return time
[ 003 014 ]
LOC:
Autom. return time
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
LOC:
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Operation Panel
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z1301A
Fig. 3-2: Operation Panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-5
P437
3.3.2
3 Operation
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for LOC : Hold-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
LOC:
[ 031 075 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
Fig. 3-3: Fault panel.
3-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.3.3
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for LOC : Hol d-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
LOC:
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Overload Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
Fig. 3-4: Overload Panel.
3.3.4
Configurable Clear Key

, to which one or more reset functions can be
The P437 has a Clear key
assigned by selecting the required functions at L OC : Assignment rese t ke y.
Details on the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.12.12, (p. 3106).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-7
P437
3.4
3 Operation
Serial Interfaces
The P437 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels
depending on the design version. Communication between the P437 and the
control stations computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P437's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.12.13, (p. 3-109)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes dead. It will only be enabled again when the time-out
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.12.14, (p. 3-110)).
3-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.1
PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the P437 and a PC is through the PC interface. In order
for data transfer between the P437 and the PC to function, several settings must
be made in the P437.
There is support software available as an accessory for P437 control.
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block.
[ 003 086 ]
PC:
Delta P
[ 003 059 ]
0
1
0: No
PC:
Delta f
[ 003 057 ]
PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 155 ]
1: Yes
PC:
Delta t
[ 003 058 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
[ 003 188 ]
PC:
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z80ECA
Fig. 3-5: PC interface settings.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-9
P437
3.4.2
3 Operation
Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)

There are several different interface protocols available at the communication
interface 1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use
with the P437:
IEC 608705103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the

informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12
(corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, Protection communication
companion standard 1, compatibility level 2, February 1995 edition) with
additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 8705101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems Part 5: Transmission

protocols Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,"
first edition 199511
ILSC, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P437.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
3-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0
1
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
0: No
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ]
COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
Selected protocol
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
Fig. 3-6: Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-11
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
-103 prot. variant
COMM1:
[ 003 178 ]
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
COMM1:
[ 003 165 ]
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ]
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 171 ]
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 176 ]
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 202 ]
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 072 ]
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
COMM1:
[ 003 166 ]
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Name of manufacturer
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 161 ]
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ]
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
COMM1:
Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ]
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Communication error
Communic. interface
304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA
Fig. 3-7: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 608705-103 interface protocol.
3-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-101
[ 003 218 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Comm. address length
[ 003 201 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 200 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Cause transm. length
[ 003 192 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Address length ASDU
[ 003 193 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 194 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 196 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 197 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 195 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Time tag length
[ 003 198 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 190 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 191 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Initializ. signal
[ 003 199 ]
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Balanced operation
[ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Direction bit
[ 003 227 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Time-out interval
[ 003 228 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0
Comm. interface
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FGA
Fig. 3-8: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-13
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5, ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
Comm. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FHA
Fig. 3-9: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
3-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant
[ 003 214 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 210 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 211 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 212 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 213 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 152 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
Fig. 3-10: Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-15
P437
COMM1:
Selected protocol
3 Operation
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 244 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Link Max. Retries
[ 003 245 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 246 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 247 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 232 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 233 ]
COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
[ 003 240 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. count.
[ 003 234 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 235 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay
[ 003 241 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 236 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Char. Timeout
[ 003 242 ]
COMM1:
Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
[ 003 250 ]
COMM1:
Link Confirm. Mode
[ 003 243 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (DNP3)
[ 003 248 ]
304 415
COMM1:
DNP3
[ 003 230 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
19Z50AZA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
3-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
COURIER
[ 103 041 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Command selection
[ 103 042 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Signal selection
[ 103 043 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Meas. val. selection
[ 103 044 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Parameter selection
[ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (COURIER)
[ 103 046 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
19Z51BAA
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-17
P437
3.4.2.1
3 Operation
COMM1 Checking Spontaneous Signals

For interface protocols based on IEC 608705103, IEC 8705101, or ILS-C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered using setting
parameters.
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
Fig. 3-13: COMM1 Checking spontaneous signals.
3-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.3
Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)

Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 608705103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P437.
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2:
COMM2:
General enable USER
[ 103 170 ]
[ 103 179 ]
0
1
0: No
COMM2:
[ 103 074 ]
COMM2:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 076 ]
COMM2:
Delta P
[ 103 054 ]
0
COMM2:
Delta f
[ 103 052 ]
0: No
COMM2:
1: Yes
[ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
Delta t
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
40Z5070A
Fig. 3-14: Settings for communication interface 2.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-19
P437
3.4.3.1
3 Operation
COMM2 Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
COMM2:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
Fig. 3-15: COMM2 Checking spontaneous signals.
3-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.4
InterMiCOM Protective Interfaces (Function Groups COMM3,

COMM4)
3.4.4.1
Application
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface is designed to establish a digital
communication link between two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary
protection signals may be transmitted. Whereas communication interfaces 1
(Section 3.4.2, (p. 3-10)) and 2 (Section 3.4.3, (p. 3-19)) are designed as
information interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote
access, the InterMiCOM interface (also called communication interfaces 3 and 4)
is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time signals.
Its main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function
group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be
transmitted.
3.4.4.2
Physical Medium
COMM3 and COMM4 are provided as asynchronous, full-duplex communication
interfaces. To transmit data the following physical media are available for each:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:
Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:
FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max.

10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
3.4.4.3
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Configuration and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 (and/or
COMM4, depending on order options and application) has to be configured using
the parameter C OMM3 : F un ction grou p COMM3 (COMM4: Fu nct ion
group C OMM4). This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional
communication module is fitted. After activation of COMM3 (COMM4), all
addresses associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state
signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3: General
e nable U SER (CO MM4: Gen eral en able USER).
3.4.4.4
Telegram Configuration
For the remainder of this COMM3 / COMM4 description, COMM3 represents COMM4
as well, this means that the description is also valid for COMM4.
The parameter addresses given apply to COMM3. The corresponding addresses for
function group COMM4 are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 81).
The communication baud rate is settable (COMM3 : Baud rat e) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-21
P437
3 Operation
COMM 3: S ource ad dres s and COMM3: Rece i ving addr ess can be set to
different values, thus avoiding that the P437 communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission
of eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals COMM3: Fct .
a ssignm. send 1, ) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs
(OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals (COMM3 : F ct . assignm . re c.
1, ) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be
chosen.
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set
C OMM3: Op er. mode re ce ive 1, ), thus defining the required checks for
accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected telegram
structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual
balance of Speed, Security and Dependability for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to Blocking or Direct intertrip
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to Permissive or Direct intertrip
EN 608341 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-23)). By selection
of a binary signal and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these
requirements can be fulfilled as follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:
Preference:
Security.
Implication:
No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting:
Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and set operating

mode Direct intertrip.
Permissive teleprotection scheme:
Preference:
Dependability.
Implication:
Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the presence of

channel noise.
Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and set operating mode

Permissive.
Blocking teleprotection scheme:
Preference:
Speed.
Implication:
Fast peer-to-peer signal transfer.
Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and set operating mode

Blocking.
3-22
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Speed
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high
Security
Direct
Intertrip
high
Dependability
47Z1030A
Fig. 3-16: Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
3.4.4.5
Communication Monitoring
Timer stage C OMM3 : Time -out comm.f aul t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct
received telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual
channel transmission times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes
such as the blocking scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM3: C ommu nicati ons fau lt and SFMON: Commun ic.fau lt COMM3
are issued and the received signals are automatically set to their user-defined
default values (COMM3: De fault value rec. 1, , CO MM3: D efault v alue
rec. 8). As the main application for this protective signaling the fault signal may
be mapped to the corresponding input signal in function group PSIG with the
COMM3: Si g.asg. comm.f ault setting.
Timer stage COMM3 : Time -ou t link fail .. is used to determine a persistent
failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM3: Comm. link fai l ur e and SFMON: Comm.lin k fail.COMM3 are
issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-23
P437
3 Operation
Message
received
Character frame &

Source address check
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram
receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals

accepted
(Re)start of the
monitoring
timer stages
COMM3:
Time-out comm.fault
[ 120 033 ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3:
Time-out link fail.
[ 120 035 ]
COMM3:
Comm. link failure
[ 120 044 ]
47Z1031B
Fig. 3-17: Message processing and communication monitoring.
3-24
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.4.6
Supervision of Communication Link Quality

After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received
messages. The result is provided as an updating measurand COMM3: No. tel.
err ors p.u.. and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM 3: N o.t .err.,max,s t or ed.
If the set threshold C OMM3 : Limi t te le gr. er rors is exceeded the
corresponding signals C OMM3 : L im.e xcee d. ,te l.er r. and
SFMON: Lim.e xc.te l.e r. COMM3 will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are
counted (C OMM3: No. tel e gram errors). This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via COMM3: R set
No.t lg.e rr.USE R (as well as via the binary signal CO MM3: Res et
No.t lg.e rr.EXT).
3.4.4.7
Commissioning Tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the P437 as
physical state signals (COMM3: State se nd 1 and C OMM3 : Stat e re ce iv e
1, with x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for
commissioning of the protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C OMM3: Loop back se nd) the test can be triggered via COMM3: Loop back
t est. This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set at
C OMM3: Hold ti me for te st. For this test only, the source address is set to
'0'; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result
can be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured
operating data C OMM3 : L oop back re su lt and C OMM3: L oop back
receiv e. As soon as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated
and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual
values of the configured send signals, using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The
transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by
setting individual binary signals (COMM3: Se nd s ignal for t est) to userdefined test values (C OMM3: L og. state f or te st). After triggering the test by
C OMM3: Send signal, te st, the preset binary signal is sent with the preset
value for the set hold time COMM3: Hold time for t est. The 7 remaining
binary signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with
their actual values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the
receiving device, e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time
has expired, the test mode is reset automatically and the actual values of all
8 signals are transmitted again.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-25
P437
3.4.5
3 Operation
Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE

and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups
and the Ethernet module.
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1
Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

The P437 offers as an ordering option a communication protocol according to the
Ethernet based IEC 61850 protocol.
3.4.5.1.1
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P437:
ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description

Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available
from the P437, that are to be imported into the configuration tool IED
Configurator or into a system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
3-26
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an

overview of available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview
of available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of
parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used
by the P437 with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.5.1.2
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic
interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of
the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by
setting the parameter [ IC]: Me di a.
Setting parameters identified by [ I C ] : in the IEC function group are set with the
IED Configurator. They cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or
with the operating program.
There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST
connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant
ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector
supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for
remote access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
The P437 may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
3.4.5.1.3

The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the
parameter I EC : Fun ction group IE C. This parameter is only visible if the
optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P437. After having
included the parameter IEC: Functi on group IEC in the configuration the
parameter IEC : Gen eral en abl e USER and the parameters for internal clock
tracking are visible and freely configurable.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3 : Ge ne ral
enab le USER.
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related
function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the P437. The
P437 features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific projectrelated extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are
loaded into the P437 by downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication
parameters are activated by executing the command IE C: Switch Config.
Bank. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-27
P437
3 Operation
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
S&R 103
.mcl
.x3v
Operating program
19Z7001B
Fig. 3-18: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.
3-28
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
Ethernet module
IED
Configurator
Parameter upload
IEC 61850
parameter
IEC 61850
parameter
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the

device parameters
New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002B
Fig. 3-19: Saving configuration parameters.
3.4.5.1.4
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the Abstract Communication Service Interface (ACSI, IEC 6187072),
are assigned to the devices. A server is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
information, for instance reports. In its function as server the P437 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.4.5.1.5
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P437 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P437 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-29
P437
3.4.5.1.6
3 Operation
Generating Datasets, Reporting

The specific project related feature of the P437s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority
transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as
to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.
The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is
determined by the application; merely the maximum size of a dataset to be
transmitted by GOOSE (see Section 3.4.5.2, (p. 3-32)) is limited to 1500 bytes.
Data objects provided by the P437 are available for selection with a structure as
specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of
information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the P437s
state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created
with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The
knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received
signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of
all data objects included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see Section 3.4.5.1.10,
(p. 3-31)) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The P437 provides up to
sixteen unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number
of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report
Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA
to brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost
during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a
buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A
pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine
which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets
is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in
GOOSEs.
The P437 can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. 8 clients, and
one buffered report can be allocated to max. 4 clients. A client is then able to
activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his
requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into
account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the P437.
3.4.5.1.7
Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P437 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting I EC: SigGGI O1 selection. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the m
out of n selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.4.5.1.8
Single Commands
Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P437 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P437. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3-30
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.4.5.1.9
Fault Transmission
Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per File Transfer. COMTRADE fault files
in the P437 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.4.5.1.10
High Priority Transmission of Information

Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP
level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at
Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received
by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or
client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of
information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example,
are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The standard IEC 61850 provides two modes for high priority transmission of
information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE ) is
used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and
it is compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats
available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values, two-pole
contact position signals or analog measured values. The P437 supports receipt
and evaluation of GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact
position signals from external devices.
3.4.5.1.11
Communication with the MiCOM S1 Support Software via the Ethernet Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on
the P437 may occur through the tunneling principle. Transmission is carried
out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the
associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such
transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is
used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions
offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting
parameters or retrieving stored data.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-31
P437
3.4.5.2
3 Operation
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a
local network, the P437 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of
information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P437 is connected.
3.4.5.2.1

Function group GOOSE can be configured by setting the parameter
GOOSE: Functi on group GOOSE This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P437. After having configured the
GOOSE all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and
ready to be configured.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI)
or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GO OSE: General
enab le USER.
3-32
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Device A
IEC 61850
Mapping
S1 Studio
Device B
S1 Studio
System/GosGGIO2
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32
GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
System/GosGGIO1
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
MCL
IED Configurator
System/DevGosGGIO3
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
Fixed assignment
S1 Studio
Ext.Dev 1 32
19Z7003A
Fig. 3-20: GOOSE configuration.
3.4.5.2.2
Sending GOOSE
The GOOSE can send up to eight different GOOSE messages which are managed
in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on
the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P437 to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting.
Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting
GO OSE: Outp ut 1 fct.ass ig.. (or Output 2, ..., Output 32). The data object
indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the
GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then
be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-33
P437
3 Operation
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s, [ IC]: Application ID (hex),
[I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex), [IC] : V LA N P r iority and
[I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and
[IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.4.5.2.3
Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[IC ]: Mu lt icast MA C Addres s, [IC] : A ppl ication ID (hex),
[IC]: Source Pat h, [IC] : GOOSE Iden ti f ie r and [IC]: DataSet Refere nce.
With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj I nde x / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [IC] : Configuration Re vision
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function"
(virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an
existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data
input.
Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then
this can be evaluated. When activating [ IC]: Quality Obj Index the distance
of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well
as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the
bits ([IC ]: Invalidit y Qu ality bits, see displayed bar with bit state) is received
as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and
are accepted from there during an import action.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[IC]: De fault I npu t Val ue. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
(or Input 2, , Input 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary
signal inputs (optocoupler inputs). Contact position signals received from
external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for
interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design
a decentralized substation interlock.
3-34
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input
to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are
deleted.
3.4.5.2.4
Uniqueness of Control within a System

If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (uniqueness) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P437 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information stored in a dataset is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P437 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
Device A
IED Configurator
Device B
S1 Studio
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
IED Configurator
MCL
System/OrdRunGGIO1
Ind1.stVal ... Ind32.stVal
19Z7004A
Fig. 3-21: Uniqueness of Control.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-35
P437
3.4.5.3
3 Operation
Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent
electronic devices) in a local network, the P437 provides, as an additional
functionality, the GSSE function group (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the
IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic
binary state signals such as reverse interlocking, trip commands, blocking,
enabling and other signals.
3.4.5.3.1

Function Group GSSE can be configured by setting the parameter
GSSE: Functi on grou p GSSE. This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P437. After configuration of
GSSE, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters,
binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or
disabled by setting GSSE : Ge ne ral e nable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the P437 are
not automatically activated. The P437 features two memory banks one of
which includes the active setting parameters. The other memory bank is used
with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and
the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850
parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P437 by downloading
a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing
the command IEC : Switch Con fig. Ban k. This command may also be issued
from the IED Configurator.
3.4.5.3.2
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary
state signals is made by setting GSSE: Out put 1 fct.assig. (or Output 2, ,
Output 32). Each selected state signal is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE
(GSS E: Out pu t 1 b it pa ir (or Output 2, , Output 32)), which will transmit
this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal.
There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send
repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Min.
cycle. The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional
equation with the increment set with the parameter GSSE: Increment. Should
no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has
elapsed (GSSE: Max. cycl e), then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as
set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used
which was set in function group IEC.
3.4.5.3.3
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of
the logic binary state signals received (GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig., or Input 2,
, Input 32) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto
coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the
required information, must be selected by setting the IED name (e.g.
GSSE: In put 1 IE D name). Selection of information wanted from the selected
GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (e.g. GSSE: Input 1 bit pair).
Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the
3-36
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
validity duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e.
because of a communications fault), the signals received will automatically be
set to their respective default value (e.g. GSSE: In put 1 default).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-37
P437
3.5
3 Operation
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal
clock of the P437 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional
IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on
the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at
the P437, the P437 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface

The IRIGB interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P437 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P437. If
the P437 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
47Z02BAA
Fig. 3-22: IRIGB interface.
3-38
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.6
Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)

The P437 provides six freely configurable function keys. A password may be
configured for each function key (e.g. for F1 at F _KEY: Pass word funct .k ey
1), and if a password has been configured then the respective function key will
only be enabled when the configured password is entered.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in Fig. 3-23, (p. 3-40).
After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F_KE Y: Re tur n ti me f ct.ke ys. Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function
keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the function Local/Remote switching has
been assigned to this function key.
3.6.1
Configuration of Function Keys with a Single Function

One function may be assigned to each function key (e.g. for F1) at F _KEY: Fct.
assignm. F1 or by selecting a logic state signal (except L OC: Trig. me nu
jmp 1 EXT and L O C: Trig. me nu j mp 2 E XT). The assigned function is
triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P437.
3.6.2
Configuration of Function Keys with Menu Jump Lists

Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu
jump lists assigned (e.g. for F1) at F _KEY: Fct. as sign m. F1 by selecting the
listing at LO C : Tr ig. me nu jmp 1 EXT or LOC: Trig. m en u jmp 2 EXT. The
functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at LO C: Fct. m en u jmp lis t 1 or
LOC: Fct. men u jmp lis t 2. Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters,
event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
3.6.3
Configuration of the READ Key

As with LO C : Fct. m e nu j mp lis t 1 or LO C: Fct. m enu jmp list 2 up to 16
functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at
LOC: Assi gnment re ad ke y. They are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the READ key.
3.6.4
Operating Mode of the Function Keys

For each function key the operating mode may be selected (e.g. for F1) at
F _KEY: Operating mode F1. Here it is possible to select whether the function
key operates as a key or as a switch. In the Key operating mode the selected
function is active while the function key is pressed. In the Switch operating mode
the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
3.6.5
Handling Keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the READ key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-39
P437
3 Operation
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function
&
Activate function
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
F_KEY:
State F1
[ 080 122 ]
&
2
1: Key
2: Switch
&
&
S1 1
&
R1 0
1)
1) Keys, local control
40Z5003A
Fig. 3-23: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
3-40
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.7
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

(Function Group INP)
The P437 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
substation. The functions that will be activated in the P437 by triggering these
binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
In order to ensure that during normal operation the P437 will recognize an input
signal, it must persist for at least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general
starting this time period may have to be increased to 40 ms under unfavorable
conditions.
Configuring the Binary Inputs

One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The
same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization
commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O
module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
In this technical manual, it is assumed that the required functions (marked EXT
in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by
configuration.
Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can
specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low"
mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal. The display of the
state of a binary signal input "low" or "high" is independent of the setting for
the operating mode of the signal input.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter INP : Filt er.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-41
P437
3 Operation
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function
&
Activate function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0
1
2
3
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP:
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
&
&
INP:
State U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-24: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
3-42
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.8
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

The P437 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current
is fed to the P437 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for
connection of a resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a
measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring
purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds (see Section 3.39, (p. 3-415)).
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values
and monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they
exceed or fall below set thresholds (see Section 3.39, (p. 3-415)).
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function

The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
1
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-25: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-43
P437
3 Operation
3.8.1
Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA
that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the
temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged,
provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for
certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to
monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair MEA SI: IDC 1 and MEASI: IDC,lin 1, the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored
by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e. IDC,lin. (These two setting parameters
refer to value pair number 1; setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are
available, too.)
The resulting points, called interpolation points, are connected by straight lines
in an IDCIDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is
sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting
values (see Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-44)). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising
or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting
differs, the signal SFMON: In vali d scal in g IDC will be generated.
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1
0
0
0.1
0.2
I DC1
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
I DC / I DC,nom
I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-26: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
3-44
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20
0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4
0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3
0.3
IDC,lin2
0.2
IDC,lin1
0.1
0
0
0.1
0.2
IDC1
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
IDC2 IDC3
0.7
0.8
0.9
IDC4
1
IDC20
1.1
1.2
IDC / IDC,nom
Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEC_EN
Fig. 3-27: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-45
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
IDC 1
[ 037 150 ]
MEASI:
IDC 8
[ 037 164 ]
MEASI:
IDC 15
[ 037 178 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 1
[037 151 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 8
[037 165 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 15
[037 179 ]
MEASI:
IDC 2
[ 037 152 ]
MEASI:
IDC 9
[ 037 166 ]
MEASI:
IDC 16
[ 037 180 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 2
[ 037 153 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 9
[ 037 167 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 16
[ 037 181 ]
MEASI:
IDC 3
[ 037 154 ]
MEASI:
IDC 10
[ 037 168 ]
MEASI:
IDC 17
[ 037 182 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 3
[ 037 155 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 10
[ 037 169 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 17
[ 037 183 ]
MEASI:
IDC 4
[ 037 156 ]
MEASI:
IDC 11
[ 037 170 ]
MEASI:
IDC 18
[ 037 184 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 4
[ 037 157 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 11
[ 037 171 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 18
[ 037 185 ]
MEASI:
IDC 5
[ 037 158 ]
MEASI:
IDC 12
[ 037 172 ]
MEASI:
IDC 19
[ 037 186 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 5
[ 037 159 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 12
[ 037 173 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 19
[ 037 187 ]
MEASI:
IDC 6
[ 037 160 ]
MEASI:
IDC 13
[ 037 174 ]
MEASI:
IDC 20
[ 037 188 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 6
[ 037 161 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 13
[ 037 175 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 20
[ 037 189 ]
MEASI:
IDC 7
[ 037 162 ]
MEASI:
IDC 14
[ 037 176 ]
MEASI:
Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 190 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 7
[ 037 163 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 14
[ 037 177 ]
MEASI:
IDC< open circuit
[ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1)
SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Fig. 3-28: Analog direct current input.
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-46
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
Fig. 3-29: Scaling of the linearized measured value.
3.8.1.1
Zero Suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting MEA SI: En able ID C p. u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and
the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0.
3.8.1.2
Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring

The P437 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls
below the set threshold MEA SI: ID C < open cir cuit, the signal MEA SI: Open
ci rc. 20mA inp. is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
M EASI : O ve rload 20mA in put is issued.
3.8.2
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the PT 100 Analog

Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance
thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is
required.
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand
(temperature T), a normalized value (temperature norm. T), and as the maximum
value since the last reset.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-47
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
Measur. input PT100
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
19Z5262A
Fig. 3-30: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O)
module.
3.8.2.1
Open-Circuit Monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
MEASI : PT100 faulty is issued.
3-48
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.9
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output

Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configurable by the user.
Configuration of the Output Relays

One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal
can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating Mode of the Output Relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines
whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or
normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode.
Depending on the selected operating mode, latching can be disabled, either
manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input at the start of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general
starting, or of a new system disturbance.
Blocking the Output Relays
The P437 offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are
likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary
inputs.
In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e.
relays in a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in
a normally closed arrangement (NC) are triggered.
This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals SF MO N: Warning
(relay ) or MAIN : Block ed/f au lty. Self-monitoring alarms are thus correctly
indicated.
If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in
Chapter 11, (p. 11-1), which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all
output relays are reset regardless of the set operating mode or signal
configuration.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-49
P437
3 Operation
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
OUTP:
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
-K xxx
4
5
6
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
OUTP:
State K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
S1 1
R1
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
OUTP:
Latching reset
[ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1
100 ms
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
64Z8038A
Fig. 3-31: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
Testing the Output Relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a
setting parameter. Therefore the P437 must be switched to off-line. Triggering
persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3-50
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
[ CCC CCC ]
-K yyy
OUTP:
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
Selected relay
OUTP:
Relay test
[ 003 043 ]
OUTP:
Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1050A
Fig. 3-32: Testing the output relays
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-51
P437
3.10
3 Operation
Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Measurands made available by the P437 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the P437 is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the P437 is equipped with
analog module Y or not.
3.10.1
General Settings
3.10.1.1
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function

The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
1
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-33: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
3.10.1.2
Enabling Measured Data Output

The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input,
provided that the function MEASO: Outp. e nable d EXT has been configured.
If the function ME ASO: Ou tp. en abl ed E XT has not been configured to a
binary signal input, then the measured data output is always enabled.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
036 085
MEASO:
Outp. enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
S8Z52H5A
Fig. 3-34: Enabling measured data output.
3-52
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.10.1.3
Resetting the Measured Data Output Function

BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control
panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ]
MEASO:
Output reset
[ 037 117 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A
Fig. 3-35: Resetting the measured data output function.
3.10.1.4
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P437 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-53
P437
3.10.2
3 Operation
BCD Measured Data Output

The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time MEA SO: Hol d t ime ou tpu t BCD. If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.10.2.1
Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.10.2.2
Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.10.2.3
Scaling of BCD Output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the
associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
MEA SO: Scale d min . val. BCD
MEASO: Scal ed m ax. val. BCD
ME ASO: BC D-Out m in . value
MEA SO: BC D-Out max. val ue
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 - PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under minimum and
maximum.)
3-54
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Measurands to be output
Range
Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max

with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data

model
"Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
Measurands
BCD display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output"
(Valid BCD value)
Measurands:
BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx:
BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx:
BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3.10.2.4
Example for Scaling of BCD Output

The value range for the fault measurand is set from 320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands
Range
Fault measurand:
-320.00% ... +320.00%
FT_DA: Fa ult locat . pe rcent

0 ... 1
Range
0% ... 200%
Scaled measurands to be output
0.5 ... 0.813

with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-55
P437
3 Operation
Measurands
BCD display values
Measurands in the range Measurands to be

output
0 ... 200
In this example the following P437 settings are selected:

Address
Description
Current value
056 020
MEASO : F unction group

MEASO
With
031 074
MEASO : Ge ne ral en able

USE R
Yes
053 002
ME ASO : F ct. assi gnm. BC D
FT_DA: Fau lt locat. pe rcent
010 010
MEASO : Hold time output

BCD
1.00 s
037 140
ME ASO : Scal ed m in . val.

BCD
0.500
037 141
M EASO : Scale d m ax. val .

BCD
0.813
037 142
MEASO : BC D-Out m in . valu e 0
037 143
MEASO : BC D-Out m ax.

va lue
200
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal MEASO: Vali d BCD value = Yes are only issued
in the value range 0% to 200%.
BCD value
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
MEASO:
Valid BCD value
[004 027]
FT_DA:
[004 027]
[037 050]
200
0
-320%
0%
200%
320%
FT_DA:
[004 027]
47Z1040A
Fig. 3-36: Example of BCD output of fault location.
3-56
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable
value only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault
location is more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote
substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and
sensible range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = Only
aft.tr.t1/t1,ze.
MEASO:
Hold time output BCD
[ 010 010 ]
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO:
Enable
MEASO:
1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 054 ]
304 600
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 056 ]
MEASO:
MEASO:
[ 037 057 ]
304 601
MEASO:
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
Selected
meas. oper. value
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
Selected meas. val.
MEASO:
Valid BCD value
Value not measured
[ 037 050 ]
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD
[ 053 002 ]
Meas. value 399
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
c1
Measured value n
c2
Scaling of the
BCD output
Selected meas. val.
++
2
1...2
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ]
0 . . . 100 %
++
Scaling of the BCD output
Address
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. BCD
037 140
x: 1
037 120
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. BCD
037 141
x: 2
037 121
MEASO:
BCD-Out min. value
037 142
037 122
MEASO:
BCD-Out max. value
037 143
MEASO:
Output value x
x: 3
19Z5264A
Fig. 3-37: BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-57
P437
3.10.3
3 Operation
Analog Measured Data Output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P437 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a
measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time MEA SO: Ho ld ti me ou tpu t A -1. If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.10.3.1
Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.10.3.2
Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.10.3.3
Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels

The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the
output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEA SO: Value
A-1 outp ut, since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited
(see the terminal connection diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)).
3.10.3.4
Scaling the Analog Display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional
value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an
analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-38, (p. 362).
3.10.3.5
Measurand Range to be Output

The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following

parameters:
MEA SO: S cale d min . val . A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled min. val. A- 2,
resp.
MEASO : Scal ed k ne e val. A -1 or MEASO: Scaled knee val. A -2,

resp.
MEASO: Scal ed max. val. A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled max. val. A- 2,

resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
3-58
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 PC Access Software MiCOM S1 under minimum and
maximum.)
Measurands
Range
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
0 ... 1
Range
Measurands with knee-point to be output
Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model
"Scal. min. value Ax" ...

... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
3.10.3.6
Associated Display Range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
ME ASO: A nOu t min . val. A -1 or MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2, resp.
ME AS O: An Out kne e point A -1 or MEA SO : AnOut knee point A -2,

resp.
MEA SO: A nOu t max. val . A-1 or ME ASO: AnOut max. val. A-2,
resp.
Measurands
Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be

output"
"AnOut min. val. A-x" ...

... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x valid)
Measurands:
"AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx:
"AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx:
"AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-59
P437
3.10.3.7
3 Operation
Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges

Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display
range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of
16 mA.
Measurands
Range
0 V ... 150 V
0 ... 1
Range
Measurands with knee-point to be output
2 V ...10 V... 100 V
0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67

with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.67
Measurands
Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be

output"
4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom

In this example the following P437 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
3-60
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Address
Description
Current value
056 020
MEASO : F uncti on group MEA SO
With
031 074
MEASO : Ge ne ral ena bl e USER
Yes
053 000
MEASO : F ct. assignm. A -1
MAIN: Volta ge A -B p.u.
010 114
M EASO : Hol d t ime output A -1
1.00 s
037 104
MEASO : Sca le d m in . val. A-1
0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105
MEASO : S cale d k ne e val. A -1
037 106
ME ASO : S caled m ax . val. A -1
037 107
ME ASO : A nOu t mi n. val. A -1
4 mA
037 108
ME ASO : AnOut knee poi nt A -1
16 mA
037 109
MEASO : AnOut max. val . A-1
18 mA
By setting MEASO: A nOut m in . val. A-1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: In val i d s caling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P437, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P437 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-61
P437
3 Operation
Ia / mA
20
18
Max.
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
8
6
4
Min.
output value
2
0
0
0.02
0.013
0.1
0.067
1
0.667
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.0
Vnom
Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-38: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
3-62
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
Hold time output A-1
[ 010 114 ]
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
R
c
Setting(s) blocked
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)

[ ------ ]
MEASO:
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP:
[ xxx xxx ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
c
K x1
K x2
K x3
K xx
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
[ 053 000 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
[ 037 104 ]
MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
[ 037 109 ]
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
Selected meas. val.
Value in AnOut range
MEASO:
Output value x
[
*
]
Value in AnOut range

but above scaled
range
0...100 %
Value < AnOut range
MEASO:
Output value x
Address
AnOut value
X: 1
037 120
037 121
X: 3
037 122
c1
c2
c3
1
2
AnOut min. value
X: 2
MEASO:
Value A-1 valid
[ 069 014 ]
and in scaled range
3
1...3
AnOut max. value
MEASO:
Current A-1
[ 005 100 ]
Selected meas. val.

Value not measured
Selected meas. val.
Value measured
Selected meas. val.
Overflow
S8Z52H8B
Fig. 3-39: Analog measured data output.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-63
P437
3.10.4
3 Operation
Output of External Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P437 via the communications
interface.
MEASO : Out put valu e 1
MEASO: Out put valu e 1
ME AS O: Out put valu e 1
These external measured values are output by the P437 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
3-64
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.11
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P437 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Some of the
LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED
indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either
red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may
not be configured independently).
3.11.1
Configuring the LED Indicators

One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color
indications. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or
colors), if required.
LED indicator
Label
Configuration
H 1 (green)
HEALTHY
Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the

P437 (supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red)
EDIT MODE
Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when

the P437 is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by
pressing the Up and Down keys. (See Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 2 (amber)
OUT OF SERVICE
Permanently configured with function MA IN: B locked/ fault y.
H 3 (amber)
ALARM
Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warning (L ED).
H 4 (red)
TRIP
With the P437 this LED indicator is customarily configured with

function MAIN: Ge n. trip s ign al, but the configuration may be
modified.
H 4 (green)
Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely

configurable.
H 5 to H 16
For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
be configured freely and independently.
3.11.2
Layout of the LED Indicators

The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-65
P437
3 Operation
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 3-40: Layout of the LED indicators.
3.11.3
Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be
selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will
operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode,
whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode.
Latching is disabled, depending on the selected operating mode:
either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately configured

binary signal input (see Section 3.12.12, (p. 3-106))
or at the onset of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general starting

or of a new system disturbance.
Therefore there are eight operating modes available, which are built from
combinations of the following components:
continuous (i.e. not

flashing)
flashing
updating
latching with manual

reset
energize-on-signal
(ES)
ES updating
ES manual reset
normally-energized
(NE)
NE updating
NE manual reset
energize-on-signal
(ES)
ES updating bl
ES manual reset bl
normally-energized
(NE)
NE updating bl
NE manual reset bl
In addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes:

3-66
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset

after new fault
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset

after new system disturbance
continuous (i.e. not

flashing)
ES reset (fault)
ES reset (syst.dist)
flashing
ES reset (fault) bl
ES rst (syst.dst) bl
Finally, as the 13th operating mode, every LED (except the permanently
configured ones, see Section 3.11.1, (p. 3-65)) can be set to the mode ES
Alarmunit. This mode has the following flashing behavior:
The LED starts flashing with the first starting of the signal that has been
assigned to it.
The LED assumes the color that has been assigned via setting parameter. If
both colors (red and green) have been configured to different signals, and
these two signals both become active then the LED flashes in amber color.
If an LED reset is executed and the configured signal is still active the LED
changes to continuous light.
Important: If the LED was flashing in amber color then this color is kept,
even if one of the two signals is no longer active.
If all the configured signals are no longer active at the time of the LED
reset, or become inactive at a later time, the LED goes out.
If later, after the LED has gone out, any of the configured signals becomes
active again then the LED starts flashing again (in the assigned color).
If both colors have been configured and the LED shines continuously in
amber color, then it is possible that one of these two signals becomes
inactive and active again whilst the other signal stays active all the time. In
this case the LED starts flashing again with the starting of that signal. But
since the LED permanently keeps the amber color it is no longer possible to
tell the two signals from each other. Therefore general caution is
recommended whenever two different signals are configured to an LED
with this operating mode.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-67
P437
3 Operation
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
13: ES Alarmunit
!G!
-Hxx (red)
&
LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
&
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
&
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
1
2
3
n
&
&
m out of n
Selected signals
&
S1 1
&
R1
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
[ 035 004 ]
&
&
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z8000A
Fig. 3-41: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators, showing the example of the red LED color.
3-68
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12
Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1
Conditioning of the Measured Variables

The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed into the P437
and are electrically isolated converted to normalized electronics levels. Airgap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency
(DC decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized
and are thus available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P437 to
nominal quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents
and voltages of the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P437 must also be set.
The diagram below shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of
the digitized currents is rotated by 180.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-69
P437
3 Operation
A
B
C
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
Vref
2U
MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IP
[ 010 004 ]
IA
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
XY
IA
XY
IB
IC
XY
IC
IN
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
IB
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IN
[ 010 019 ]
X
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 026 ]
XY
IN
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Conn.meas.crc.IN,par
[ 010 020 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 023 ]
2IN
X
XY
IN,par
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Parallel line
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
N(e)
E(n)
VN-G
U
V
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
Line
47Z0203B
Fig. 3-42: Connecting the P437 measuring circuits. (If markings P1 P2 and S1 S2 are used for CT polarity
then the dots shown here represent the P1 and S1 terminals.)
3-70
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2
Operating Data Measurement

The P437 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents
and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured
values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be
exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds
are not exceeded, the value Not measured is displayed. The following measured
variables are displayed:
Phase currents for all three phases
Delayed and stored phase currents for all three phases demand values for
the three phases
Minimum and maximum phase current
Delayed and stored maximum phase current maximum demand values
Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 4 transformer, and

calculated resultant current
Residual current of the parallel line, which is measured by the P437 at the
T 24 transformer
Calculated unfiltered resultant current
Phase-to-ground voltages
Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages and neutral-point displacement

voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90 transformer
Reference voltage measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer
Phase-to-phase voltages
Minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltage and minimum and

maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Positive-sequence current and negative-sequence current (in units of Inom),

taking into account the set phase sequence
Positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage (in units of Vnom)
Active, reactive and apparent power
Active power factor
Active and reactive energy output and input
Load angle in all three phases
Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point

displacement voltage
Phase relation between measured neutral current and calculated residual

current (binary indication of equal or reverse phase)
System frequency
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the

self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-71
P437
3.12.2.1
3 Operation
Measured Current Values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow display
in primary values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer
should be set in the P437.
Phase sequence A-B-C (clockwise rotating field)
Negative-sequence current:
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

Positive-sequence current:
I pos = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Phase sequence A-C-B (anti-clockwise rotating field)
Negative-sequence current:
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Positive-sequence current:
I pos = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
3-72
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IP
[ 011 030 ]
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
IA
c1
IB
c2
IC
c3
c4
c5
c6
+
+
+
MAIN:
Current A p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN:
Current B p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN:
Current C p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
MAIN:
Current (IP) p.u.
[ 005 011 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
COMP
Imax
Imin
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Current A prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN:
Current B prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN:
Current C prim.
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN:
Current (IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
19Z6403A
Fig. 3-43: Measured operating data - phase current, part 1.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-73
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
IA p.u.,demand
[ 006 235 ]
MAIN:
IB p.u.,demand
[ 006 236 ]
MAIN:
IC p.u.,demand
[ 006 237 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN:
IA p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 232 ]
MAIN:
Current B p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN:
IB p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 233 ]
MAIN:
Current C p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
Current A p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN:
IC p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 234 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
IA prim,demand
[ 006 226 ]
MAIN:
IB prim,demand
[ 006 227 ]
MAIN:
IC prim,demand
[ 006 228 ]
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,delay
[ 005 036 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
IA prim,demand stor.
[ 006 223 ]
0
1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
IB prim,demand stor.
[ 006 224 ]
MAIN:
IC prim,demand stor.
[ 006 225 ]
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,stored
[ 005 034 ]
19Z6404A
Fig. 3-44: Measured operating data - phase current, part 2: demand values (delayed and stored phase currents and
maximum phase current).
3-74
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IN
[ 011 031 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
IN
MAIN:
Current IN p.u.
[ 004 044 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom C.T. prim.
[ 010 018 ]
MAIN:
Current IN prim.
[ 004 043 ]
S8Z5097A
Fig. 3-45: Measured operating data - residual current.
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Meas.val.rel. IN,par
[ 011 043 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IN,par
MAIN:
Current IN par p.u.
[ 008 001 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom,par C.T. prim
[ 010 152 ]
MAIN:
Current IN,par prim.
[ 008 000 ]
47Z0210A
Fig. 3-46: Measured operating data residual current of the parallel line.
3.12.2.2
Display of Demand Values Delayed Maximum Phase Current

The P437 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the
three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase
current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max
(see upper curve in Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)). The time after which the delayed
maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase
current IP,max is set at MAI N: Settl . t. IP ,max,del.
3.12.2.3
Display of Demand Values Stored Maximum Phase Current

The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current.
If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest
value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display
remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the
value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Fig. 3-47, (p. 376)). The stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed
maximum phase current is set at MA IN: Re s et IP ,max ,s t. USE R (see lower
curve in Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-75
P437
3.12.2.4
3 Operation
Display of Demand Values Delayed and Stored Values of the Three

Phase Currents
The P437 offers the option of a delayed display of the three phase currents. This
functionality is equivalent to the display of the maximum value of the three
phase currents. However, in this case, the delayed phase current display will
have reached 90 % (not 95 %) of IA , IB or IC , respectively, after the set delay.
The stored phase currents are implemented as for the stored maximum phase
current.
The delay for these six operating data values is set at MAIN: Se ttl. t.
IP,max,del as for the delayed maximum phase current.
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
50Z0115A
Fig. 3-47: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display display of demand values.
3-76
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2.5
Measured Voltage Values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P437.
COMP
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
VPG,max
VPG,max
VPG,min
VPG,min
+
+
+
(VPG)/3
(VPG)/3
VA-B
VB-C
VC-A
MAIN:
Phase sequence
COMP
[ 010 049 ]
VPP,max
VPP,max
VPP,min
VPP,min
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
Vneg
Vneg
Vpos
Vpos
47Z0106A
Fig. 3-48: Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the
negative-sequence and positive-sequence voltages.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-77
P437
MAIN:
General start. int.
3 Operation
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. V
[ 011 032 ]
VA-G
C1
VB-G
C2
VC-G
C3
VPG,max
C4
VPG,min
C5
(VPG)/3
C6
VA-B
C7
VB-C
C8
VC-A
C9
VPP,max
C10
VPP,min
C11
Vneg
C12
Vpos
C13
MAIN:
Voltage A-G p.u.
[ 005 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-G p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G p.u.
[ 007 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPG,max p.u.
[ 008 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPG,min p.u.
[ 009 043 ]
MAIN:
Volt. (VPG)/3 p.u.
[ 005 013 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-B p.u.
[ 005 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-C p.u.
[ 006 045 ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAIN:
Voltage C-A p.u.
[ 007 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPP,max p.u.
[ 008 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPP,min p.u.
[ 009 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vneg p.u.
[ 009 017 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vpos p.u.
[ 009 018 ]
8
9
10
11
12
13
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-G prim.
[ 005 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-G prim.
[ 006 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G prim.
[ 007 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,max prim.
[ 008 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,min prim.
[ 009 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. (VPG)/3 prim.
[ 005 012 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-B prim.
[ 005 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-C prim.
[ 006 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-A prim.
[ 007 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,max prim.
[ 008 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
12Z6204B
Fig. 3-49: Measured operating data phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
3-78
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
Meas. val. rel. VNG
[ 011 033 ]
VN-G
MAIN:
Voltage VNG p.u.
[ 004 042 ]
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 027 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VNG prim.
[ 004 041 ]
19Z5064A
Fig. 3-50: Measured operating data neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN:
Meas. val. rel. Vref
[ 011 034 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
Vref
MAIN:
Voltage Vref p.u.
[ 005 047 ]
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 100 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vref prim.
[ 005 046 ]
47Z0109A
Fig. 3-51: Measured operating data reference voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-79
P437
3.12.2.6
3 Operation
Measured Values for Power, Active Power Factor, and Angle

Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following
conditions:
Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and
displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy
measurement. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low
phase currents or a critical power factor value.
The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value
exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds
0.1Inom and if the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the
neutral-point displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual
current exceeds 0.02IN,nom and the neutral-point displacement voltage
exceeds 1.5 V.
The setting for MAIN : Meas . di recti on P,Q may be changed from Standard to
Opposite if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data
displayed with the opposite sign (see Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)):
MAI N: Acti ve power P p. u.
MAI N: Reac. power Q p.u .
MAI N: Act ive power P pri m.
MAI N: Reac. power Q prim.
This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating
data. It must be noted that inverting the sign will only affect the display of
measured operating data, all protection functions will internally use non-inverted
measured values.
3-80
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Appar. power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]
S > 0.05 Snom
MAIN:
Active power factor
[ 004 054 ]
IA
> 0.025 Inom
IB
MAIN:
Meas. direction P,Q
[ 006 096 ]
> 0.025 Inom
IC
> 0.025 Inom
VA-G
> 1.5 V
VB-G
> 1.5 V
VC-G
> 1.5 V
IN
> 0.02 INnom
X Y
X Y
X Y
X Y
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
&
VN-G
> 1.5 V
MAIN:
Appar. power S prim.
[ 005 025 ]
MAIN:
Active power P p.u.
[ 004 051 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi A p.u
[ 005 073 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi A
[ 004 055 ]
&
MAIN:
Load angle phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi B
[ 004 056 ]
&
MAIN:
Load angle phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi C
[ 004 057 ]
&
MAIN:
Angle phi N p.u.
[ 005 076 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi N
[ 004 072 ]
&
+
+
+
MAIN:
Angle VPG/IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]
MAIN:
Angle VPG vs. IN
[ 005 009 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
19Z8003A
Fig. 3-52: Measured operating data power, active power factor, and angle.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-81
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2.7
Phase Relation IN
The P437 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and
measured residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the
two currents is 45, then the indication Equal phase is displayed.
IA
IB
IC
IN
1
MAIN:
Phase rel. IN vs IP
[ 004 073 ]
1: Equal phase
2: Reverse phase
47Z0112A
Fig. 3-53: Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current.
3.12.2.8
Phase Relation Between Phase-to-Ground Voltage A and Residual

Currents
The P437 determines the phase displacement between the phase-to-ground
voltage VAG and the residual currents measured at transformers T 14 and T 24.
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IN
>0.02 INnom
IN,par
>0.02 INnom
VA-G
> 1.5 V
&
&
MAIN:
Angle VAG, IN
[ 008 004 ]
MAIN:
Angle VAG, IN,par
[ 008 003 ]
47Z8013
Fig. 3-54: Phase relation between phase-to-ground voltage A and residual currents.
3.12.2.9
Frequency
The P437 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be
determined.
3-82
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
>0.65Vnom
306 018
VA-G
VB-G
MAIN:
Frequency f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
12Z6209A
Fig. 3-55: Frequency measurement.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-83
P437
3.12.2.10
3 Operation
Active and Reactive Energy Output and Input

The P437 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on
the primary active or reactive power.
There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy. If
procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s
(approximately). If procedure 2 is selected, active and reactive energy are
determined every 100 ms (approximately). In this way higher accuracy is
achieved.
Measured energy values are presented as text parameters with a value range of
about 0 6.5 TWh and a resolution of 10 kWh. In addition, 16 bit values and
overflow counters are provided, which are needed for transmission via serial
protocols (e.g. Modbus, DNP3, Courier).
Energy values as 32 bit / text

values
Energy values as 16 bit values

Value range: 0 655,35 MWh
Value range: 0
6553500.00 MWh
Overflow counters for the 16 bit

energy values
Value range: 0 10000
(008 065) MAIN: Act .energy

ou tp. prim
(005 061) MAI N: A ct. en ergy

outp.pri m
(009 090)
MA IN: No.overfl .act.en.out
(008 066) MAIN: Act .energy

in p. p rim
(005 062) MAI N: A ct.en ergy

inp. prim
(009 091)
MA IN: No.overfl. act.e n.inp
(008 067) M AIN: React .en.

outp. prim
(005 063) MA IN: React.e n.

out p. prim
(009 092) MAI N: No.ov/

fl .re ac.en.ou t
(008 068) MAIN: R eact . en.

inp. prim
(005 064) MA IN: React. en .

inp. prim
(009 093) MA IN: No.ov/

f l.reac.en .in p
The total energy is calculated as follows:

Total energy = number of overflows 655.35 + current count
For example:
(MAIN : Act .en ergy outp. pri m) = (MA IN: No.overfl.act.en.out) 655.35 +
(MAIN : Act .en ergy outp. pri m)
3-84
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Op. mode energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
P(t) dt
MAIN:
Act.energy outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
-P(t) dt
MAIN:
Act.energy inp. prim
[ 005 062 ]
Q(t) dt
MAIN:
React.en. outp. prim
[ 005 063 ]
-Q(t) dt
MAIN:
React. en. inp. prim
[ 005 064 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN:
Reset meas.v.en.USER
[ 003 032 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Overflow
Transfer
MAIN:
Rst meas.v.ener. EXT
[ 005 212 ]
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
MAIN:
No.overfl.act.en.out
[ 009 090 ]
MAIN:
No.overfl.act.en.inp
[ 009 091 ]
MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
19Z8033A
Fig. 3-56: Determining the active and reactive energy output and input.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-85
P437
3.12.2.11
Procedure
3 Operation
Selection of the Procedure to Determine Energy Output

Characteristics
Applications
Determination of the active and

reactive energy every 2 s
(approximately)
Constant load and slow load

variations (no significant load
variations within 1 second).
Reduced system loading
Phase angles below 70

(cos > 0.3 ).
Determination of the active and

reactive energy every 100 ms
(approximately).
Fast load variations
Phase angles below 70

(cos > 0.3 ).
Increased system loading
Fault
The maximum phase-angle error of the P437 of 1 leads to greater errors in

measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown (for the range
0 < 90) in the following diagram.
5%
2%
45
70
Phase Angle
S8Z0401B
Fig. 3-57: Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the
P437.
Error of measurement:
Approx. 2% of the measured value for |cos | 0.7
Approx. 5% of the measured value for |cos | 0.3
where the whole measuring range is 180 180.
For phase angles with |cos | < 0.3, or when the error of measurement
resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external
counters should be used to determine the energy output.
3-86
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.3
Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions

The P437 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system
by configuring the available function range. By including the desired P437
functions in the configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an
individually configured device appropriate to the specific application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on
the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data
recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
3.12.3.1
Canceling a Device Function

The following conditions must be met before a P437 function can be cancelled or
removed:
The P437 function must be disabled.
None of the functions of the P437 function to be cancelled can be assigned

to a binary input.
None of the signals of the P437 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
None of the functions of the P437 function to be cancelled may be selected

in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P437 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the LIMIT function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MI T: Function gr ou p L IMI T is set to Without. To re-include the
LIMIT function in the P437 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P437 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT). In the following
description of the P437 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P437
function is included in the configuration.
3.12.3.2
Enabling or Disabling a Device Function

Besides cancelling P437 functions from the configuration, it is also possible to
disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection
can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the
MAIN : D isab le protect. EXT and MAIN: E nabl e prot ect. E XT functions are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as Protection externally enabled. If the triggering
signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible i.e. both are at logic level =
1 then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T, the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-87
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
003 027
Address
003 026
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. enabled
[ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
MAIN:
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
Fig. 3-58: Enabling or disabling a device function.
3.12.4
Current Flow Monitoring

The current flow is monitored continuously and pole-selectively, independent of
the current flow monitoring performed by the CBF function. The sampled current
values are continuously compared with the fixed threshold value 0.05Inom.
As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously
issue the phase selective signals MA IN: Curre nt flow A, MA IN : C urr ent flow
B, MAIN : Cu rre nt fl ow C.
>0.05Inom
IA
IB
MAIN:
Current flow A
[ 010 223 ]
MAIN:
Current flow B
[ 010 224 ]
IC
MAIN:
Current flow C
[ 010 225 ]
19Z8039A
Fig. 3-59: Current flow monitoring.
3-88
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.5
Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)

The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur
when transformers or machines are switched on. For all selected stages of the
Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC, IDMT), of the
Backup Overcurrent Protection (BUOC) and of the Distance Protection (DIST), the
selective starting will be blocked if an inrush current flow is detected.
The inrush stabilization function detects an inrush current by evaluating the ratio
of the second harmonic current component to the fundamental. If this ratio
exceeds the threshold that can be set with the parameter MA IN: Ru sh I(2 fn)/
I(fn)PS x, then the inrush stabilization operates.
The current trigger MAI N: I > l i ft rush r. P Sx and a fixed threshold of 0.1 Inom
define the range in which the inrush stabilization operates. If the current is
outside of this range then the inrush stabilization is blocked.
The parameter MAIN: t li ft rush r str.PSx defines the maximum hold-time for
the inrush stabilization.
MAIN:
Protection active
&
MAIN:
I> lift rush r. PSx
[
*
]
MAIN:
t lift rush rstr.PSx
[
*
]
306 001
&
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
&
&
[ 041 028 ]
&
[ 041 029 ]
[ 041 027 ]
IA
&
IB
&
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
IC
>0.1 Inom
&
MAIN:
Op. mode rush r. PSx
[
]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014
1
2
MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
0: Without
1: Not phase-selective
2: Phase-selective
fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
2*fnom
Parameter
MAIN:
Op. mode rush r. PSx
MAIN:
I> lift rush r. PSx
set 1
017 097
017 095
set 2
001 088
001 085
set 3
001 089
001 086
set 4
001 090
001 087
fnom
2*fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
fnom
2*fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
Parameter
MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
MAIN:
t lift rush rstr.PSx
set 1
017 098
019 001
set 2
001 091
019 002
set 3
001 092
019 003
set 4
001 093
019 004
12Z7306A
Fig. 3-60: Inrush stabilization.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-89
P437
3 Operation
3.12.5.1
Selection of Functions
The inrush stabilization is designed with respect to function groups DIST, BUOC,
DTOC and IDMT. Depending on the parameter MA IN: Funct.Rush restr. PSx
the starting of these function groups is blocked selectively.
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
m out of n
DIST:
Starting I>>
011 139
DIST:
Starting Z<
MAIN:
036 241
BUOC:
Starting
306 014
010 185
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>
450 209
035 021
DTOC:
Starting I>>>
450 207
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>
450 208
035 020
DTOC:
Starting I>>
450 205
BUOC:
Block. Starting
BUOC:
Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
BUOC:
Zero-sequ. starting
DTOC:
Starting I>
450 204
DIST:
Bl.Start. Z<
450 206
036 013
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
DIST:
Bl.Start. I>>
035 022
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>
450 210
DTOC:
Starting I>>>>
035 023
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
035 024
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>>
450 211
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>
450 153
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>>
450 154
035 025
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>>>
450 155
035 026
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>>
DTOC:
Bl.Start. Ineg>>>>
450 212
035 027
DTOC:
Starting IN>
035 028
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
035 029
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>
450 149
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>
450 150
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>>
450 151
035 030
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
Parameter
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
set 1
017 093
set 2
017 064
set 3
017 082
set 4
017 083
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>>>
035 031
450 152
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
040 080
IDMT:
Starting Iref,N>
450 156
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,N>
040 081
450 160
IDMT:
Starting Iref,neg>
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
040 107
450 161
45Z8031A
Fig. 3-61: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the inrush stabilization.
3-90
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.6
Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via m out of n parameters.
The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
MAIN:
Blck.1 sel.functions
306 022
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 2
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
MAIN:
Blck.2 sel.functions
306 023
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
D5Z50CLA
Fig. 3-62: Multiple blocking.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-91
P437
3.12.7
3 Operation
Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MA IN: B locked/fault y. In addition
functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Blocked/faulty signal by
setting a m out of n parameter.
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Device not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
Blocked/faulty
[ 004 065 ]
SFMON:
Blocking
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
Fig. 3-63: Blocked/Faulty signal.
3.12.8
Monitoring and Processing of CB Status Signals
Extended CB Status Signals

An extended monitoring of the circuit breaker (CB) status signals is available in
the main function group. It is possible to select whether the multiple signals
MAI N: C B closed 3p / MA IN : C B open 3p or pole selective Closed
status signals will be monitored. Simultaneous monitoring of all status signals is
not feasible and should therefore not be undertaken.
The diagram below shows the logical processing of the various input signals. The
plausibility logic will be triggered should one of the following discrepancies be
detected:
A minimum of one 3pole monitoring signal and one 1pole monitoring

signal are configured at the same time.
Both multiple signals MAI N: C B cl ose d 3p EXT and MA IN: C B open 3p

E XT are present simultaneously.
There is no pole-selective status signal (MA IN: CB closed A EX T or for B

or C) present (i.e. CB contact is open) but at the same time there is a
current flow exceeding 0.05Inom in this conductor.
In order to suppress triggering during transient actions, the signal issued when a
plausibility discrepancy is detected has a generally delayed pickup of 100 ms.
Besides monitoring for signaling purposes, status signals are also processed in
these functions:
3-92
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN: Ending a CB (re-)close command.

If the (re-)close command is to be terminated by the CB closed signal
(setting at MAIN: RC i nh ib.by CB cl ose = Yes) then the resulting
MA IN: C B close d 3p signal is read.
ARC: Ready indication.

If the ARC should only be available when the circuit breaker has already
been closed (setting at ARC: CB clos.pos.s ig. PSx = With) then the
resulting signal MA IN: CB clos e d 3p is read.
ARC: Plausibility check on single-pole HSR.

If pole selective status signals have been configured then the device will
check that just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The
single-pole HSR is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued
when at least one further CB contact is opened. This trip command is either
final (with AR C: HSR oper. mode P Sx = 1-pole or 1-/3-pole and with the
timer stage ARC: tDi scri m. P Sx having elapsed) or the dead time for the
three-pole HSR is triggered (with A RC : HSR ope r. m ode PSx = 1-/3-pole
and with the timer stage AR C: tD is cr im . PSx still running).
The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal MAIN: CB
closed 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
PSIG and CSCSG: Un-delayed echo if CB is open.

If the CB is open, the echo signal (if enabled) is issued without additional
delay. For this the MAI N: CB open 3p signal is used.
MCMON: Release of negative-sequence voltage protection using CB

status indication.
With the operating mode set to Vneg w.CB cont.enab. the internally
generated MA IN: CB close d 3p signal is used.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-93
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
&
&
&
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
&
[ 031 028 ]
configured
&
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
&
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
&
MAIN:
CB closed >= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed A
[ 031 035 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open A
[ 031 032 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed B
[ 031 036 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open B
[ 031 033 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed C
[ 031 037 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open C
[ 031 034 ]
&
&
&
[ 036 051 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
[ 031 029 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
[ 031 030 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
[ 031 031 ]
configured
10
100 ms
0
MAIN:
CB pos.sig. implaus.
[ 031 041 ]
>0.05 Inom
Plausibility
check
IA
IB
IC
47Z1021C
Fig. 3-64: Monitoring of CB status signals.
3.12.9
Close Command
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by
a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The
close command by setting parameters or a binary signal input is only executed if
there is no trip command 1 present and no trip has been issued by a protection
3-94
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the setting of MA IN: RC inhib.by

CB close to Yes, the close command is not executed if there is a CB closed
position signal present. The signal MAI N: CB cl osed 3 p is read for this
purpose.
The duration of the close command can be set. The close command is reset when
the trip command is issued.
If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then
the close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.
Close Command Counter
The number of close commands are counted. This counter may be reset
individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.12.12, (p. 3-106)).
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip A EXT
[ 036 052 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip B EXT
[ 036 053 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip C EXT
[ 036 054 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN:
RC inhib.by CB close
[ 015 042 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
[ 037 068 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN:
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT
[ 041 023 ]
1
t
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Close command
303 021
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
+
[ 009 055 ]
0: don't execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
47Z1322A
Fig. 3-65: Close command.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-95
P437
3 Operation
3.12.10
Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
3.12.10.1
Starting Signals
The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time
protection functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of
general starting signals (GS) is counted.
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
+
R
MAIN:
No. general start.
[ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
Starting A
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
303 529
BUOC:
IA> triggered
304 750
DIST:
Starting B
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
303 530
BUOC:
IB> triggered
304 751
DIST:
Starting C
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
303 531
BUOC:
IC> triggered
304 752
DIST:
Signal block start.G
303 594
&
DIST:
Starting N1
MAIN:
Starting GF
[ 036 004 ]
303 535
BUOC:
SN
304 757
45Z63ASA
Fig. 3-66: Fault detection signals of the P437.
For solidly grounded systems (setting MAIN: Neu tr.pt. treat. PSx = Lowimped. grounding), it can be selected whether a ground fault is determined by an
'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> detectors in the
distance protection. The parameter setting MA IN : Ground starting PSx may
then be used.
3.12.10.2
Phase Selection Logic

Various internal protection functions, such as distance protection, issue a phaseselective trip signal. Processing of such trip signals is shown in Fig. 3-68, (p. 399) below.
Other internal protection functions (e.g. overcurrent protection in the residual
current system in function groups DTOC-N and GFSC) and external protection
devices (MiCOM P547 for example) issue only a 3-pole trip signal. In order to
allow phase-selective single-pole tripping in case of single-phase-to-ground short
circuits the P437 now provides a faulted phase detection and trip selection logic.
This phase-selective trip is controlled by a new setting parameter and an existing
binary input function (see Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-98)). The P437 now features an m
out of n selection of trip signals in order to offer maximum flexibility.
In order to obtain a single-pole trip the selected trip signals must not be
configured into the trip command 1! (Setting M A I N : F c t . a s s i g . t r i p c m d . 1)
3-96
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
In addition the function must be enabled by setting the four parameters
MAIN : Enab le 1p trip PSx.
When setting MA IN : Fct.as sig.tri p cm d.1 the following signals may be

selected:
All trip signals issued by function groups DTOC, IDMT, PSB, GFSC, SOTF,
THERM, V<>, P<>, CBF
All output signals issued by function group LOGIC
MA IN : Manual tri p signal
MAIN : Transfe r tr ip. EXT
In addition the P437 now provides a time delayed 3-pole transfer trip feature.
This is issued if during the time period set at MA IN: 3p t rans f 1p trp PSx no
phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible.
The internal ARC is also controlled by this trip logic.
If at least one phase starting takes place, then the ARC operative timer
stages are triggered, as usual, with general starting. The ARC dead time is
started if the trip signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this
case it is assumed that the operating mode HSR permits that the ARC dead
time is not triggered if only a singlepole HSR has been set and the trip is
multi-pole.
In case no starting takes place and the 3-pole trip is issued, then the ARC
operative timer stages are triggered together with the general trip signal 1.
The ARC dead time is started if the trip signal is terminated within the set
operative time. In this case it is assumed that a 3-pole HSR (for a 3-pole
trip) is permitted.
Phase-selective trip-logic
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx
Number of
phases
selected
Trip decision
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole (only for

1p)
3-pole trip
no
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
1-pole trip
yes
yes (1-pole)
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
>1
3-pole trip
no
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
no
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-97
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Fct.ass.1p trip cmd1
[ 002 060 ]
DTOC:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
MAIN:
Par. trip (1p) EXT
[ 002 066 ]
...
m out of n
Selected signals
MAIN:
* Parameter MAIN:
Enable 1p trip PSx
3p transf 1p trp PSx
set 1
002 061
002 184
set 2
002 062
002 185
set 3
002 063
002 186
set 4
002 064
002 187
MAIN:
Enable 1p trip PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
&
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
&
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
&
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
&
1
1
MAIN:
Blocking 1p trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
MAIN:
3p transf 1p trp PSx
[
*
]
&
&
47Z1101A
Fig. 3-67: Phase selection for single-pole tripping.
3-98
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
BUOC:
Trip A
MAIN:
Trip A
303 623
306 009
304 754
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
402 575
PSIG:
Trip V<, A
305 159
ARC:
External trip A
303 016
ARC:
Test HSR A, internal
303 011
GSCSG:
Trip A
304 004
MAIN:
Manual trip signal A
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,A
310 003
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
MAIN:
Trip B
303 624
306 010
BUOC:
Trip B
304 755
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip V<, B
305 160
ARC:
External trip B
303 017
ARC:
Test HSR B, internal
303 012
GSCSG:
Trip B
304 005
MAIN:
Manual trip signal B
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,B
310 004
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
MAIN:
Trip C
303 625
306 011
BUOC:
Trip C
304 756
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip V<, C
305 161
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
=1
ARC:
External trip C
303 018
ARC:
Test HSR C, internal
303 013
&
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
=3
GSCSG:
Trip C
304 006
MAIN:
Manual trip signal C
[ 034 049 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,C
310 005
MAIN:
3p tr.if HSR off PSx
[
*
]
0
1
&
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
ARC:
3-pole transfer int.
Parameter
set
set
set
set
303 020
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
3p tr.if HSR off PSx
015 065
024 034
024 094
025 054
47Z1123A
Fig. 3-68: Phase-selective trip.
3.12.10.3
Trip Command
The P437 provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be
selected by setting an m out of n parameter independently for each of the two
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-99
P437
3 Operation
trip commands. The minimum trip command time is settable. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Trip command 1, A
[ 036 072 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, B
[ 036 007 ]
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Trip command 1, B
[ 036 073 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, C
[ 036 008 ]
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Trip command 1, C
[ 036 074 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 2
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
303 585
DIST:
Trip zone 3
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]
303 586
DIST:
Trip zone 4
303 587
DIST:
Trip zone 5
303 588
DIST:
Trip zone 6
303 621
DIST:
Trip zone 7
303 622
DIST:
Trip zone 8
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
303 626
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
m out of n
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Trip signal 1
Selected signals
306 017
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]
m out of n
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
Selected signals
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 2
[ 021 004 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
47Z10AUA
Fig. 3-69: Forming of trip commands.
3-100
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.10.3.1
Direct Underreaching Transfer Trip

Direct transfer tripping independently of the protective signaling scheme logic
(function group PSIG) is possible by using the following input signals:
MA IN: Tran sfe r tri p. EXT
MA IN : Transfe r trip A EXT
MA IN : Transfe r tri p B EXT
MAI N: Transfe r trip C EXT
This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical
scheme logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) concurrently.
3.12.10.3.2
Direct Transfer Trip

There are special send signals for the direct transfer trip of the switch at the
remote end:
MA IN: Se nd tran sf er trip
MA IN : S en d trans fer trip A
MA IN : Se nd tran sf er trip B
MA IN : Se nd trans fer trip C
These send signals were designed for applications with bi-directional transfer
tripping so as to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only
because such a transfer trip signal was received from the remote station.
With a 3-pole trip, the MAIN: Se nd transf e r trip signal is sent as soon as the
MAI N: Gen . tri p command 1 signal has been issued, except when this trip
command was caused by receiving the MAI N: Tr ans fer t rip. EXT signal (see
Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-101)).
For the P437 with 1/3-pole tripping the same applies to 1-pole send signals.
The P437 should either be used with phase-selective transfer tripping (1-pole) or 3pole transfer tripping, but never with both transfer trip types used simultaneously.
The reason for this is that with each 1-pole trip command a 3-pole general trip
command 1 is issued. If, for instance, the M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p A E X T signal is
received without a local trip signal being present, then the P437 will issue a 1-pole
M A I N : T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , A as well as the 3-pole M A I N : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d
1. Since no 3-pole transfer trip signal M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p . E X T was received,
the P437 will send the M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p signal (but not the
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p A signal).
Signal assignm. Kxx:
Signal assignm. Kxx:
MAIN:
Send transfer trip
[ 001 207 ]
MAIN:
Send transfer trip
[ 001 207 ]
Signal assignm. Uxx:

MAIN:
Transfer trip. EXT
[ 120 046 ]
VG
VG
Signal assignm. Uxx:

MAIN:
Transfer trip. EXT
[ 120 046 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
P437
&
11
P437
45Z6304A
Fig. 3-70: 3-pole transfer trip.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-101
P437
3.12.10.3.3
3 Operation
Manual Trip Command

Phase-selective as well as 3-pole manual trip commands may be issued via
setting parameters or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. However, a
3-pole manual trip command will be executed only if it is included in the
selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
[ 034 047 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
[ 034 048 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
[ 034 049 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. A USER
[ 003 017 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip A EXT
[ 038 030 ]
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. B USER
[ 003 018 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip B EXT
[ 038 031 ]
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. C USER
[ 003 019 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip C EXT
[ 038 032 ]
47Z11AVA
Fig. 3-71: Manual trip command.
3.12.10.3.4
Latching of the Trip Commands

Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching
mode (via MA IN : L atch in g tr ip cmd. 1 or MAI N: Latching trip cmd . 2,
respectively).
The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameter
(MAIN: Rset .lat ch.tri p USE R) or reset through an appropriately configured
binary signal input (MAIN: Re se t latch .tri p EXT).
3.12.10.3.5
Blocking of the Trip Commands

The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for both trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated
amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an
output relay configured to Blocked/Faulty.
3-102
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
0
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
47Z01AWA
Fig. 3-72: Blocking of the trip commands.
3.12.10.3.6
Counter of Trip Commands

The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either
individually or jointly with other counters, see Section 3.12.12, (p. 3-106).
ARC:
External trip A 303 016
ARC:
External trip B 303 017
ARC:
External trip C 303 018
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN:
No. final trip cmds.
[ 004 005 ]
MAIN:
Final trip
[ 038 103 ]
S1 1
R1
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
[ 034 049 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1
306 017
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, A
[ 036 072 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, B
[ 036 073 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, C
[ 036 074 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, A
[ 005 006 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, B
[ 005 007 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, C
[ 005 008 ]
MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 004 006 ]
MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
47Z13AXA
Fig. 3-73: Trip command counter.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-103
P437
3.12.11
3 Operation
Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization

The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P437.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P437 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
Setting
MAIN:
Time switching
0: Standard time
1: Daylight saving time
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-74: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
3-104
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.11.1
Synchronization Source
The P437 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-74, (p. 3104) and previous paragraph
With older P437 versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated
triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization
sources (communication master, IRIGB and minute pulse source) operate at the
same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different
time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other
hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time
synchronization via IRIGB interface even if and while the SCADA communication
is out of service.
With the current P437 versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in
the above.
MAI N: Prim.Source Ti me Sync
MAI N: Backu pS ourceTi meSyn c
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAIN : Time sy n c. time -out The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the P437 will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-105
P437
3.12.12
3 Operation
Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given

that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the Clear key
located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Assignme nt
reset ke y further memories may be assigned which will then also be
cleared when the Clear key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t r e cord. U SER and set to execute, see also the exact stepby-step description in Section 6.11.7, (p. 6-28).)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC : Res e t record. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point

MAIN : Gr ou p re set 1 USER (or MA IN: Group reset 2 USER) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MA IN: Fct.assign. rese t 1 (or
MAIN : F ct .assign. r es et 2, resp.)
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(That is assign parameter MA IN: Group re set 1 EXT (or MAIN: Group
reset 2 EXT) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U
xxx after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAIN : F ct .assign. r e se t 1 (or MAIN: Fct.assign. r eset 2).
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAIN: General

reset USER). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(MAI N: General res et EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal
battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-106
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1: execute
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
306 020
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-75: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
LOC:
Reset key active
&
310 024
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Assignment reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 USER
[ * ]
0
1
MAIN:
Group reset 1 EXT
[
&
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
1: execute
&
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
[
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 1
[
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 2
[
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-76: CLEAR key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAI N: F ct .as sign. re set 1
in the file P437650_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-107
P437
3.12.12.1
3 Operation
Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a function key.
3-108
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory

is assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a
binary signal input is simulated. (See Section 3.6, (p. 3-39).)
Alternatively one can assign one of the two menu jump lists (LO C: Tr ig.
menu jm p 1 EXT or LOC: Tri g. me nu jmp 2 EXT) to a function key
and include the relevant resetting action in the definition (LO C: Fct .
menu jm p list 1 or L OC: Fct. me nu j mp list 2) of the selected menu
jump list.
The same may be achieved with the READ ( ) key by assigning it a

menu point for a resetting action through L OC : A ssignment read ke y.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.12.13
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical

Communications Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up
to two communications channels available (see Chapter Technical Data). These
physical communications channels may be assigned to communications
interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes dead. It will only be enabled again when the "time-out"
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1
2
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
Fig. 3-77: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-109
P437
3.12.14
3 Operation
Test Mode
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBA
Fig. 3-78: Setting the test mode.
3-110
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.13
Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P437, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.
Selecting the Parameter Subset

The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: C ontrol via
USE R or via the external signal PSS: Control via us er E XT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS: Par am.su bs. se l. USE R or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: A ctual param . subset or
PSS : PS 1 act iv e.
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P437 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P437 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of 1. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of 1, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of 0), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of 1, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of 1, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of 1 is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-111
P437
3 Operation
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0
1
0: No
PSS:
Control via user
[ 036 102 ]
1: Yes
PSS:
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ]
PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
[ 003 060 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
1: Parameter subset 1
Address
065 002
Address
065 003
Address
065 004
Address
065 005
1
2
3
4
1
PSS:
Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT
[ 065 002 ]
PSS:
PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT
[ 065 003 ]
PSS:
PS 3 active
[ 036 092 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
[ 065 004 ]
PSS:
PS 4 active
[ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
0
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
2
3
4
0
PSS:
Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
Fig. 3-79: Activating the parameter subsets.
3-112
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.14
Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P437 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring, open-circuit monitoring
and the logic outputs.
3.14.1
Tests During Start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P437. If the P437 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P437 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.
3.14.2
Cyclic Tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory the
monitoring signal memory along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.16, (p. 3-117)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.14.3
Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON: Warning ( re la y). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected monit. sig.
SFMON:
Hardware fault
SFMON:
Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
Warning (relay)
[ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154A
Fig. 3-80: Monitoring signals.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-113
P437
3.14.4
3 Operation
Device Response
The response of the P437 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called
a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any
start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is
characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting
parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be
triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the
protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will
be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions
remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually
be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test,
which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried
out. This is necessary because the P437 cannot identify which parameter in
the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be
reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings
are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state,
the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
3-114
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.14.5
Monitoring Signal Memory

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P437 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P437 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P437 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon. sig.
re t ent ion is applied. This parameter may either be set to Blocked or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P437 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P437 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.
3.14.6
Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag

The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-115
P437
3.15
3 Operation
Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The operationally
relevant signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system events that represent a
deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short-circuits
are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset.
Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation

The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
OP_RC:
No. oper. data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-81: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
3-116
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.16
Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMO N: O ve rf low MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an m out of n parameter (see Section 3.14, (p. 3113)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P437 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring Signal Counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC : N o. mon it . sign als).
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
Selected monit. sig.
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
1
0
1
0: don't execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
CT30
SFMON:
Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
MT_RC:
No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
1: execute
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-82: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-117
P437
3 Operation
3.17
Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
3.17.1
Overload Duration
In the event of an overload, the P437 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
FT_RC : R ecord. in pr ogre ss signal.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
+
R
OL_DA:
Overload duration
[ 004 102 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
Fig. 3-83: Overload duration.
3-118
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.17.2
Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload

Protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protections
measured operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ]
R
THERM:
I
305 202
THERM:
Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
R
THERM:
Coolant temperature
[ 004 149 ]
R
THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
OL_DA:
[ 004 147 ]
OL_DA:
Load current THERM
[ 004 058 ]
OL_DA:
Object temp. THERM
[ 004 035 ]
OL_DA:
Coolant temp. THERM
[ 004 036 ]
OL_DA:
Pre-trip t.leftTHERM
[ 004 148 ]
R
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
OL_DA:
Offset THERM replica
[ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A
Fig. 3-84: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-119
P437
3 Operation
3.18
Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
3.18.1
Start of Overload Recording

An overload exists and consequently overload recording begins if at least the
signal THE RM: St art in g k*I ref> is issued.
3.18.2
Counting Overload Events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
52Z01C3A
Fig. 3-85: Counting overload events.
3.18.3
Time Tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
3-120
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.18.4
Overload Logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the nonvolatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL _RC: Overl. me m. overflow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1
Signal 3
Signal n
Signal 2
OL_RC:
Overl. mem. overflow
[ 035 007 ]
CT200
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[
*
]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
033 020
033 021
033 022
033 023
033 024
033 025
033 026
033 027
0
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6117A
Fig. 3-86: Overload memory.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-121
P437
3.19
3 Operation
Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a primary system fault, the P437 collects the following measured
fault data:
3.19.1
Running time
Fault duration
Fault current (short-circuit current)
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance)
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of the line reactance

and in
Line fault loop angle
Fault distance
Ground fault (short-circuit) current
Ground fault loop angle
Relative fault location
Fault location in km
Running Time and Fault Duration

The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general
starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start
and end of the FT_RC : Re cor d. i n pr ogre ss signal.
!G!
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
FT_DA:
Running time
[ 004 021 ]
!G!
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
Fault duration
[ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1
1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
Fig. 3-87: Running time and fault duration.
3-122
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.19.2
Fault Data Acquisition Time

The setting at FT_DA : St art data acqu . PSx determines at which time during
a fault the acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are
possible:
End of fault Acquisition at the end of the fault.
Trigger/Trip/End Acquisition at the following points:
when an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during

a general starting state,
when a general trip signal is issued,
at the end of the fault.
The setting at FT_D A: Ou tp. flt.locat. P Sx determines the conditions under

which calculation and output of the fault location occur. The following settings
are possible:
Always: Calculation and output of the fault location always occurs if the
other measured fault data are also being determined.
Only after trip t1: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P437 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard reach
(non-extended zone).
Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P437 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard and
extended reach.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-123
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Start data acqu. PSx
[
]
1
2
1: End of fault
2: Trigger/Trip/End
FT_DA:
Output meas. values
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
305 050
FT_DA:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 088 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
[
]
1
2
3
1: Always
2: Only after trip t1
3: Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze
FT_DA:
Outp. fault location
305 051
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
FT_DA:
Trigger N
310 059
FT_DA:
Flt.loc. determ. PSx
[
]
0
1
0: with GS
1: with GS or N
Parameter
FT_DA:
Start data acqu. PSx
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
FT_DA:
Flt.loc. determ. PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
008
008
008
008
1
2
3
4
011
042
043
044
032
033
034
035
007
008
009
027
49Z7005A
Fig. 3-88: Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output.
3.19.3
Selection of the Measuring Loop for Determining Fault Data

If the distance protection function detects a fault, one of the measuring loops
that is used by distance protection for measurement purposes is selected, and
the data from this loop are displayed as the fault data. Selection of the
measuring loop is based on the following criteria:
When there is a general starting condition for distance protection, calculation of
impedances is enabled as a function of ground starting (zero-sequence starting):
either phase-to-ground impedances (in the case of grounded starting) or phaseto-phase impedances (in the case of ungrounded starting). If the distance
protection function decides in favor of a trip in none or in all phases, then the
impedance loop having the lowest impedance is selected. In the case of multipole ungrounded starting and a trip decision in a phase-to-phase loop, the loop in
which the trip decision is made is selected. If there is multi-pole grounded
starting and a trip decision is made in only one phase, the corresponding phaseto-ground loop is selected. If there is a trip decision in two phases, then the ratio
3-124
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
of the impedances of these two phase-to-ground loops is determined according

to the following formula:
| Zloop1 | | Zloop2 |
| Zmin |
Zloop1: Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 1
Zloop2: Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 2
Zmin: Lowest impedance of the two phase-to-ground loops
If the ratio is smaller than 0.1, then the phase-to-phase loop is selected, and if
the ratio is 0.1, then the phase-to-ground loop having the lowest impedance is
selected.
The phase-to-ground impedances are determined depending on the setting
based on the residual current of the parallel line.
FT_DA:
Mutual comp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: Depend. on IN/IN,par
2: Always
C 1,2,3
DIST:
With mutual comp.
[ 038 039 ]
C 4,5,6
IA
IB
IC
DIST:
IkG,par
303 605
5
6
DIST:
IkG
303 604
1,4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
FT_DA:
Mutual comp. PSx
025 096
024 016
027 076
025 036
2,5
3,6
FT_DA:
IA,corr.
305 061
FT_DA:
IB,corr.
305 062
FT_DA:
IC,corr.
305 063
47Z01ANC
Fig. 3-89: Conditioning of the phase currents for determination of phase-to-ground impedances.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-125
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip signal A
303 664
DIST:
Trip signal B
303 665
DIST:
Trip signal C
303 666
c1
c2
c3
||Zloop1|/|Zmin||Zloop2|/|Zmin||
< 0.1
||Zloop1|/|Zmin||Zloop2|/|Zmin||
0.1
DIST:
Multipole starting
303 534
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Starting N1
VA-G
IA
IB
VC-G
IC
ZPP,min
ZPG,min
c 1,2,3
c 4,5,6
303 535
VB-G
2
1,2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-G
B-G
B-G
4
5
6
FT_DA:
VMeas
305 053
8
1
FT_DA:
IA,corr.
305 063
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-B
305 058
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-C
1,4
1,5
305 062
FT_DA:
IC,corr.
305 054
1,3
305 061
FT_DA:
IB,corr.
2,6
2,7
FT_DA:
IMeas
2,8
305 059
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-A
305 060
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-G
305 055
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-G
305 056
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-G
305 057
FT_DA:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 064
47Z11AMA
Fig. 3-90: Selection of the measuring loop for determining fault data.
3.19.4
Acquisition of Short Circuit Data

The fault must last for at least 60 ms in order for fault data (short-circuit data) to
be determined.
3-126
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the
measuring loop selected by the fault data acquisition function. If a phase-tophase loop has been selected, then the fault current will be the current of the
leading phase in the cycle. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the
per-unit fault reactance using the nominal data for the set primary current and
voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been
selected for display. The geometric sums of the three phase currents of the line
being protected or of the parallel line are displayed as the ground fault current.
The ground fault angle is the phase displacement between ground fault current
and measuring voltage as selected by the fault data acquisition function.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then
only the fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is
displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and
Vnom. If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring
range, the Overflow indication will be displayed.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-127
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Output meas. values
C 1,2
305 050
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
FT_DA:
C2
305 064
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
c 1,3,4,5
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
c 2
FT_DA:
IMeas
FT_DA:
Fault current P p.u.
[ 004 025 ]
FT_DA:
Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
FT_DA:
Fault loop angle P
[ 004 024 ]
305 054
R
IA
2
Imax
IB
IC
IN,par
IN
1
R
FT_DA:
Fault impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
5
1
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
FT_DA:
Fault react., prim.
[ 004 029 ]
FT_DA:
Fault loop angle N
[ 004 048 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr. N p.u.
[ 004 049 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.N,par p.u
[ 004 059 ]
2 ... 3
FT_DA:
1
c 1
305 055
FT_DA:
5
R
c 2
305 056
FT_DA:
c 3
305 057
FT_DA:
305 058
FT_DA:
R
c 1
c 2
305 059
FT_DA:
c 3
305 060
R
1
2
3
1 ... 3
FT_DA:
Meas. loop selected
[ 004 079 ]
FT_DA:
VMeas
305 053
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z11APB
Fig. 3-91: Acquisition of short circuit data.
3.19.5
Acquisition of Fault Location

In order to determine the fault location as a percentage of the line length and in
km, the value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the monitored
line section, as well as the corresponding line length in km, must be set.
3-128
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Line length PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Line reactance PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Output fault locat.
305 076
FT_DA:
Fault location
[ 004 022 ]
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_DA:
[ 004 027 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
Parameter
FT_DA:
Line length PSx
FT_DA:
Line reactance PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
306 020
1
2
3
4
005
006
007
008
012
013
014
015
50Z01B4B
Fig. 3-92: Acquisition of fault location.
3.19.6
Fault Data Reset

on the local control panel, the fault data value is
After pressing the reset key
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can
continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-129
P437
3 Operation
3.20
Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
3.20.1
Start of Fault Recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
MAIN : Gen eral star tin g
MAIN : Ge n. trip si gn al 1
MAIN : Gen. trip s ignal 2
FT_RC : Trigger
FT_RC : I > tri ggere d
In addition, the user can set a logical OR combination of logic signals (m out of
n parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
3-130
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.20.2
Fault Counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 089 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Record. trig active
[ 002 002 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
0
1
1 min
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
No. of faults
[ 004 020 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
&
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
[ 035 004 ]
S1 1
R1
45Z6325A
Fig. 3-93: Start of fault recording and fault counter.
3.20.3
Time Tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-131
P437
3.20.4
3 Operation
Fault Recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and postfault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC: Faul t me m. overf low will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
FT_R C: Faul ty t ime tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered
in the fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
[ 035 001 ]
CT200
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
Fault memory n
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
003 000
033 001
033 002
Measured value 1
033 003
Measured value 2
033 004
Measured value 3
033 005
Measured value N
033 006
MAIN:
Time tag
033 007
306 021
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
&
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1
1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
Fig. 3-94: Fault memory.
3-132
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.20.5
Fault Value Recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
Phase currents
Phase-to-ground voltages
Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 4 transformer
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90

transformer
Reference voltage Vref measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer
Residual current of the parallel line, measured by the P437 at the T 24

transformer
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time
period of 16.4 s is available for recording. This period can be divided among a
maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a
fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum
recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the
oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults
have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are
overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-133
P437
3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
IA
IB
IC
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
IN
VN-G
Vref
IN,par
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
Analog channel 1
Analog channel 2
Analog channel 3
Analog channel 4
Analog channel 5
Analog channel 6
Analog channel 7
Analog channel 8
Analog channel 9
Analog channel 10
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
47Z1319A
Fig. 3-95: Fault value recording.
3-134
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.21
Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)
Disabling or Enabling Distance Protection

Distance protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter
(see Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)).
3.21.1
Fault Detection Logic

The fault detection logic in distance protection serves to detect short-circuits
phase-selectively. Fault detection logic is divided into the following areas:
Overcurrent detection
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection
Underimpedance fault detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault
detection logic.
Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents
can be detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic
is provided for short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In
order to control difficult conditions for fault detection, the P437 is also equipped
with a highly angle-dependent true underimpedance detection logic function.
Ground fault detection logic distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded
faults.
The fault detection logic starts the timer stages of the trigger levels and as a
function of the phase-selective fault detection decision selects the measuring
loops in which the fault impedances are determined. The fault detection logic is
blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
The protection function is disabled using setting parameters or

appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Monitoring (VT supervision) detects a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
If distance protection is blocked, the user may switch to backup overcurrent-time

protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
DIST:
General enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
0
1
0: No
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
1: Yes
DIST:
Starting blocked
303 500
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
D5Z5029A
Fig. 3-96: Fault detection blocking.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-135
P437
3.21.1.1
3 Operation
Overcurrent Detection
Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of
the threshold values I>> and I>>>. The I>> threshold can be set. I>>> is equal to
2I>>. The thresholds are identical for all three phases.
The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of 1 if the threshold
is exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only
one halfwave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic
value of 1. Triggering of inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>>
trigger.
If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if
I>>> is exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is
shortened since there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave.
Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point
treatment set in the P437. If isolated neutral/resonant grounding or shortduration grounding is set, then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s)
in which the I>> threshold is exceeded. With the setting Low-imped. grounding
the following condition must also be satisfied:
I
3-136
2
3
| I max |
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DIST:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting blocked
303 500
IA
IB
IC
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
I>>> = 2I>>
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
(2/3)Imax
Imax
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
DIST:
I>> PSx
010
001
001
001
010
010
010
011
048
076
077
078
054
074
094
014
47Z1155A
Fig. 3-97: Overcurrent detection.
3.21.1.2
Ground Fault Detection

To detect ground faults, the ground fault detection function monitors the average
magnitude of the residual current calculated from the phase currents and the
neutral-displacement voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages for
values exceeding set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current
measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection
value for ground fault monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-137
P437
3 Operation
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>,
which means that the operate value of the ground current function increases
with an increasing phase current level as a form of stabilization.
IA
COMP
IB
IC
DIST:
IN> PSx
Imax
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
303 502
|Ix|
|Ix|+IN>
0.05|Imax|
DIST:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting blocked
DIST:
tIN> elapsed
303 500
303 503
DIST:
tIN> running
[ 036 105 ]
MAIN:
[ * ]
50ms
DIST:
VNG> PSx
[
DIST:
VNG>> exceeded
303 596
DIST:
Start.VNG> triggered
VA-G
VB-G
303 504
VC-G
DIST:
VNG>> PSx
[
DIST:
tVNG>> PSx
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
MAIN:
303 506
[ * ]
DIST:
VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 036 016 ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
DIST:
IN> PSx
DIST:
tIN> PSx
DIST:
VNG> PSx
DIST:
VNG>> PSx
DIST:
tVNG>> PSx
010
001
001
001
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
048
076
077
078
055
075
095
015
057
077
097
017
056
076
096
016
062
082
002
022
061
081
001
021
45Z8056A
Fig. 3-98: Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage.
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set
in the P437.
3-138
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MA IN: N e ut r .pt. tre at. PSx = Low-imped. grounding

Ground fault detection DIST: Starting G occurs with this setting when the
threshold of the IN> or VNG> trigger is exceeded. Furthermore, triggering of
stage VNG>> and the lapse of timer stage tVNG>> is signaled (see Fig. 3-98,
(p. 3-138)).
MA IN : Ne ut r.pt. treat. P Sx = Isol./res.w.start.PG

MA IN : Ne ut r.pt. tre at. PSx = Isol./res.w/o st. PG
If any of these two settings is selected, instantaneous ground fault
detection DIST: Starting G operates in the event of multiple phase-toground fault detection when the thresholds of the IN> and VNG> triggers are
exceeded. Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in the event that
only one base point is detected, ground fault detection will operate, but not
until tIN> has elapsed.
MA IN: Ne utr .pt. treat. P Sx = Short-durat. ground.

Operation here corresponds to operation with the setting Isol./
res.w.start.PG or Isol./res.w/o st. PG except that in the case of a sustained
ground fault the timer stage tIN> remains activated due to the operating
trigger VNG>> and therefore no longer has any effect in the event of
subsequent short-duration grounding.
MAIN:
[ * ]
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
DIST:
Starting G
303 507
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
303 502
DIST:
Start.VNG> triggered
303 504
100ms
FT_RC:
Trigger N
310 058
DIST:
tIN> elapsed
FT_DA:
Trigger N
303 503
310 059
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
* Parameter
DIST:
VPP< triggered
set
set
set
set
303 509
DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered
303 510
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
010
001
001
001
048
076
077
078
49Z7004A
Fig. 3-99: Evaluation of trigger signals.
3.21.1.3
Enabling Undervoltage and Underimpedance Fault Detection

The undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection functions are enabled by
I>(Imin) in the corresponding measuring systems. For the two possible dynamic
ranges of current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the
fault detection value for I>(Imin). In order to control contention problems when
current and voltage appear at the same time (branch voltage transformers),
measuring system enabling is delayed by 15 ms.
For sensitive detection of double ground faults with isolated neutral/resonant
grounding, the P437 checks to determine whether the base point current I>(Imin)
is exceeded in one phase only and whether the measured value falls below the
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-139
P437
3 Operation
set threshold for underimpedance fault detection in two phases. Enabling

proceeds in the phases where the voltage is below the set threshold.
DIST:
Starting blocked
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
303 500
IA
DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg.
303 598
IB
DIST:
IB>(Ibl) trigg.
IC
303 599
DIST:
IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
Meas.val.> set value

C
15ms
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
15ms
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
15ms
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
Meas.val< set value
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
MAIN:
[ * ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
V< PSx
MAIN:
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
010
010
011
011
010
001
001
001
010
010
011
011
069
089
009
029
048
076
077
078
068
088
008
028
45Z8029A
Fig. 3-100: Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection.
3.21.1.4
Undervoltage Detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the
phase-to-phase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set
threshold V<.
Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the
operating mode. The following operating modes are possible:
3-140
Undervoltage fault detection is disabled.
The undervoltage fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of

the phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by
ground fault detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phaseto-ground loops.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Operat. mode V< PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: W/o V< starting
1: With V< start. PG
2: With V< start.PG,PP
DIST:
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
VPP< triggered
303 509
Parameter
DIST:
V< PSx
DIST:
Operat. mode V< PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
069
089
009
029
067
087
007
027
47Z0157A
Fig. 3-101: Undervoltage detection.
3.21.1.5
Underimpedance Fault Detection

Underimpedance fault detection determines the impedances of the phase-toground or phase-to-phase loops.
The underimpedance fault detection mode can be set by selecting the operating
mode via DIST: Ope rat. mode Z< P Sx. The following operating modes are
possible:
W/o Z< starting: Underimpedance fault detection is disabled.
With Z< starting P-G: The underimpedance fault detection function

evaluates only the decisions of the phase-to-ground loops, once these
functions have been enabled by ground fault detection.
With Z< start.PG,PP: Ground fault detection brings about a switch from
phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the I>>>
trigger operates (see Section 3.21.1.1, (p. 3-136)). When overcurrent or
undervoltage fault detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are
blocked phase-selectively.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-141
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: W/o Z< starting

DIST:
Enable ZP-G
303 508
0: W/o Z< starting

1: With Z< starting P-G
2: With Z< start.PG,PP
DIST:
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
DIST:
Enable ZA-G starting
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
303 520
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
DIST:
Enable ZB-G starting
303 515
303 521
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
DIST:
Enable ZC-G starting
303 516
303 522
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
Parameter
DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
066
086
006
026
DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
303 525
D5Z5010A
Fig. 3-102: Enabling underimpedance fault detection.
If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance is determined and compared to

ascertain that it is within the set impedance range. The loop impedance of the
phase-to-ground loops is determined, depending on the setting DIST: Z
evaluat ion PSx, by using the ground current corrected by the set ground factor
kG or by using the phase current multiplied by 2 or by (1+kG).
3-142
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Setting ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN): The calculation is carried out using the

ground current corrected by the set ground factor kG:
Z PG =
I P + kG I N
Setting ZPG=VPG/2*IP: The calculation is carried out using the phase

current multiplied by 2:
Z PG =
V PG
V PG
2 I P
Setting ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG): The calculation is carried out using the

phase current and the ground factor kG:
Z PG =
V PG
I P (1 + kG )
The following values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault
detection characteristic:
Reactance in forward direction Xfw
Load angle
Ratio Zbw/Zfw, where
Zbw: Impedance in backward (reverse) direction;
Zfw: Impedance in forward direction)
Phase-to-ground impedance in forward direction Zfw,PG
Phase-to-phase impedance in forward direction Zfw,PP
Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction Rfw,PG
Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction Rfw,PP
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is
greater than 3Znom, then the range is limited to 3Znom (where
Znom = Vnom / Inom).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-143
P437
3 Operation
110
Rfw,PG
Forward direction
Rfw,PP
Backward direction
Xfw
Xfw
w
Zf
70
Zfw
, PP
Zf
w,
PG
bw
70
D5Z5212A
Fig. 3-103: Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function.
DIST:
Abs. value kG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Angle kG PSx
[ * ]
+
+
+
IA
IB
IC
IN
INkG
DIST:
INkG
450 171
IA(1+kG)
DIST:
IA(1+kG)
450 168
IB(1+kG)
DIST:
IB(1+kG)
450 169
IC(1+kG)
DIST:
IC(1+kG)
450 170
Parameter
DIST:
Abs. value kG PSx
DIST:
Angle kG PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
1
2
3
4
037
087
037
087
036
086
036
086
47Z1458
Fig. 3-104: Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor.
3-144
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Enable ZP-G
303 508
DIST:
Z evaluation PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
INkG
450 171
DIST:
Xfw PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
DIST:
PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
[ * ]
IC
2IA
2IB
2IC
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IA(1+kG)
450 168
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IB(1+kG)
450 169
1. . .3
DIST:
IC(1+kG)
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN)
2: ZPG=VPG/2*IP
3: ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG)
450 170
DIST:
Enable ZA-G starting
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
303 520
VA-G
COMP
ZA-G
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered
303 526
COMP
DIST:
Enable ZB-G starting
303 527
COMP
303 521
VB-G
303 528
COMP
ZB-G
303 510
COMP
DIST:
Enable ZC-G starting
c
COMP
303 522
VC-G
ZC-G
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
ZA-B
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
ZB-C
DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
303 525
+
ZC-A
Parameter
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
051
071
091
011
Parameter
DIST:
Z evaluation PSx
DIST:
Xfw PSx
DIST:
PSx
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
set
set
set
set
025
024
024
025
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
093
013
073
033
050
070
090
010
063
083
003
023
053
073
093
013
101
102
103
104
052
072
092
012
105
106
107
108
47Z1459B
Fig. 3-105: Underimpedance detection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-145
P437
3.21.1.6
3 Operation
Fault Detection Logic

The fault detection logic links the phase-selective output signals from the
following fault detections to form common phase-selective starting decisions (SA,
SB, and SC) and SN1:
Overcurrent detection (I>>)
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection (V<)
Underimpedance detection (Z<)
. The phase-selective starting decisions are combined to form general

starting and thus produce the MAIN: Ge ne ral s tarting signal. Ground fault
detection alone does not bring about general starting.
If fault detection operates via overcurrent fault detection, single-phase fault
detection may operate without ground fault detection. In order for the measuring
loops for distance and directional measurement to be properly selected even in
this case, either SN1 or starting in another phase must be triggered as well. It is
possible to specify whether, in the case of single-phase starting, SN1 will always
be triggered or whether depending on the magnitude of the phase currents
SN1 or starting in one phase will be transfer-triggered.
MA IN : Transfe r f or 1 p P Sx = Ground
With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred
after the timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see Section 3.21.1.2, (p. 3-137) for
setting).
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without
ground to multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault
detection, starting will occur instantaneously.
MA IN : Transfer for 1p PSx = P or G =f(Imed,Imax)

For single-pole overcurrent fault detection, the decision as to whether
starting in one phase or SN1 starting will be transferred depends on the
Imed / Imax ratio. The magnitude of the medium phase current must be more
than 2/3 the magnitude of the maximum current for the phase to be
transfer-triggered. If the current with the medium-sized magnitude is
smaller, SN1 will be triggered after timer stage tIN> has elapsed.
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without
ground to multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault
detection, starting will occur instantaneously.
3-146
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
VA< triggered
DIST:
Starting A
303 517
303 529
DIST:
303 526
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
VB< triggered
DIST:
Starting B
303 518
303 530
DIST:
303 527
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
VC< triggered
DIST:
Starting C
303 519
303 531
DIST:
303 528
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
1-pole starting
303 533
DIST:
Multipole starting
DIST:
Starting G
303 534
303 507
DIST:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 036 021 ]
MAIN:
Transfer for 1p PSx
[ * ]
1: Ground
2: P or G =f(Imed,Imax)
IA
|Imedium|/|Imax|2/3
COMP
IB
IC
|Imedium|/|Imax|>2/3
Imax
Imedium
COMP
COMP
COMP
Parameter
DIST:
tIN> PSx
MAIN:
Transfer for 1p PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
057
077
097
017
040
079
080
081
45Z8030A
Fig. 3-106: Fault detection and starting logic.
If a general starting condition is present, then the decisions of the following

systems are signaled:
Overcurrent fault detection
Undervoltage fault detection
Underimpedance fault detection
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-147
P437
DIST:
Bl.Start. I>>
3 Operation
450 204
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
Starting I>>
[ 011 139 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> A
[ 040 064 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> B
[ 040 065 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> C
[ 040 097 ]
&
DIST:
Starting V< A
[ 040 067 ]
&
DIST:
Starting V> triggered
303 513
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
303 526
DIST:
DIST:
Starting Z< C
[ 040 072 ]
&
303 527
DIST:
303 528
DIST:
Bl.Start. Z<
DIST:
Starting Z<
[ 036 241 ]
450 205
45Z8032A
Fig. 3-107: Fault detection signals of distance protection.
3.21.2
Selection of Measured Values

The P437 selects measuring loops based on the phase-selective fault detection
decision. The fault impedances (short-circuit impedances) and the fault direction
are determined from the voltage and current values collected from these
measuring loops.
For multi-phase-to-ground faults, the user can specify whether phase-to-ground
or phase-to-phase variables will be used for measurement. For single-phase
faults, it is possible to disable impedance and directional measurement.
3-148
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Measuremen PG Loops
t with Phaseto-Ground
Fault
Detection
PP Loops or
No Loops
Measuring Loop 1
PG Loops
PP Loops
Measuring Loop 2
PG Loops
PP Loops
Measuring Loop 3
Starting
Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas
s,1
,1
s,1
,1
s,2
,2
s,2
,2
s,3
,3
s,3
,3
A, B, C, G
VA-G
IA,cor VA-B
r
IA-B
VB-G
IB,cor VB-C
r
IB-C
VC-G
IC,cor VC-A
r
IC-A
A, B, C
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
VB-C
IB-C
IB-C
VC-A
IC-A
IC-A
A, B, G
VA-G
IA,cor VA-B
r
IA-B
VB-G
IB,cor /
r
B, C, G
VB-G
IB,cor VB-C
r
IB-C
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
A, C, G
VA-G
IA,cor VC-A
r
IC-A
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
A, B
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
B, C
VB-C
IB-C
VB-C
IB-C
A, C
VC-A
IC-A
VC-A
IC-A
A, G
VA-G
IA,cor /
r
B, G
VB-G
IB,cor /
r
C, G
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
VB-C
VC-A
Only one measuring loop is shown in the following block diagrams. If several
measurement loops are selected, the P437 links the measuring decisions with an
OR operator.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-149
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Starting A
303 529
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
DIST:
Meas. start. 1pG PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: PG loops
2: None
DIST:
303 537
DIST:
303 538
DIST:
303 539
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
DIST:
[ * ]
303 543
1
2
1: PG loops
2: PP loops
DIST:
303 540
DIST:
303 541
DIST:
303 542
DIST:
[ * ]
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
303 544
1
2
1: PG loops
2: PP loops
Parameter
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 172
012 173
012 174
012 175
012 176
012 177
012 178
012 179
012 180
012 181
012 182
012 183
47Z0161A
Fig. 3-108: Selection of measuring loops.
3.21.2.1
Parallel Line Compensation

In the case of grounded faults, it is possible to activate parallel line compensation
if the proper setting has been made. If parallel line compensation has been
enabled, then the residual current of the parallel line will be included in distance
3-150
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
and directional measurement as a function of the decision of the zero current

scale. The zero current scale compares the magnitude of the residual currents
in the line and the parallel line. Compensation is only permitted if the ratio of the
residual current in the parallel line to the residual current in the line to be
protected is lower than the value set at MAIN: k P ar PSx. Otherwise there is the
danger of incorrect compensation in the healthy line with a residual current in
the shorted parallel line. The ratio should be set to a value smaller than 1, so as
to prevent such incorrect compensation, even with faults at the line's end (with
residual currents of differing magnitude caused by unbalanced lines).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-151
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
IN,par> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IN,par> triggered
[ 037 210 ]
IN,par
DIST:
kG,par angle PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kG,par abs.value PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IkG,par
kG,par IG,par
303 605
MAIN:
kPar PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
IC
|IN,par|kPar.line <
DIST:
With mutual comp.
[ 038 039 ]
|IN|
|IN,par|kPar.line
|IN|
DIST:
Mutual comp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
c 1,2,3
0: Without
c 4,5,6
1: Depend. on IN/IN,par
1
DIST:
IkG
303 604
1,4
DIST:
IA,corr.
2,5
DIST:
IB,corr.
3,6
DIST:
IC,corr.
303 606
303 607
303 608
Parameter
DIST:
IN,par> PSx
DIST:
kG,par abs.value PSx
DIST:
kG,par angle PSx
DIST:
Mutual comp. PSx
MAIN:
kPar PSx
set 1
012 184
012 049
012 048
025 095
set 2
012 185
012 099
012 098
024 015
024 017
set 3
012 186
013 049
013 048
024 075
024 077
025 097
set 4
012 187
013 099
013 098
025 035
025 037
47Z0162B
Fig. 3-109: Parallel line compensation.
3.21.2.2
CVT Stabilization
Only the fundamental component of the selected measuring voltages is
evaluated. If stabilization for capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization)
3-152
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
has been enabled, the device checks to determine whether the second harmonic
exceeds the threshold of 0.01Vnom. If so, a special filter designed specifically for
CVTs is activated.
DIST:
303 537
DIST:
303 538
DIST:
303 539
DIST:
303 540
DIST:
303 541
DIST:
303 542
DIST:
IA,corr.
DIST:
CVT stabilization
[ 010 031 ]
303 606
DIST:
IB,corr.
303 607
DIST:
IC,corr.
303 608
0: No
IA
1: Yes
IB
IC
VA-G
2fnom
VB-G
VC-G
> 0.01 Vnom
fnom
1
Filter 1
fnom
2
Filter 2
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
47Z0163A
Fig. 3-110: CVT stabilization and selection of measured variables.
3.21.3
Distance and Directional Measurement

The P437 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction on the basis of
the selected measured values. A voltage memory is available so that
measurement will function correctly, even with very low fault voltages.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-153
P437
3.21.3.1
3 Operation
Voltage Memory
Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage
exceeds the fixed value of 0.65Vnom and there is no starting of the distance
protection function, then the voltage memory will be synchronized.
Synchronization requires approximately 300 ms. Then a check is carried out to
determine whether the frequency satisfies the following condition:
0.95fnom < f < 1.05fnom
If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency
condition is checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer
met, the enable is canceled.
If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below 0.65Vnom or if a starting of
the distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory
will be terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains
enabled for 2 s.
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
>0.65Vnom
DIST:
corr
corr
303 547
f/fnom = f
+
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
1
300ms
S1 1
303 549
R1
1
DIST:
tVmemory running
[ 040 034 ]
2s
DIST:
VA-B (stored)
VA-G
303 548
VB-G
49Z6433A
Fig. 3-111: Storing the reference voltage in memory.
3.21.3.2
Angle Determination
When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles F and S are
determined. Angle F is the fault angle that is determined using the selected
measuring voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle S is
determined on the basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected
measuring current Imeas. Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ
from the nominal frequency, a phase correction must be made. This correction is
determined by the frequency deviation and the time that has elapsed since
synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle correction based on the
selected measuring loop and the setting at MA IN: Phase sequence is
required. The resulting angle, X, is used for further processing.
3-154
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
303 549
DIST:
Vmeas
DIST:
F
303 546
303 550
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
DIST:
VA-B (stored)
303 548
DIST:
corr
303 547
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
X1
2: A - C - B
X(-1)
DIST:
X = 0
303 540
DIST:
X = -120
303 541
DIST:
X = +120
303 542
DIST:
X = +150
303 537
DIST:
X = +30
303 538
DIST:
X = -90
303 539
DIST:
X
303 551
47Z0165A
Fig. 3-112: Angle determination.
3.21.3.3
Selecting the Angle for Direction Determination

For distance and directional measurement, the following angles are used as a
function of the magnitude of the selected measuring voltage and the fault
duration:
Fault angle F
Angle X
Set angle
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas is above the threshold set at

DI ST: Op er.v al.Vm emory P Sx when the fault occurs, then the direction is
determined using fault angle F. If the measuring voltage is below the threshold
set at DI ST: Ope r.val .V mem or y PSx then angle X is used for directional
measurement. If the voltage memory is not enabled, angle X cannot be
determined. In this case the P437 checks whether the measuring voltage Vmeas is
within this range:
0.002Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper. val.V me mory PSx
If such is the case then the direction is determined with fault angle F. Direction
determination using X or F is not possible if the voltage memory is not enabled
or if the measuring voltage is less than 0.002Vnom. In these cases, set angle is
used for directional measurement. This means that a decision is made for the
forward direction.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-155
P437
3 Operation
Angle for Direction Determination:

V memory
Vmeas < 0.002Vnom
0.002Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x
Enabled
Not enabled
F
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction
determination is in this range:
45 < < +135
In the case of angles outside this range, a decision is made for the backward
(reverse) direction.
3-156
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Forw. w/o meas. y
[ 1* ]
< 0,002 Vnom
DIST:
Dir.using Vmeas y
[ 1* ]
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
[
]
DIST:
Dir.using Vmem y
[ 1* ]
C1
C2
C3
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
F
2
303 550
DIST:
X
-45 < N < 135
303 551
1 ... 3
135 < N < 315
set 1
010 109
set 2
010 116
set 3
010 117
set 4
010 118
y:
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, x
[ 2* ]
DIST:
* Parameter
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, x
[ 2* ]
Sys1. Sys2, Sys3
Starting
Active measur. loop
DIST:
Dir.using Vmeas y
DIST:
Dir.using Vmem y
DIST:
Forw. w/o meas. y
1p, 2p, 3p
Measuring loop 1
038 045
038 047
038 044
2p, 3p
Measuring loop 2
038 105
038 106
038 104
3p
Measuring loop 3
038 108
038 109
038 107
Selected meas. var.

x: A, B, C
Possible signals
Vmeas
Imeas
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, x
VA-G
IA,corr.
038 010
038 011
VB-G
IB,corr.
038 012
038 013
VC-G
IC,corr.
038 014
038 015
VA-B
IA-B
038 010
038 012
038 011
038 013
VB-C
IB-C
038 012
038 014
038 013
038 015
IC-A
038 010
038 014
038 011
038 015
VC-A
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, x
47Z1162B
Fig. 3-113: Directional measurement.
3.21.3.4
Selecting the Angle for Impedance Calculation

The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance is selected according to the
following criteria:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-157
P437
3 Operation
If the measuring voltage Vmeas is greater than the set threshold

(D IST : Op er.v al.V memory PSx) when the fault occurs, then fault angle
F is used to calculate fault impedance.
If the fault voltages are lower than the set threshold

(D IS T: O pe r.val.V memory PSx) and the voltage memory is enabled, a
check is made to determine whether angles F and X are in the forward
direction, i.e.: 45 < < +135
If both angles are in the same direction, either forward or backward,

then fault angle F is selected for distance measurement.
If angle F is in the forward direction and angle X is in the backward

direction, then an angle of (180 + ) is specified for the calculation.
If angle X is in the forward direction and angle F is in the backward
direction, then set angle is used for distance measurement.
If voltage memory is not enabled, the P437 checks whether:
the measuring voltage Vmeas is within this range:

0.002Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: O pe r.val .V memory PSx
If such is the case then the impedance is calculated using fault angle F.
3-158
the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002Vnom. In this case, the
impedance is calculated using set angle .
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0,002 Vnom
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
[ * ]
DIST:
F
-45 < F < 135

303 550
DIST:
X
-45 < X < 135

1
303 551
2
3
4
2
DIST:
180+
303 552
3
4
1 ... 4
1
2
3
1 ... 3
DIST:
Z
303 553
Parameter
DIST:
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
109
116
117
118
49Z6436A
Fig. 3-114: Selecting the angle for impedance calculation.
3.21.3.5
Distance Measurement
One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance
measurement by way of the setting at DI ST: C haract erist ic PSx:
Circle
Polygon
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-159
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1: Circle
2: Polygon
1: Circle
2: Polygon
Parameter
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
040
097
097
097
D5Z5019A
Fig. 3-115: Selecting the characteristic.
3.21.3.5.1
Extending the Measuring Range for Single-Phase Fault Detection

The user has the option of specifying whether the measuring range of impedance
zone 1 shall be extended by zone extension factor kze HSR in the case of singlephase fault detection. If this is desired, the measuring range of impedance zone
1 is extended if the following conditions are met:
There is an enable.
ARC (auto-reclosing control) was ready before general starting occurred.
The enable is issued from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. If the enable signal is to be issued from the local
control panel, it is possible to define conditions that must be met so that the
enable signal is issued.
3-160
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Zone extens. for 1pG
[ 011 049 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
[
Parameter
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 039
012 089
013 039
013 089
1
2
0: Without
1: If PSIG not ready
2: Always
DIST:
Zone ext. 1pG active
[ 039 028 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG EXT
[ 038 025 ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
1-pole starting
303 533
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
47Z0175A
Fig. 3-116: Extending the measuring range for single-phase fault detection.
3.21.3.5.2
Circle Characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using the selected measuring
quantities Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting Arc compensation has been chosen
(DI ST: A rc comp . ci rcle P Sx = Yes), then a correction to the measured fault
impedance is calculated for angles Z in the range of 45 < Z < or
135 < Z < (+180) as follows:
| Z
F,corr
|=
| Z F |
1 + sin
The following relation applies in the range 45 < Z < :

= Z
The following relation applies in the range 135 < Z < (+180):
= Z+180
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-161
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Arc comp. circle PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
-45<Z<
DIST:
Z
303 553
135<Z<(+180)
1
1
1 =-Z
DIST:
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 567
303 552
2 =-Z+180
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1: Circle
|ZF,corr|=
|ZF|/(1+sin)
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
|ZF|=|Vmeas|/|Imeas|
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
Parameter
DIST:
Arc comp. circle PSx
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
038
090
091
092
040
097
097
097
D5Z5026B
Fig. 3-117: Impedance measurement with the circle characteristic.
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in the following figure is obtained. If
the characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
Arc compensation, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
3-162
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
In this diagram, the following example settings have been used: n = 1 to 6, =

60; dot-dash line: with arc compensation; dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in
Zone 1 only).
+135
Forward direction
Zn
Z
R
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5025A
Fig. 3-118: P437 impedance and direction characteristic for the Circle setting.
The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-163
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
[ * ]
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 552
DIST:
Dist.decision zone n
|Zmeas|f(Zn, n)
303 567
303 561
Impedance zone2(n=2)
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
2 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
043
092
092
092
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
set
set
set
set
095
095
095
095
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z3 (circle) PSx
DIST:
3 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
044
093
093
093
096
096
096
096
* Parameter
* Parameter
DIST:
Z4 (circle) PSx
DIST:
4 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
045
094
094
094
* Parameter
099
099
099
099
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z5 (circle) PSx
DIST:
5 (circle) PSx
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
148
149
150
151
164
165
166
167
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z6 (circle) PSx
DIST:
6 (circle) PSx
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
152
153
154
155
168
169
170
171
47Z1467A
Fig. 3-119: Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement.
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1. The impedances modified by zone extension factor kze are
calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = kzeZ1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
Protective signaling (PSIG: Z1 e xten ded)
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or

irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling during the reclose
command.
Switch on to fault protection (SOTF: Z1 e xte nded)
An external signal (D IST: Zone exte nsi on EXT).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a

time-delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
3-164
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
303 000
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
ARC:
Meas.r.extd. ext.ARC
303 025
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
Zone extension
[ 036 065 ]
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
DIST:
Z1 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
1 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 543
DIST:
303 544
|Zmeas|f(Z1,1)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1, x
|Zmeas|f(Z1,1,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1ze,x
303 629
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 630
303 567
S1 1
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
R1
ASC:
Manual close request
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
303 565
x: A-N, B-N, C-N,

A-B, B-C, C-A
305 000
* Parameter
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
DIST:
Z1 (circle) PSx
DIST:
1 (circle) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
012 042
073 091
074 091
075 091
072 090
073 090
074 090
075 090
012 046
012 096
013 046
013 096
012 047
012 097
013 047
013 097
012 034
012 084
013 034
013 084
012 035
012 085
013 035
013 085
47Z1468A
Fig. 3-120: Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement.
3.21.3.5.3
Polygon (Quadrilateral) Characteristic

The ZF fault impedance value is determined using the selected measuring
quantities: Vmeas and Imeas. By multiplying this value by the cosine or sine of the
angle selected for distance measurement, Z, we then calculate the fault
resistance RF or fault reactance XF.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-165
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
2: Polygon
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
|ZF|=|Vmeas|/|Imeas|
DIST:
Imeas
DIST:
XF
|ZF|sinZ
303 555
303 545
DIST:
RF
|ZF|cosZ
303 554
DIST:
Z
303 553
Parameter
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
040
097
097
097
D5Z5021B
Fig. 3-121: Impedance measurement with the polygon characteristic.
The calculated quantities, RF and XF, are compared with the reference quantities,
Rref and Xref, of the four impedance zones. The reference quantities are
determined using the settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both
quantities lie within the set impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made
for the corresponding zone(s).
The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:
Reactance X
Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
Angle
Angle
Note that the specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8:
Rn,PG / Xn < 8, and
Rn,PP / Xn < 8
If the ratio is greater than this (i.e. the polygon becomes extremely flat), the
measurement conditions for high fault resistances become quite bad, because in
this case, the angle of the fault impedance gets small, which results in quite big
measurement deviations for the reactance.
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in the
following figure.
3-166
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
In this diagram, the following example settings have been used: n = 1 to 6, Xn =

6.5 , Rn = 2.0 , n = 50 , n = 15; dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in
Zone 1 only).
+135
Forward direction
Xn
45
n
Rfw,PP
Rfw,PG
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5022A
Fig. 3-122: P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the Polygon setting.
The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops can be set

separately for each zone. The different impedances are therefore compared with
different impedance characteristics.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-167
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
c R2,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
303 543
DIST:
DIST:
R2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
X2,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
X2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Z
Rnref=f(Rn,n,n,Z)
Rn,ref RF
303 553
Xnref=f(Rn,n,n,Z)
DIST:
Dist.decision zone n
Xn,ref XF
303 561
DIST:
RF
303 554
DIST:
XF
303 555
Parameter
DIST:
R2,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R2,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X2,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X2,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
007
057
007
057
008
058
008
058
002
052
002
052
080
081
082
083
014
064
014
064
087
087
087
087
Parameter
DIST:
R3,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R3,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X3,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X3,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
3 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
3 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
009
059
009
059
010
060
010
060
003
053
003
053
084
085
086
087
015
065
015
065
088
088
088
088
Parameter
DIST:
R4,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R4,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X4,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X4,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
4 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
4 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
011
061
011
061
012
062
012
062
004
054
004
054
089
090
091
092
016
066
016
066
089
089
089
089
Parameter
DIST:
R5,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R5,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X5,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X5,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
5 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
5 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
002
002
002
002
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
100
101
102
103
093
094
095
096
124
125
126
127
156
157
158
159
Parameter
DIST:
R6,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R6,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X6,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X6,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
6 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
6 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
002
002
002
002
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
104
105
106
107
097
098
099
126
128
129
130
131
160
161
162
163
45Z8069A
Fig. 3-123: Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 (showing the example of zone 2) and distance measurement.
In addition to the settings described above, the kze zone extension factors for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1.
As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R
and X directions. The R and X values modified by the kze zone extension factor
are calculated according to the following equations:
R1,kze = kzeR1
X1,kze = kzeX1
3-168
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
Protective signaling (PSIG: Z1 exten de d)
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or

irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling during the reclose
command.
Switch on to fault protection (SOTF: Z1 exte nded)
An external signal (DI ST: Zone e xten sion EXT).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a

time-delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
Reactive reach settings Xn,PP and Xn,PG
The reactive component of the distance zones may be set separately for the
phase-tophase (PP) and phase-to-ground (PG) measuring loops.
D IST: X1,PG ( polygon ) PSx
DIST: X 6,PG (polygon ) PSx
DIST: X1,PP (polygon) P Sx
DI ST: X6 ,PP ( polygon) PSx
This feature may be helpful with double-circuit lines without using mutual
compensation. In order to cope with effects of mutual coupling, the zone 1 reach
for faults with grounding can now be set to the smallest possible reactance value
(depending on possible switching states of the parallel circuit), while the phaseto-phase loop measurement is set to a "normal" underreaching reach.
A further application is to selectively block the phase-to-ground measurement in
protection schemes where backup protection for ground fault short circuits is
provided with time-graded directional neutral overcurrent protection elements.
Zone 1 extension already provides various factors for phase-to-phase and phasetoground measuring loops. Further precaution measures are therefore not required
here.
Increased reach settings

The maximum setting values for R and X zone reaches, including the
underimpedance starting zone, are 400 at Inom = 1 A (and 80 at Inom = 5
A). Therefore exceptionally high secondary impedances in backup protection
applications may now be taken into account.
For such especially high reach settings the accuracy of an impedance
measurement will naturally be limited because of the then very low short circuit
currents available, so that the user will have to abide with tolerance deviations in
the order of 10%.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-169
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
303 000
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
ARC:
303 025
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
X1,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone extension
[ 036 065 ]
DIST:
X1,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
[ * ]
303 543
DIST:
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
R1,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
R1,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Z
R1,ref1 =
303 553
R1,ref1 RF
f(R1, 1, 1, Z)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1, x
X1,ref1 =
303 629
X1,ref1 XF
f(X1, 1, 1, Z)
R1,ref2 =
R1,ref2 RF
f(R1,1,1,Z,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1ze,x
X1,ref2 =
303 630
X1,ref2 XF
f(X1,1,1,Z,kze)
DIST:
RF
DIST:
S1 1
R1
303 554
303 565
DIST:
XF
303 555
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
x: A-N, B-N, C-N,

A-B, B-C, C-A
306 012
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
X1,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X1,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
DIST:
R1,PG (polygon) PSx
012 001
012 051
013 001
013 051
002 076
002 077
002 078
002 079
012 013
012 063
013 013
013 063
012 034
012 084
013 034
013 084
012 035
012 085
013 035
013 085
012 005
012 055
013 005
013 055
DIST:
R1,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
012 006
012 056
013 006
013 056
012 046
012 096
013 046
013 096
012 047
012 097
013 047
013 097
072 086
073 086
074 086
075 086
47Z1457A
Fig. 3-124: Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement.
3.21.3.5.4
Distance Decision for 2pG-Faults

To provide correct operation for cross-country faults or inter-system faults on
double circuit lines (2pGG faults), it is mandatory to evaluate only the both
phase-ground loop impedances. This is possible by setting, yet during tests this
setting resulted in staggered tripping for very close 2pG faults, because one PG
loop impedance could appear in backward direction. The reason for this is that
3-170
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
the impedance is calculated by using the ground factor kG of the line, yet as no
line impedance is involved in the measuring loop any more and as the source
ground factor was significantly smaller than the line factor, thus one PG loop
impedance is misleading.
Therefore the following solution is implemented:
If starting identifies a 2pG fault condition, and PG loops evaluation is selected,
than the phase-phase voltage is used to determine whether it is a close fault,
which is the case for VPP < 10%Vnom. In this case, the PG-loop impedances (for
the distance and directional measurement) are calculated with kG = 0; otherwise
normal equation with set kG is used.
Additionally to the 2 PG impedances the PP impedance is calculated, too, to
secure simultaneous 3-pole tripping, because it could happen that the 2 PG
impedances settle in zone 1 (or Z1e) with different speed just depending on
the fault transients. Always all 3 impedances (e.g. BN, CN and BC for a BCN fault)
are calculated, and the zone decisions are then compared:
1.
If both PG impedances are in zone 1, P437 immediately trips 3-pole.
2.
If one PG and the PP impedance are in zone 1 and the 2nd PG loop is in
forward direction, then P437 trips 3-pole, too.
Taking care for the directional decision acertains, that just in case of
cross-country and intersystem faults (2pGG faults) both PG faults are on
the protected line. The zone 1 decision of the PP loop then is sufficient to
secure that both faults are in zone 1, too.
In applications with parallel lines, during intersystem faults one PG fault
could be on the parallel line, but then either its direction is backwards or
the PP loop impedance is outside zone 1.
3.
If after the first calculation loop just one zone 1 decision is determined,
than the DIST processing task duration is prolonged and all 3 impedances
are calculated again.
This is done to make shure that normal 2pG faults are immediately
tripped 3-pole and the risk of staggered tripping is minimized.
The disadvantage is that for parallel line applications in case of crosscountry/intersystem faults the correct 1pole trip could be delayed by up to
~7 ms.
So in order to get a proper balance of speed and correct 1p/3p trip
decision, this measuring repitition is only done once.
3.21.3.5.5
1pG Starting During 2pG Faults

In some cases a fast 1pG starting was observed during a 2pG fault. This
incomplete fault type determination also forced an initial 1-pole trip. During the
2nd processing cycle the correct type of fault was identified and 3-pole trip was
issued, thus an unfortunate staggered tripping took place.
To solve this problem, the starting conditions are now checked again during the
first distance measuring cycle.
3.21.3.5.6
Settable Directional Characteristic

In some cases with external phase-phase faults with a high intermediate infeed
at the remote busbar, the apparent directional angle (calculated from memorised
voltage and fault current) appeared at about 40 70, i.e. close to the
directional line, sometimes even in the forward section. This resulted from a
severe phase shift of VAB voltage upon fault inception.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-171
P437
3 Operation
The solution implemented for this condition is a settable directional characteristic

angle as figure below.
45
Setting
DIST:
Directional char PSx
[ * ]
R
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Directional char PSx
002 234
002 235
002 236
002 237
47Z1201A
Fig. 3-125: Settable distance directional characteristic.
3.21.4
Impedance-Time Characteristics
A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for
impedance time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward
direction, backward (reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distanceindependent timer stage t7 can also operate forward-directionally, backwarddirectionally, or non-directionally. Timer stage t8 operates independently of
distance and direction. All zone timer stages are triggered by the general starting
of distance protection if an appropriate setting has been selected at
DIST : Mode t im e r start (otherwise see Separate Zone Timer Start below).
3.21.4.1
Timer Stage Logic for Extended Zone 1

The measuring range of zone 1 can be extended by the set zone extension
factors. The timer stage logic for the device is described below.
If neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone
extension proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the
extended zone takes place once the set time (DIST: t1,ze PSx) has elapsed. If
protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the
protective signaling tripping time has elapsed.
If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then the following occurs in
the 1-/3-pole, 3-pole and 3-pole (only for 1p) ARC modes: in extended zone 1 a
trip is issued once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard
reach (non-extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection
3-172
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time
setting is effective.)
In the 1-pole ARC mode, a three-pole trip occurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed
and in extended zone 1 after timer stage t1,ze of distance protection has elapsed.
A single-pole trip is issued in extended zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has
elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-extended zone) it is issued after
timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time
of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is effective.)
Separate Zone Timer Start
If at DI ST: Mode t ime r s tart the mode with zone starting has been selected,
then only the timer stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered
for which the measured loop impedance is inside the zone.
The trigger is issued by the respective signal DI ST: Zone 1 s tart ing (or
DI ST: Z one 2 startin g, D IST: Zone 8 s tar tin g, resp.)
These signals are only supported if the mode with zone starting has been
selected, otherwise as is mandatory in IEC 61850 modeling all zone startings
are still visible, but will have no influence on the functional sequence.
Compensation of Starting Time
The P437 automatically subtracts starting time from grading time.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-173
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
t1 PSx
303 002
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
C
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
&
DIST:
t1,ze PSx
*
t1
t1,ze
DIST:
t1 elapsed
[ 036 026 ]
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST:
Mode timer start
[ 001 236 ]
0
1
0: With DIST gen.start.
1: With zone starting
&
DIST:
Zone 1 starting
[ 001 094 ]
&
DIST:
Zone 1,ze starting
[ 002 067 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
4: 3-pole (only for 1p)
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
303 614
&
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
&
303 003
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
&
&
&
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
305 150
SOTF:
Trip time elapsed
460 528
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
DIST:
t1 PSx
DIST:
t1,ze PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
023
012
012
013
013
026
027
028
029
1
2
3
4
051
025
085
045
028
078
028
078
025
025
025
025
47Z8033
Fig. 3-126: Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1.
3-174
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
&
DIST:
t2 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Mode timer start
[ 001 236 ]
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
1
0
1
1: With zone starting
DIST:
t3 PSx
[ * ]
&
DIST:
Zone 2 starting
[ 001 095 ]
DIST:
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
&
DIST:
t4 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone 3 starting
[ 001 096 ]
DIST:
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 4 starting
[ 001 097 ]
DIST:
t5 PSx
[ * ]
0
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 5 starting
[ 001 098 ]
DIST:
t6 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 6 starting
[ 001 099 ]
DIST:
t7 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 7 starting
[ 001 100 ]
DIST:
t8 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 8 starting
[ 001 101 ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
DIST:
t2 PSx
DIST:
t3 PSx
012
012
013
013
029
079
029
079
012
012
013
013
032
082
032
082
DIST:
t5 PSx
1
2
3
4
DIST:
t4 PSx
012
012
013
013
030
080
030
080
012
012
013
013
033
083
033
083
DIST:
t6 PSx
012
012
013
013
031
081
031
081
012
012
012
012
140
141
142
143
DIST:
t7 PSx
DIST:
t8 PSx
012
012
012
012
144
145
146
147
47Z1154A
Fig. 3-127: Time settings for timer stages 2 to 8.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-175
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
DIST:
N1,fw
[ 038 010 ]
303 572
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
DIST:
N1,bw
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
303 571
[ 038 014 ]
DIST:
N1,fw, A
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A
303 631
[ 038 011 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, B
[ 038 013 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, C
[ 038 015 ]
DIST:
N1,fw, B
DIST:
Direction N1 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
DIST:
Direction N1 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 023
012 073
013 023
013 073
303 632
DIST:
N1,fw, C
1
2
3
DIST:
Direction N2 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 024
012 074
013 024
013 074
303 635
303 636
DIST:
N2,fw
1
2
DIST:
Direction N3 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 025
012 075
013 025
013 075
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
1
2
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Direction N4 PSx
DIST:
Direction N7 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 136
012 137
012 138
012 139
303 579
DIST:
N6,fw
1
2
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST:
Direction N7 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
DIST:
Direction N6 PSx
[ * ]
012 132
012 133
012 134
012 135
303 577
DIST:
N5,fw
1
012 027
012 077
013 027
013 077
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
303 578
DIST:
N4,bw
DIST:
Direction N5 PSx
DIST:
Direction N6 PSx
303 575
DIST:
N4,fw
1
012 026
012 076
013 026
013 076
Parameter
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
DIST:
Direction N5 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 573
DIST:
N3,fw
DIST:
Direction N4 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
DIST:
Direction N3 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 634
DIST:
N1,bw, B
DIST:
N1,bw, C
DIST:
Direction N2 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 633
DIST:
N1,bw, A
DIST:
N7,fw
1
2
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
47Z0173A
Fig. 3-128: Directional settings.
3.21.5
Distance Protection Trip Signals

A trip signal is issued for each measuring loop in zones 1 to 6 if the following
criteria are satisfied simultaneously:
3-176
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
A distance decision exists for the zone.
The timer stage of this impedance zone has elapsed.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of this

impedance zone.
If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip
occurs in the zone having the highest number.
A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied
simultaneously:
Timer stage t7 has elapsed.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting for N7.
After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued.
Trip signals from all zones may be blocked individually by the power swing
blocking function (P SB: Blocki ng in iti ated, see Section 3.26, (p. 3-212))
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, A-G
303 637
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, B-G
303 638
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, C-G
303 639
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, A
303 649
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, B
303 650
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, C
303 651
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, A-B
303 640
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, B-C
303 641
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, C-A
303 642
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, A-G
303 643
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, B-G
303 644
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, C-G
303 645
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
303 652
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, B
303 653
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, C
303 654
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, A-B
303 646
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, B-C
303 647
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, C-A
303 648
47Z0183A
Fig. 3-129: Linking of loop-selective distance decisions for impedance zone 1.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-177
P437
PSB:
Block. sel. zone
3 Operation
304 862
DIST:
Blocking Z1 EXT
[ 036 034 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z1,ze EXT
[ 036 036 ]
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, A
303 649
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw, A
303 631
DIST:
N1,bw, A
303 634
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, B
S11
11
S21
21
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
S12
DIST:
N1,bw, B
303 632
12
22
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
S13
DIST:
N1,bw, C
303 633
DIST:
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
23
303 652
S31
303 657
DIST:
Trip zone 1
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
31
303 584
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S41
DIST:
13
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S23
303 636
303 656
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 651
DIST:
N1,fw, C
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S22
303 635
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, C
303 655
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
303 650
DIST:
N1,fw, B
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
41
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 653
S32
32
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 659
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S42
DIST:
42
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 654
S33
33
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S43
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
43
303 595
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
47Z8058A
Fig. 3-130: Distance protection trip signals in zone 1.
3-178
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
PSB:
Block. sel. zone
304 862
DIST:
Blocking Z2 EXT
[ 036 037 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z3 EXT
[ 036 039 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z4 EXT
[ 036 041 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z5 EXT
[ 036 044 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z6 EXT
[ 036 061 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z7 EXT
[ 036 067 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z8 EXT
[ 036 068 ]
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
S50
DIST:
N3,bw
50
R1x,3x,70,90,110,130,150,170
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST:
DIST:
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
DIST:
Trip zone 2
303 581
S60
60
R2x,4x,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 582
S70
70
R1x,3x,50,90,110,130,150,170
303 576
S80
303 575
R2x,4x,60,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
DIST:
303 583
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST:
N4,fw
S90
90
R1x,3x,50,70,110,130,150,170
S100
303 577
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5303 619
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,bw
DIST:
303 620
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
N7,fw
DIST:
N7,bw
303 615
S140
303 617
S160
150
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
160
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,180
S170
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
303 621
DIST:
Trip signal zone 6
[ 040 059 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 7
303 622
DIST:
Trip signal zone 7
[ 037 129 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 8
170
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,150
S180
303 588
DIST:
Trip signal zone 5
[ 040 058 ]
140
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,160,180
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,170
303 618
303 587
DIST:
Trip signal zone 4
[ 040 057 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 6
130
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,150,170
S150
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
120
R2x,4x,60,80,100,140,160,180
S130
DIST:
Trip zone 4
DIST:
Trip zone 5
110
R1x,3x,50,70,90,130,150,170
S120
303 579
100
R2x,4x,60,80,120,140,160,180
S110
303 586
DIST:
Trip signal zone 3
[ 040 056 ]
80
303 578
DIST:
N4,bw
303 585
DIST:
Trip signal zone 2
[ 041 084 ]
180
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,160
303 626
DIST:
Trip signal zone 8
[ 037 130 ]
DIST:
Trip sig. zone 2-8
[ 035 073 ]
303 623
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
303 624
303 625
47Z8059A
Fig. 3-131: Distance protection trip signals in zones 2 to 8.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-179
P437
3 Operation
t8
t8
t7
t7
t6
t6
t5
t5
t4
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1
t1 = 0 s
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z2
Z1
Z1
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
t8
t8
t7
t6, t7
t6
t5
t5
t4
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s
t1 = 0 s
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z6
Z5
Z4
Z3
Z2
t8
t8
t7
t6
t6
t5
t5
t4
t7
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s
t1 = 0 s
Z5
Z3
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z2
Z4
Z6
Z1
Z1
Z2
47Z0176A
Fig. 3-132: Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic.
For special applications (such as the application of the impedance dependent

blocking scheme see function group PSIG), the P437 generates the signal
DIS T: I mp ed ance in zon e 6, if the following conditions are satisfied
simultaneously:
3-180
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
A distance decision exists for zone 6.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of zone 6.
DIST:
Impedance in zone 6
[ 037 200 ]
DIST:
303 620
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
47Z0185A
Fig. 3-133: Signal D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6.
3.21.6
Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1

For zone 1(including the extended zone) the user can specify whether the
distance trip in zone 1 shall be single-pole or three-pole. This choice is separately
available both for single-pole ground faults (1pN) and two-phase ungrounded
faults (2p).
In the case of a two-phase ungrounded fault, the P437 checks if there is a ground
fault detection signal. If this is the case, there is a three-pole trip transfer. If
there is no ground fault detection signal and if a single-pole trip for a two-phase
ungrounded fault has been selected , then a trip decision is issued in the leading
or trailing phase, depending on the setting. This is based on the setting at
MAI N: Pha se se que nce. A three-pole trip can be forced via an appropriately
If the P437 carries out a single-pole trip when a two-phase ungrounded fault has
occurred, then a fault change is ignored for 100 ms if a trip decision is reached in
the phase, which has not been cleared. This takes differing fault clearing time
periods at both line ends into account that lead to a transient ground starting. If,
after a fault change, a trip decision is reached in the third phase, which was not
involved previously, then a three-pole transfer occurs instantaneously.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-181
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
PSIG:
Not
[ 037ready
028 ]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
303 623
305 167
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
303 624
305 168
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
303 658
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 625
303 656
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
S1 1
303 659
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
DIST:
Signal block start.G
R1
303 657
303 594
S1 1
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
R1
303 660
S1 1
R1
DIST:
General starting
[036 240 ]
1
100ms
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole leading phase
1
2
2: 1-pole trailing phas
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
MAIN:
[ 041 078 ]
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z1164A
Fig. 3-134: Selection of zone 1 trip mode.
3-182
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.22
Power Swing Blocking (Function Group PSB)

The power swing blocking (PSB) function offers these options should a power
swing occur in the power system:
The user can block distance trip signals in selected distance zones by
PSB: Fct . assi gn. block.. These zones may be selected for blocking: Zx
(x=1 to 8) and Z1,ze. This will prevent unwanted tripping by apparent low
impedances during a power swing.
Moreover, PSB: Fct. ass ign . bl ock. allows for blocking undervoltage
stages of function group V<>.
A trip signal can be generated so as to end a power swing, by initiation of

system splitting (or islanding).
Disabling or Enabling Power Swing Blocking

The power swing blocking function can be disabled or enabled individually in
each parameter subset via the setting parameter PSB: En able PSx.
When the monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit is triggered the PSB
function will be blocked.
PSB:
General enable USER
[ 014 050 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSB:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
PSB:
Enabled
[ 040 095 ]
0
1
0: No
PSB:
Ready
1: Yes
* Parameter
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
set
set
set
set
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
1
2
3
4
304 859
PSB:
Enable PSx
015
015
015
015
090
091
092
093
47Z11CBB
Fig. 3-135: Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.
3.22.1
Measurement
The P437 continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance. Because of
this measurement in the positive-sequence system, the protection is also
available during a single-pole HSR.
Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing starting
occurs only when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the
settable power swing polygon.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-183
P437
3 Operation
PSB:
R
[ 014 060 ]
PSB:
posX
[ 014 061 ]
PSB:
negX
[ 006 185 ]
PSB:
PSB:
Asyn. power swing
[ 014 062 ]
304 860
VA-G
VB-G
Vpos
VC-G
PSB:
Z within polygon
Zpos
IA
[ 036 024 ]
Ipos
IB
IC
45Z80CCA
Fig. 3-136: Measurement.
The diagram shows: Typical trajectory of a stable power swing; typical

trajectory of an instable power swing.
PSB:
posX
Zpos(t)
PSB:
PSB:
R
PSB:
negX
47Z13CFA
Fig. 3-137: Trajectory of the positive-sequence impedance during a power swing.
3.22.2
Power Swing Detection

Power swing detection is based on impedance variation (Delta Z).
The rate of change of the resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
Rpos, when entering the power swing polygon, is measured and interpreted. The
function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller than the
set threshold Rx/T and subsequently blocks all selected zones.
The threshold Rx has a fixed value:
Rx = 5 for Inom = 1 A
Rx = 1 for Inom = 5 A.
Timer stage T can be set at P SB: Ope r. valu e Delta T.

3-184
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions
is met:
The positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon.
The expected maximum power swing duration (PSB: Max. PS cycle

dur.) has elapsed.
One of the PSB current stages has started.
Furthermore, several timer stages are triggered by a power swing decision,

which lead to a blocking signal (P SB: Bl ocked). This blocking signals resets the
blocking of the distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been selected
via PSB: Fct. assign. block.. (All other PSB functionality is not affected by
PSB: Blocked.) The details are described in the following section.
MiCOM P437 operates task oriented. The PSB task is processed approximately
every 15 ms. The internal Rx threshold value will be adapted according to the
measured actual time delay between 2 consecutive measurements. With each
processing step, the impedance Zpos is determined and stored. Thus Rpos is
calculated from 2 consecutive processing steps:
Rpos = Rpos(n) - Rpos(n-1),
Where:
Rmit(n): the first measurement inside the power swing detection

polygon
Rmit(n-1): the previous measurement outside the power swing

detection polygon
R stab. = [ 014 060 ]PSB:

R
= [ 014 061 ]PSB:

posX
= [ 006 185 ]PSB:

negX
= [ 014 090 ]PSB:

Oper. value Delta T
= [ 014 062 ]PSB:
Zpos(t)
PSP:
Rx
T
R stab.
47Z1352A
Fig. 3-138: Power swing detection zone.
3.22.3
Load Blinding
In the case of parallel lines (i.e. double-circuit lines) with a high rate of power
transmission to neighboring networks the failure of one three-phase system may
lead to a short-time (typically 20 to 30 minutes) increase in the power flow rate
on the remaining line. Here the positive-sequence impedance locus will then lie
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-185
P437
3 Operation
within the load blinding area of the distance protection starting characteristic.
This is displayed in the figure below, with the following fault sequence:
1.
Operation under load conditions (blue area, 2 operational systems).
2.
Fault on the parallel line will lead to a selective disconnection of this

parallel line.
3.
Operation under overload conditions on the remaining system (red area,

1 faulted system).
4.
Start of a power swing due to instable network conditions.
150
Power swing polygon

Starting characteristic
100
50
50
50
100
50
Load area
Load area
1 faulted system
2 operational systems
47Z2000A
Fig. 3-139: Impedance trajectory with a fault in one three-phase system.
It is therefore not possible to selectively set the power swing polygon where:
3-186
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The setting for the resistance reach Rfwd of the starting polygon is such that
the impedance locus could possibly not leave the power swing polygon
after the initial short-circuit fault has been cleared, and therefore power
swing blocking cannot be enabled when a power swing occurs.
It is also possible that because of load variations the impedance locus will
leave the power swing polygon for a short-time and then return, which
could cause power swing blocking to be enabled erroneously (resulting in a
protection malfunction if a chance short-circuit fault should then occur).
The setting for the starting impedance in the load area Zfwd (minimum load
impedance) is such that power swing blocking may occur too late if a power
swing has started in the normal blue area and then crosses the starting
characteristic in the power swing polygon area (above the angle ).
To cope with this problem a load blinding feature is now available for the power
swing polygon:
The time for a measurement sample to be taken to determine the speed of
resistance change may be set at P SB: A ctivation con d. dZ (with two
selection options Power Swing polygon and PS-polygon + 3pStart):
With the Power Swing polygon setting (entry into the power swing polygon),
the function will operate as before, i.e. when the positive-sequence impedance
locus enters the power swing polygon, the speed of change of the positivesequence impedances real component is measured and evaluated.
With the PS-polygon + 3pStart setting (power swing polygon + 3-phase start),
the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedances real component is
measured under these conditions only:
[The updated positive-sequence impedance locus determined lies within the
power swing polygon]
AND([A 3-phase - without ground - start has occurred]
OR([A 2-phase - without ground - start has occurred]
AND["The negative-sequence current value is sufficiently
small"]))
The result is that the state positive-sequence impedance locus in the power
swing polygon will now also be a simple enabling condition for the Z method.
In this case whether the positive-sequence impedance is now being measured for
the first time within the power swing polygon or it was already there during a
previous measurement is irrelevant.
Crucial for a measurement decision is the onset of the (distance) general start.
In theory, a 3-phase start (without ground) is to be expected, as power swing
occurrences are symmetrical (i.e. the same measurement conditions are to be
found in all 3 phases).The result is that with the onset of a phase-ground start
there will be no power swing occurence (i.e. when with the onset of a start there
is also a phase-ground start or it is already present, then the blocking effect can
no longer be set).
In practice all currents and voltages will be unbalanced (mainly because of
unbalanced lines, but asymmetrical loads and infeeds, as well as measurement
errors by transformers and even by the protection device itself are also to be
considered) so that possibly one of the three phase-phase starting systems will
trigger first. Therefore, with a high R1 reach for zone 1, the 2-phase start may
have already led to a trip command during a power swing event, even before a
3-phase start has activated power swing blocking. Therefore, in order to also
have control of this state, the power swing blocking function carries out the R
measurement at the onset of the 2-phase start, but only if currents are
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-187
P437
3 Operation
adequately balanced. To ensure this, the negative-sequence current is measured

continuously. With the onset of the first 2-phase start, caused by a power swing
event, the Ineg value must not be significant, i.e. in this case:
Ineg < 0.1Inom + 0.2IP,max
On the other hand, the device will make a (2-phase) short-circuit decision when
the negative-sequence current value exceeds this value.
In order for power swing blocking to become effective in time with such a
selection of sampling times, it will be implemented after the distance protection
start and before the distance zone detection.
This is the preferred approach when looking at a parallel undervoltage start. The
reach of the undervoltage start is basically not definable in the impedance plane
and can therefore not be covered safely by a purely impedance-defined power
swing polygon. Since it is now possible to select the sampling times of power
swing events, the first occurence of the undervoltage condition can be
ascertained in time if the power swing polygon is set to a sufficient size.
Overlapping of the power swing polygon with the area of minimum load
impedance is permitted.
According to the basic Z principle, the decision is taken only once (in this case
with the onset of above mentioned starting conditions). If a power swing event is
detected, power swing blocking is set and stored until the reset condition is met.
The power swing blocking is adapted (extended) when this new acquisition
method is used. The blocking effect is lifted if one of the following conditions is
met:
3.22.4
The general start is terminated (only with the setting PS-polygon +

3pStart), or (as before)
the positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon, or
(at least) one current trigger (IP>, Ineg>, IN>) is triggered, or
the maximum blocking time has been reached.
Behavior with a Short-Circuit Fault During a Power Swing Event

A short-circuit fault condition may occur during a power swing event. With the Z
operating mode, blocking is lifted because one current trigger (IP>, Ineg>, IN>)
has operated. Until now this would occur instantaneously. As distance
measurement was already active during the blocking the following problems
could be encountered:
1.
The zone-time grading measurement is already running (since the general

start or since the zone entry because of the power swing event). For
example a short-circuit fault has occurred in backup zones: this will then
lead to an instantaneous triggering when power swing blocking is lifted
(which is an overreaction).
2.
When a general starting is present for a length of time the measurement

window of the distance measurement is shifted backwards in time so as to
prevent incorrect decisions at fault clearance (tripping by an upstream
protection device).
If no change in starting occurs when power swing blocking is lifted, (i.e. a
3pole fault is detected) then distance measurement operates, for the
time being, with the previous measured values from the power swing area
which were collected before the short-circuit fault had occurred. Therefore
distance and zone decisions are of no use.
With protection systems where phase-differential protection is applied along with

distance protection, the overreaction as given under item 1. can be avoided if,
after the current short-circuit trigger has operated, blocking of distance
3-188
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
protection is lifted with a short release delay (100 ms), which will then give
preference to the selective differential protection.
Such a short release delay is of no use with protection systems where two
distance protection devices are used.
For this a new release delay for blocking is available. It is set at PSB: Abort
d elay (in the range from 0.00 s to 1.00 s with the default value = 0.00 s). This
release delay will become active when blocking is lifted because a current trigger
has operated (IP>, Ineg>, IN>). For technical reasons this release delay will also
be activated when the maximum blocking time has elapsed so that, including
this release delay, the set maximum blocking time may be exceeded.
3.22.5
PSB Blocking
The blocking of the distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been
selected via PSB: F ct. as s ign. bl ock.PSB: Fct. assign. block. is reset as soon
as the signal PSB: Blocked is issued.
The following signal flow diagram shows how this PSB blocking signal is set up.
A
B
C
PS condition
[008 234] PSB:
Abort delay
PS condition
reset
PSB:
Blocking initiated
[036 032]
set
reset
set
(re)trig.
reset
set
reset
set
(re)trig.
(re)trig.
(re)trig.
PSB:
Hold time running
[011 142] PSB:
Hold time
[011 142] PSB:

Hold time
(B or C)
D
E
F
trigger
trigger
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
PSB:
Blocked
[011 144]
[010 179] PSB:

Max. blocking time
trigger
[010 179] PSB:

Max. blocking time
[011 143] PSB:

Blocking time int.
45Z8009
Fig. 3-140: Signal flow diagram for P S B : B l o c k e d.
The signal flow diagram is based on the assumption that PSB is enabled and not
blocked by an external input signal (i.e. by P SB: Blockin g E XT = Yes).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-189
P437
3 Operation
A: The first line in the signal flow diagram represents the basic relevant
measuring and logic condition that is used to establish the power swing
blocking condition (i.e. Zpos is within the power swing polygon, the PSB
activation condition was fulfilled, and no unblocking condition is present, or
abort delay P SB: Abor t de lay).
B: If PSB is not blocked, the signal P SB: Blocking initiated is issued.

This signal is the condition used to block the selected DIST zones and V<
stages.
C: When the signal P SB: Blocki ng in iti ate d falls back to No, a settable
hold timer is triggered or retriggered. It does not matter, whether the reset
of power swing blocking was caused because Zpos has left the power swing
polygon, or because of any unblocking condition (current triggers or
PS B: Max. PS cycl e du r. elapsed).
D: Signal D is the result of a logical OR operation: B or C.
E: The raising edge of the signal D (i.e. the beginning of a measured power
swing condition) triggers a timer. If this timer reaches the set PSB: Max.
bl ocki ng ti me a further pulse timer (=signal F) is triggered, which is
running for the set time PSB: Bl ocking ti me int..
F: While this pulse timer is elapsing (i.e. during the time interval
PSB: Blocking ti me int.) the signal PSB: Blocked Is issued. It is also
issued along with external blocking of PSB (P SB: Blocking EXT) or with
internal blocking initiated from current trigger operation (PSB: IP >
t riggere d, P SB: In eg> tri gge re d, P SB: IN> trigge red). The blocking
of the distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been selected via
PSB: F ct. assign. bl ock. is reset as soon as this signal (PSB: Block ed)
is issued.
[036 032]
PSB:
Blocking initiated
= Yes
PSB:
Blocking EXT
not active
PSB:
Blocked
ext.
[008 248]
PSB:
Blocking
EXT
=
Yes
PSB:
Blocking EXT
active
(per 012 017 selected

DIST zones and V<> stages
are blocked.)
Normal
[040 095]
PSB:
Enabled
= Yes
Activation condition fulfilled

(basically:
[036 024]
PSB:
Z within polygon = Yes)
Block. time
elapsed
PSB:
Blocking time int.
PSB:
Blocking initiated
De-activation condition fulfilled

(basically [036 024] = No)
Short-circuit condition present (I>, Ineg>, IN> triggered)
max. PS cycle duration elapsed (Tmax elapsed)
PSB:
Hold time
elapsed
[011 144]
PSB:
Blocked
PSB:
Abort delay
running
PSB:
Hold time running
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
Fig. 3-141: PSB state diagram.
3-190
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.22.6
Out-of-Step Tripping
A power swing starting may become necessary when a power swing with low
damping has to be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such
a procedure the device has three independent methods available:
1st criterion for a safe system split at an instable power swing.

The positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon on the
opposite side (see impedance trajectory in Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-184)).
The sign for the positive-sequence impedances resistive component is
stored when the measured positive-sequence impedance locus enters the
power swing polygon. This stored sign is compared with the sign when
crossing the R(OOS) boundary (description of R(OOS) below). Should the
signs differ, a trip signal is issued immediately.
When this criterion is applied an instable power swing will be determined,
regardless of swing frequencies.
2nd criterion Enhanced counting-based tripping.

Detailed description follows below.
The trip signal of the 1st criterion is issued as PSB: Trip sign al.
The counting-based trip signals per 2nd criterion are available as individual
signals, described below. They are not linked into this PSB: Trip s ignal, but
could be individually linked into the general trip commands.
3.22.7
Enhanced Counting-Based Trip Logic

The basic considerations could be discussed on a simple (simplified) 2-machine
power system as shown in Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-191). Sources A and B represent
power system equivalents, impedance A-B represents (positive sequence) line
impedance. The distance protection to be discussed is located on the line at end
A.
Source A
Line AB
AS
Source B
BS
DIST
Fig. 3-142: Power system equivalent circuit.
Based on this equivalent circuit, the impedance plot per Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-192)
could be drawn. The origin of the complex plane is put at the location of the
distance protection device, that is at system bus A.
For this simplified description any apparent impedance Z measured from the
distance protection during a steady-state out-of-step condition moves along
circles with its origin in either AS or BS source, depending on the ratio of the
absolute values of the 2 source voltages. The rotation sense further depends on
which source is leading.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-191
P437
3 Operation
This description of power swings is rather simplified but sufficient to describe the
functionality as implemented in the P437.
BS
B
Z
AS
47Z1351A
Fig. 3-143: Power system equivalent impedances.
The basic power swing detection zone of P437 is of quadrilateral shape. While
resistive reach in forward and backward direction is equal, the reactive reaches
can be set independently to provide coverage adjustable to the power system
impedances (essentially to cover differences in reverse source impedance and
forward line plus remote source impedances).
Power swing detection is done by measuring the rate of change of the resistance
(real part) of the positive sequence impedance. A power swing is detected, if a
resistance change of Rx = 5 (at Inom = 1 A) takes more time than a settable
timer T (see Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-185)).
Inside the power swing detection zone, 2 more lines are defined by a settable
resistance PSB: R (OOS) to determine an out-of-step condition. Thus this
decision could be taken before leaving the power swing detection zone.
3-192
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The relay checks that settings are valid:
The resistive lines have to be inside the power swing detection zone:
Rinst.P. Rstab.P
Otherwise the internal R(OOS) variable is limited to the R(PSB) value as per
Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-194) (left-hand part).
The resistive lines must not cross the X-axis.
Otherwise the lines are limited to the X-axis as per Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-194)
(right-hand part).
3.22.7.1
Counters
An out-of-step condition is determined if the apparent positive-sequence
impedance moves along its trajectory from the right side into the power swing
detection zone and then crosses the left side OOS detection line (trajectory in
Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-194) below), or vice versa (trajectory ). In both cases the outof-step counter nOOS is incremented by 1.
If the apparent positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing detection
zone on the same side as it entered, a stable power swing is determined (e.g.
trajectory ). In this case the power swing counter nPSB is incremented by 1.
By this definition, the counter values are only available during a power swing or
out-of-step condition, respectively. As it is desirable to have the counter values
available for post-mortem analysis, the values are stored as event counters, too.
The following counters are implemented to count unstable and stable swings as
described above:
3.22.7.2
ninst.P.: PS B: No. OOS-Swi ng
nstab.P.: PS B: No. stab. P Sw ing
Counter Reset
During a power swing a dedicated timer stage is triggered upon each
incrementing the counter. If this timer elapses while no further incrementing of
the same counter takes place, then it is assumed that the power swing condition
has stopped and this counter is reset to 0.
For this timer stage the setting PSB: Max. P S cycle dur. is used, which is
recommended to be set to the anticipated maximum power swing cycle time.
The counters are reset automatically with the detection of a new power swing. A
manual reset of the counters, however, can also be done by setting the
parameter PSB: R e se t cou nters to execute.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-193
P437
3 Operation
R stab. = [ 014 060 ]PSB:

R
R instab. = [ 006 184 ]PSB:
R (OOS)
n instab. = [ 006 026 ]PSB:
No. OOS-Swing
n stab. = [ 006 025 ]PSB:
No. stab. PSwing
BS
n instab.+1
n instab.+1
n stab.+1
Rinstab.
R
+Rinstab.
+Rstab.
AS
47Z1353A
Fig. 3-144: Out-of-step detection and counter incrementing conditions.
Left: Limiting at Rstab, if Rinst > Rstab; right: Limiting X-axis.

R instab. = [ 006 184 PSB:
]
R (OOS)
R stab. = [ 014 060 PSB:
]
R
BS
BS
Rinstab.
Rinstab.
R
+Rinstab.
AS
+Rinstab.
AS
47Z1354A
Fig. 3-145: Automatic limiting for the position of the resistive lines.
3-194
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.22.7.3
Counter Comparators
Out-of-step tripping is raised, if the number of counted out-of-step swings nOOS
reaches a settable limit.
In order to take into account the electrical center of the oscillation, the
impedance area between the OOS detection lines inside the power swing
detection zone is split into 3 areas, divided by 2 settable reactances as per
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-196). The reactances are set at:
P SB : posX (O OS)
P SB: ne gX (OOS)
The inner main area is used to identify swings with electrical center on the line.
The back-up area is the remaining part of this corridor. Typically the back-up
area counter is set to a higher number of swings to provide only back-up tripping
(system splitting) in case the protection system closest to the electrical center of
the oscillation failed to operate.
As the OOS counter is incremented when the positive-sequence impedance
trajectory crosses the resistive detection lines, the decision which counter limit to
compare with is practically linked to the section on this resistive detection line
rather than the area the impedance moved through.
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-196) shows 2 cases:
OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,a.
OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,b .
In the same way, an additional power swing tripping is raised if the number of
counted power swings nPSB reaches a settable limit nPSB,trp (case ). This feature
may be used as back-up protection, if stable swings persist for too many power
swing cycles.
These counter thresholds are also known as permissible number of unstable or
stable power swings, respectively.
3.22.7.4
ninst,zul,a is set at P SB: Per m. N o. OOS ( a).
ninst,zul,b is set at P SB : Pe rm. No. OOS ( b).
nstab,zul is set at P SB: P e rm . No. stab. P S.
Counting Based Trip Signals

The following individual tripping signals are issued:
P SB: Tri p sign al OOS ( a)
PSB: Trip signal OOS ( b)
PS B: Trip signal stab. PS
These binary signals remain active for a pulse duration of 100 ms.
All out-of-step and power swing trip signals are available in the selection list of
the general trip commands of the relay.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-195
P437
3 Operation
X instab,= [ 014 060 ]PSB:

R
X instab,= [ 006 184 ]PSB:
R (OOS)
n instab,a = [ 006 028 ]PSB:
Perm. No. OOS (a)
n instab,b = [ 006 189 ]PSB:
Perm. No. OOS (b)
n stab
= [ 006 027 ]PSB:
Perm. No. stab. PS
X instab,
BS
n instab,b
n instab,a
n stab
X instab,
n instab,b
AS
47Z1355A
Fig. 3-146: Out-of-step tripping conditions.
3-196
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.23
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)

The P437 monitors the phase currents and the voltages for balance during
healthy system operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is
detected, action is taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
Monitoring the Starting Conditions

If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the
following monitoring signal is issued: MCMON: Zero-sequ . st artin g
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
10s
MCMON:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 041 080 ]
DIST:
Starting G
SFMON:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 098 015 ]
303 507
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
300ms
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip V
[ 098 000 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
SFMON:
[ 098 017 ]
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 041 079 ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ]
MCMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 040 078 ]
MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 038 100 ]
SFMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 098 023 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
300ms
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]
MCMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
[ 037 020 ]
SFMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
[ 098 016 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
GFSC:
Monitor. triggered
[ 038 095 ]
MCMON:
Peripheral fault
[ 038 024 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
SFMON:
Peripheral fault
[ 098 018 ]
47Z1145B
Fig. 3-147: Monitoring signals.
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the

event of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
3.23.1
Current Monitoring
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current
exceeds the settable value MC MO N: Imi n cu rr. monit or. in at least one
phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute value of the negative-sequence
component of the current system is determined in accordance with the definition
of the symmetrical components. This is based on the setting at MAI N: Phase
seque nce.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-197
P437
3 Operation
Phase sequence A-B-C
(Alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field)

1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

Phase sequence A-C-B
(Alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field)
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
This value is divided by the maximum phase current |Imax| and compared with
the set threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a
monitoring signal is issued once the operate delay + 300 ms have elapsed.
MCMON:
General enable USER
[ 014 001 ]
0
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MCMON:
Current monitoring
[ 014 006 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
Imin curr. monitor.
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
[ 010 183 ]
IA
IB
IC
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
|Ineg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ]
MCMON:
Ineg>
[ 014 002 ]
|Ineg|/|Imax|
Imax
+ 300 ms
SFMON:
[ 098 005 ]
MCMON:
[ 040 087 ]
45Z8022A
Fig. 3-148: Monitoring the current-measuring circuits.
3.23.2
Voltage Monitoring
The voltages used by distance protection as measured values are monitored for
plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function.
3-198
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Monitoring of voltage-measuring circuits is based on the following criteria:
Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the
default threshold of 0.4Vnom. This monitoring function is enabled when the
current exceeds MCMON: Imin Vn eg monit oring in one phase.
The negative-sequence component of phase-to-ground voltages is

monitored in accordance with the definition of symmetrical components.
Monitoring is enabled when a phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the default
threshold of 0.7Vnom / 3.
In addition to these conditions, either a minimum current having the default

threshold setting of I>0.05Inom or the closed position of the circuit breaker
contacts can be used as enabling criteria. If there is an enable, the absolute
value of the negative-sequence component of the voltage system is determined
in accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. This is based on
the MAIN : Ph ase s e que nce setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotating
field)
Negative-sequence voltage
V
neg
1
3
| (V
A-G
+ a2 V
+ aV
B-G
)|
C-G
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating

field)
V
neg
1
3
| (V
A-G
+ aV
B-G
+ a2 V
)|
C-G
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2Vnom / 3. If
the threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the
operate delay has elapsed.
If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance
protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time
protection provided the appropriate setting has been selected.
In addition, the MC MON: Me as . voltage o.k. monitoring signal is issued if all
phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65Vnom and negativesequence monitoring has not operated.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-199
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
0.7Vnom/3
VA-G
VB-G
>0.2Vnom/3
C
VC-G
|Vneg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ]
SFMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 098 014 ]
0
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 041 079 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
S11
SFMON:
Undervoltage
[ 098 009 ]
R1
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MCMON:
Op. mode volt. mon.
MCMON:
Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 038 049 ]
[ 014 007 ]
SFMON:
Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
1
2
3
1: Vneg
2: Vneg with curr. enab
3: Vneg w.CB cont.enab.
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MCMON:
Imin Vneg monitoring
[ 010 184 ]
IA
IB
IC
<0.4Vnom
C
>0.65Vnom
C
0
5s
MCMON:
Meas. voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
45Z8041B
Fig. 3-149: Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit.
3.23.3
Phase-Sequence Monitoring
Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled only if the following conditions are
simultaneously met:
3-200
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled.
Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled.
All three phase-to-ground voltages exceed 0.4Vnom.
No general starting signal is present.
In order to suppress short-term transients, the phase-sequence monitoring

trigger is followed by a set time-delay of 1 s. Once the time-delay has elapsed,
the signal MC MON: Phase s e qu. V faulty is issued.
3.23.4
Fuse Failure Monitoring of Phase-to-Ground Voltages

In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the
P437 also provides for fuse failure monitoring. This function is used in particular
when there is no voltage transformer m.c.b. auxiliary contact. If fuse failure
monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
The fuse failure monitoring function must distinguish between a short circuit in
the three-phase current system and a lack of measuring voltage due to a short
circuit or open circuit (broken wire) in the secondary circuit of the voltage
transformer.
A short circuit exists in the three-phase current system being monitored, if one of
the following conditions is satisfied:
Distance protection has started. (This signal has a time delayed reset of
30 ms so as to avoid startings by transients that may occur at the end of a
short circuit.)
Major current variations occur:
The current increases by more than +5% in at least one phase.

The current decreases by more than 10% in at least two phases.
The current increases by more than +5% in the positive-sequence
current system.
The P437 uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or threephase faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A single- or two-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the

voltage transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
The phase currents exceed the distance protection's I> thresholds either
in none or in all of the three phases (= symmetrical load condition).
A current increase I/t > 10% occurs during 3 cycles (= 3T) in not
exactly one phase.
The negative-sequence current does not exceed an internal threshold.
The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded an internal threshold.
A three-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage

transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the distance protection's I>
threshold.
The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below an internal threshold.
The positive-sequence current may only vary less than 10% or +5%
within 3 cycles after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below this
threshold.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-201
P437
3 Operation
Fuse failure monitoring for 3-phase faults in the measuring circuit is only active
within a 50 ms time window after a positive sequence undervoltage condition is
detected.
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set. The settable operate delay
timer should remain at 0 s to ensure that fuse failure monitoring is able to
prevent false pick up of distance protection.
The memory is reset when the positive-sequence voltage exceeds the fixed
threshold of 0.5Vnom and the negative-sequence voltage falls below an internal
threshold.
If the buffer memory has been set the P437 decides that the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer is faulty if the following conditions are met:
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the I> threshold, or:
The set threshold of the negative-sequence voltage has been exceeded and
three cycles previously at least one phase-to-ground voltage had been
above 50% Vnom/3.
In this case distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup
overcurrent time protection provided that the appropriate setting has been
selected.
3-202
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg.
>1 &
>1
303 598
303 599
>1
DIST:
IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ]
DIST:
IB>(Ibl) trigg.
30ms
1 1
SFMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 098 021 ]
>1
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
IA(t) < 0.9IA(t-3T)
>2
&
IB(t) < 0.9IB(t-3T)
MCMON:
Blocking FF, V EXT
[ 002 182 ]
>1
IC(t) < 0.9IC(t-3T)
IA(t) > 1.05IA(t-3T)
>1
IB(t) > 1.05IB(t-3T)
&
&
IC(t) > 1.05IC(t-3T)

IA
IA(t) < 1.1IA(t-3T)
IB
IB(t) < 1.1IB(t-3T)
IC
IC(t) < 1.1IC(t-3T)
=1
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
Ipos(t) > 0.9Ipos(t-3T)
Ipos
& >1
Ipos(t) < Ipos(t-3T)

Ipos(t) > 1,05Ipos(t-3T)
&
&
Ineg
1
50 ms
VA-G
&
VB-G
Vneg
VC-G
&
VA-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3 >1
VB-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3
VC-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3
Vpos
|Vpos| > 0.5 Vnom
45Z8025A
Fig. 3-150: Fuse failure monitoring (after setting M C M O N : F F , V e n a b l e d U S E R = Yes).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-203
P437
3.23.4.1
3 Operation
Extend Fuse Failure Blocking Condition

Fuse failure determination is prohibited under the following conditions, to avoid
false operation due to voltage transients during de-energized line conditions:
The dead time of the internal auto-reclosing control (ARC) is running.
At least one CB pole is open i.e. MA IN: CB open >=1 p is set to Yes.
This blocking prevents false operation based on discharge-transients of line
reactors, or if the line is energized from the remote end while the fault is
still present. The device at the open CB end then may determine a fuse
failure condition due to a sudden asymmetric change of voltage with no
current. This operation of fuse failure monitoring is basically non-critical (as
the local CB is still open), but jeopardizes faster fault clearance at the
remote end, aided by protection signaling, because PSIG/Echo logic is also
blocked, if MCMON determines a voltage measuring circuit failure.
A fuse failure blocking input signal is activated (MCMON: Blocking FF, V

E XT).
This signal is implemented to establish further flexible blocking conditions, e.g.

through the LOGIC function.
3-204
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.23.5
Fuse Failure Monitoring of the Reference Voltage

The P437 includes Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage function,
which is required by the Automatic Synchronism Check (ASC).
Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC
function has been configured. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary
contact is available on the voltage transformer m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is
not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in
the three-phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing
because of a short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the
reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference
voltage is present when the following conditions are met:
The circuit breaker is closed.
The voltage difference between the line side and the busbar must exceed
0.1Vnom.
MCMON:
FF,Vref enabled USER
[ 014 013 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Vref
|Vref|-|VMeas|
ASC:
Vmeas
0.1 Vnom
305 007
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
MCMON:
Oper. delay FF, Vref
[ 014 012 ]
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 038 100 ]
036 051
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
SFMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 098 022 ]
47Z0178B
Fig. 3-151: Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-205
P437
3.24
3 Operation
Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection (Function Group BUOC)

If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked,
since accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrenttime protection (BUOC) is then automatically activated if set accordingly.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) is enabled if there is a fault in the
voltage-measuring circuit. It monitors the phase currents for overcurrents
exceeding the set values I>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage
tI> is started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If
inrush stabilization is triggered, BUOC protection is blocked (if included in the
selection, see Section 3.12.5.1, (p. 3-90)).
If the Low impedance-grounding setting has been selected for the neutral point
treatment, ground current IN is also monitored by the settable trigger IN>, in
addition to the phase currents. If the ground current exceeds the set value, timer
stage tIN> is started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
Inrush stabilization blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection (if included in
the selection, see Section 3.12.5.1, (p. 3-90)).
The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection
function will trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer
stages tI> and tIN> will be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase
starting, the trip signal will then be issued instantaneously; with ground starting,
it will be issued after an 80 ms delay. Timer stage tIN> (or fixed 80 ms starting
time in case of ARC) is also blocked by phase starting.
If auto-reclosure is not required or if auto-reclosure with three-pole HSR is
required, then the trip signal is always three-pole.
3-206
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC:
General enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
SFMON:
BUOC not active
[ 098 002 ]
0
1
0: No
BUOC:
Enabled
1: Yes
[ 040 093 ]
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
BUOC:
Operating mode
[ 014 000 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1
2
SFMON:
BUOC active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
1: Without ARC
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
BUOC:
Active
3: With ARC, 1/3p. HSR
[ 037 021 ]
MAIN:
[ 041 078 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC:
tI> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
BUOC:
Trip A
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
304 754
[ 041 029 ]
BUOC:
Trip B
304 755
BUOC:
Trip C
BUOC:
I> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
304 756
BUOC:
IA> triggered
306 001
304 750
IA
BUOC:
IB> triggered
IB
304 751
IC
BUOC:
IC> triggered
304 752
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
BUOC:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC:
IN> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
80ms
0
BUOC:
Starting
BUOC:
Block. Starting
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC:
SN
450 206
BUOC:
Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
304 757
BUOC:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 010 185 ]
450 207
Parameter
BUOC:
I> PSx
BUOC:
tI> PSx
BUOC:
IN> PSx
BUOC:
tIN> PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
058
078
098
018
059
079
099
019
064
084
004
024
065
085
005
025
45Z8024B
Fig. 3-152: Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-207
P437
3.25
3 Operation
Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)

When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an
existing fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were
inadvertently left connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance
protection function would not clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had elapsed. In
this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is desired.
To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be
applied not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P437. The MAIN: Manual
close E XT signal must be configured separately to a binary signal input (and
triggered during the closing action) even if the close command is issued via the
P437. The manual close signal is converted to an internal pulse, of settable
duration. The pulse time can be set. The user may specify whether the following
shall occur during operation of this timer stage:
The occurrence of a general start shall cause a trip

(SOTF: Trip signa l).
A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur

(SOTF : Z 1 ext e nde d).
Moreover, the overcurrent protection of SOTF features an additional phase

overcurrent element. This allows full, current based SOTF protection even during
a voltage measuring failure. The featured settings are SOTF: I> PSx for the
current threshold and SOTF: tI > P Sx for the timer stage. The signal
SOTF: St art in g I > is set to Yes in case of an overcurrent situation.
Switch on to fault protection can be blocked by external auto-reclosing control
(ARC), provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly. An
internal blocking signal is generated together with the trigger signal for the timer
stage. This internal blocking signal will prevent that ARC is activated during an
existing fault when a manual close signal is issued.
Moreover, an external trigger SOTF : Tri gge r EXT may now be applied as an
alternative to the external trigger MAI N: Man ual close EXT. In some
applications, SOTF triggering is required when line energizing is initiated from an
external A/R device. This is how the P437 provides the feature Zone extension
during reclosure. Although this functionality can be achieved by using the
existing binary input MAIN: Manu al clos e EXT, the use of this signal might be
confusing.
An additional option SOTF: Activati on m ode P Sx can be set to either Trigger
(which is the situation described above) or to Line Dead State. With the latter
setting, SOTF becomes permanently active during dead line condition, so that no
external trigger is necessary.
3-208
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
SOTF:
Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF:
Evaluation IN PSx
[*]
SOTF:
tIN> PSx
[*]
0
SOTF:
tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
2
1: Calculated
2: Measured
SOTF:
IN> (meas.) PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Starting IN>
[ 001 187 ]
&
IN(meas.)
SOTF:
tI> PSx
SOTF:
IN> (calc.) PSx
[*]
[*]
IN(calc.)
SOTF:
tI> elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF:
I> PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Starting I>
[ 006 128 ]
&
IA
IB
IC
Parameter
SOTF:
Evaluation IN PSx
SOTF:
IN> (meas.) PSx
SOTF:
IN> (calc.) PSx
SOTF:
I> PSx
SOTF:
tIN> PSx
SOTF:
tI> PSx
set 1
set 2
001 191
001 192
001 189
001 195
001 190
001 198
001 177
001 178
set 3
set 4
001 193
001 194
001 196
001 197
001 199
001 202
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
130
131
132
133
001 179
001 180
134
135
136
137
47Z1306A
Fig. 3-153: Switch on to fault protection function, overcurrent stage in the residual current system.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-209
P437
3 Operation
SOTF:
General enable USER
[*]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Enable PSx
Parameter
SOTF:
Enable PSx
SOTF:
Man. close timer PSx
SOTF:
Operating mode PSx
SOTF:
Activation mode PSx
set
set
set
set
001
001
001
001
011
001
001
001
011
001
001
001
006
006
006
006
1
2
3
4
203
204
205
206
Parameter
SOTF:
Tripping time PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
1
2
3
4
060
181
182
183
061
184
185
186
**
218
219
221
222
142
143
144
145
PSU:
PS y active
1
2
3
4
036
036
036
036
090
091
092
093
[*]
SOTF:
Enabled
[ 040 069 ]
&
1
0: No
PSU:
PS y active
[**]
1: Yes
SOTF:
tI> elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF:
Trip signal
[ 036 064 ]
SOTF:
tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
&
&
SOTF:
Par. ARC running EXT
[ 039 063 ]
SOTF:
Man. close timer PSx
[*]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
306 001
SOTF:
Line dead trig. en.
&
310 006
MAIN:
Manual close EXT
[ 036 047 ]
SOTF:
Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF:
tManual-close runn.
[ 036 063 ]
&
SOTF:
Trigger EXT
[ 002 127 ]
SOTF:
ARC blocked
ARC:
Close command
305 650
303 021
SOTF:
Activation mode PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Operating mode PSx
[*]
1
2
&
1: Trigger
4: Trip with starting
2: Line Dead State
5: Trip with overreach
SOTF:
Line dead
[ 006 147 ]
SOTF:
Tripping time PSx
[*]
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
SOTF:
Trip time elapsed
460 528
45Z8040A
Fig. 3-154: Switch on to Fault Protection.
3.25.1
Decision Line dead

The setting SO TF : W ith V< en abl e P Sx allows the function SOTF to be
enabled only when the phase voltage is low. If this is set to Yes, then a settable
timer stage will have to elapse before an undervoltage condition will lead to the
decision 'Line dead'. This will prevent timing problems between the line
energizing control function and triggering of the SOTF function.
On the other hand, in few cases CT failures occurred from picking up load
current. For such cases it is not desirable to inhibit SOTF, even if the line is
already energized. To take care for this condition, too, the dead line inhibit logic
can be disabled by setting SOTF: With V < e nable PSx to No.
3-210
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Moreover, the decision Line dead is set only if also all 3 phase currents are
below an undercurrent threshold. This threshold is fixed to 0.05Inom.
A settable timer SO TF : Oper ate de lay PSx makes the SOTF function active (in
permanent modes) or triggered (in trigger modes) only after the conditions for
Line dead are present for a sufficiently long time. This time delay should be set
longer than the slowest delayed auto-reclose dead time, but shorter than the
time in which the system operator might re-energize a circuit once it had
opened/tripped. 110 seconds is the default setting.
SOTF:
With V< enable PSx
[*]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Operate delay PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Release delay PSx
[*]
V < 0.7 Vnom/3
t
&
VA-G
SOTF:
Line dead trig. en.
310 006
&
&
VB-G
VC-G
SOTF:
Line dead
[ 006 147 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
I < 0.05 Inom
IA
IB
IC
&
Parameter
SOTF:
With V< enable PSx
SOTF:
Operate delay PSx
SOTF:
Release delay PSx
set
set
set
set
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
002
002
002
002
1
2
3
4
005
006
007
008
138
139
140
141
128
129
133
134
47Z1304B
Fig. 3-155: Decision Line dead in the Switch on to fault protection function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-211
P437
3.26
3 Operation
Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)

The reach of the first impedance zone of the distance protection function is
normally set for values less than 100%. Protective signaling is used to extend
protection to 100% of the line section. This is achieved by logical linking of the
signals that are transmitted by the remote stations protection device.
3.26.1
Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling

The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through
binary signal inputs.
The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via PSIG: Gener al
enable U SER. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via
PSI G: En able PSx. If these enabling functions have been activated, protective
signaling can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary
signal inputs have equal status. If only the P SIG: Enable EXT function is
assigned to a binary signal input, then protective signaling is enabled by a
positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the
PSI G: D isa ble EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal
at this input will have no effect.
3.26.2
Readiness of Protective Signaling

In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements
must be satisfied:
3-212
It must be enabled.
There must be no external block.
There must be no transmission fault.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
General enable USER
[ 015 004 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
PSIG:
Enabled
[ 015 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 025
Address
037 026
PSIG:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 023 ]
PSIG:
Enable EXT
[ 037 025 ]
PSIG:
Enable USER
[ 003 132 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Disable EXT
[ 037 026 ]
PSIG:
Disable USER
[ 003 131 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
1
2
3
4
014
015
016
017
45Z5032C
Fig. 3-156: Enabling, disabling and readiness of protective signaling.
If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place in zone 1.
With normal reach: After distance protection stage t1 has elapsed.
With extended reach: after the protective signaling tripping time has
elapsed.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-213
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
8: Direction comparison
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
PSIG:
Tripping time PSx
[ *
]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
305 164
&
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
305 150
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Tripping time PSx
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
011
003
063
023
000
000
060
020
47Z8042A
Fig. 3-157: Protective signaling tripping time.
3.26.3
Three-Ended Line Application

In general the PSI G: Re ce i ve ( A ) EXT or P SIG: Re ce ive ( B) EXT signals are
simply used in an OR combination.
In case a permissive scheme is applied to 3-ended lines, the permissive signals
from both remote end units must be received, and these two signals have then
to be used in an AND combination.
Forming such an AND combination externally would mean having to accept
additional delays and loss of data with respect to the transmitted signals. In
order to have this operation available and overcome the shortcomings of the
usual single channel data transmission links, the P437 features the possibility to
use these two signals directly by setting parameters PSIG: 3ended line p ro t
PSx to Yes .
These two signals are further processed as shown in the figure below to create a
new signal (PS IG: Receive which is used in the various PSIG operating modes.
If 3ended line protection is enabled then both receive signals are linked in an
AND gate, otherwise they are linked in an OR gate. The latter permits the use
of either the A or the B signal, or even both signals in case of redundant signaling
channels, on 2ended lines.
The same principle is true of the phase-selective input signals, see figure below.
3-214
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
[ * ]
0
1
Parameter
PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
006 039
006 046
006 047
006 048
0: No
1: Yes
&
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ]
&
PSIG:
Chan. B1 receive EXT
[ 008 241 ]
&
&
PSIG:
[ 008 243 ]
&
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Chan. A3 receive EXT
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
&
&
PSIG:
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG:
[ 008 242 ]
&
&
PSIG:
[ 038 091 ]
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
&
47Z2004B
Fig. 3-158: Three-ended line protection.
3.26.4
Monitoring the Transmission Section

A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function
(see Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)). If protective signaling is being carried out via a
signal transmission or communication device, the device's fault signal can be
connected. With protective signaling over pilot wires or with the operating mode
set to reverse interlocking the internal monitoring function will detect a fault in
the transmission channel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-215
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ *
]
6: DC loop operat. mode
&
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ *
]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
SFMON:
Telecom. faulty/PSIG
[ 098 006 ]
Set value+600ms
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty int.
305 151
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
&
&
&
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT
[ 008 094 ]
PSIG:
Blk.f.telcom.flt PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty
2: Ch. (A)AND(B) faulty
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
PSIG:
Blk.f.telcom.flt PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
002
001
061
021
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty (A)
[ 012 244 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty (B)
[ 012 245 ]
246
247
248
249
47Z8047A
Fig. 3-159: Transmission fault.
3.26.5
Frequency Monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission may be signaled to the P437 via an
appropriately configured binary signal input (PSIG: F req. m on. trig. EX T). If
frequency monitoring is enabled, the P437 once a time-delay of approximately
20 ms has elapsed will generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms.
PSIG:
Frequency monit. PSx
[
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
20ms
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
1
150ms
305 152
PSIG:
Freq. mon. trig. EXT
[ 038 080 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Frequency monit. PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
025
011
071
031
45Z6348A
Fig. 3-160: Frequency monitoring.
3.26.6
Transient Blocking
In the event of a direction change, protective signaling will be blocked for the
time set at PSI G: tBlock PSx.
3-216
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
S1 1
R1
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
S1 1
1
t
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 154
R1
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
024
010
070
030
49Z6444A
Fig. 3-161: Transient blocking.
3.26.7
Protective Signaling Operating Modes

Protective signaling can be operated in eight different modes, which can be
selected with the setting parameter P SI G: Operat ing mode PSx:
Direct underreaching transfer trip (setting: Dir.trans.trip.under, see

Section 3.26.7.3, (p. 3-219))
Permissive underreaching transfer trip (setting: PUTT, see Section 3.26.7.4,

(p. 3-220))
Zone extension (setting: Zone extension, see Section 3.26.7.5, (p. 3-222))
Release (permissive) scheme (setting: Release scheme, see

Section 3.26.7.6, (p. 3-224))
Blocking scheme (setting: Blocking scheme, see Section 3.26.7.7, (p. 3228))
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-217
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
2: PUTT
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
7: Reverse interlocking
8
0: Without
2: PUTT
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
7: Reverse interlocking
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
070
020
D5Z5061A
Fig. 3-162: Setting the protective signaling operating modes.
3.26.7.1
Checking the Operating Mode Setting

The P437 features protective signaling and ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling. If the P437 is operating with protective signaling and ground fault
protective signaling, then the user has the option to specify whether ground fault
protective signaling will share the channel used by protective signaling (distance
schemes) for signal transmission. If this is the case, the operating modes for
protective signaling and ground fault protection signaling must be set identically.
Otherwise a signal will be issued.
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1: Signal comp. release
& 1
&
&
SFMON:
Op.mode PSIG inval.
[ 098 019 ]
2: Signal comp. block.
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
47Z8037A
Fig. 3-163: Checking the operating mode setting.
3-218
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.26.7.2
Limiting to Weak-Infeed Logic or Echo Function

If only the weak-infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other
protective signaling functions, then this can be implemented by setting the
operating mode to Without.
3.26.7.3
Operating Mode Dir.trans.trip.under

When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the
remote stations protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three
channels, depending on the setting.
Upon receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote stations circuit
breaker is tripped. The settings DIST: Trip zon e 1 PG PSx and DI ST: Trip
zone 1 PP PSx are taken into account.
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
&
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
&
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8088B
Fig. 3-164: Protective signaling transmission with the Dir.trans.trip.under operating mode.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-219
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Parameter
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking305 154
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1305 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl. 305 172
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
47Z0189C
Fig. 3-165: Protective signaling trip with operating mode Dir.trans.trip.under.
3.26.7.4
Operating Mode PUTT

When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the
remote stations protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three
channels, depending on the setting.
On receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote stations circuit
breaker is subject to permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) once the
protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. The DIST: Tr ip zone 1 PG PSx
(with starting in the zero-sequence system )and D IST: Tr ip zone 1 PP PS x
(without starting in the zero-sequence system) settings are taken into account by
the P437.
3-220
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Mode set at DI ST: Trip zone 1 P G PSx = 1-pole or 3-pole.
Mode set at DIST: Tr ip zone 1 PP PSx = 1-pole leading phase or 1-pole

trailing phas or 3-pole.
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
&
PSIG:
[ * ]
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
1
3
&
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8090A
Fig. 3-166: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer
tripping).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-221
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
PSIG:
[ * ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Parameter
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
305 164
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 154
DIST:
Starting A
303 529
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch.
1
305 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient305
bl.172
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
47Z0191C
Fig. 3-167: Protective signaling trip with operating mode PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping).
3.26.7.5
Operating Mode Zone extension

When a distance protection trip has occurred in zone 1, a signal is sent to the
remote stations protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal, the
measuring range of zone 1 in the remote station is increased by the zone
extension factor kze HSR (see Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-232)). Signals are transmitted
through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the
setting at PS IG: Oper. mode trip P Sx in the remote station.
3-222
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in
the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction. The D IST: Trip zon e 1 PG PSx and
DIST: Trip zo ne 1 PP PSx settings are taken into account by the P437. If
transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.
Dist.-dependent
If the fault is located within the extended zone, then the protection device
of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then
the receive signal will be ignored.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5053A
Fig. 3-168: Reaches with zone extension.
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
PSIG:
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8092A
Fig. 3-169: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Zone extension.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-223
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.-dependent
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
2: Dist.-dependent

3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed305 164
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg. 305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking 305 154
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST:
[ 038 010 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1 305 169
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
DIST:
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B 303 659
DIST:
[ 038 014 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C 303 660
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
* Parameter
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0293D
Fig. 3-170: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode Zone extension.
3.26.7.6
Operating Mode Release scheme

Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PS IG: Op er. mode se nd PSx.
3-224
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
'Direct.-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Dist.-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices
is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see Fig. 3-177, (p. 3232)). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is blocked in both
protection devices.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR.
Nfw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Nfw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5054A
Fig. 3-171: Zone reaches with the release (permissive) scheme.
The setting at PSIG: Ope r. mode se nd P Sx defines when the P437 sends a
signal to the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction,
the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
Dist.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1,
the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
setting at PSIG: Oper. mode tri p PSx in the remote station.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-225
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction.
Detected fault type phase phase with ground will cause a 3-pole trip.
Detected fault type phase phase without ground will cause a 1-pole or
3-pole trip, depending on the setting at DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx.
Detected fault type 1p phase ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole trip,
depending on the setting at DI ST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx.
The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
Dist.-dependent
If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device
of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed and a receive signal is present. The
receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
If for a 2pG fault or for an inter-system fault on double circuit lines there
are forward and backward (reverse) decisions present at the same time,
then the send signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on
Z1e). This, however, is not the case with the setting PSIG: 3ended line
p rot PSx = Yes, because this functionality could result in an underfunctioning of the Protective Signaling in case of 3-ended line applications
(different lengths of the line parts, different feed-in power).
3-226
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 002
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
&
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
[ * ]
1: 1 channel
2: Dist.-dependent
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
&
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
& 1
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
&
1
& 1
DIST:
[ 038 010 ]
&
DIST:
& 1
303 652
DIST:
[ 038 012 ]
&
DIST:
& 1
303 653
DIST:
[ 038 014 ]
&
DIST:
303 654
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
036
037
040
041
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8094A
Fig. 3-172: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Signal comparison release scheme.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-227
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
2: Dist.-dependent

3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
305 164
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST:
[ 038 010 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch.3051 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl.
305 172
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
303 658
DIST:
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
DIST:
[ 038 014 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0295C
Fig. 3-173: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme'.
3.26.7.7
Operating Mode Blocking scheme

Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSI G: O pe r. m ode se nd PSx.
3-228
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
Dist.-dependent
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices
is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see Fig. 3-177, (p. 3232)). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled in both
protection devices.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR.
Nbw, a
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Nbw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5055A
Fig. 3-174: Zone reaches with signal comparison blocking scheme.
The setting at PSI G: Ope r. mode s en d P Sx defines when the P437 sends a
signal to the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction
or for a directional change for the transient blocking time (setting at
PSI G: t Block PSx), a signal is sent to the remote station.
Dist.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the
measured impedance lies in zone 6 (signal DI ST: I mpedance in zone
6), then the P437 sends a signal to the remote station. A signal is also sent
to the remote station during transient blocking.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
setting at PSI G: Oper. mode trip P Sx in the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction. If transient blocking is operating, then
the receive signal will be ignored.
Dist.-dependent
the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection
detects a fault within extended zone 1. If transient blocking is operating,
then the receive signal will be ignored.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-229
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
304 002
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
[ * ]
1
3
2
1: 1 channel
2: Dist.-dependent
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
PSIG:
Transient blocking
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
305 154
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
DIST:
Impedance in zone 6
[ 037 200 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A
[ 038 011 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
305 172
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, A
303 661
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, B
[ 038 013 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl.
305 173
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, B
303 662
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, C
[ 038 015 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 174
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, C
303 663
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
036
037
040
041
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8096A
Fig. 3-175: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Signal comparison blocking scheme.
3-230
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
2: Dist.-dependent
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed305 164
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST:
[ 038 010 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A 303 658
DIST:
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
DIST:
[ 038 014 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
* Parameter
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0297C
Fig. 3-176: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode Signal comparison blocking scheme.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-231
P437
3 Operation
3.26.8
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
PSIG:
Transient blocking
Measuring Zone Extension of Zone 1 of Distance Protection
305 152
305 154
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 169
305 172
305 170
305 173
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
305 171
305 174
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
2: Dist.-dependent
2: Dist.-dependent
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 036
015 037
015 040
015 041
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
47Z0298A
Fig. 3-177: Zone extension by protective signaling.
3.26.9
Weak-Infeed Logic
The P437 features a weak-infeed logic function. Weak-infeed logic can either
be triggered by a binary signal input configured to PSIG: We ak inf. trig g. EXT
or by binary signal inputs configured to either P SIG: Receive (A) EXT or
PSI G: Receiv e (B) EXT.
The weak-infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine
whether they fall below the P SI G: V < we ak in fe e d PSx set threshold. If the
voltage in one phase falls below the set threshold, then a timer stage is started.
If PSIG: St art cond . tV < P Sx is set to V< & WI start, then the timer stage is
only started if both the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are
present. Once the set time has elapsed provided that the appropriate setting
has been selected a protective signaling trip is issued. The DIST: Trip zone 1
PG PSx setting is taken into account.
If the device has not issued its own protective starting the receive signal
(PS IG: R eceiv e ( A) EXT or PSIG: Re ceive ( B) EXT) is reset after the set
time delay (PSI G: tV < PSx + 100 ms). This will always ensure that weak-infeed
logic trips independently of the reset time of the send signal.
3-232
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The weak-infeed logic function is blocked by a 3-pole open circuit breaker, when
this status is either signaled by the CB auxiliary contacts or when the newly
implemented monitoring function detects this state from a 3p undervoltage
condition.
The phase selective starting signals are stored in RS flip-flops, which are only
reset after the received signal has ended. This excludes an over reaction during a
reset of its own starting when the received signal from the other end is still
present.
Detection
of
dead line by
undervoltage
criterion (only with
line side
VT connection)
V < 0.35Vnom/3
VA-G
5s
&
VB-G
PSIG:
Weak inf. blocked
310 015
VC-G
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
Detection
of
dead line by
CB status contact
47Z1014C
Fig. 3-178: Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 1.

PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
&
PSIG:
Weak inf. ready
310 014
PSIG:
Weak inf. blocked
310 015
GSCSG:
Bl. PSIG weak infeed
304 003
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
47Z1143B
Fig. 3-179: Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 2.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-233
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT
[ 043 062 ]
&
[ 043 062 ] is
configured
to a
binary input
&
1
1
&
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
310 011
&
1
1
PSIG:
305 152
&
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
310 012
&
PSIG:
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
&
PSIG:
310 013
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
&
1
1
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
&
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
Parameter
PSIG:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
47Z1011C
Fig. 3-180: Phase selective receive signals of the weak-infeed logic.
3-234
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
&
ARC:
3p trip for 1p fault
310 019
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
S 1 1
PSIG:
&
50ms
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. A
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. B
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. C
310 016
R 1
310 011
MAIN:
CB closed A
[ 031 035 ]
S 1 1
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
&
0
PSIG:
R 1
310 017
50ms
310 012
MAIN:
CB closed B
[ 031 036 ]
1
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
S 1 1
&
0
PSIG:
R 1
310 018
50ms
310 013
MAIN:
CB closed C
[ 031 037 ]
*
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 045
47Z1203B
Fig. 3-181: Phase selective blocking of the weak-infeed logic.
If the ARC operating mode (A RC: HSR ope r . mode PSx) is set to 3-pole (only
for 1p) and ARC issues a 3-pole trip for this reason, then the weak infeed logic is
blocked.
This refinement was necessary based on the following application:
Assuming a weak infeed condition and the P437 receives a signal from the
remote end device because of a ground fault short-circuit, it then issues a singlepole PSIG trip as soon as weak infeed timer tV< has elapsed. According to the
operating mode being set to 3-pole (only for 1p) the ARC now converts this
single-pole trip into a 3-pole trip. As soon as the CBs are open on both sides, the
undervoltage condition becomes true for the remaining 2 phases. Consequently
the week-infeed trip condition becomes true for the 2 healthy phases, and PSIG
raised a 3-pole trip. This in turn leads to aborting the HSR.
In this example it is assumed that blocking of the weak infeed logic by CB auxiliary
contacts is not generally fast enough to prevent the 3-pole tripping.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-235
P437
PSIG:
Weak inf. ready
3 Operation
PSIG:
V< weak infeed PSx
[ * ]
310 014
PSIG:
V< triggered
VA-G
310 020
VB-G
VC-G
PSIG:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Start cond. tV< PSx
[
&
1
2
&
1: V<
PSIG:
Trip signal V< PSx
2: V< & WI start
[ * ]
&
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Trip V<, A
[ 006 152 ]
&
&
&
&
PSIG:
Trip V<, B
[ 006 153 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Trip V<, C
[ 006 154 ]
&
PSIG:
Trip V<
PSIG:
310 011
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. A
310 016
PSIG:
310 012
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. B
310 017
PSIG:
310 013
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. C
310 018
305 158
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
&
3p-trip in case
of 2-/3-pole faults
or 3p-transfer trip,
with
setting
no 1p-trip
PSIG:
Weak infeed start.
[ 043 064 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
V< weak infeed PSx
PSIG:
Start cond. tV< PSx
PSIG:
tV< PSx
PSIG:
Trip signal V< PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
set 1
015 020
006 148
015 019
015 021
011 050
set 2
024 006
006 149
024 005
024 007
011 051
set 3
024 066
006 150
024 065
024 067
011 052
set 4
025 026
006 151
025 025
025 027
011 053
47Z8014A
Fig. 3-182: Tripping logic of the weak-infeed logic.
3.26.10
Echo Function
If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether
the receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or
whether the receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak-infeed logic are
to be used. The conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a
period in excess of the set time-delay, and distance protection starting must be
3-236
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
absent for the echo pulse to be activated. This time-delay is ineffective with an
open circuit breaker (i.e. when the signal MA IN: CB ope n 3 p is present).
The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse
duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the set
pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted.
The echo function may be disabled.
If the P437 is operating with ground fault protective signaling and if directional
measurement of ground fault protection has been enabled, the echo signal will
be blocked if protective signaling (distance schemes) and ground fault protective
signaling are sharing a common transmission channel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-237
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
PSIG:
Op. delay echo PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Echo on receive PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: On receive
2: On receive & V<
PSIG:
[ * ]
1
3
PSIG:
Pulse dur. echo PSx
[ * ]
1: 1 channel
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
V< triggered
305 162
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ]
PSIG:
t+1s
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
1
0
305 152
PSIG:
A1 receive
EXT
[Chan.
038 091
]
t+1s
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
[ 008 241 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
t+1s
305 169
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
PSIG:
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG:
[ 008 242 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
t+1s
305 170
PSIG:
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG:
[ 008 243 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
*
Parameter
PSIG:
Echo on receive PSx
PSIG:
Op. delay echo PSx
PSIG:
Pulse dur. echo PSx
PSIG:
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
003
002
062
022
022
008
068
028
023
009
069
029
026
012
072
032
47Z8097A
Fig. 3-183: Echo function.
3.26.11
Testing the Communication Channels

The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is
issued through a binary signal input or by a setting parameter. It is extended by
3-238
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
the reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if
the transmission link is in order.
PSIG:
[ * ]
&
1
3
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Test telecom. EXT
[ 036 038 ]
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
1
PSIG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 015 009 ]
1
500ms
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 1 EXT
[ 038 085 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
&
1
500ms
[ 038 083 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. chann.
PSIG:
Test telecom. 1 USER
[ 015 027 ]
[ 034 016 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 1
[ 034 026 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 2 EXT
[ 038 086 ]
1
500ms
1
500ms
PSIG:
[ 015 028 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 2
&
[ 034 027 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 3 EXT
[ 038 087 ]
PSIG:
[ 015 029 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 3
&
[ 034 028 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z80ABA
Fig. 3-184: Testing the communication channels.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-239
P437
3.27
3 Operation
Auto-Reclosing Control in the P437 (Function Group ARC)

After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about
automatic reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection
device.
3.27.1
ARC Operating Modes

The integral ARC function in the P437 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures.
When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first
begin with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure
by an HSR, then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a timedelayed reclosure (TDR). Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if
the ARC operating mode is set accordingly.
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: HSR/TDR permitted
Parameter
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
2: TDR only permitted
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
3: Test HSR only permit
1
2
3
4
100
101
102
103
D5Z5095A
Fig. 3-185: Setting the ARC operating mode in the P437.
3-240
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.27.2
Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function

The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter
subsets) via AR C: Ge ne ral e nabl e U SER. It is enabled as a function of a
parameter subset via A RC: E nabl e P Sx. If these enabling functions have been
activated, the auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the
AR C: Enable EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then ARC will be
enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If
only the AR C: D isable EXT parameter has been assigned to a binary signal
input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-241
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
General enable USER
[ 015 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 010
Address
037 011
ARC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 013 ]
ARC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 010 ]
ARC:
Enable USER
[ 003 134 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 011 ]
ARC:
Disable USER
[ 003 133 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
ARC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
1
2
3
4
046
047
048
049
45Z5039A
Fig. 3-186: Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control in the P437.
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:
3-242
Protection is activated (on).
ARC is not blocked.
No ARC cycle is running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB
opening and closing mechanism ready).
The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)
No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
[
]
0
1
0: Without
ARC:
CB closed
1: With
303 004
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
ARC:
CB drive ready EXT
[ 004 066 ]
ARC:
Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
ARC:
Not ready
[ 037 008 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
Parameter
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
050
024
084
044
D5Z5066A
Fig. 3-187: ARC readiness in the P437.
3.27.3
ARC Blocked
ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
A manual close is carried out.
A manual open command is issued.
A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but due to

the setting no ARC is to be carried out.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
A ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling trip occurs, but no autoreclosing is to occur.
A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection.
The binary signal input configured to ARC : Block ing EXT is triggered.
The HSR mode selection is to be made by external control (setting at

A RC : Contr ol vi a U SER = No) but no binary signal inputs have been
configured.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is
started, and when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-243
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
SOTF:
ARC blocked
305 650
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
ARC:
Block. time int. PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
[ 034 049 ]
ARC:
Block. time running
[ 037 004 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003]
CBF:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
GFSC:
Trip
[ 039signal
092 ]
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
[ * ]
304 008
ARC:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 050 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Block. time int. PSx
ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 043
024 021
024 081
025 041
015 058
024 032
024 092
025 052
47Z11ADA
Fig. 3-188: ARC blocking.
3.27.4
ARC Tripping Times

If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC
function are initiated by the general starting condition.
If the HSR operating mode (A RC : HSR ope r. m ode PSx) has been set to 1-/3pole, 3-pole or 3-pole (only for 1p) then the tripping times replace the timer
stage t1,ze of distance protection.
If the 1-pole operating mode has been set, a single-pole trip is issued once the
HSR tripping time has elapsed, or a multi-pole trip is issued after distance
protection grading time (depending on the zone) has elapsed or after the BUOC
timer stages have elapsed.
3-244
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
TDR
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 006
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
303 003
ARC:
Trip time TDR PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
ARC:
Trip time TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
025
025
015
024
025
025
1
2
3
4
072
040
000
060
073
041
001
061
D5Z5068A
Fig. 3-189: ARC tripping times in the P437.
3.27.5
Starting the ARC Cycle

When the ARC function is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following
functions:
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of
a parallel protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been
configured accordingly.
A trip without general starting, such as through the protective signaling

direct transfer trip or through the function MA IN: Trans fe r t rip. EXT.
A backup overcurrent-time protection trip (BUOC trip), provided that the

ARC is to be activated by the BUOC function.
The trip signal of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, provided

that the ARC is to be activated by ground fault protection signaling.
The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the

parameters of this device have been set accordingly (A RC : Parallel t rip
PSx).
A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
3.27.6
High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)

When the ARC cycle starts, operative times 1 and 2 are started. The starting
conditions for the ARC cycle must drop out while the operative times are
elapsing. This means that the circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead
time is started. If both operative times are set at 25 ms, then ARC will not be
ready in the event of starting; in the event of a trip, the reclaim time is started.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-245
P437
3 Operation
After starting drops out without a subsequent trip, ARC is immediately ready
again. Operative time 1 has priority over operative time 2. Selection of the HSR
operating mode determines which dead time is started. The following settings
are possible:
3.27.6.1
HSR Operating Modes

ARC : HSR oper. mode P Sx
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole (only for 1p)
With the operating mode 3-pole (only for 1p) only a three-pole HSR will result
from single-pole ground faults.
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1:
2:
3:
4:
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
051
025
085
045
45Z8094
Fig. 3-190: Setting the HSR operating mode in the P437.
3.27.6.1.1
Selecting Operating Mode via Binary Signal Inputs

The operating mode can be selected via binary signal inputs, if this selection
mode has been enabled (A RC: Con trol vi a USE R = No) and the required
binary signal inputs have been configured.
When using binary signal inputs the operating mode is set according to the
following terms:
3-246
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC: 1p-HSR enable

EXT
ARC: 3p-HSR enable

EXT
ARC: 3p-HSR(1p)
enab. EXT
HSR operating mode
ARC is blocked. (RRC

and TDR are also
blocked.)
Only single-pole HSR

permitted under 1p trip
condition.
Three-pole tripping is
always final.
Three-pole HSR for all

types of fault.
Trip-dependent HSR:
single-pole HSR with
single-pole trip decision,
three-pole HSR with
three-pole trip decision
0 or 1
Three-pole HSR only

with single-pole trip
decision.
0 or 1
Three-pole HSR for all

types of fault.
Logic input signals may be fed from physical binary signal inputs, signal
assignment within the LOGIC or through the InterMiCOM communication
interface. If not all the available operating modes are required, it is not necessary
to configure all 3 signals. Signals that are not configured are internally used with
their default value 0.
3.27.6.1.2
HSR Operating Mode 2

The setting at A RC : HSR oper. mode 2 P Sx determines whether starting (of
distance or backup overcurrent-time protection) or a trip will be used for a singleor three-pole HSR. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then trip decisions will be
used as the criterion. If the setting is Start-dependent, then starting decisions will
also be used.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-247
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
ARC:
HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
ARC:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 085
015 044
024 022
024 082
025 042
1
2
1: Trip-dependent
2: Start-dependent
47Z1067A
Fig. 3-191: Setting the HSR operating mode and HSR operating mode 2.
3.27.6.1.3
1-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent then the single-pole HSR is
only executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If
there is a multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then there is a threepole final trip, and the reclaim time is started.
If the setting is Trip-dependent then the HSR is only executed if a single-pole trip
decision is reached. In the event of a three-pole trip, no HSR is executed, and
instead a final trip occurs. In addition, the HSR is started by a single-pole test
HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC).
Protective signaling.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN).
A parallel protective device.
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground

fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, or the phase selection logic and if the
P437 has not started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR
irrespective of whether the setting is Start-dependent or Trip-dependent.
The single-pole dead time (A RC: Dead time 1p PSx) is started if the starting
conditions drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time
elapses, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC), and a close command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC.
If the starting conditions for the ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has
elapsed but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (ARC: De ad
t im e max PSx) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is
sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a
positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and while the dead
time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
3-248
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur (depending on the
setting or with ASC disabled or blocked), then the reclaim time is started and a
three-pole trip occurs (final trip).
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR: If pole selective status signals have
been configured (see Section 3.12.8, (p. 3-92)) then the device will check that
just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR
is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further
CB contact is opened. This trip command is final when the discrimination time
has elapsed (timer stage ARC: tDis crim. P Sx) or if this timer stage is set to
0 s. The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal MAI N: CB
open 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-249
P437
3 Operation
Trip dur. op. time 1
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
[ 015 067 ]
4
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
5
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
7
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1061A
Fig. 3-192: Signal flow for the 1-pole operating mode.
3.27.6.1.4
1-/3-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent then a single-pole HSR is
executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a
multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then a three-pole HSR is executed.
3-250
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
With the Trip-dependent setting, the decision as to whether a single- or threepole HSR will be executed is contingent upon the trip decisions. In addition, a
single- or three-pole HSR is started by a corresponding test HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC).
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN).
A parallel protective device.
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground

fault (short-circuit) protection signaling or the phase selection logic and if the
P437 has not started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR
irrespective of whether the setting is Start-dependent or Trip-dependent.
If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied the single-pole dead time
(ARC : Dead t ime 1p PSx) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle
drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a close
request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close
command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC.
If the conditions for a three-pole HSR are satisfied the three-pole dead time
(ARC : Dead t ime 3p runn in g) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC
cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time has
elapsed, a close request is sent to the ASC. If ASC is to be activated
(ASC : Act ive for HSR PSx) it first checks to determine whether reclosure is
possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then
there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(ASC : C los.re j.w.bl ock P Sx = No).
If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has
elapsed but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (A RC : Dead
time ma x PSx) is started. This occurs with both single-pole and three-pole trips.
When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC
checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is
reached during the ASC operative time and while the dead time is elapsing, then
there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC
function is not ready, then the reclaim time is started after the dead time has
elapsed, and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip).
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR: If pole selective status signals have
been configured (see Section 3.12.8, (p. 3-92)) then the device will check that
just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR
is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further
CB contact is opened. This trip command is final when the discrimination time
has elapsed (timer stage ARC: tDis crim. P Sx) or if this timer stage is set to
0 s. The dead time for the three-pole HSR is triggered when the discrimination
timer stage is still running. The same procedure is carried out should the multiple
signal MAI N: C B ope n 3p E XT occur during the dead time of a single-pole
HSR.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-251
P437
3 Operation
1-pole trip
3-pole trip
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
3
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
4
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
5
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
MAIN:
[ 015 067 ]
7
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1062A
Fig. 3-193: Signal flow with the operating mode 1-/3-pole, tripping during operative time 1.
3-252
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
[ 015 067 ]
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1063B
Fig. 3-194: Signal flow with the operating mode 1-/3-pole, tripping during operative time 2, and close rejection.
3.27.6.1.5
3-pole
The three-pole HSR is executed both with a single-pole trip and a three-pole trip
irrespective of whether the setting is Start-dependent or Trip-dependent. If the
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-253
P437
3 Operation
setting is Trip-dependent then there is a three-pole trip transfer in the event of a

single-pole trip.
The three-pole dead time (AR C: De ad ti me 3p PSx) is started if the starting
conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the
dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism
check function (ASC). If ASC is to be activated (A SC: Active f or HSR PS x) it
first checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is
reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the
close command is issued.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a
close command is issued immediately (A SC : C los .rej.w.block PSx = No i.e.
close rejection when blocked).
If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has
elapsed but during operative time 2 then the maximum dead time (ARC: Dead
t ime max PSx) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is
sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a
positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and while the
maximum dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close
command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then the reclaim
time is started and the final trip signal is issued.
3-254
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
[ 015 067 ]
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1064A
Fig. 3-195: Signal flow for the operating mode 3-pole.
3.27.6.1.6

With this operating mode no further trip command is issued when a HSR cycle is
terminated (a 3-pole trip has already occurred); only the signal MA IN: F inal
trip = Yes is generated.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-255
P437
3.27.6.1.7
3 Operation
All HSR Operating Modes

The following applies to all HSR operating modes:
Should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault within the operative times, the
reclaim time will be started and a three-pole trip will occur (final trip). If the
operative times elapse without a trip decision, then the ARC is immediately ready
again as soon as the general starting condition has dropped out.
3.27.6.2
Test HSR
A single- or three-pole test HSR can be carried out using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If a single-pole test HSR is
triggered in the 3-pole operating mode, then a three-pole trip occurs.
3-256
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: TDR only permitted
ARC:
Reject test HSR
[ 036 055 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
ARC:
Test-HSR A USER
[ 011 063 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A, internal
303 011
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR A EXT
[ 037 014 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A
[ 034 020 ]
ARC:
Test-HSR B USER
[ 011 064 ]
ARC:
Test HSR B, internal
303 012
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR B
[ 034 021 ]
ARC:
Test HSR B EXT
[ 037 015 ]
ARC:
Test-HSR C USER
[ 011 065 ]
ARC:
Test HSR C, internal
303 013
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR C EXT
[ 037 016 ]
ARC:
Test HSR C
[ 034 022 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C USER
[ 011 066 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C
[ 034 023 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C EXT
[ 037 017 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
Parameter
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
100
101
102
103
051
025
085
045
47Z01AFA
Fig. 3-196: Test HSR.
3.27.7
Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in the P437

A TDR may occur after an HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR
or if the operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is possible only if
the setting for A RC : No. pe rm it. TDR P Sx (number of permitted TDRs) is not
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-257
P437
3 Operation
zero. The TDR is always a three-pole process. This means that three-pole transfer
tripping will occur in the event of a single-pole trip.
The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an
external protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim
time is elapsing. Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions
for the TDR drop out while operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead
time is started. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the
automatic synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC checks to determine
whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC
operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ASC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(ASC: C los.re j.w.bl ock P Sx = No i.e. close rejection when blocked).
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip
occurs after the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is
started.
If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started
again. This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the number of
permitted TDRs. If the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
3-258
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Reclosure
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
015 057
024 031
024 091
025 051
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
MAIN:
[ 015 067 ]
47Z1065A
Fig. 3-197: Signal sequence with time-delayed reclosure (TDR).
3.27.8
Rapid Reclosure (RRC)

Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P437 carries out
appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and
that the line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC which in
turn reduces the dead times of HSR or TDR. For this, VTs must be connected on
the line side.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-259
P437
3 Operation
If the setting at MAI N: Ne utr.pt. tre at. PSx is Low-imped. grounding, then
both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
either Isol./res.w.start.PG, Isol./res.w/o st. PG or Short-durat. ground., then only
the phasetophase voltages are checked.
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
V> RRC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
VA-G3
VA-G
303 014
VB-G3
VB-G
VC-G
VC-G3
MAIN:
[ * ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
ARC:
V> RRC PSx
MAIN:
015
024
025
025
015
024
025
025
010
001
001
001
085
044
004
064
087
046
006
066
048
076
077
078
49Z64AHA
Fig. 3-198: Voltage monitoring for RRC.
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the
RRC timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P437
checks to determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were
greater than or equal to the set threshold value (A RC: V> RRC PSx) during the
last 100 ms. If this was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic
synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC response depends on whether the
conditions for a single- or three-pole HSR are satisfied.
If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied then a close command is
immediately issued.
If the conditions for a three-pole HSR or TDR were satisfied the ASC checks to
determine whether reclosing can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close
enable and then a close command are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there
is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the
close request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even
in the case of a three-pole trip.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not
greater or equal to the set threshold (ARC: V > RRC PSx), then the ARC cycle is
continued by the HSR or TDR.
3-260
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
1-pole trip
3-pole trip
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
tRRC running
303 015
ARC:
303 014
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
tRRC PSx
015 086
024 045
025 005
025 065
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
Minimum time 100 ms

MAIN:
[ 015 067 ]
47Z1066A
Fig. 3-199: Signal sequence for rapid reclosure (RRC).
3.27.9
Secondary Fault Treatment in the P437

If a repeat trip occurs in another phase during the dead time, then this is referred
to as a secondary fault and results in three-pole tripping. This is carried out as a
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-261
P437
3 Operation
three-pole trip. The response of the ARC to a secondary fault is a function of

whether the secondary fault occurs during a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a timedelay reclosure (TDR) or a rapid reclosure (RRC).
Secondary fault treatment during HSR
If a secondary fault occurs during an HSR, then the response is a function of the
HSR operating mode that has been set.
AR C: HSR ope r. mode P Sx = 1-pole

If a trip starts during the single-pole dead time in a different phase than at
the beginning of the ARC cycle, then tripping is three-pole (final trip) and
the reclaim time is started. Reclosing does not occur.
If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the
same phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is
continued. The ARC cycle is terminated only if the starting signal or the trip
are still present immediately before the close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs in the same phase while the maximum dead
time is elapsing, the ARC cycle is terminated normally. If a secondary fault
occurs in a different phase, there is a three-pole trip transfer and the
reclaim time is started.
ARC : HSR op er. mode P Sx = 1-/3-pole

If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the
same phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is
continued. The ARC cycle is terminated only if a starting signal or trip is still
present immediately before the close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs during the single-pole dead time, then operative
time 1 is started. The single-pole dead time continues. If the secondary
fault's starting condition and trip drop out while operative time 1 is
elapsing, the P437 checks to determine whether the fault change occurred
during the course of the time set at A RC : tDiscrim. PSx, which is started
with the single-pole dead time. If this is the case, a switch is made to the
three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is terminated as in the case of a
three-pole trip. If the fault change occurred after the tDiscrim. time had
elapsed then final tripping occurs and the reclaim time is started.
A secondary fault during the course of the three-pole dead time is ignored.
Termination of the ARC cycle only occurs if the starting signal or trip has
not yet dropped out immediately before the close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then
a three-pole trip transfer occurs. The dead time and checking by the ASC
function continue. If the ASC decision is that reclosing is permissible, a
close command is issued.
ARC: HSR ope r. mode P Sx = 3-pole

In this HSR operating mode, a secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is
terminated only if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately before
the close command is issued.
Secondary fault treatment during TDR

A secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is terminated only if a starting signal
or trip is still present immediately before the close command is issued.
Secondary fault treatment during RRC
Rapid reclosing is blocked in the event of a secondary fault.
3-262
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.27.10
Parallel Blocking in the P437

If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P437, then the trip
from this protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence
provided that the binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The
effect exercised by the trip of the parallel protection device is a function of
whether it intervenes in a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure
(TDR), or a rapid reclosure (RRC). In addition, the AR C: Paralle l tr ip PSx
setting is a determining factor (see Figure Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-263
P437
3.27.10.1
3 Operation
Parallel Blocking with HSR

The trip of an external protection device may intervene in the HSR functional
sequence depending on the set HSR operating mode and the ARC: Par allel
tri p P Sx setting.
AR C: HSR ope r. mode P Sx = 1-pole
A RC : Parall el tri p PSx = Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the
functional sequence.
ARC : P aral le l trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is
ignored. If a trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while the
operative times and the single-pole or maximum dead time are elapsing
the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection
device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the
ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external protection device
has been reached in another phase, then the ARC cycle is terminated
and the reclaim time is started.
ARC : P aral le l trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w. init
If the setting at ARC: H SR oper. mode 2 PSx is Start-dependent and
if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device
does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not
started then the trips of the external protection device are used as the
criterion for a single-pole HSR, irrespective of the Start-dependent
setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent the ARC cycle is started by the
trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally in the event
that the P437 does not reach a trip decision or not in the same phase.
However, if a trip decision has been reached by the P437 in a different
phase from that of the external protection device, then the reclaim time
is started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip). Reclosing does not
occur.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is
elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault
treatment.
3-264
AR C: HS R ope r. mode PSx = 1-/3-pole
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC : Paral lel tri p PSx = Without function
ARC : P aral le l tri p PSx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is
ignored.
If a single-pole trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while
operative time 1 and the time set at AR C: t Dis crim. PSx are elapsing
the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection
device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the
single-pole ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external
protection device has been reached in another phase while operative
time 1 was elapsing, then the three-pole dead time is started and the
ARC cycle is terminated as is the case with a three-pole HSR. If the trip
of the external protection device occurs while time tDiscrim. is elapsing,
then a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is
continued as with a three-pole trip. If the trip of the external protection
device occurs after the time set at ARC : t Dis crim. PSx has elapsed,
then final three-pole tripping occurs, the ARC cycle is terminated, and
the reclaim time is started.
If a single-pole HSR with maximum dead time is carried out, then timer
stage tDiscrim. is started at the same time as the maximum dead time.
The P437 checks to determine whether, while operative time 2 or timer
stage tDiscrim. was elapsing, a trip of the external protection device has
occurred in the same phase as in the P437. If this is the case, then the
ARC cycle is continued. If the external protection device reaches a trip
decision in a different phase, then there is a three-pole trip transfer and
the ARC cycle is continued. If the trip of the external protection device
occurs after time tDiscrim. has elapsed, then three-pole final tripping
occurs and the reclaim time is started.
A RC : Parall el trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w. init
If the setting at ARC: H SR oper. mode 2 PSx is Start-dependent and
if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device
does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not
started, then the trips of the external protection device are used as the
criterion for a single- or three-pole HSR, irrespective of the Parall. bloc.w.
init setting. If the setting is Parall. bloc.w/o ini the ARC cycle is started by
the trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally if the
P437 does not reach a trip decision or has reached a trip decision in the
same phase. However, if the P437 has reached a trip decision in a
different phase from that of the external protection device, then threepole tripping occurs (3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as
with a three-pole HSR.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is
elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault
treatment.
AR C: HSR ope r. mode PSx '3-pole'
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-265
P437
3 Operation
ARC : Parallel trip P Sx 'Without function'
ARC : Parall el trip P Sx 'Parall. bloc.w/o ini'
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the HSR
ARC : Parallel trip P Sx 'Parall. bloc.w. init'
As a result of the trip of the external protection device, the ARC cycle is
started and proceeds normally.
3.27.10.2
Parallel Blocking for TDR or RRC

The trip of the external protection device may intervene in the TDR or RRC
functional sequence depending on the setting of the A RC : Parallel trip PS x
parameter.
AR C: P aralle l t rip PSx = Without function

ARC: Paral le l t r ip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini

The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR or
RRC functional sequence.
ARC : Parall el tri p PSx = Parall. bloc.w. init

The trip of the external protection device starts a TDR or RRC. The
sequence is the same as with initiation by the P437.
3.27.11
Zone Extension in the P437

Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is
only initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.
HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.
3-266
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
External trip A
303 016
ARC:
External trip B
ARC:
Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 017
ARC:
External trip C
303 018
0
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
ARC:
Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
0: Without
1: Following HSR
2: Always
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
303 000
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR permitted
303 019
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
ARC:
Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
025
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
059
033
093
053
088
047
007
067
071
039
099
059
D5Z5099A
Fig. 3-200: Zone extension by ARC.
3.27.11.1
Zone Extension by kze HSR

Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-267
P437
3 Operation
Setting for A RC : Zon e e xt. f . H SR P Sx Yes

The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while
operative times 1 and 2 are elapsing.
Setting for A RC : Zone ext.du r. RC P Sx
Following HSR
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is

elapsing if the close command is issued by a non-synchronism-checked
HSR. There is no zone extension with a rapid reclosure (RRC).
Always
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is
elapsing. How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no
zone extension.
3.27.11.2
Zone Extension by kze TDR

The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension
factor kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as
another TDR is permitted and the setting for A RC: Zone ext. f. TDR PSx is
Yes. Zone extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the
setting is No, there is no zone extension.
3.27.12
Control Using External Auto-Reclosing Control

If an external ARC is used in place of the ARC function implemented in the P437,
the operating mode of the external ARC is defined for the P437 by selecting the
appropriate setting at ARC: Op. mode e xt ARC PSx. Control of the zone
extension factor kze HSR and enabling of the distance protection trip in zone 1
with extended reach is handled in the P437 in accordance with this setting.
The measuring range is only extended if protective signaling is not ready,
internal ARC is disabled, and the binary signal input configured for ARC: Ena ble
ext . AR C EXT is triggered. If the setting at A RC: Op. mode ext ARC PSx is
1-pole, trip-depend., there must also be a single-pole starting signal, or in the
case of a two-pole starting signal the setting at D IST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx
must be 1-pole leading phase or 1-pole trailing phas, so that the zone extension
factor kze HSR is activated. If the setting at A RC: Op. mode e xt ARC PSx is 1pole, trip-depend., then the distance protection trip with extended reach is only
enabled if the trip is single-pole.
3-268
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
ARC:
Enable ext. ARC EXT
[ 038 003 ]
DIST:
Starting A
ARC:
Op. mode ext ARC PSx
[ * ]
303 529
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
BUOC:
IA> triggered
ARC:
303 025
304 750
BUOC:
IB> triggered
0: Without
304 751
1: 1-pole, trip-depend.
BUOC:
IC> triggered
2: 1-pole,start-depend.
304 752
3: 3-pole
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Enable dist.tripZ1ze
303 026
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 659
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660
Parameter
ARC:
Op. mode ext ARC PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 045
024 043
024 083
025 043
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z01ALA
Fig. 3-201: Control with external ARC.
3.27.13
General ARC Control Functions in the P437
Monitoring the Receive Signals of Protective Signaling

The user can specify whether there will be intervention in the ARC sequence
when a signal is received by protective signaling. If this is desired, then the ARC
cycle is continued in different ways depending on the number of receive signals
that are received by the P437 while operative time 1 or the single- or three-pole
dead times are elapsing.
At the end of the dead time, the P437 checks to determine whether protective
signaling has received one signal while the above-mentioned times are elapsing.
If this is the case, then the HSR is terminated normally. If protective signaling
receives no signal or more than one signal, the HSR is terminated as if the fault
had been cleared during operative time 2. This means that even with single-pole
starting signals or trips reclosing is preceded by a synchronism check by ASC.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-269
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
ARC:
Switch to tPmax
1: Yes
PSIG:
[ * ]
1: 1 channel
303 024
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
[ 037 069 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
PSIG:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 082
024 050
025 010
025 070
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
47Z80AHA
Fig. 3-202: Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling.
Signal ARC: Ext. 1p trip pe rm.

If ARC is ready or if one of the operative times is elapsing, the P437 will generate
the following signal: ARC: Ext. 1p trip pe rm..
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Ext. 1p trip perm.
[ 039 086 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
100ms
&
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
47Z13AKB
Fig. 3-203: Signal A R C : E x t . 1 p t r i p p e r m ..
Switch to Maximum Dead Time via Binary Signal Input

If the binary signal input configured for AR C: 3p transfer trip EXT is triggered
while the single-pole or three-pole dead time is elapsing, the P437 switches to
the maximum dead time. The ARC cycle will then be terminated as if starting or
trip signals had dropped out during operative time 2.
3-270
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC Sequence Control

ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
[ * ]
ARC:
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
No. permit. TDR PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
[ * ]
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
015 044
024 022
024 082
025 042
ARC:
tRRC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
tDiscrim. PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
[ * ]
Setting
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
0: Without function
1: Parall. bloc.w/o ini
2: Parall. bloc.w. init
ARC:
General starting EXT
[ 037 096 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Parallel trip A EXT
[ 036 052 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip B EXT
[ 036 053 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip C EXT
[ 036 054 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
ARC:
3p transfer trip EXT
[ 038 043 ]
ARC:
Switch to tPmax
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
015 100
015 101
015 102
015 103
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 045
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
015 085
024 044
025 004
025 064
ARC:
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
tDiscrim running
[ 039 087 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ARC:
Close command
303 021
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
ARC:
External trip A
303 024
303 016
ARC:
ARC:
External trip B
ASC:
Close enable w.block
ARC:
External trip C
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ARC:
CB closed
ARC:
TDR permitted
303 017
303 014
303 018
305 001
303 019
ARC:
3-pole transfer int.
303 020
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
HSR A
303 004
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
No. permit. TDR PSx
015 068
024 037
024 097
025 057
ARC:
tRRC PSx
015 086
024 045
025 005
025 065
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
015 053
024 027
024 087
025 047
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
015 057
024 031
024 091
025 051
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
ARC:
tDiscrim. PSx
018 051
024 049
025 009
025 069
ARC:
HSR B
303 008
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ARC:
HSR A-B-C
ARC:
TDR
303 005
303 006
ARC:
3-pole RRC
303 007
ARC:
tRRC running
303 015
ARC:
[ 037 007 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Reclosure successful
[ 036 062 ]
47Z01AJA
Fig. 3-204: ARC sequence control.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-271
P437
3.27.14
3 Operation
ARC Counters in the P437

The following ARC signals are counted:
Number of single-pole high-speed reclosures, pole-selectively.
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
Number of time-delayed reclosures.
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ARC:
No. of HSR A
[ 004 001 ]
ARC:
No. of HSR B
[ 004 002 ]
ARC:
No. of HSR C
[ 004 003 ]
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
303 005
ARC:
No. of HSR A-B-C
[ 004 004 ]
ARC:
TDR
+
303 006
ARC:
Number TDR
[ 004 008 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
45Z63ACA
Fig. 3-205: ARC Counters.
3-272
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28
Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)

The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the P437 to verify that
before a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system
sections that are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system
sections is de-energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages
generally the voltages on the line and busbar sides are compared for
differences in frequency, angle, and voltage. Connecting the reference voltage
transformer will determine which of the system sections will provide the
reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side). The measurement loop
must be set to correspond to the reference voltage connection
(ASC: Measur eme nt loop P Sx) so that the correct measuring voltage is
selected for the comparison. In the connection example shown in section
Conditioning of the Measured values (see Section 3.12, (p. 3-69)), the busbar
voltage VA-B is the reference voltage.
ASC:
Measurement loop PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
ASC:
305 008
1: Loop A-G
2: Loop B-G
ASC:
Vmeas
305 007
3: Loop C-G
4: Loop A-B
Parameter
ASC:
Measurement loop PSx
set
set
set
set
031
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
5: Loop B-C
6: Loop C-A
060
044
044
044
47Z0125A
Fig. 3-206: Selecting the measurement loop.
3.28.1
Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function

The function is enabled generally (independently of the parameter subsets) at
AR C : Gener al enabl e U SER. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via ARC : Enable PSx. If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can
be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs
have equal status. If only the ARC: Enabl e EX T function is assigned to a binary
signal input, then the ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the AR C: Dis able E XT function has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no
effect.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-273
P437
3 Operation
If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued.
ASC:
General enable USER
[ 018 000 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 049
Address
037 061
ASC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 092 ]
ASC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 049 ]
ASC:
Enable USER
[ 003 136 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 061 ]
ASC:
Disable USER
[ 003 135 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
ASC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
020
021
022
023
19Z5232A
Fig. 3-207: Enabling/disabling the automatic synchronism check function.
3-274
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28.2
ASC Readiness and Blocking

The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no
blocking. Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.c.b. was
tripped or by an appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can
specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with
or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and timedelayed reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a
check.
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
ASC:
Blocking EXT
[ 037 048 ]
ASC:
Blocked
[ 038 018 ]
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Ready
[ 037 079 ]
ASC:
Not ready
[ 037 082 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable w.block
305 001
0
1
ASC:
Close reject.w.block
305 002
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
HSR
303 156
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR
303 006
ASC:
305 000
Parameter
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
003
032
032
032
001
030
030
030
002
031
031
031
19Z51BCA
Fig. 3-208: ASC readiness and blocking.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-275
P437
3.28.3
3 Operation
Close Request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, via setting parameters or from an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Close requests via a setting
parameter or the binary signal input are accepted only if no ARC cycle is running.
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
306 012
305 000
ASC:
MC close requ. USER
[ 018 004 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
MC Close request
034 018 ]
ASC:
MC Close request EXT
[ 037 062 ]
50ms
ASC:
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
50ms
1
500ms
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address
037 063
ASC:
Test MC close r USER
[ 018 005 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1
100ms
0: don't execute
1
500ms
1: execute
ASC:
Test MC close r. EXT
[ 037 064 ]
ASC:
Test MC close requ.
[ 034 019 ]
47Z8072
Fig. 3-209: Close request for auto-reclose control.
3-276
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
306 012
305 000
ASC:
AR close requ. USER
[ 008 238 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
AR close request
[ 008 239 ]
ASC:
AR close request EXT
008 236 ]
50ms
ASC:
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
50ms
1
500ms
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address
037 063
ASC:
Test AR close r.USER
[ 008 237 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1
100ms
0: don't execute
1
500ms
1: execute
ASC:
Test AR close requ.
008 240 ]
ASC:
Test AR close r. EXT
[ 000 106 ]
47Z8073
Fig. 3-210: Close request for manual close command.
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A SC : C lose r e j ecti on signal is generated for 100 ms.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-277
P437
3 Operation
Close enable
Close reject
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
306 012
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
010
034
034
034
MAIN:
[ 015 067 ]
D5Z5073B
Fig. 3-211: Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection.
3.28.4
ASC Operating Modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting
(see Section 3.28.9, (p. 3-284)). The following operating mode settings are
possible:
3.28.5
Voltage-checked
Synchronism-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked
Continuous Synchronism Check

Synchronism checks, e.g. monitoring of voltage and/or synchronism
requirements, are carried out continuously during the duration of the set ASC
operative time. The following signals are updated according to their current
states:
A SC: Close en abl e
ASC : Close e nable, volt .ch
A SC: Close en able ,s yn c.ch
AS C: C lose reje ction
The ASC maximum operative time setting is 6000 s (100 minutes).
3-278
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28.6
Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions

The close enable conditions can now be set separately for auto-reclose control
and manual close command. This makes it possible to select different operating
modes as well as different tolerance ranges.
Close enable conditions for Auto-reclose control
Close enable conditions for Manual close

command
ASC: AR op. mod e P Sx
ASC: MC op. mode PSx
ASC : AR with tCB PSx
A SC: MC wit h tC B P Sx
ASC : AR Op .m od e v -chk .PSx
A SC: MC op.mode v-chk.P Sx
ASC: AR V> volt .che ck PSx
A SC: MC V> volt.che ck P Sx
ASC: AR V< volt.ch eck PSx
ASC: MC V < vol t. che ck P Sx
ASC: AR tmin v -check PSx
A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx
ASC: AR V> syn c.che ck PSx
ASC: MC V > sync.che ck PSx
ASC: AR de lta V max PSx
ASC: MC del ta V m ax P Sx
ASC: AR de lta f max PSx
A SC: MC de lta f max PSx
ASC: AR de lta phi max PSx
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
ASC: AR t min sy nc.ch k PSx
ASC: MC tmin s yn c.chk PSx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request
is issued by the integrated ARC (for an RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request
from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function ASC: AR
close req ue st EXT.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-279
P437
3 Operation
3.28.7
Considering the CB Close Time

In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting A SC: AR with tC B PSx to Yes
makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker closing time when issuing a
close command.
The condition for slightly asynchronous power systems is given if the difference
in frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < f < fmax. If this condition and
the voltage condition (V < Vmax) are met then the next point in time is
continuously calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding
voltage of the three-phase system are in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase
angles approaches 0). The close command, allowing for the set CB close time
M AIN: t C B,cl ose is then issued sooner.
yes
yes
Close with tCB
f < 10 mHz
no
no
Normal mode,
Asynchronous mode,
Synchronous mode,
close if:
close if:
close if:
V < Vmax
V < Vmax
V < Vmax
f < fmax
f < fmax
< max
< max
for tmin,synchr.
for tmin,synchr.
for tmin,synchr.
within operative time.

Raise close command
so that closing takes place at
= 0
(taking CD close time and
internal delays into account).
47Z1085A_EN
Fig. 3-212: Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check.
3-280
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28.8
Voltage-Checked Close Enable

The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltagechecked close enable without affecting the former. For this purpose the three
phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to
determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values.
ASC: AR V> vo lt .check PSx
ASC: MC V > vol t.ch eck PSx
ASC: AR V< vo lt .check PSx
ASC: MC V< vol t.ch eck P Sx
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three
phase-to-ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to
meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding
to the set operating mode for the voltage synchronism check are met, then the
close enable is issued after the set minimum time has elapsed.
ASC: AR tm in v-ch eck PSx
A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately
for each parameter subset:
Vref but not V
V but not Vref
Not V and not Vref
Not V or not Vref
Vref & Z1 but not V
N V&Vref or V&n Vref
Where the operating mode is set to Vref & Z1 but not V the significance of Z1
has been modified several times during the development of the P437. Basically
this condition should guarantee that the voltage-checked reclose control will only
occur after a highspeed trip issued to clear a line fault. With a time-delayed trip
(ARC start via operative time 2) the reclose control should only occur after a
voltage input is received from the remote end, including a synchronism check
(V, f, ).
Originally Z1 was actually the condition that would make distance protection
trip in zone 1. This was sufficient with plain protection systems. As of version
P437 611, the significance of &Z1 was then extended to [Trip with DIST Z1]
OR [Trip with Z1,ze and PSIG].
Perhaps this approach did not suffice for applications with line differential
protection operating concurrently. Causes for problems were for example:
States during the loss of the protective signaling interface and faults at the
remote end of the line.
Extremely short fault duration (2 periods) with a too fast trip command
by L-DIFF and CB, so that DIST starting has already dropped out before the
PSIG enable signal has been received.
High ohmic faults where DIST does not start but L-DIFF does.
The line selective trip signals from L-DIFF operating in parallel (or DIFF operating
in parallel) have been mapped to binary signal inputs on the P437
(MAIN : Parall el tri p EXT etc.). Together with this trip a start by the ARC will
also occur.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-281
P437
3 Operation
In order to address these problems the condition Z1 is now (as of version

P437 630) no longer dependent on individual protection functions but rather on
the recognition that the trip has occurred during operative time 1 of ARC.
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
AR V> volt.check PSx
[ * ]
3: Volt.&sync.-checked
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
AR V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
ASC:
305 008
Vref
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1
Vref3
2
1
6
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
DIST:
303 565
ASC:
Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
Parameter
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
ASC:
AR V> volt.check PSx
ASC:
AR V< volt.check PSx
ASC:
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
018 025
018 026
018 027
018 028
026 017
077 043
078 043
079 043
018 017
077 040
078 040
079 040
018 029
018 030
018 031
018 032
018 018
077 041
078 041
079 041
47Z1380C
Fig. 3-213: Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control.
3-282
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
MC V> volt.check PSx
[ * ]
3: Volt./sync.-checked
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
MC V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
ASC:
305 008
Vref
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1
Vref3
2
1
6
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
DIST:
303 565
ASC:
Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ASC:
[ 037 084 ]
Parameter
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
ASC:
MC V> volt.check PSx
ASC:
MC V< volt.check PSx
ASC:
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
000 056
000 057
000 058
000 059
000 064
000 065
000 066
000 067
000 068
000 069
000 070
000 071
000 060
000 061
000 062
000 063
000 072
000 073
000 074
000 075
47Z1381C
Fig. 3-214: Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-283
P437
3.28.9
3 Operation
Synchronism-Checked Close Enable

Before a close enable signal is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for
synchronism. Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set
threshold value.
(When with a three-phase voltage the setting of MAIN: Neutr.pt. t reat .
P Sx is Low-imped. grounding both the phase-to-ground and the phase-tophase voltages are checked. If the setting is Isol./res.w.start.PG only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.)
ASC: AR V> sync.che ck P Sx
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference

voltage must not exceed the set threshold value.
ASC : AR de lt a Vmax PS x
ASC: MC delta V m ax P Sx
The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference

voltage must not exceed the set threshold value.
ASC : AR de lt a f max PSx
ASC: MC V> sync.che ck PSx
ASC: MC delta f max PSx
The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage

must not exceed the set threshold value. (In these comparisons the set
offset angle AS C: Ph i of fs e t PSx is taken into account.)
ASC : AR de lt a ph i m ax P Sx
A SC: MC de lta phi max PSx
If these conditions are met for at least the set time ASC : A R tmin sync.chk
PS x or A SC: MC tmi n sync. chk P Sx, respectively, then a close enable signal
is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in voltage,
angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are
stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In
the event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the
new data.
3-284
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Active
Parameter
MAIN:
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
AR V> sync.check PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
018
018
018
018
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
305 003
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
025
026
027
028
034
042
042
042
011
035
035
035
1
*
2
3
1: Voltage-checked
2: Sync.-checked
Parameter
ASC:
AR delta Vmax PSx
ASC:
AR delta f max PSx
ASC:
AR delta phi max PSx
ASC:
AR tmin sync.chk PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
012
036
036
036
014
038
038
038
013
037
037
037
015
039
039
039
3: Volt.&sync.-checked
MAIN:
[ * ]
ASC:
AR V> sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
305 008
Vref
1
2
ASC:
AR tmin sync.chk PSx
Vref3
[ * ]
2
1
100ms
ASC:
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
AR delta Vmax PSx
[ * ]
Vmax
ASC:
Volt. sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC:
Volt. magn. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC:
AR delta f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
fmax
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
AR delta phi max PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
max
- corr
47Z1112A
Fig. 3-215: Synchronism-checked close enable for auto-reclose control.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-285
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Active
Parameter
MAIN:
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
MC V> sync.check PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
000
000
000
000
018
077
078
079
000
000
000
000
305 003
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
056
057
058
059
034
042
042
042
052
053
054
055
1
*
2
3
1: Voltage-checked
2: Sync.-checked
Parameter
ASC:
MC delta Vmax PSx
ASC:
MC delta f max PSx
ASC:
MC delta phi max PSx
ASC:
MC tmin sync.chk PSx
set
set
set
set
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
1
2
3
4
080
081
082
083
084
086
087
088
089
091
092
093
098
099
100
101
3: Volt./sync.-checked
MAIN:
[ * ]
ASC:
MC V> sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
305 008
Vref
ASC:
MC tmin sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
Vref3
2
1
100ms
ASC:
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
MC delta Vmax PSx
[ * ]
Vmax
ASC:
Volt. sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC:
MC delta f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Volt. magn. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
fmax
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC delta phi max PSx
[ * ]
max
- corr
47Z1113A
Fig. 3-216: Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close command.
3-286
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28.10
Voltage/Synchronism-Checked Close Enable

If this setting has been selected, then the close enable signal is issued if the
conditions for voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
ASC:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close reject.w.block
305 002
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
010
034
034
034
D5Z5076A
Fig. 3-217: ASC sequence control.
3.28.11
Testing the ASC Function

For test purposes a close request can be issued via a setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Fig. 3-218, (p. 3-288)). In this
case no close command is issued and it is not counted.
Separate triggering parameters are available for testing the function with
parameters for manual (MC) and automatic (AR) reclosure.
Triggering parameter for auto-reclose control
Triggering parameter for manual close command
ASC: AR close re qu. USER
ASC: MC close re qu . USER
ASC: AR close re qu est EXT
ASC: MC Close re qu es t EXT
ASC: AR close re quest
A SC: MC Cl ose requ es t
ASC: Tes t AR close r.USER
ASC: Te st MC close r USER
ASC: Tes t AR close r. EXT
ASC: Te st MC close r. EXT
ASC: Tes t AR close re qu.
A SC: Test MC close re qu.
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request.
The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and
ASC : Cl ose e nable is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no
network synchronism is registered, a 100 ms signal ASC : C lose r ejection is
issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-287
P437
3 Operation
Close enable
Close reject
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
306 012
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
>
100 ms
010
034
034
034
19Z5230A
Fig. 3-218: ASC sequence during testing.
3-288
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.28.12
ASC Counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
Number of reclosures after a close request via setting parameters or an

appropriately configured binary signal input
Number of close requests
Number of close rejections
The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are
displayed) or as a group.
ASC:
>S 1 1
305 000
>R 1
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
&
+
R
306 012
ASC:
No. RC aft. man.clos
[ 004 009 ]
ASC:
No. close requests
[ 009 033 ]
R
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
No. close rejections
[ 009 034 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1377A
Fig. 3-219: ASC counters.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-289
P437
3.29
3 Operation
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection (Function Group

GFSC)
In the event of single-phase high-resistance faults, the measured fault data are
often insufficient for fault detection and selective clearing by the distance
protection function. To cover for this situation, ground fault (short-circuit)
protection is integrated into the protection device as a highly sensitive backup
protection function. Consequently, ground fault (short-circuit) protection is
operating in parallel with and independently of distance protection.
3.29.1
Disabling or Enabling Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection

subsets) via GFSC : Gen er al en able USER. It is enabled as a function of a
parameter subset at GFSC: E nabl e P Sx. If these enabling functions have been
activated, ground fault (short-circuit) protection (GFSC) can be disabled or
enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal
inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs
have equal status in this regard. If only the GFSC: Enable EXT function is
assigned to a binary signal input, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection
(GFSC) is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a
negative edge. If only the GFSC: Di sable EXT function is assigned to a binary
signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-290
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
General enable USER
018[ 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
GFSC:
Enabled
[ 038 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
xxx[ xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
Address
039 095
Address
039 096
GFSC:
Ext. enabled
[ 039 097 ]
GFSC:
Enable EXT
[ 039 095 ]
GFSC:
Enable USER
003[ 138 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC:
Disable EXT
[ 039 096 ]
GFSC:
Disable USER
003[ 137 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
GFSC:
Ready
[ 039 093 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
GFSC:
Not ready
[ 039 094 ]
GFSC:
Blocked
310 002
Parameter
GFSC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
072
073
074
075
47Z1117A
Fig. 3-220: Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
3.29.2
Measured Values from the Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection
Measured variables for the GFSC function

Depending on the setting the neutral-displacement voltage used is either the
value calculated by the P437 or the measured value of the neutral-point
displacement voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-291
P437
3 Operation
As a value for the calculated neutral-displacement voltage, ground fault (shortcircuit) protection uses measurements of the same phase-to-ground voltages
measured by distance protection. From these voltages the P437 calculates the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG.
With the second option (measured value), it is possible to establish ground fault
(short-circuit) protection (GFSC) and its associated ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling (GSCSG) irrespective of the installed system voltage
transformers.
As the measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage, ground fault
(short-circuit) protection (GFSC) uses the neutral-displacement voltage formed
externally via the fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutraldisplacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers
(see Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-69)).
The residual current IN is drawn from a separate transformer in the P437 that is
looped into the phase current transformer neutral or connected to a Holmgreen
group. The connection example shown in Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70) shows the
transformer looped into the current transformer neutral.
3.29.3
Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection

If the calculated value for the neutral-displacement voltage is used then ground
fault (short-circuit) protection is blocked should the signal MC MON: Meas. circ.
V fault y = Yes is present.
With the second option (measured value) GFSC is not blocked by this signal as an
other measuring circuit is used. The signal MAI N: M.c.b. trip VNG EX T is used
instead.
3-292
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Blocking EXT
[ 043 068 ]
GFSC:
Blocked
MCMON:
[ 038 023
310 002
GFSC:
Evaluation VNG
002 136 ]
1
2
1: Calculated
2: Measured
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip VNG EXT
[ 002 183 ]
300ms
GFSC:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 006 020 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip VNG
[ 098 132 ]
m out of n
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032
. ]
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
selected
conditions occurs
47Z1307 B
Fig. 3-221: Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
GFSC:
Evaluation VNG
[ 002 136 ]
VN-G
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
1 ... 2
1: Calculated
GFSC:
VNG
310 001
2: Measured
0.7Vnom/3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z1115A
Fig. 3-222: Selecting the measured variable.
3.29.4
Starting
The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured.
They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds
(GFSC : IN > and GFSC: V NG>). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a
settable timer stage (GFSC: Start. ope r. de lay) is started. Once the trigger
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-293
P437
3 Operation
has dropped out, the starting persists until the settable release delay
(GFSC : St art. re le as. de lay) has elapsed. Directional measurement is
enabled if the current reaches 70% of the set threshold (GFSC : IN>) and the
voltage exceeds the trigger threshold (GFSC : VNG >).
GFSC:
IN>
[ 018 063 ]
GFSC:
Ready
[ 039 093 ]
f0
GFSC:
IN> triggered
IN
[ 039 088 ]
IN / 0.7
GFSC:
VNG>
[ 018 062 ]
f0
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
GFSC:
Start. oper. delay
[ 018 064 ]
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
Start. releas. delay
[ 018 065 ]
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
VNG filtered
303 950
0.7Vnom/3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z0127A
Fig. 3-223: Starting.
3.29.5
Directional Tripping
The P437 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The measured angle is
displayed. The position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions is determined by setting GFSC: Angle phi N. A forward or
backward (reverse)-directional decision results if the following angle conditions
are met:
Forward direction: (90+G) < (270+G)
Backward (reverse) direction: (90+G) > (270+G)
where:
: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point
G: Setting for GFS C: Angle phi N
3-294
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
The directional decisions (GFSC : F au lt forward / L S and GFSC: Fault

backward / BS) are followed by timer stages GFSC: t1 (forward) and
GF SC: t2 (back ward). Once the timer stages have elapsed, a trip signal is
issued.
Backward direction
VC-G
90+(IN)
VG-N = -VN-G
VA-G
(IN)
IN
Forward direction
VB-G
47Z1090A
Fig. 3-224: Directional characteristic.
3.29.6
Improved Directional Measurement for Series-Compensated Line

Applications xyz
Ground fault protection is based on the assumption of inductive zero-sequence
source impedances. In case of series compensated lines with a high
compensation degree this condition may not be fulfilled.
The following figures show the measuring conditions of GFSC for forward and
backward (reverse) short-circuits. Problematic is the measurement of line side
faults: Due to the line side VT, the measured voltage results from the voltage
drop caused by the zero-sequence current across the (inductive) equivalent
source impedance ZS0(fwd) and the series-capacitance XC0. Depending on whether
the source reactance is bigger or smaller than the series capacitance the voltage
is inductive or capacitive versus the zero-sequence current. Problems will occur
for a high compensation degree (big XC0) and for strong sources (small XS0(fwd)).
The fault location or distance to the fault does not matter at all.
For backward (reverse) faults, this problem needs not to be considered, as the
source impedance then is always inductive.
Adding a current-proportional voltage to the measured voltage (crosspolarization) as follows solved this problem:
V(GFSC) = Vmeas + jX0I0 = (ZS0(fwd) - jXC0 + jX0)I0
X0 is settable at GF SC : C omp. re actan ce X0, the recommended setting is X0
= XC0, so that the same condition as on a normal inductive line is obtained:
V(GFSC) = ZS0(fwd)I0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-295
P437
3 Operation
The ground fault starting condition VNG> remains using the directly measured
neutral displacement voltage. In order to secure that directional measurement is
only done with a reliably high absolute value of the line-to-line voltage V(GFSC),
this value must always exceed a minimum of 50 mV.
1pG faults forward (on the line)

-jXC0
To neg.-sequ.
system neutral
ZL0
Imeas = IN = 3 I0
Z S0(fwd)
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZS0(fwd) - jXC0) * I0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Backward
Vmeas (capacitive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} < XC0)
Vmeas (inductive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} > XC0)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
Imeas= IN = 3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)

47Z11X1A_EN
Fig. 3-225: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in forward direction.
3-296
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
1pG faults backward

To neg.-sequ.
system neutral
-jXC0
ZL0
Imeas = - IN = - 1/3 I0
ZS0(bwd)
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZL0 + ZS0(bwd) ) * I0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Imeas
Backward
Vmeas (always inductive!)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
IN = 1/3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)

47Z11X2A_EN
Fig. 3-226: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in backward (reverse) direction.
3.29.7
Improved Phase Selection

In cases with very high fault resistances the neutral displacement voltage is too
small to get a starting of P437 ground fault protection. Also the faulty phase
selection based on distance starting could not be secured in such cases, and so
no 1pole trip of ground fault signaling could be obtained.
To resolve these issues, there are the following concepts:
3.29.7.1
Faulty Phase Selection

If neutral overcurrent starting (GFSC IN>) operates, then the relay checks
whether the faulty phase could be determined based on a delta-current
measurement (where the delta is calculated over a 5 cycle period). This delta
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-297
P437
3 Operation
measurement is only done at the IN> starting. Its valid result is memorized until
the IN> trigger resets.
The phase selection is further depending on the operation of the distance
function:
If DIST has identified a multi-phase(-to-ground) fault, then the above phase

selection is disabled.
If DIST has identified a single phase-to-ground fault, then this phase is

used.
These signals are used to provide 1-pole tripping of ground fault signaling
function (GSCSG) if no phase selection by distance starting is available (initiating
1p HSR cycle, as previously guided by distance starting). They are also used to
apply the virtual current polarization technique (Section 3.29.7.2, (p. 3-298)).
3.29.7.2
Virtual Current Polarization

If sufficient neutral displacement voltage is present (VNG> starting), then GFSC
uses this voltage for directional measurement.
Otherwise, virtual current polarization is applied, i.e. based on the
determination of the faulty phase the relay calculates the polarizing voltage as
sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages, e.g. for an AG fault:
Vpol = VBN + VCN
This Vpol is equal to the inverted faulty-phase voltage, so it is clearly high enough
to secure reliable measurement.
Ideally, for VNG = 0 this polarizing voltage gets Vpol = VBN + VCN = VAN where
the sign is automatically taken into consideration in the direction
determination.
To provide backwards compatible operation, this method needs to be enabled by
user, setting GFSC: V irtual curr e nt pol. to Yes.
3-298
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GFSC
GFSC:
IN> triggered
no
[ 039 088 ]
yes
Determination of faulty
phase
GFSC reset
DIST:
Starting
>2p(E)
multi-phase fault
DIST:
Starting
= AN [BN, CN]
Phase A [B, C]
DIST:
Starting
= only N
Phase with max. I
No DIST: Starting
Phase with max. I
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
yes
no
no
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
[ 006 009 ]
yes
no
Faulty phase
determined?
yes
Calculation
of
Vpol = VPG
only the 2
healthy phases)
Direction cannot
be determined
Directional Determ.
Directional Determ.
= (Vpol,IN)
= (VNG,IN)
GFSC
47Z1205B
Fig. 3-227: GFSC Phase selection and optional virtual current polarization.
3.29.8
Voltage-Dependent or Current-Dependent Tripping

By setting operating mode tS, the user can choose between voltage-dependent
or current-dependent tripping. After the voltage-dependent or current-dependent
time has elapsed, a trip signal is issued either independently of the directional
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-299
P437
3 Operation
decision or when there is a directional decision for the forward direction

depending on the setting at GF SC : C rite ria tS active.
3.29.8.1
Voltage-Dependent Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the
voltage-dependent tripping time. Tripping time tS is calculated as follows.
tS =
2s
| VN-G |
10
V nom - 0.2
0.6364 1.1
3
Time-Voltage Characteristic (for Vnom = 100V)
45
s
40
35
Tripping Time tS
30
25
20
15
10
V
0
10
11
Voltage VN-G
47Z0129A
Fig. 3-228: Voltage-time characteristic.
3-300
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
1
2
1: VNG-dependent
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
tA
GFSC:
Volt.-dep. trip sig.
GFSC:
VNG filtered
303 950
VNG
303 954
47Z0130A
Fig. 3-229: Forming the voltage-dependent trip signal.
3.29.8.2
Current-Dependent Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the
current-dependent tripping time. The user can select from a large number of
characteristics (see table below). If the current exceeds 1.05 times the set
reference current, calculation of the tripping time begins. A trip signal is issued
as a function of the set characteristic. The tripping characteristics available for
selection are shown in figures Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-303) to Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-305).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-301
P437
No.
Tripping
Characteristic
Characteristic
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
3 Operation
Formula for the

Tripping
Characteristic
Definite Time
t=k
Per IEC 2553
t =k
Standard Inverse
I
ref
0.02
Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
Long Time Inverse
120.00
1.00
t = k (
(I
Moderately Inverse
6
7
b
) -1
0.14
Per IEEE C37.112
a
(I
Formula for the

Reset
Characteristic
Constants
I
ref
)b - 1
tr =
+ c)
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
t = k (
(I
I
ref
+ c)
tr =
) -1
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938
0.17966
9.00
Short Time Inverse
0.2663
1.2969
0.03393
0.50
10
Long Time Inverse
5.6143
1.0000
2.18592
15.75
11
RI-Type Inverse
t =k
1
0.339 -
12
3-302
RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
I
)
(I
ref
t = k (5.8 - 1.35 ln I
I
ref
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 2553

Characteristic 2: IEC 2553, Very Inverse
Characteristic 1: IEC 2553, Standard Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 2553, Extremely Inverse
Characteristic 4: IEC 2553, Long Time Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Fig. 3-230: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-303
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112

Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=1
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse

1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-231: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
3-304
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI

Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse

1000
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-232: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.

IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Fig. 3-233: RI-type inverse and RXIDGtype inverse tripping characteristics.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-305
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Iref,N
[ 018 076 ]
1.05 Iref,G
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
Characteristic N
[ 018 078 ]
GFSC:
Factor kt,N
[ 018 077 ]
GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
|IN|/Iref,G
303 955
GFSC:
Characteristic N
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
47Z0131A
Fig. 3-234: Forming the current-dependent trip signal.
3.29.9
Non-Directional Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection starts settable timer stage t3.
Once t3 and tS have elapsed, a trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection.
3-306
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains
present until the starting drops off even if the direction decision changes or is
reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GFSC:
GFSC:
Angle phi N
[ 018 061 ]
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
t1 elapsed
GFSC:
t2 (backward)
[ 018 067 ]
GFSC:
t2 elapsed
[ 038 097 ]
[ 038 098 ]
GFSC:
Trip signal
(90+G)>(270+G)
GFSC:
VNG filtered
GFSC:
t1 (forward)
[ 018 066 ]
[ 039 092 ]
(90+G)<(270+G)
303 950
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0
1
2
0: blocked
1: forward
2: non-directional
GFSC:
Volt.-dep. trip sig.
303 954
GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
303 955
GFSC:
t3 (non-directional)
[ 018 068 ]
GFSC:
t3 elapsed
[ 038 099 ]
GFSC:
Angle VNG/IN
[ 009 098 ]
47Z0132A
Fig. 3-235: Forming the trip signal.
3.29.10
Counters
The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The
counter can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-307
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Trip signal
[ 039 092 ]
GFSC:
No. of trip signals
[ 009 054 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
47Z13AHA
Fig. 3-236: Counting the trip signals.
3.29.11
Monitoring the Measured Values

If only one of the two triggers has responded (IN> or VNG>), and if at least one of
the phase-to-ground voltages exceeds 0.7 Vnom/3, a signal will be issued after
10 s.
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
& 1
10 s
GFSC:
Monitor. triggered
[ 038 095 ]
&
SFMON:
Meas. circuits GFSC
[ 098 013 ]
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
D5Z50AJB
Fig. 3-237: Monitoring the measured values.
3-308
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.30
Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling (Function

Group GSCSG)
In order to make selective instantaneous tripping possible ground fault (shortcircuit) protection includes the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
function. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling operates in parallel with
and independently of the protective signaling function of distance protection.
Only when a common communication channel is used is it necessary to block the
protective signaling echo. Furthermore, measures for blocking the weak-indeed
logic of distance protection protective signaling are implemented in the Signal
comp. release operating mode. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is
coordinated with distance protection protective signaling through appropriate
time delays.
An external signal transmission device is required for operation of ground fault
(short-circuit) protection signaling.
3.30.1
Disabling or Enabling Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection

Signaling
subsets) via GSC SG: Ge ne ral e nable USE R. It is enabled as a function of a
parameter subset via GSC SG: Enable PSx. If these enabling functions have
been activated, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be disabled
or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status.
If only the PSI G: Enable E XT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then
protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is
disabled by a negative edge. If only the GSCSG: D isable EXT function is
assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-309
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
General enable USER
[ 023 069 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
GSCSG:
Enabled
[ 023 070 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
043 050
Address
043 051
GSCSG:
Ext. enabled
[ 043 066 ]
GSCSG:
Enable EXT
[ 043 050 ]
GSCSG:
Enable USER
[ 003 140 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GSCSG:
Disable EXT
[ 043 051 ]
GSCSG:
Disable USER
[ 003 139 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
GSCSG:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
023
023
023
023
1
2
3
4
071
072
073
074
45Z5043A
Fig. 3-238: Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
3.30.2
Readiness of Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling

Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready if the following
conditions are satisfied:
3-310
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is ready.
There is no external blocking.
No fault has been detected in the communication channel.
The GFSC function is not inhibited by either MCMON: Me as. circ. V

faulty (in case GFSC: Evaluati on V NG = Calculated) or by
MA IN : M.c.b. tri p VNG EXT (in case GFSC: Ev aluat ion VNG =
Measured).
None of the conditions selected with GFSC: Fct .as sign . blocking has
been detected.
External blocking is carried out either via a binary signal input configured for
GSC SG: Block ing EXT or via a binary signal input configured for
PSIG: Blockin g E XT, depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The fault signal from the external signal transmission device can be either
connected to a binary signal input, configured for GSCSG: Telecom. faulty
EX T or to a binary signal input, configured for P SIG: Te le c. fault y (A) EXT or
PSI G: Telec.fault y (B) EXT depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The condition for blocking the ground fault protection scheme logic is user
settable at GSCSG: Fct.assign. blocking because of sometimes conflicting
application restraints. Some considerations about the various blocking conditions
are given below:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-311
P437
3 Operation
Blocking with CB auxiliary contacts
If distance starting resets, but the trip signal is still present (e.g. because of
the presence of parallel or transfer trip signals), then the start of the 1-pole
dead time of internal autoreclosing is delayed. In order to prevent a 3-pole
trip decision from GSCSG now (as phase selection is no longer possible),
GSCSG needs to be blocked by using the CBs auxiliary contacts.
No instant blocking with 1-pole distance trip
3-312
If one (strong infeed) end issues a fast zone 1 distance 1-pole trip, then
previously GSCSG was blocked almost immediately. At the remote (weak
infeed) end only GFSC senses the fault. In order to allow a fast tripping of
GSCSG at the remote end under this condition, the function must remain
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
active at the strong infeed end as long as possible, i.e. until a "CB open"
condition is signaled.
GSCSG:
Not ready
MAIN:
Protection active
[ 043 058 ]
306 001
GSCSG:
Enabled
GFSC:
Not ready
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
2
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Blocking EXT
[ 043 052 ]
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
SFMON:
Telecom.faulty/GSCSG
GSCSG:
Telecom. faulty EXT
[ 043 053 ]
[ 098 027 ]
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT
[ 008 094 ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
GSCSG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 046 060 ]
COMM3:
Sig.asg. comm.fault
[ 120 034 ]
0
1
2
3
4
5
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
None
Telecom. flt.(A)PSIG
Telecom.faulty GSCSG
TCflt.(A)PSIG &GSCSG
Telecom. flt.(B)PSIG
TCflt.(B)PSIG &GSCSG
GSCSG:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 002 180 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
m out of n
[ 042 032 ]
.
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
conditions occurs
47Z8018A
Fig. 3-239: Readiness of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
3.30.3
Communication Link Faulty Signal

The GS CSG: Te le com. f aul ty status signal is available in conjunction with the
implementation of the protective interface.
This signal is set by the G SCSG: Te l e com. fau lt y E XT logic binary input
function as well as by COMM3: Commu nications fau lt if the
C OM M3 : Sig.asg. comm.f aul t parameter has been set accordingly.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-313
P437
3.30.4
3 Operation
Tripping Time
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready, then the tripping timer
is started by ground fault (short-circuit) protection starting.
GSCSG:
Tripping time
[ 023 075 ]
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
&
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
&
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
[ 006 009 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
47Z1325 A
Fig. 3-240: Tripping time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
3.30.5
Failure of frequency transmission can be signaled to the P437 via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Which inputs are activated is
determined by the channel operating mode setting at GSCSG: C hannel mode.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling uses a different communication
channel than protective signaling, then the following occurs, as long as
frequency monitoring has been enabled: when the binary signal input configured
for GSC SG: Fre qu .mon .tri gd. E XT is triggered, the P437 allows an operate
delay of approximately 20 ms to elapse and then generates a receive signal for
150 ms.
3-314
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Frequency monitoring
[ 023 085 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2
0: No
2: Common channel
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT
[ 043 054 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
305 152
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
47Z0135A
Fig. 3-241: Frequency monitoring.
3.30.6
Transient Blocking
In the event of a directional change of ground fault (short-circuit) protection from
backward (reverse) to forward, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
will generate a blocking signal for the time period set at GSCSG: tBlock.
GSCSG:
tBlock
[ 023 077 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
S1 1
[ 039 091 ]
R1
&
1
t
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
304 001
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
[ 043 061 ]
47Z0136B
Fig. 3-242: Transient blocking.
3.30.7
Operating Modes of Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection

Signaling and the Communication Channel
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be operated in two different
modes: Signal comparison release or Signal comparison blocking. For the
communication channel, the user can specify whether ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling will use a different communication channel than distance
protection protective signaling or whether the same channel will be used. If the
same communication channel is being used, then the operating mode settings
for protective signaling and ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling must
be identical. Otherwise there will be a fault signal (see Section 3.26, (p. 3-212)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-315
P437
3.30.8
3 Operation
Signal Comparison Release Scheme

If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the forward direction, a
signal is sent to the remote station once the tripping time of ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling has elapsed. In the event of a directional change
from backward (reverse) to forward, the send signal is blocked for the duration of
transient blocking.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are
satisfied:
There is a receive signal.
The ground fault (short-circuit) protection function has detected a fault in

the forward direction.
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling

function has elapsed.
No transient blocking has been set.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling and distance protection

protective signaling use a common communication channel, then blocking of the
weak indeed logic of distance protection protective signaling will be implemented
if the following conditions are satisfied:
3-316

Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the backward

(reverse) direction.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
GSCSG:
[ 039 090 ]
304 002
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
[ 037 254 ]
GSCSG:
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
GSCSG:
Bl. PSIG weak infeed
304 000
304 003
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
45Z8038A
Fig. 3-243: GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the Signal comp. release (permissive) operating mode and
blocking of the weak indeed logic of distance protection protective signaling.
3.30.9
Signal Comparison Blocking Scheme

If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse)
direction, a signal is sent to the remote station. In the event of a directional
change from backward (reverse) to forward, the send signal is extended for the
set duration of transient blocking. Depending on the setting at GSCSG: Block.
sig. n ondir ., a send signal is already generated if directional measurement of
ground fault (short-circuit) protection has been enabled and ground fault (shortcircuit) protection has not made a forward decision.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are
satisfied:
There is no receive signal.
The ground fault (short-circuit) protection function has detected a fault in

the forward direction.

There is no transient blocking in the remote station.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-317
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
2: Common channel
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
GSCSG:
304 001
304 002
GSCSG:
Block. sig. nondir.
[ 023 089 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
[ 039 090 ]
GSCSG:
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
304 000
47Z0139A
Fig. 3-244: Send signal and trip signal in the operating mode Signal comp. block..
3.30.10
Weak-Infeed Logic
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling has a weak-infeed logic
function that makes tripping possible if ground fault (short-circuit) protection
does not start. The user has the option to choose whether in this case the trip
signal will be issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling when
there is a directional decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection in the
forward direction or when the GFSC: VNG> trigger value is exceeded.
3-318
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Weak infeed trip
[ 023 084 ]
0
1
2
0: No
1: With directional r.
2: With VNG> release
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Op.delay weak infeed
[ 023 087 ]
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
304 000
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
[ 037 254 ]
45Z8039A
Fig. 3-245: Weak-infeed logic.
3.30.11
Trip Mode
Depending on the GSCSG: Trip mode setting, ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling can trigger a single-pole or three-pole trip that can activate
the ARC function. If the trip mode setting is 1/3-pole trip w.HSR then when there
is single-pole starting of the distance protection function there will be a trip in the
phase in which the starting condition is present. When there is multi-pole starting
of the distance protection function, ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling will reach a three-pole trip decision. If one of the other two operating
modes has been set, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling always
generates a three-pole trip. If the operating mode is 3p-pole trip w/o.HSR, then
the ARC will be blocked by a trip generated by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-319
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Trip mode
[ 023 088 ]
1
2
3
1: 1/3-pole trip w.HSR
2: 3p-pole trip w.HSR
3: 3p-pole trip w/o.HSR
GSCSG:
Trip A
GSCSG:
Trip signal
304 004
[ 043 060 ]
DIST:
Starting A
GSCSG:
Trip B
303 529
304 005
DIST:
Starting B
GSCSG:
Trip C
303 530
304 006
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
304 008
47Z0142A
Fig. 3-246: Operating mode trip.
3.30.12
Echo Function
When a signal is received, an echo pulse can be formed depending on the
setting if ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not detected a fault in the
backward direction. The receive signal must be present for a period longer than
the set operate delay in order for the echo pulse to be activated. If the circuit
breaker is in the open position, then the operate delay is not active. The echo
pulse is transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration. When the
echo pulse is activated, a set blocking time is also started, during the course of
which a new echo pulse is prevented. This prevents a permanent signal from
being transmitted.
3-320
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Echo on receive
[ 023 080 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Operate delay echo
[ 023 081 ]
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Pulse duration echo
[ 023 082 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
S1 1
GSCSG:
304 002
R1
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
304 000
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
GSCSG:
tBlock echo
[ 023 083 ]
45Z6310A
Fig. 3-247: Echo function.
3.30.13
Testing the Communication Channel

The communications link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is
issued through a binary signal input or from the local control panel. It is extended
by the reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal
if the transmission link is in order.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-321
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 023 086 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GSCSG:
Test telecom. EXT
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GSCSG:
304 002
[ 043 056 ]
GSCSG:
Test telecom. chann.
[ 034 029 ]
47Z0143A
Fig. 3-248: Testing the communication channel.
3-322
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.31
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group

DTOC)
A four-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be enabled
concurrently with distance protection. Three separate measuring systems are
available for this purpose for:
Maximum phase current
Negative-sequence current
Residual current
The inrush stabilization function may intervene in the functional sequence of the
DTOC function.
3.31.1
Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection

DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
DTOC:
General enable USER
[ 031 068 ]
0
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
Parameter
DTOC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
098
098
098
098
1: Yes
45Z8089A
Fig. 3-249: Disabling or enabling DTOC protection.
3.31.2
Monitoring the Maximum Phase Current

The three phase currents are monitored by the P437 to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued.
The elapsing of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the selected stages of the
DTOC function are blocked (see Section 3.12.5, (p. 3-89)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-323
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>
&
450 208
MAIN:
Protection active
&
DTOC:
tI> PSx
[ * ]
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
I> PSx
[ * ]
IA
DTOC:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]
IB
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
IC
DTOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT
[ 041 061 ]
DTOC:
tI>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>
DTOC:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
450 209
DTOC:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>>> EXT
[ 041 062 ]
DTOC:
tI>>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>
DTOC:
I>>> PSx
[ * ]
450 210
DTOC:
tI>>> elapsed
[ 040 012 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>>>> EXT
[ 041 100 ]
DTOC:
tI>>>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>>
DTOC:
I>>>> PSx
[ * ]
450 211
DTOC:
tI>>>> elapsed
[ 035 032 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>>
[ 035 023 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
I> PSx
DTOC:
I>> PSx
DTOC:
I>>> PSx
DTOC:
I>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
007
007
007
007
008
008
008
008
009
009
009
009
010
010
010
010
Parameter
DTOC:
tI> PSx
DTOC:
tI>> PSx
DTOC:
tI>>> PSx
DTOC:
tI>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
019
019
019
019
020
020
020
020
021
021
021
021
022
022
022
022
45Z80ALA
Fig. 3-250: Monitoring the phase currents.
3.31.3
Negative-Sequence Current Stages

The P437 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current
values according to this formula. The result depends on the MAIN: Phase
se quence setting.
3-324
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation

1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P437 to detect when it

exceeds the set thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is
issued. The operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary
signal inputs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-325
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
MAIN:
306 014
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
Ineg> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
[ 035 033 ]
Ineg
IC
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg>> EXT
[ 041 103 ]
DTOC:
tIneg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Ineg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>> elapsed
[ 035 034 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 035 025 ]
DTOC:
Block. tIneg>>> EXT
[ 041 104 ]
DTOC:
Ineg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>> elapsed
[ 035 035 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 035 026 ]
DTOC:
Block. tIneg>>>> EXT
[ 041 105 ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Ineg>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> elapsed
[ 035 036 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>>
[ 035 027 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
Ineg> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>>> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
011
011
011
011
012
012
012
012
013
013
013
013
014
014
014
014
Parameter
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>>> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
023
023
023
023
024
024
024
024
025
025
025
025
026
026
026
026
D5Z52AMA
Fig. 3-251: Monitoring the negative-sequence current.
3.31.4
Residual Current Stages

Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the residual current, derived from
the three phase currents or measured at the current transformer T 4.
3-326
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
IC
1
2
IN
1
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter
DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
set
set
set
set
073
073
073
073
1
2
3
4
...
DTOC:
IN
402 625
189
190
202
219
45Z5045B
Fig. 3-252: Selecting the measured value.
The residual current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set

thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The
operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-327
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
MAIN:
306 014
MAIN:
Protection active
DTOC:
IN> PSx
[ * ]
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
DTOC:
IN
402 625
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>> EXT
[ 041 064 ]
DTOC:
IN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 038 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 029 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>>> EXT
[ 041 065 ]
DTOC:
IN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 035 039 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 030 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>>>> EXT
[ 041 101 ]
DTOC:
IN>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
IN> PSx
DTOC:
IN>> PSx
DTOC:
IN>>> PSx
DTOC:
IN>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
015
015
015
015
016
016
016
016
017
017
017
017
018
018
018
018
Parameter
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>>> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
027
027
027
027
028
028
028
028
029
029
029
029
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
030
030
030
030
45Z5046A
Fig. 3-253: Monitoring the residual current.
3.31.4.1
Direction-Dependent Trip of the Residual Current Stages

The P437 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction
determination is enabled when a current stage is started and the neutraldisplacement voltage exceeds the set threshold DTOC: VNG> PSx. The
measured angle is displayed. The position of the straight line separating forward
and backward (reverse) directions is determined by setting DTOC: Angle phi N
PSx. A forward or backward (reverse)-directional decision results if the following
angle conditions are met:
Forward direction: (90+G)>(270+G)
Backward (reverse) direction: (90+G)<(270+G)
Where:
3-328
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point

G = (IN): Setting DTOC : A ngl e ph i N PSx
Backward direction
VC-G
90+(IN)
VG-N = -VN-G
VA-G
(IN)
IN
Forward direction
VB-G
47Z1090A
Fig. 3-254: Directional characteristic of definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC).

DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 029 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 030 ]
DTOC:
VNG> PSx
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
f0
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
DTOC:
Angle VNG/IN
[ 009 004 ]
DTOC:
IN
402 625
DTOC:
Angle phi N PSx
[
(90+G)>(270+G)
(90+G)<(270+G)
Parameter
DTOC:
VNG> PSx
DTOC:
Angle phi N PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
004
004
004
004
1
2
3
4
045
060
080
139
092
247
248
249
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
42Z50CGA
Fig. 3-255: Direction measurement of definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-329
P437
3 Operation
After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual
current stage is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>>
[ 035 044 ]
DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 038 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>>>
[ 035 045 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 035 039 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip sign. tIN>>>>
[ 035 046 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
set
set
set
set
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
1
2
3
4
032
042
082
091
033
043
083
092
034
044
084
093
035
045
085
094
42Z50CHA
Fig. 3-256: Trip signals of the DTOC residual current stages.
3-330
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.31.4.2
Settable timer start condition of the residual current system

The triggering of the timers for the residual current system can be set as
direction-dependent by setting the following parameter:
DT OC: tI N time r start PSx = With direction
The timers only start if the relevant OC threshold is exceeded and the direction
measured corresponds to the set direction of the respective stage:
D TOC : Dire cti on tIN> P Sx
DTOC: D irection tIN>> P Sx
DTOC: D irecti on tIN>>> PSx
D TOC : Dire ction tIN>>>>PSx
The relevant settings are:
Forward directional
Backward directional
Non-directional
This expanded logic is displayed in Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334).

3.31.4.3
Settable Operation Mode During 1-Pole Dead Time of HSR

The operation mode of each residual current system timer stage and negativesequence overcurrent timer stage during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed
reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle may be set individually.
The following setting parameters are available for the neutral OC elements:
D TOC : tI N> (1pH SR) PSx
D TOC : tI N>> ( 1pH SR ) P Sx
D TOC : tI N>>> ( 1pH SR ) P Sx
DTOC: t IN >>>> ( 1pH SR) PSx
Normal: No change for the DTOC timer stage during a 1-pole dead time.
Normal: The directional decision is ignored during the 1-pole dead time; the
DTOC timer stage operates as if it where set to 'Non-directional'
Normal: During a 1-pole dead time the DTOC timer stage is automatically
blocked. If a starting was present it will be reset. The time delay stage is
also reset.
The same is valid for the negative-sequence elements, but here there are only
two setting options available:
D TOC : tI ne g> ( 1pH SR) PSx
D TOC : tI ne g>> (1pHSR) P Sx
D TOC : tI ne g>>> ( 1pHSR) PSx
DTOC: t In eg >>>>( 1pH SR ) P Sx
3.31.4.4
Normal
Blocked
Neutralizing Directional Operation by Binary Signal Inputs

For each residual current system timer stage, a binary signal input is provided to
disable directional operation. While this binary input signal is TRUE, the stage
operates non-directional. If the stage is set to 'non-directional', then this input
has no influence.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-331
P437
3 Operation
D TOC: Block . di r. t IN > E XT
DT OC : Blck . di r. tIN>> EXT
D TOC : Blk. dir. tIN>>> EX T
DTOC: Bl . dir. tIN>>>> EXT
This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a
measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: Normal
& >1
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
[ * ]
1: Blocked
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
0
DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
[ 035 033 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
set
set
set
set
002
002
002
002
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
160
161
162
163
023
023
023
023
47Z1119A
Fig. 3-257: DTOC operation of negative-sequence elements show for the stage Ineg> with the setting
D T O C : t I n e g > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I n e g > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = Blocked.
3-332
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
[
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
002
002
002
002
072
072
072
072
072
073
074
075
144
145
146
147
032
042
082
091
027
027
027
027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
2: Blocked
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
&
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
DTOC:
Fault N forward
&
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
&
[ 035 048 ]
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
1
2
3
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1108A
Fig. 3-258: DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r
s t a r t P S x = With starting and D T O C : t I N > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to Nondirectional or Blocked.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-333
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
[
Parameter
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
set
set
set
set
002
002
002
002
072
072
072
072
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
144
145
146
147
032
042
082
091
027
027
027
027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
ARC:
[ 037 066 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
&
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
&
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
1
2
3
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
t
&
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1107A
Fig. 3-259: DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r
s t a r t P S x = With direction and D T O C : t I N > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to Nondirectional or Blocked.
3-334
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.31.5
Hold-Time Logic for Intermittent Ground Faults

A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in
the P437.
As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time
is reset. At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN>
starting commences.
As IN> starting ends, the timer stage DTOC: Puls .prol. IN>,int PSx is
started and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened
by the set value of the timer stage.
The accumulation result is compared to the settable limit value at

DTOC: t IN >,int erm. P Sx.
If the limit value is reached and a general starting is present, then a trip
results (D TOC: Trip s ig. tI N>,intm .), which can be configured to the
trip commands 1 and 2.
MAI N: Fct .ass ig.tri p cmd.1 (Address 021 001)

MA IN : Fct.as sig.tri p cmd.2 (Address 021 002)
If the limit value is reached while the timer stage

D TOC : Puls.prol.IN >,i ntP Sx is running, then a trip will occur when the
next general starting phase commences.
With each release of the trigger stage IN>, the set hold-time D TOC: Holdt . tI N>,int m P Sx is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed or after the
hold-time logic has issued a trip (D TO C: Tr ip s ig. tI N>,in tm.)
accumulation is stopped and the accumulation buffer is cleared.
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
[ * ]
&
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
Hold-time logic
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
0
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. elapsed
[ 040 099 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
set
set
set
set
017
073
074
075
017
073
074
075
017
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
055
042
042
042
056
038
038
038
057
039
039
039
49Z6449A
Fig. 3-260: Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-335
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
305 462
DTOC:
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
Setting = 80ms
Setting = 15ms
Setting = 300ms
49Z6450A
Fig. 3-261: Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value.
3-336
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
305 462
DTOC:
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
[ 039 073 ]
<1>= Startings not

illustrated
have occurred
here.
Settings
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
Setting = 80ms
Setting = 15ms
Setting = 300ms
49Z6451A
Fig. 3-262: Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-337
P437
3.32
3 Operation
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)

The inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT) operates with three
separate measuring systems for:
Phase currents system
Residual current.
The inrush stabilization function may intervene in the functional sequence of the
IDMT function.
3.32.1
Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection

IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
IDMT:
General enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
0
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
IDMT:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
070
070
070
070
19Z5020A
Fig. 3-263: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection. (Only IDMT1 is shown; the logic, however, also applies to IDMT2
with different numerical addresses.)
3-338
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.32.2
Time-Dependent Characteristics
The measuring systems for phase currents, residual current and negativesequence current operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negativesequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in the following
figures (Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-340) to Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-342)).
No.
Tripping
Characteristic
Characteristic
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
Formula for the

Tripping
Characteristic
Definite Time
t=k
Per IEC 2553
t =k
Standard Inverse
I
ref
0.02
Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
Long Time Inverse
120.00
1.00
t = k (
(I
Moderately Inverse
6
7
b
) -1
0.14
Per IEEE C37.112
Formula for the

Reset
Characteristic
a
(I
Constants
I
ref
)b - 1
tr =
+ c)
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
t = k (
(I
I
ref
+ c)
tr =
) -1
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938
0.17966
9.00
Short Time Inverse
0.2663
1.2969
0.03393
0.50
10
Long Time Inverse
5.6143
1.0000
2.18592
15.75
11
RI-Type Inverse
t =k
1
0.339 -
12
RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
I
)
(I
ref
t = k (5.8 - 1.35 ln I
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
I
ref
3-339
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 2553

Characteristic 2: IEC 2553, Very Inverse
Characteristic 1: IEC 2553, Standard Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 2553, Extremely Inverse
Characteristic 4: IEC 2553, Long Time Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Fig. 3-264: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
3-340
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112

Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=1
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse

1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-265: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-341
P437
3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI

Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse

1000
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-266: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.

IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
Fig. 3-267: RI-type inverse and RXIDGtype inverse tripping characteristics.
3-342
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.32.3
Enable Thresholds
Minimum Operate Value

A minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for each of the phase
currents, the residual current and the negative-sequence current, valid for
function group IDMT. Each factor IDMT: Factor I,y (y=P for the phase
currents, y=N for the residual current, y=neg for the negative-sequence
current) is multiplied by the reference quantity (Iref,P or Iref,N or Iref,neg,
respectively) in order to form the minimum operate value. The timer stage is
triggered only when the current exceeds the set threshold.
Minimum Trip Time
A minimum trip time ID MT: Min. tri p ti me y PSx may be defined for the
phase currents (y=P), the residual current (y=N) and the negative-sequence
current (y=neg). The respective timer stage is started as soon as the
associated minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the
trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.
t/s 10
neg
IDMT:
Iref,y PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time y PSx
1
1
10
P
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
100
G
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
neg
IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
set 1
007 250
001 173
007 254
set 2
007 251
001 174
007 255
set 3
007 252
001 175
008 002
set 4
007 253
001 176
008 005
Parameter
IDMT:
Min. trip time P PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time N PSx
set 1
072 077
072 079
072 078
set 2
073 077
073 079
073 078
neg
IDMT:
Min.trip time negPSx
set 3
074 077
074 079
074 078
set 4
075 077
075 079
075 078
45Z8004A
Fig. 3-268: Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-343
P437
3.32.4
3 Operation
Phase Current Stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P437 to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value is exceeded in one phase. The P437 will then determine
the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for
further processing. Depending on the characteristic selected and the current
magnitude the P437 will determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time
will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold
irrespective of the current flow magnitude.
When the inrush stabilization function (see Section 3.12.5, (p. 3-89)) is triggered,
the phase current stage as well as the residual current stage is blocked.
However, when a phase starting is present then no subsequent triggering of the
inrush stabilization will be taken into account. (When a change from a singlephase fault to a two-phase fault or from a two-phase fault to a three-phase fault
had occurred, it was possible that, because of transients during the change, the
inrush stabilization was momentarily triggered which would reset the starting
and the timer.)
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-344
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
450 156
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
&
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IDMT:
Starting A
IDMT:
Iref,P PSx
[
*
]
304 359
IDMT:
Starting B
304 360
IDMT:
Starting C
1.05 Iref
304 361
IA
&
IB
&
IC
&
Setting
IDMT:
Characteristic P PSx
IDMT:
[
0: Definite Time
IDMT:
[
2: IEC Very Inverse

IDMT:
Factor kt,P PSx
[
Setting
IDMT:
Release P PSx
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
[
1: Without delay

IDMT:
Release P PSx
2: Delayed as per char.

11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
[
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Block. tIref,P> EXT
[ 040 101 ]
c
IDMT:
Memory P clear
[ 040 110 ]
IP,max/Iref,P
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,P PSx
IDMT:
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
050
050
050
050
056
056
056
056
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor kt,P PSx
IDMT:
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
IDMT:
Release P PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
007
007
007
007
1
2
3
4
053
053
053
053
077
077
077
077
071
071
071
071
059
059
059
059
250
251
252
253
45Z8034A
Fig. 3-269: Phase current stage for IDMT.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-345
P437
3.32.5
3 Operation
Negative-Sequence Current Stage

According to the following formulas the P437 will determine the negativesequence current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set
phase sequence (alternative terminology: Rotary field):
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field):
1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field):
I neg =
1
3
| (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P437 to detect when it

exceeds the set thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of
the set reference current value is exceeded by the negative-sequence current.
Depending on the characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the
P437 will determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no
circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the
negative-sequence current flow magnitude.
When the inrush stabilization function (Section 3.12.5, (p. 3-89)) is triggered, the
negative-sequence current stage is blocked.
signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked
by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
3-346
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
450 161
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
IDMT:
Iref,neg PSx
[
*
]
1.05 Iref
Ineg/Iref,neg
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
&
IA
IDMT:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 040 107 ]
Ineg
IB
IC
Setting
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
[
*
]
IDMT:
Factor kt,neg PSx
[
*
]
Setting
IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
0: Definite Time
IDMT:
[
*
]
2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT:
Hold time neg PSx
[ * ]

IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
[
*
]
1: Without delay

IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
[
*
]
&

11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMT:
Block. tIref,neg>EXT
[ 040 102 ]
IDMT:
Memory neg clear
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg
306 400
[ 040 111 ]
IDMT:
Hold time neg runn.
[ 040 113 ]
IDMT:
tIref,neg> elapsed
[ 040 109 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,neg PSx
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
051
051
051
051
057
057
057
057
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor kt,neg PSx
IDMT:
IDMT:
Hold time neg PSx
IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
007
007
008
008
1
2
3
4
054
054
054
054
078
078
078
078
072
072
072
072
060
060
060
060
254
255
002
005
45Z8035A
Fig. 3-270: Negative-sequence current stage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-347
P437
3 Operation
3.32.6
Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage

A setting specifies which current will be used by the P437 as the residual current:
either the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the
residual current directly measured at the fourth current transformer (T 4).
IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
IN
2
1
IA
IB
IC
1
1: Calculated
IDMT:
IN
307 100
2: Measured
Parameter
IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
075
075
075
075
19Z5022A
Fig. 3-271: Selecting the measured variable.
3.32.7
Residual Current Stage

The residual current is monitored by the P437 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value is exceeded by the residual current. Depending on the
characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P437 will
determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no
circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the
residual current flow magnitude.
signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked
by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
3-348
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,N>
450 160
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT:
Iref,N PSx
c
1.05 Iref
IDMT:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
&
IN/Iref,N
IDMT:
IN
307 100
IDMT:
Characteristic N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
IDMT:
Factor kt,N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
[ * ]
IDMT:
Hold time N PSx
[ * ]
Setting
IDMT:
Release N PSx
IDMT:
Release N PSx
[ * ]
Setting
0: Definite Time
2: IEC Very Inverse
1: Without delay
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
[ * ]
11: RI-Type Inverse

&
IDMT:
Block. tIref,N> EXT
[ 040 103 ]
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg
IDMT:
Memory N clear
[ 040 112 ]
306 400
IDMT:
Hold time N running
[ 040 054 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,N PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
IDMT:
tIref,N> elapsed
[ 040 083 ]
052
052
052
052
Parameter
IDMT:
IDMT:
Factor kt,N PSx
IDMT:
IDMT:
Hold time N PSx
IDMT:
Release N PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
001
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
058
058
058
058
055
055
055
055
079
079
079
079
073
073
073
073
061
061
061
061
173
174
175
176
45Z8036A
Fig. 3-272: Residual current stage for IDMT.
3.32.8
Holding Time
Depending on the current flow the P437 will determine the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during
which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped
out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the
renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting
times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P437 then the
corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold
time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-349
P437
3 Operation
characteristic set. In Fig. 3-273, (p. 3-350), the effect of hold time is shown by
the example of a phase current stage.
Case A
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Case B
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time

Non-delayed
Per characteristic
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
071
071
071
071
19Z5025A
Fig. 3-273: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. Example A: Hold time determined
is not reached. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
3-350
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.33
Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)

Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented.
Disabling and Enabling Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
THERM:
General enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
1
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
&
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Enable PSx
[
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSU:
PS y active
[ * ]
PSU:
PS y active
Parameter
THERM:
Enable PSx
1
2
3
4
036
036
036
036
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
090
091
092
093
1
2
3
4
175
175
175
175
19Z6112B
Fig. 3-274: Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
3.33.1
Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection is not ready (THERM: N ot re ady) if one of the
following conditions applies:
3.33.2
Thermal overload protection is disabled.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant

temperature (ambient) acquisition.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal

input.
Operating Modes
Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
Relative replica
Absolute replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if
both operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload
protection is blocked and the error message TH ERM: Sett ing e rror,block . is
generated by the P437.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-351
P437
3.33.3
3 Operation
Coolant Temperature Effect

To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition, the analog (I/O) module Y
with a 20 mA current input and the PT100 input must be fitted.
One of the 11 measuring inputs listed above is selected for the primary
measurement of coolant temperature by setting the parameter THERM: S ele ct
mea s.inputPSx.
If the parameters THERM: Sel e ct me as.in putPSx have been set incorrectly
the thermal overload protection is blocked and the error message
THERM: Setti ng error,block. is generated.
An open measuring circuit, due to a broken wire, is determined by the measured
value inputs (function group MEASI). This will result in the issuance of these
signals:
MEA SI: Open circ. 20mA i np.
MEA SI: PT100 faul ty
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the
coolant temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs
selected will lead to the issuance of the signal THE RM: CTA er ror.
The setting for THERM: Fu nct.f .CTA fail .PSx determines how the thermal
overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee
continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the
coolant temperature measurement has failed.
Default temperature value:

The coolant temperature set at THE RM: Coolant t emp. PSx is applied.
The thermal overload protection function is not blocked.
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has
occurred in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature
measured before such an erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal
overload protection function is not blocked.
Last measured temperature:

The coolant temperature set at THE RM: Coolant te mp. PSx is applied if
no last measured values are available because a device warm restart or a
parameter subset selection was carried out.
Blocking:
The signals THERM: W arni ng and TH ER M: Trip signal are reset and
blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the
basis of the measured current alone. All further measured values are issued
as Not measured.
All parameters relevant to coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden

if the analog module Y has not been fitted in the P437. The tripping time is
calculated by including the setting for TH ER M: Coolant temp. PSx.
3-352
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.33.4
Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant

Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition
In order to ensure thermal overload protection, without taking into account an
offset due to a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the
THE RM: Coolant temp. PSx parameter to the maximum permitted coolant
temperature.
THERM:
Select meas.inputPSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
&
THERM:
With CTA
0: Default temp. value
305 201
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
&
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
&
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI:
THERM:
CTA error
[ 039 111 ]
[ 040 192 ]
THERM:
CTA error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
SFMON:
CTA error
[ 098 034 ]
THERM:
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
&
THERM:
Block. by CTA error
305 200

2: Last meas.temperat.
3: Blocking
Parameter
THERM:
Select meas.inputPSx
THERM:
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
45Z8010A
Fig. 3-275: Coolant temperature monitoring.
3.33.5
Relative Replica
The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal
replica.
In the Relative replica operating mode, the following settings have to be made
for thermal overload protection:
The rated operating current of the protected object: THE RM: Iref PSx
The tripping threshold trip is set at THERM: t r ip PSx.
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters

must be set:
The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object max,

THERM: Max .obj ect te mp. PSx
The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) c,max,

THERM: Max . cool. t e mp. P Sx
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-353
P437
3.33.6
3 Operation
Absolute Replica
The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the
absolute thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the
maximum coolant temperature.
In the Absolute replica operating mode, the following parameters have to be set
for thermal overload protection:
The thermal limit current of the protected object: IDMT: Min. trip time N
P Sx
The limit temperature for tripping max, THE RM: Max.object tem p. PSx
The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (max c,max ), THERM: O/T f. Ire f pers . PSx
The maximum permitted coolant temperature c,max is derived from the difference
between the T H E R M : M a x . o b j e c t t e m p . P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s .
P S x settings.
3-354
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.33.7
Tripping Characteristics
The maximum RMS phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica
as specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the
following parameters will govern the tripping time:
The set thermal time constant of the protected object,

THERM: Tim.cons t.1,>Ibl PSx
The accumulated thermal load 0
The current measured coolant temperature c
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:

(I
t = ln
(I
I
ref
)2 - 0
a - a,max
)2 - trip (1 -
)
ref
max - a,max
I
The trip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode
is Absolute replica.
/%
10000
1000
/ min
100
200
110
10
1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50
0.001
0
I / I ref
10
11
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-276: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to P = 0 % and
identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-355
P437
3.33.8
3 Operation
Warning Signal
Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of
the following parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: warni ng P Sx
Absolute replica: THERM: Warni ng tem p. PSx
Additionally, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set. When the

time left until tripping falls below this setting, a warning signal will be issued.
3.33.9
Trip
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the
following parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: tri p PSx
Absolute replica: THERM: Max.obje ct te m p. PSx
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the
thermal replica has decreased by the value set at TTHERM: Hystere s. ,tr ip
PS x, at least for a fixed time of 5 s.
3.33.10
Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is
applied with the time constant set at THERM: Ti m.const.2,<Ibl PSx. This
element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of
stopped motors.
These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers and
power lines.
3-356
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
IA
THERM:
I
COMP
IB
305 202
IC
IP,max
MAIN:
Protection active
AR_MV
&
306 001
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ]
THERM:
Block replica EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM:
Block. by CTA error
&
305 200
THERM:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
[ * ]
c
THERM:
Iref PSx
[ * ]
<0.1 Iref
THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
[ * ]
kIref
THERM:
O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Warning temp. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
c Max.object temp. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Absolute replica
[ 022 065 ]
THERM:
c Max. cool. temp. PSx
[ * ]
c
THERM:
warning PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
trip PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Relative replica
[ 022 064 ]
THERM:
Within pre-trip time
[ 041 109 ]
SFMON:
Setting error THERM
[ 098 035 ]
THERM:
Setting error,block.
[ 039 110 ]
THERM:
Warning
[ 039 025 ]
THERM:
Trip signal
[ 039 020 ]
THERM:
Hysteres. ,trip PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Warning pre-trip PSx
[ * ]
0
1
THERM:
Buffer empty
[ 039 112 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
With CTA
THERM:
[ 004 016 ]
305 201
Coolant temperature
THERM:
Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM:
Coolant temperature
[ 004 149 ]
I/Iref
THERM:
Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
c
Parameter
THERM:
Iref PSx
THERM:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
THERM:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
180
THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. p.u.
[ 004 178 ]
THERM:
Object temp. p.u.
[ 004 179 ]
187
187
187
187
Parameter
THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
THERM:
O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
THERM:
Warning temp. PSx
THERM:
Max.object temp. PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
188
188
188
188
167
167
167
167
153
153
153
153
THERM:
Therm. replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
THERM:
Current I,therm prim
[ 007 220 ]
182
182
182
182
THERM:
Current I,therm p.u
[ 007 221 ]
Parameter
THERM:
Max. cool. temp. PSx
THERM:
warning PSx
THERM:
trip PSx
THERM:
Coolant temp. PSx
THERM:
Hysteres. ,trip PSx
THERM:
Warning pre-trip PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
185
185
185
185
184
184
184
184
181
181
181
181
186
186
186
186
183
183
183
183
191
191
191
191
19Z8042A
Fig. 3-277: Thermal overload protection.
3.33.11
Resetting
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-357
P437
3 Operation
thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be

blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THERM:
Reset replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
1
THERM:
Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Reset replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020A
Fig. 3-278: Resetting the thermal replica.
3-358
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.34
Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the
phase voltages and of the neutral-point displacement voltage as well as the
positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the
fundamental waves of the three phase-to-ground voltages.
3.34.1
Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection

V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
3.34.2
V<> Protection Readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the
voltage-measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0
1
0: No
V<>:
Enabled
[ 040 066 ]
1: Yes
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
Not ready
[ 042 004 ]
45Z8085A
Fig. 3-279: Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-359
P437
3 Operation
3.34.3
Minimum Current Monitoring

There is an optional enabling threshold available with the V<> element which is
based on minimum current monitoring for the undervoltage stages (V<, V<<,
V<<<, Vpos<, Vpos<<).
The following two settings may be used to activate the operating mode for
minimum current monitoring and to set the enabling threshold:
V <>: I enable V< PSx
V <>: Op. mode V < mon. P Sx
The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set
threshold of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
V<>:
Op. mode V< mon. PSx
[
]
V<>:
V< ready
460 506
1
0: Without
1: With
V<>:
I enable V< PSx
[
IA
IB
IC
Parameter
V<>:
Op. mode V< mon. PSx
V<>:
I enable V< PSx
set
set
set
set
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
162
163
164
165
155
159
160
161
19Z8089A
Fig. 3-280: Enabling threshold for the undervoltage stages.
3-360
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.34.4
Monitoring the Phase Voltages

The P437 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Dependent on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the
phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages
(Delta operating mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages
that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands,
then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip
command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected,
and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
V<>:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
VA-G
VB-G
fnom
VC-G
fnom
fnom
VA-G 3
fnom
2
VB-G 3
fnom
VC-G 3
1VA(-B)
1
1VB(-C)
1VC(-A)
1: Delta
2: Star
Parameter
V<>:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
001
001
001
001
47Z0147A
Fig. 3-281: Selection of the measured values.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-361
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
tV> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
tV> 3-pole elapsed
[ 041 098 ]
V<>:
Starting V> 3-pole
[ 041 097 ]
V<>:
tV>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT
[ 041 069 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> A(-B)
[ 041 031 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> B(-C)
[ 041 032 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V> PSx
V<>:
tV> PSx
V<>:
tV> 3-pole PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
003
003
003
003
005
005
005
005
V<>:
Starting V>/>> C(-A)
[ 041 033 ]
027
027
027
027
Parameter
V<>:
V>> PSx
V<>:
tV>> PSx
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
004
004
004
004
006
006
006
006
092
094
095
096
048
048
048
048
19Z8091A
Fig. 3-282: Overvoltage monitoring, Part 1: stages V> and V>>.
3-362
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>>> PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[
V<>:
V>>> PSx
[
]
V<>:
tV>>> elapsed
[ 010 233 ]
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole PSx
[
V<>:
Blocking tV>>> EXT
[ 010 246 ]
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 234 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>> 3-pole
[ 010 232 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V>>> PSx
V<>:
tV>>> PSx
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
099
105
117
118
048
048
048
048
19Z8092A
Fig. 3-283: Overvoltage monitoring, Part 2: stage V>>>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-363
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
V<>:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
V< PSx
[
]
Setting(s) blocked
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V<
[ 041 037 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
Fault V<
[ 041 110 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole elapsed
[ 042 006 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V< 3-pole
[ 042 005 ]
V<>:
tV<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Fault V< 3-pole
[ 041 111 ]
V<>:
V<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<<
[ 041 099 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Fault V<<
[ 041 112 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV<< EXT
[ 041 071 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ]
V<>:
Starting V<< 3-pole
[ 010 228 ]
V<>:
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
[ 042 024 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3p elaps. trans
[ 010 230 ]
V<>:
Fault V<< 3-pole
[ 011 132 ]
Parameter
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Starting V</<< A(-B)
[ 041 038 ]
V<>:
Starting V</<< B(-C)
[ 041 039 ]
048
048
048
048
V<>:
Starting V</<< C(-A)
[ 041 040 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V< PSx
V<>:
tV< PSx
V<>:
tV< 3-pole PSx
V<>:
V<< PSx
V<>:
tV<< PSx
V<>:
tV<< 3-pole PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
011
011
011
011
1
2
3
4
007
007
007
007
009
009
009
009
028
028
028
028
008
008
008
008
010
010
010
010
119
124
125
126
19Z8093A
Fig. 3-284: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 1: stages V< and V<<. (Transient pulse: See following diagram.)
3-364
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV<<< EXT
[ 010 247 ]
V<>:
tV<<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
V<>:
tV<<< elapsed
[ 010 237 ]
V<>:
V<<< PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V<<<
[ 010 235 ]
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
Fault V<<<
[ 011 134]
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 239 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<<< 3-pole
[ 010 236 ]
V<>:
Fault V<<< 3-pole
[ 011 133 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[
*
]
V<>:
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole elapsed
[ 042 006 ]
V<>:
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
[ 042 024 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3p elaps. trans
[ 010 230 ]
V<>:
tV<<< elaps.transien
[ 010 238 ]
V<>:
tV<<< 3p elaps.trans
[ 010 240]
V<>:
tV</<</<<< el.trans
[ 042 007 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V<<< PSx
V<>:
tV<<< PSx
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
V<>:
set
set
set
set
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
076 029
1
2
3
4
083
083
083
083
088
088
088
088
127
127
127
127
048
048
048
048
077 029
078 029
079 029
19Z8094A
Fig. 3-285: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 2: stage V<<< and transient pulse for stages V</<</<<<.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-365
P437
3.34.5
3 Operation
Monitoring the Positive- and Negative-Sequence Voltages

The P437 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages
from the fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to
the formulas given below. This is based on the MA IN: Phase seque nce setting
(alternative terminology: Rotary field).
Phase sequence A-B-C (clockwise rotating field)
Negative-sequence voltage:
Vneg =
| (VAG + a2 VBG + a VCG) |
Positive-sequence voltage:
Vpos =
3-366
1
3
1
3
| (VAG + a VBG + a2 VCG) |
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
Phase sequence A-C-B (anti-clockwise rotating field)
Negative-sequence voltage:
Vneg =
| (VAG + a VBG + a2 VCG) |
Positive-sequence voltage:
Vpos =
1
3
1
3
| (VAG + a2 VBG + a VCG) |
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
VA-G
V<>:
Vpos
305 250
fnom
VB-G
Vpos
fnom
VC-G
Vneg
V<>:
Vneg
305 251
D5Z50AYB
Fig. 3-286: Determination of positive- and negative-sequence voltages. (Note: The previous terminology for
MAIN: Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field.)
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or

falls below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to
determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls
below the set thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays
have elapsed. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands,
then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip
command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected,
and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-367
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVpos> EXT
[ 041 090 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vpos> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos> elapsed
[ 042 012 ]
V<>:
Vpos
305 250
V<>:
Starting Vpos>
[ 042 010 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos>> EXT
[ 041 091 ]
V<>:
tVpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos>> elapsed
[ 042 013 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos< EXT
[ 041 092 ]
V<>:
Starting Vpos>>
[ 042 011 ]
V<>:
tVpos< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
460 506
V<>:
Vpos< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos< elapsed
[ 042 016 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<
[ 042 014 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos<< EXT
[ 041 093 ]
V<>:
Fault Vpos<
[ 041 113 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< elapsed
[ 042 017 ]
V<>:
Vpos<< PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<<
[ 042 015 ]
V<>:
Fault Vpos<<
[ 041 114 ]
V<>:
[ * ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Vpos> PSx
076 015
077 015
078 015
079 015
V<>:
tVpos> PSx
076 017
077 017
078 017
079 017
V<>:
Vpos>> PSx
076 016
077 016
078 016
079 016
V<>:
tVpos>> PSx
076 018
077 018
078 018
079 018
V<>:
Vpos< PSx
076 019
077 019
078 019
079 019
V<>:
tVpos< PSx
076 021
077 021
078 021
079 021
V<>:
tVpos< elaps. trans.
[ 042 026 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< elaps.trans.
[ 042 027 ]
V<>:
tVpos</<< elap.trans
[ 042 018 ]
V<>:
Vpos<< PSx
076 020
077 020
078 020
079 020
V<>:
tVpos<< PSx
076 022
077 022
078 022
079 022
V<>:
076 029
077 029
078 029
079 029
V<>:
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
19Z80AZA
Fig. 3-287: Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage.
3-368
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVneg> EXT
[ 041 094 ]
V<>:
tVneg> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVneg> elapsed
[ 042 021 ]
V<>:
Vneg
305 251
V<>:
Starting Vneg>
[ 042 019 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVneg>> EXT
[ 041 095 ]
V<>:
tVneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVneg>> elapsed
[ 042 022 ]
V<>:
Starting Vneg>>
[ 042 020 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Vneg> PSx
076 023
077 023
078 023
079 023
V<>:
tVneg> PSx
076 025
077 025
078 025
079 025
V<>:
Vneg>> PSx
076 024
077 024
078 024
079 024
V<>:
tVneg>> PSx
076 026
077 026
078 026
079 026
V<>:
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
D5Z52BAA
Fig. 3-288: Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-369
P437
3 Operation
3.34.6
Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage

Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P437 from the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the neutral-point displacement voltage formed externally via the
fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutral-point displacement
voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers (see
Section 3.12, (p. 3-69)). The neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to
determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer
stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
V<>:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G
2
1
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
V<>:
VNG
305 252
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter
V<>:
Evaluation VNG PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
002
002
002
002
47Z0148A
Fig. 3-289: Selecting the measured value.
V<>:
Blocking tVNG> EXT
[ 041 072 ]
V<>:
tVNG> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
[ * ]
V<>:
VNG> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
tVNG> elapsed
[ 041 045 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVNG>> EXT
[ 041 073 ]
V<>:
Starting VNG>
[ 041 044 ]
V<>:
VNG>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVNG>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 041 046 ]
V<>:
VNG
305 252
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
VNG> PSx
076 011
077 011
078 011
079 011
V<>:
tVNG> PSx
076 013
077 013
078 013
079 013
V<>:
VNG>> PSx
076 012
077 012
078 012
079 012
V<>:
tVNG>> PSx
076 014
077 014
078 014
079 014
V<>:
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
V<>:
Starting VNG>>
[ 042 008 ]
D5Z52BCA
Fig. 3-290: Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage.
3.34.7
Monitoring the Reference Voltage

The reference voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by respective timer stages that
can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-370
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVref> EXT
[ 007 036 ]
V<>:
tVref> PSx
V<>:
[ * ]
[
C
V<>:
Vref> PSx
[
V<>:
tVref> elapsed
Vref
[ 007 047 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>
V<>:
Blocking tVref>> EXT
[ 007 037 ]
[ 007 051 ]
V<>:
tVref>> PSx
[
C
V<>:
Vref>> PSx
[
V<>:
tVref>> elapsed
[ 007 048 ]
V<>:
Block. tVref>>> EXT
[ 010 248 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>>
[ 007 052 ]
V<>:
tVref>>> PSx
[
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Vref>>> PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
V<>:
tVref>>> elapsed
[ 010 242 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>>>
[ 010 241 ]
Parameter
V<>:
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
049
049
049
049
Parameter
V<>:
Vref> PSx
V<>:
tVref> PSx
V<>:
Vref>> PSx
V<>:
tVref>> PSx
V<>:
Vref>>> PSx
V<>:
tVref>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
1
2
3
4
064
071
075
079
066
069
073
077
065
068
072
076
067
070
074
078
065
068
072
076
067
070
074
078
19Z8095A
Fig. 3-291: Monitoring the reference voltage, part 1: stages Vref>/>>/>>>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-371
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVref< EXT
[ 007 039 ]
V<>:
tVref< PSx
V<>:
[ * ]
[
C
V<>:
Vref< PSx
[ * ]
]
V<>:
tVref< elapsed
[ 007 053 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<
[ 007 061 ]
Vref
V<>:
Blocking tVref<< EXT
[ 007 046 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vref<
[ 007 055 ]
V<>:
tVref<< PSx
[
C
V<>:
Vref<< PSx
[
V<>:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 007 054 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<
[ 007 062 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Block. tVref<<< EXT
[ 010 249 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref<<
[ 007 056 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< PSx
[
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Vref<<< PSx
[
V<>:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 007 054 ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<<
[ 011 135 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vref<<<
[ 010 243 ]
V<>:
[ * ]
V<>:
tVref< elaps. trans.
[ 007 057 ]
V<>:
tVref<< elaps.trans.
[ 007 060 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< elaps.trans
[ 010 245 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V<>:
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
029
029
029
029
V<>:
tVref</<</<<< el.tr.
[ 007 063 ]
049
049
049
049
Parameter
V<>:
Vref< PSx
V<>:
tVref< PSx
V<>:
Vref<< PSx
V<>:
tVref<< PSx
V<>:
Vref<<< PSx
V<>:
tVref<<< PSx
set
set
set
set
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
1
2
3
4
086
097
101
105
088
099
103
107
087
098
102
106
096
100
104
108
059
062
069
070
071
072
073
074
19Z8096A
Fig. 3-292: Monitoring the reference voltage, part 2: stages Vref</<</<<<.
3-372
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.35
Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The P437 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
frequencies. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between
the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency
protection function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency
protection will be explained below using the first stage as an example.
3.35.1
Disabling or Enabling Over/Underfrequency Protection

The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
0
1
0: No
f<>:
Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
f<>:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
f<>:
Not ready
[ 042 140 ]
196
197
198
199
F5Z0104C
Fig. 3-293: Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-373
P437
3.35.2
3 Operation
Selecting the Measuring Voltage

By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is
used by the over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement
purposes. This can be either a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase
voltage.
f<>:
Selection meas. volt
[ 018 202 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
fnom
VA-G
VA-G 3
VB-G
VB-G 3
VC-G
VC-G 3
fnom
2
fnom
3
fnom
4
fnom
5
fnom
6
f<>:
VMeas
305 725
1: Voltage A-G
2: Voltage B-G
3: Voltage C-G
4: Voltage A-B
5: Voltage B-C
6: Voltage C-A
47Z0150A
Fig. 3-294: Selecting the measuring voltage.
3-374
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.35.3
Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time

Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient
magnitude. Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if
the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
f<>:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
VMeas
305 725
f<>:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
305 726
47Z0151A
Fig. 3-295: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting.
3.35.4
Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection

For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can
choose between the following operating modes:
3.35.5
Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient

monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring

(f/t)
Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-375
P437
3.35.6
3 Operation
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency

Gradient Monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the
frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is
reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set
threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3.35.7
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient

Monitoring (f/t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual
substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for loadshedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for underfrequency monitoring.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within
the set time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the t/f monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-376
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
f<
t
Start t
Start t
Function blocked
Trip f/t
F5Z0128C
Fig. 3-296: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-377
P437
3 Operation
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
[ * ]
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
tf1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
Trip signal f1
[ 042 111 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[
*
]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
df/dt
305 726
f<>:
Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
Start. cond. met
SFMON:
Setting error f<>
[ 098 028 ]
f>
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
Parameter
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
f<>:
f1 PSx
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
f<>:
tf1 PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
120
121
122
123
100
101
102
103
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
104
105
106
107
47Z0152A
Fig. 3-297: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function.
3-378
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.35.8
fmin-/fmax Measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max . fre qu. for f>
f<>: Min. frequ. f or f <
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
f<>: Reset meas .val. USER
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-379
P437
3.36
3 Operation
Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>)

The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive
power from the fundamental currents and voltages. The sign of the active or the
reactive power, respectively, is evaluated for direction determination
3.36.1
Disabling and Enabling P<> Protection

The power directional protection can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
P<>:
General enable USER
[ 014 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
P<>:
Enabled PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Enabled
[ 036 250 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
P<>:
Enabled PSx
set
set
set
set
014
014
014
014
1
2
3
4
252
253
254
255
45Z5051A
Fig. 3-298: Enabling or disabling power directional protection.
3.36.2
Power Determination
The P437 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase
currents and the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring
function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power
determination will be blocked.
3-380
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.36.3
Power Monitoring
The P437 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or
fall below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be
blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands
when values have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that
transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present
when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P<>:
Enabled
[ 036 250 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
fnom
P<>:
P
IA
402 631
fnom
IB
fnom
IC
fnom
VA-G
fnom
VB-G
fnom
VC-G
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P402 634
P<>:
Q
402 632
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q402 636
45Z5052A
Fig. 3-299: Power determination.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-381
P437
3 Operation
3.36.4
Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded

The P437 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set.
When the active power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The
starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>:
Operate delay P> PSx
[
]
P<>:
Release delay P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tP> EXT
[ 035 082 ]
P<>:
Signal P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
P<>:
P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
P
P<>:
Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
402 631
P<>:
Operate delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tP>> EXT
[ 035 083 ]
P<>:
Signal P>> delayed
[ 035 090 ]
P<>:
P>> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
Parameter
P<>:
P> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P> PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P> PSx
P<>:
Release delay P> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
120
200
201
202
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
Parameter
P<>:
P>> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P>>PSx
P<>:
Release delay P>>PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
19Z5271A
Fig. 3-300: Active power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-382
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.36.5
Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded

The P437 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a
forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-)
directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is
triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-) directional or a nondirectional decision.
P<>:
Direction P> PSx
[
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal P>
[ 035 088 ]
P<>:
Signal P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P402 634
P<>:
Direction P>> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal P>>
[ 035 091 ]
P<>:
Signal P>> delayed
[ 035 090 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Direction P> PSx
P<>:
Direction P>> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
136
137
138
139
156
157
158
159
45Z5054A
Fig. 3-301: Direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when the set thresholds are
exceeded.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-383
P437
3 Operation
3.36.6
Reactive Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded

The P437 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set.
When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The
P<>:
Operate delay Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tQ> EXT
[ 035 084 ]
P<>:
Signal Q> delayed
[ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
[
P<>:
Starting Q>
[ 035 092 ]
P<>:
Q
402 632
P<>:
Operate delay Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tQ>> EXT
[ 035 085 ]
P<>:
Signal Q>> delayed
[ 035 096 ]
P<>:
Q>> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Q> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q> PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
Parameter
P<>:
Q>> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q>>PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q>>PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
19Z5270A
Fig. 3-302: Reactive power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-384
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.36.7
Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded

The P437 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a
P<>:
Direction Q> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal Q>
[ 035 094 ]
P<>:
Signal Q> delayed
[ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Q+
P<>:
Q-
402 635
402 636
P<>:
Direction Q>> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal Q>>
[ 035 097 ]
P<>:
Signal Q>> delayed
[ 035 096 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Direction Q> PSx
P<>:
Direction Q>> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
176
177
178
179
196
197
198
199
45Z5056A
Fig. 3-303: The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when the set thresholds
are exceeded.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-385
P437
3.36.8
3 Operation
Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds

The P437 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it
falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set. When the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The
3-386
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Blocking tP< EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>:
P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P< PSx
[
P<>:
P
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
C
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
402 631
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
&
P<>:
Blocking tP<< EXT
[ 035 051 ]
P<>:
Fault P<
[ 035 057 ]
&
P<>:
P<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay P<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay P<<PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio P<< PSx
[
P<>:
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
&
P<>:
Fault P<<
[ 035 063 ]
&
P<>:
[ * ]
P<>:
[ * ]
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>:
tP<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>:
tP</tP<< elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
Parameter
P<>:
P< PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P< PSx
set 1
017 030
017 034
017 060
set 2
set 3
017 031
017 032
017 033
017 035
017 036
017 037
017 061
Parameter
P<>:
P<< PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio P<< PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P<<PSx
P<>:
Release delay P<<PSx
P<>:
set 1
set 2
017 234
017 238
017 242
017 246
017 235
017 236
017 237
017 239
017 240
017 241
017 243
017 244
017 245
017 247
017 248
017 249
018 246
018 247
set 4
set 3
set 4
P<>:
017 062
017 063
P<>:
017 226
017 227
017 228
017 229
018 248
018 249
19Z5272B
Fig. 3-304: Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-387
P437
3.36.9
3 Operation
Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds

The P437 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a
3-388
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
P<>:
Direction P< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip signal P<
[ 035 058 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal P< trans
[ 035 059 ]
&
&
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>:
P+
P<>:
P-
&
402 633
&
&
402 634
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
Direction P<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
&
P<>:
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal P<<
[ 035 064 ]
&
&
&
P<>:
tP<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
&
P<>:
Trip sig. P<< trans.
[ 035 065 ]
&
Parameter
P<>:
Direction P< PSx
P<>:
Direction P<< PSx
set 1
017 230
017 250
set 2
set 3
017 231
017 232
017 233
017 251
017 252
017 253
set 4
&
19Z5273B
Fig. 3-305: The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-389
P437
3 Operation
1
P<>:
Starting P<
035 054
P<>:
*
P<>:
*
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
035 055
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
035 056
P<>:
Fault P<
035 057
Parameter
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
set 1
017 060
017 226
018 246
set 2
set 3
017 061
017 062
017 063
017 227
017 228
017 229
018 247
018 248
018 249
set 4
19Z5278A
Fig. 3-306: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring.
3-390
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.36.10
Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set

Thresholds
The P437 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The
P<>:
Blocking tQ< EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>:
Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q< PSx
[
P<>:
Q
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
C
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
402 632
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
&
P<>:
Blocking tQ<< EXT
[ 035 053 ]
P<>:
Fault Q<
[ 035 069 ]
&
P<>:
Q<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay Q<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q<<PSx
C
P<>:
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
&
P<>:
Fault Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
&
P<>:
[
P<>:
[ * ]
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>:
tQ<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Q< PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q< PSx
P<>:
P<>:
tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]
P<>:
set 1
018 035
018 044
018 052
018 056
set 2
set 3
018 036
018 037
018 045
018 046
018 053
018 054
018 057
018 058
set 4
018 038
018 047
018 055
018 059
Parameter
P<>:
Q<< PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q<<PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q<<PSx
P<>:
set 1
set 2
018 085
018 086
018 095
018 096
018 213
018 214
018 236
018 237
018 246
018 247
set 3
set 4
018 087
018 088
018 097
018 098
018 215
018 216
018 238
018 239
018 248
018 249
19Z5276B
Fig. 3-307: Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-391
P437
3.36.11
3 Operation
Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds

The P437 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a
3-392
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
P<>:
Direction Q< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip signal Q<
[ 035 155 ]
&
&
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip sig. Q< trans.
[ 035 156 ]
P<>:
Q+
&
402 635
P<>:
Q-
&
402 636
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>:
Direction Q<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
&
P<>:
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal Q<<
[ 035 176 ]
&
P<>:
Trip sig. Q<< trans.
[ 035 177 ]
&
&
&
P<>:
tQ<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
&
Parameter
P<>:
Direction Q< PSx
P<>:
Direction Q<< PSx
set 1
018 081
018 242
set 2
set 3
018 082
018 083
018 084
018 243
018 244
018 245
set 4
&
19Z5277B
Fig. 3-308: Direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-393
P437
3 Operation
1
P<>:
Starting Q<
035 066
P<>:
*
P<>:
*
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
035 067
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
035 068
P<>:
Fault Q<
035 069
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
set 1
018 052
018 056
018 246
set 2
set 3
018 053
018 054
018 055
018 057
018 058
018 059
018 247
018 248
018 249
Parameter
set 4
19Z5279A
Fig. 3-309: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
3-394
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.36.12
Apparent power S
Starting Signal with Direction

> 0,010 Snom
P<>:
Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
&
P<>:
Direction P forw.
[ 035 181 ]
&
P<>:
Direction P backw.
[ 035 191 ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P-
402 634
19Z5274B
Fig. 3-310: Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring.
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q402 636
P<>:
Starting Q>
[ 035 092 ]
&
P<>:
Direction Q forw.
[ 035 193 ]
&
P<>:
Direction Q backw.
[ 035 194 ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
19Z5275B
Fig. 3-311: Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-395
P437
3 Operation
3.37
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

The P437 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has
been issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has actually been
opened.
3.37.1
Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

The function is enabled at CBF: Ge ne ral e nabl e USER. If this parameter has
been activated the CBF function may be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters
and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If C BF: Enable USER is
the only function assigned to a binary signal input, then circuit breaker
protection will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by
a negative edge. If C BF: Dis able EXT is the only function assigned to a binary
signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
CBF:
General enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
1
&
CBF:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 041
&
Address 038 042
&
&
CBF:
Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
&
&
1
1
S1
CBF:
Ext./user enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF:
Enable USER
[ 003 016 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF:
Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
&
CBF:
Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138B
Fig. 3-312: Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
3-396
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.37.2
Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection

Circuit breaker failure protection will be unavailable under the following
conditions:
The CBF function is not activated.
Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured

binary signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to blocked.
CBF:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
&
CBF:
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF:
t1 1p
[ 022 164 ]
blocked
CBF:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
blocked
CBF:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
blocked
&
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
blocked
45Z6364A
Fig. 3-313: Signal C B F : N o t r e a d y.
3.37.3
Detecting a CB Tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB
tripping.
Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current
flow may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
for evaluation.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-397
P437
3.37.4
3 Operation
Current Flow Monitoring

This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and
pole-selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values
with the set threshold value C BF: I<.
As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously
issue the phase selective signals CBF : C urr en t f low A, CBF: Curre nt flow B,
CBF : C ur rent fl ow C and the multiple signal CBF: Current flow Phx.
Moreover, there is a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/
disabled. For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or
the value derived from the three phase currents may be used.
As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the
current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C BF: Curre nt
flow N) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no
monitoring is carried out and the CBF : C urr en t f low N = No signal is issued
continuously.
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF:
Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
IB
CBF:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
IC
CBF:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF:
Current flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
CBF:
Evaluation IN
[ 022 184 ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: Calculated
2: Measured
c1
c2
+
+
+
IN
1
2
1 ... 2
CBF:
IN<
[ 022 180 ]
1
CBF:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
CBF:
IN
460 394
64Z1103C
Fig. 3-314: Current flow monitoring.
3-398
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.37.5
Evaluation of CB Status Signals

Trip signals included in MAI N: Gen . tri p command 1, which use CB status
signals in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux..
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.
The P437 can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate
them:
The open signal from the circuit breaker, MAIN: CB open 3p EXT
The closed signal from the circuit breaker, MA IN: CB clos e d 3 p EXT
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the

respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. As a result,
the P437 will issue the CBF: CB pos. im pl ausi ble signal. The evaluation of
current criteria is not affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P437.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address
031 028
Address
036 051
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
&
&
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
19Z6131C
Fig. 3-315: Plausibility check of CB status signals.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-399
P437
3.37.6
3 Operation
Startup Criteria
Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a startup criterion. The following criteria are
evaluated as a startup criterion:
Internal startup criterion
Generating the Gen. Trip signal 1 is considered a start criterion. In addition

it may be selected, by setting the parameter CBF: Start with m an. t rip,
that a manual trip signal will be used as a start criterion.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary
contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the
respective trip signal, included in the Gen. Trip command 1, has been
selected from the protection function in parameter C BF: Fct.assig nm.
C BAu x. for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts.
External startup criterion
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (CBF: Start 3p

E XT) may be used as a start criterion.
To be on the safe side an additional two pole trigger may be implemented
by applying the CBF: Star t e nabl e E XT signal.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary
contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered.
After a CBF startup, the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger
signal is no longer taken into account. The CBF function will thus reset only if the
current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or
the CB's state is open.
3.37.7
Timer Stages and Output Logic

Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signals C BF: Trip s ign al t 1, A, C BF: Tr ip signal t1, B, CBF: T rip
sign al t 1 , C will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the
time period, set at timer stage CBF: t1 1p, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The C BF: t1 3p signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time delay set at timer stage CBF: Trip signal t1. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The CBF: t 2 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time delay set at timer stage CBF: Trip signal t 2, has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit
breaker or protection system.
The trip signals will be issued as long as the current criterion is not met or the
CB's state is signaled as closed. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the arcing
chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit
breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the
damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapsing of timer stage t2
may be interrupted by a signal to a binary signal input appropriately configured
at CBF : C B fault y EXT.
3-400
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
&
&
IA
S 1
R 1
MAIN:
CB closed >= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF:
Start with man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
&
&
CBF:
Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
1
0: No
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
&
1: Yes
&
&
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
&
U x01
U x02
U x03
&
U xxx
Address
038 209
&
CBF:
Start enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF:
Start A EXT
[ 038 206 ]
CBF:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF:
Start A
310 007
>2
CBF:
Start B
CBF:
Start >1p
310 010
310 008
CBF:
Start C
310 009
45Z6363A
Fig. 3-316: 1-pole starting of circuit breaker failure protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-401
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Trip 1p
[ 022 163 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBF:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF:
Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
CBF:
Startup B
[ 038 213 ]
CBF:
Startup C
[ 038 214 ]
CBF:
t1 1p
&
&
&
CBF:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
CBF:
CB failure
[ 036 017 ]
CBF:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
CBF:
CB faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]
47Z1133A
Fig. 3-317: Timer stages of circuit breaker failure protection.
3.37.8
Trip Commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages
available, the user can set minimum time-delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB
failure protection function, will operate in latching mode. The corresponding trip
command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-402
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0
1
0: No
CBF:
Trip command t1, A
[ 038 221 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
&
1 1
CBF:
Trip command t1, B
[ 038 222 ]
R 1
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Trip command t1, C
[ 038 223 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Trip command t1
[ 038 220 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0
1
0: No
&
1: Yes
CBF:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
0
CBF:
Trip command t2
[ 038 224 ]
>1
&
1 1
R 1
MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
47Z1134B
Fig. 3-318: CBF trip commands.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-403
P437
3.37.9
3 Operation
Starting Trigger
The signal CBF : St arti ng will be issued when the signal CBF: Starting tr ig.
EX T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting condition is present. The signal C BF: Delay/starting tr ig. will
be issued after timer stage CBF : Tri p s ignal. has elapsed.
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
CBF:
Starting trig. EXT
[ 038 016 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
CBF:
Starting
[ 038 021 ]
45Z8037A
Fig. 3-319: Starting trigger.
3.37.10
Fault Behind CB Protection

A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit
breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if
the circuit breaker does not indicate that it is closed after the time delay set at
C BF: D el ay/faul t be h. CB has elapsed.
When such a fault is detected behind the CB the CBF : F ault behind CB signal
is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an
InterMiCOM protective interface. This may also prevent unwanted triggering of
the circuit breaker failure function.
CBF:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
IB
&
&
CBF:
Fault behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
IC
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
45Z6365A
Fig. 3-320: Fault behind CB protection.
3-404
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.37.11
CB Synchronization Supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker
contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and
evaluation of CB state signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB
operating times the time-delay CB F: D e lay/CB sy nc.su perv can be used.
When this time-delay has elapsed the signal CBF: TripSig CBs yn c.s uper is
issued. Poles that are recognized as being open will still be signaled.
CBF:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
CBF:
TripSig CBsync.super
[ 038 226 ]
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
&
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
<3
&
&
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
&
CBF:
CBsync.superv A open
[ 038 227 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv C open
[ 038 229 ]
&
IB
IC
45Z6366A
Fig. 3-321: CB synchronization supervision.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-405
P437
3.38
3 Operation
Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM)

The P437 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports
state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.
3.38.1
Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
CBM:
Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404A
Fig. 3-322: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
3.38.2
Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of
methods:
3-406
Monitoring the mechanical switching operations
Accumulating ruptured current values
Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current

values
Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB

wear characteristic.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.38.3
CB Wear Characteristic
Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying
the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured
current.
Number of permissible CB operations
Fig. 3-323, (p. 3-407) displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with
a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The
mean ruptured current is 48 kA.
100000
10000
1000
100
10
0.1
10
100
Disconnection current in kA
19Z6123A_EN
Fig. 3-323: Circuit breaker wear characteristic.
The knee points in Fig. 3-323, (p. 3-407) are necessary to set the wear
characteristic for the circuit breaker:
The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM: I nom, CB) and the permitted
number of CB operations at nominal current (CBM: Perm. CB op.
I nom,C B)
The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM: Med. cu rr. It rip,CB)
and the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current
(C BM: P erm. CB op. I m ed,C B)
The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (CBM: Max. curr.

It rip,CB) and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum
ruptured current (CBM: P e rm. CB op. Imax ,CB)
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. A knee
point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters
for the knee point is set to Blocked.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that
the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously
descending). When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible
according to the characteristic the P437 will issue an error message and block
circuit breaker monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-407
P437
3.38.4
3 Operation
Calculating the CB Wear State

The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining
CB operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB
operations nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively after each
disconnection by the P437.
Calculation is per this equation:
nrem(I nom,CB) = nrem,0(I nom,CB) -
n(I nom,CB)
n(I d,CB)
Where:
3.38.5
Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB
n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
Id,CB: Ruptured current
n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear

characteristics
nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB

before disconnection
nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after

disconnection
Operating Modes
Setting the parameter CBM: Operati ng mode will select the condition under
which the function will be triggered:
With trip cmd. only: Function triggered only by the general trip command 1
With CB sig.EXT only: Function triggered by the CB open signal generated

by an auxiliary contact
CB sig. EXT or trip: Function triggered by the general trip command 1 or CB

open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and
compared with set threshold values.
A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time at CBM: Cor r.
acqu.t ime tr ip to be triggered by the open command. Another correction value
can be set at CB M: C orr. acqui s. time to be triggered by the position signal
issued by the CB auxiliary contacts. This enables to correctly evaluate the
leading or lagging auxiliary contacts or the delay between issuing the trip
command and opening of the CB contacts. In addition differing inherent time
delays from the two command chains can be configured independently of each
other so as to achieve optimum time adjustment.
3.38.6
Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined pole-selectively. During an active
cycle the signals CBM: C ycle ru nni ng A, CBM: Cycle r unning B or
C BM: C y cle runnin g C are issued.
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The
remaining time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected
current zero crossing. The CBM: Curr. f l ow en ded A (CBM: Curr. flow
e nded B, CBM: C urr. fl ow en de d C) signal is then issued.
The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The start of
the cycle time is corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole
is considered to be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after
3-408
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
the maximum cycle time has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB
tripping are canceled and the CBM: tmax> A (CBM: tmax> B, CBM: tmax >
C) signal is issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-409
P437
3.38.7
3 Operation
Pole-Selective Counter Values and Measured Values

The P437 separately evaluates each phase current and generates an individual
wear presentation for each CB pole.
The following counter values are presented pole-selectively:
The number of mechanical switching operations made
The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current

This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB's wear
characteristic.
The following measured values are presented pole-selectively, and per-unit

values refer to the CB's nominal current:
Primary ruptured current

This value is applied to evaluate wear with reference to the CB's wear
characteristic.
Per-unit ruptured current
Squared per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents
The ruptured current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a
last zero crossing.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and the
current's disappearance. The current's disappearance is recognized when no
further current zero crossings are detected. An example for calculation of the
current-time integral is displayed in Fig. 3-324, (p. 3-411).
3-410
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
20,00
15,00
10,00
5,00
0,00
-5,00
-10,00
-15,00
-20,00
Calculating the
current-time integral
Gen. trip command 1
Corr. time running

19Z6126A
Fig. 3-324: Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1.
3.38.8
Resetting Measured Values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset via the interfaces
on the P437. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset
operation.
3.38.9
Setting Measured Values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary
when the respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has
been replaced. The available interfaces on the P437 may be used to set
measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function.
Only such measured values and counter values in the P437 may be set to new
values that do not have their default values set to Blocked.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to Blocked.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P437 to
Blocked.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-411
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
CBM:
Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
CBM:
Operating mode
[ 022 007 ]
1
&
&
&
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
1: With trip cmd. only
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
[ 022 013 ]
2: With CB sig.EXT only

3: CB sig. EXT or trip
CBM:
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
internal trip cmd.
CBM:
Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
CBM:
Med. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 014 ]
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
[ 022 015 ]
310 025
CBM:
Internal CB trip
CBM:
Max. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
310 030
fnom
I_x
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM:
Corr. acquis. time
[ 022 018 ]
C
CBM:
Corr. acqu.time trip
[ 007 249 ]
CBM:
Set No. CB oper. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set remain. CB op. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set Itrip A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set I*t A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip A
[
*
CBM:
I*t A
[
*
CBM:
Itrip,prim A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
I*t A
[
*
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Initialize values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM:
Reset meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x /
Current Ix
CBM:
Set No. CB oper. A
CBM:
Set remain. CB op. A
CBM:
Set Itrip A
CBM:
Set Itrip**2 A
CBM:
Set I*t A
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
CBM:
A / IA
022 131
022 134
022 137
022 140
022 143
008 011
008 014
B / IB
022 132
022 135
022 138
022 141
022 144
008 012
008 015
C / IC
022 133
022 136
022 139
022 142
022 145
008 013
008 016
Phase x /
Current Ix
CBM:
Itrip A
CBM:
I*t A
CBM:
Itrip,prim A
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
CBM:
Itrip A
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
CBM:
I*t A
A / IA
009 047
009 061
009 212
009 051
009 071
009 077
009 087
B / IB
009 048
009 062
009 213
009 052
009 073
009 078
009 088
C / IC
009 049
009 063
009 214
009 053
009 076
009 079
009 089
52Z0145A
Fig. 3-325: Triggering and calculating circuit breaker monitoring.
3-412
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.38.10
Monitoring the Number of CB Operations

Depending on the selected operating mode the P437 will calculate the current
wear state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of
remaining CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A
threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: Remain No. CB op. <.
An alarm is issued should the number of remaining CB operations drop below this
threshold.
CBM:
Remain No. CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM:
[ 008 014 ]
CBM:
Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 044 136 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
19Z6121B
Fig. 3-326: Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current.
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P437's counter for
the number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is
displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. CB
ope rat ions >. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations
performed exceed this threshold.
CBM:
No. CB operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
[ 008 011 ]
CBM:
Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 044 135 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
19Z6122B
Fig. 3-327: Monitoring the number of CB operations performed.
3.38.11
Monitoring Ruptured Currents

In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number
of CB operations performed, the P437 features the means to accumulate and
display the ruptured current values and the square of these values. Threshold
values can be set with the parameters C BM: I trip>, C BM: It rip**2> and
CBM: I*t >. An alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed
any of these thresholds.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-413
P437
3.38.12
3 Operation
Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring

When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring
function should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring
results. CBM protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.
Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary

signal input.
CBM:
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
&
CBM:
Blocking EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM:
Blocking USER
[ 022 150 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346B
Fig. 3-328: Blocking circuit breaker monitoring.
3-414
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.39
Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it
is only applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor
temperature limits.
3.39.1
Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function

The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.39.2
Monitoring Phase Currents and Phase Voltages

With the P437 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit
values:
Maximum phase current
Minimum phase current
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-415
P437
3 Operation
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT:
I>
[ 014 004 ]
LIMIT:
tI>
[ 014 031 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 220 ]
LIMIT:
I>>
[ 014 020 ]
IA
IB
LIMIT:
tI>>
[ 014 032 ]
IC
LIMIT:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 221 ]
Imax
Imin
LIMIT:
I<
[ 014 021 ]
LIMIT:
tI<
[ 014 033 ]
LIMIT:
tI< elapsed
[ 040 222 ]
LIMIT:
I<<
[ 014 022 ]
LIMIT:
tI<<
[ 014 034 ]
LIMIT:
tI<< elapsed
[ 040 223 ]
47Z0153A
Fig. 3-329: Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current.
3-416
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
&
LIMIT:
VPP>
LIMIT:
tVPP>
[ 014 027 ]
[ 014 039 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
VA-G
COMP
LIMIT:
VPP>>
LIMIT:
tVPP> elapsed
[ 040 228 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP>> elapsed
[ 040 229 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP< elapsed
[ 040 230 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP>>
[ 014 028 ]
VB-G
[ 014 040 ]
VC-G
t
VPP,max
VPP,min
LIMIT:
VPP<
LIMIT:
tVPP<
[ 014 029 ]
[ 014 041 ]
LIMIT:
VPP<<
LIMIT:
tVPP<<
[ 014 030 ]
[ 014 042 ]
LIMIT:
VPG>
LIMIT:
tVPG>
[ 014 023 ]
[ 014 035 ]
COMP
LIMIT:
VPG>>
LIMIT:
tVPG> elapsed
[ 040 224 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG>> elapsed
[ 040 225 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG>>
[ 014 024 ]
[ 014 036 ]
VPG,max
VPG,min
LIMIT:
VPG<
LIMIT:
tVPG<
[ 014 025 ]
[ 014 037 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP<< elapsed
[ 040 231 ]
LIMIT:
VPG<<
LIMIT:
tVPG<<
[ 014 026 ]
[ 014 038 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG< elapsed
[ 040 226 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG<< elapsed
[ 040 227 ]
47Z0154B
Fig. 3-330: Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum
phase-to-ground voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-417
P437
3.39.3
3 Operation
Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage

The neutral displacement voltage, calculated from the three phase-to-ground
voltages, is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the
associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
VA-G
LIMIT:
VNG>
[ 014 043 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>
[ 014 045 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG> elapsed
[ 040 168 ]
VB-G
VC-G
LIMIT:
VNG>>
[ 014 044 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>>
[ 014 046 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 040 169 ]
S8Z52G8A
Fig. 3-331: Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage.
3-418
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.39.4
Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values

The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>
[ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 040 182 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<
[ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
S8Z52G6A
Fig. 3-332: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-419
P437
3 Operation
3.39.5
Monitoring the Reference Voltage

The reference voltage Vref (when synchrocheck VT is fitted) is monitored by two
stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values. If the measured value exceeds or falls below the
corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
LIMIT:
Vref>
[ 042 144 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>
[ 042 148 ]
1: Yes (= on)
LIMIT:
tVref> elapsed
[ 042 152 ]
LIMIT:
Vref>>
[ 042 145 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>>
[ 042 149 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>> elapsed
[ 042 153 ]
Vref
LIMIT:
Vref<
[ 042 146 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<
[ 042 150 ]
LIMIT:
tVref< elapsed
[ 042 154 ]
LIMIT:
Vref<<
[ 042 147 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<<
[ 042 151 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 042 155 ]
19Z5215A
Fig. 3-333: Monitoring the reference voltage.
3-420
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.39.6
Monitoring the Measured PT 100 Temperature Value

The temperature value that is measured by the P437 with a resistance
thermometer (PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y, is monitored by
two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding
upper or lower limit values. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below
the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
T>
[ 014 100 ]
LIMIT:
tT>
[ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection
306 active
001
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
LIMIT:
tT> elapsed
[ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT:
T>>
[ 014 101 ]
LIMIT:
tT>>
[ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT:
T<
[ 014 105 ]
LIMIT:
tT<
[ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT:
T<<
[ 014 106 ]
LIMIT:
tT<<
[ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
19Z5212A
Fig. 3-334: Monitoring the measured PT 100 temperature value.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-421
P437
3.40
3 Operation
Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals
within a framework of Boolean equations.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other. There are only two differences between these two
function groups:
LOGIC offers 128 logical equations.

LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations.
On the other hand, LOG_2 features long-term timers.

For example for output 1:
L O GIC : Ti me t1 output 1 and LOGIC: Time t2 output 1: settable

from 0 to 600 s.
LOG_2 : Time t1 outpu t 1 and L OG_2: Time t2 output 1: settable
from 0 to 60,000 s.
The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Where

applicable, any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned.
Binary signals in the P437 may be linked by logical OR or AND operations

with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct.assignm.
outp. 1 (or LOGIC : F ct.as s ignm . outp. 2 to L OGIC : Fct.assignm. outp .
32, or LOG_2: Fct.assi gnm. ou tp. 1 to L O G_2 : F ct .assignm. outp. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P437, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGI C: Inpu t 01 EXT (or LOGIC: Input 0 2 EXT, ,
LOGIC : I np ut 4 0 EXT) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGIC : Set 1 EXT (or LOGI C: Set 2 E XT, , LOGIC: Set 8 EXT) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGIC : Se t 1 E XT if the corresponding reset input LOGIC: Reset 1 EX T)
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of 1), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
3-422
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
WARNING
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional
type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for
the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during startup of the P437, during operation and when there is a
fault (blocking of the P437) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
1
0: No
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
036 051
Address
036 059
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
D5Z52FAB
Fig. 3-335: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
The LOGIC : Trigge r 1 signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms

pulse to be issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-423
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
General enable USER
[ 031 099 ]
LOGIC:
Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Protection active
LOGIC:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
306 001
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT
[ 034 000 ]
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ]
1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
4
5
0
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ]
0: Without timer stage

1: Oper./releas.delay
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
5
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
[ 030 002 ]
LOGIC:
Time t2 output 1
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally
[ 034 082 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-336: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
3-424
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
LOG_2:
General enable USER
[ 011 137 ]
LOG_2:
Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
LOG_2:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 050 000 ]
306 001
0
1
2
Signal 1
3
Signal 2
Signal 3
5
0
Signal n

1: Oper./releas.delay
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
5
LOG_2:
Time t1 output 1
[ 050 002 ]
LOG_2:
Time t2 output 1
[ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-337: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-338, (p. 3-426) to
Fig. 3-342, (p. 3-428)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P437 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the 0 logic level.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-425
P437
3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t2
t1
t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-338: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t2
t1
t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-339: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-426
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t1
t1
t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-340: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-341: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-427
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-342: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary

input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation
then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has
been assigned were triggered.
3-428
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Address
AAA AAA
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address
AAA AAA
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Address
BBB BBB
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address
BBB BBB
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-343: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-429
P437
3.41
3 Operation
Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)

The P437 features four binary counters. Each of these can count the positive
pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately configured binary
signal input. Such a binary signal can be provided with debouncing.
3.41.1
Enable/Disable the Counting Function

The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.41.2
Debouncing
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
Count
Signal sequence
19Z50APA
Fig. 3-344: Debouncing signal flow. Set debouncing time: 50 ms.
3.41.3
Counting Function
The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counters may
be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via
the serial interfaces. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display
and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface.
For each of the four counters, there is a limit value that can be optionally set:
C O UN T: L imit coun te r 1 (and the same way for counters 2 to 4),
settable from 1 to 65000,
setting Blocked disables the limit check. (This setting is the default
value.)
A warning signal (COUNT: Warni ng coun t 1 and the same way for counters 2
to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit.
3-430
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
3 Operation
3.41.4
Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface

The counter values are transmitted via the communications interface when a
signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input, a trigger
signal is issued by a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle
time stage C OUN T: C ycle t.cou nt trans m. When the counter value is
transmitted at cyclic intervals, then transmission is time synchronized if the ratio
60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter values are
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
3.41.5
Counter Values Reset

The counter values may be reset all at once by setting parameter
COUN T: R ese t USER or via an appropriately configured binary signal input as
well as by the general reset action.
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
Enabled
[ 217 001 ]
1
0: No
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
1: Yes (= on)
1: Yes
COUNT:
Count 1
[ 217 100 ]
COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1
[ 217 160 ]
COUNT:
Set counter 1 EXT
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Count 1
[ 217 100 ]
CT=m
Debouncing
R
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
C
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
[ 217 007 ]
COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
= 0 min
COUNT:
Reset
[ 217 005 ]
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-345: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-431
P437
3-432
3 Operation
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
4
Design
The P437 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
Irrespective of the type a P437 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local
control panel. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential
control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED
indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4-1
P437
4.1
4 Design
Designs
The P437 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
WARNING
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control
panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
WARNING
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
4-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4 Design
P437
47Z14BBA
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (or in case of a detachable HMI the case front
panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4-3
P437
4 Design
Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1
Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
4.2
X6
434.8
464.0
481.6
257.1
177.5
Fig. 4-2: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
X6
434.8
227.9
253.6
159.0
168.0
284.9
259.0
25.9
5.0
410.0
5.0
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
4-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
177.5
101.6
4 Design
X6
227.9
253.6
434.8
464.0
101.6
6.4
186.5
481.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with
angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4-5
P437
4.3
4 Design
Hardware Modules
The P437 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P437.
Key:
4-6
: standard equipment,
: optional,
: depending on order,
*: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,

(p. 5-19)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
A(CH1 CH2)
009650356
A ff
A(CH1 CH2)
009650355
A(CH1 CH2)
Width
P437
412
P437
413
Communication module (for RS 485 wire 4TE

connection)
A ff
Communication module (for plastic

fiber)
4TE
009650354
A ff
Communication module (for glass fiber,

ST connector)
4TE
A(CH3)
009651567
D ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485)
4TE
A(CH3)
009651569
D ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for glass

fiber)
4TE
A(CH4)
InterMiCOM Module COMM4 (RS 485)
4TE
A(CH4)
InterMiCOM Module COMM4 (for glass

fiber)
4TE
A(ETH CH2)
009651427
E ff
Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s

Ethernet, glass fiber, SC connector and
RJ45 wire)
4TE
A(ETH CH2)
009651471
E ff
Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s

Ethernet, glass fiber, ST connector and
RJ45 wire)
4TE
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651531
B ff
Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s,

SHP Protocol, glass fiber, ST connector)
4TE
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651532
B ff
Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s, 4TE

RSTP Protocol, glass fiber, ST connector)
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651533
B ff
Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s,

DHP Protocol, glass fiber, ST connector)
4TE
000336188
C ff
* Bus module (digital, for 84 TE device)
4TE
000336421
B ff
* Bus module (analog)
4TE
009651571
E ff
* Processor Unit
4TE
T(4I 4V)
009650307
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin

connection)
8TE
T(4I 4V)
009650321
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring

connection)
8TE
T(4I 5V)
009650308
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin

connection)
8TE
T(4I 5V)
009650322
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (ring

connection)
8TE
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4-7
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
Width
P437
412
T(1I)
009650313
Transformer module 1 x I (pin

connection)
8TE
T(1I)
009650327
Transformer module 1 x I (ring

connection)
8TE
V(4I 8O)
009651534
B ff
Power supply module 24 - 60 V DC,

standard variant (switching threshold
18 V)
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651536
B ff

switching threshold 73 V
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651537
B ff

4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651539
B ff

4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651538
B ff

4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651544
B ff
Power supply module 60 - 250 V DC /

100 - 230 V AC, standard variant
(switching threshold 18 V)
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651546
B ff

100 - 230 V AC, switching threshold
73 V
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651547
B ff

90 V
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651549
B ff

155 V
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651548
B ff

146 V
4TE
X(4H)
009651493
B ff
Binary module (4 high-break contacts)
4TE
X(6I 8O)
000336971
D ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs, 8

output relays), standard variant
4TE
X(6I 8O)
009651306
A ff

4TE
output relays), switching threshold 73 V
X(6I 8O)
009651334
A ff

4TE
output relays), switching threshold 90 V
4-8
P437
413
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
Width
P437
412
P437
413
X(6I 8O)
009651445
A ff

output relays), switching threshold
146 V
4TE
X(6I 8O)
009651362
A ff

output relays), switching threshold
155 V
4TE
X(6O)
000336973
B ff
Binary module (6 output relays)
4TE
Y(4I)
000337406
D ff
Analog I/O module, standard variant

4TE
Y(4I)
009651307
A ff
Analog I/O module, switching threshold

73 V
4TE
Y(4I)
009651335
A ff

90 V
4TE
Y(4I)
009651446
A ff

146 V
4TE
Y(4I)
009651363
A ff

155 V
4TE
The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE

in width (HE = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm).
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal
blocks in the P437 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection
diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
4-9
P437
4-10
4 Design
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
5
Installation and Connection

WARNING
Sustained exposure to high humidity during storage may cause damage to
electronics and reduce the lifetime of the equipment.
We recommend that storage humidity shall not exceed 50% relative
humidity.
Once the MiCOM products have been unpacked, we recommend that they are
energized within the three following months.
Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment,
before energization.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
WARNING
The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-12) (Protective and
Operational Grounding) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the
diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal (Fig. 5-8,
(p. 5-12)).
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
WARNING
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected
at the same time.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-1
P437
5 Installation and Connection
WARNING
Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective
earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) must be
connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable
HMI at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor
terminal on the devices case. Both the detachable HMI and the device have
to be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to
the detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be
subjected to dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable
HMI next to high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent
induced currents that would lead to electromagnetic interferences.
5-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5.1
P437
Unpacking and Packing

All P437 overcurrent and control devices are packaged separately into dedicated
cartons and shipped with outer packaging. Use special care when opening
cartons and unpacking devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to
remove supporting documents and the type identification label supplied with
each individual device from the inside carton. The design revision level of each
module included in the device when shipped can be determined from the list of
components (assembly list). This list of components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in
proper mechanical condition.
If the P437 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If
the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms
to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-3
P437
5.2
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type

The nominal data and design type of the P437 can be determined by checking
the type identification label (see below). One type identification label is located
under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found
on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed
to the outside of the P437 packaging.
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a MiCOM P3x3 device.
The P437 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter Order Information of this
manual.
5-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
5.3
Location Requirements
The P437 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F]
Air pressure:
800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity:
The relative humidity must not result in the formation of

either condensed water or ice in the P437.
Ambient air:
The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,

smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation:
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be

avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5.3.2
Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3
Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply

Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
5.3.4
Electromagnetic Conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-5
P437
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P437 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P437 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-6) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter Design. When the P437 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Protective and Operational
Grounding (Section 5.5, (p. 5-12))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI
can be found in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4).
5-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P437 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or
the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken
down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1.
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180 up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2.
Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-8)).
3.
Then remove the local control panel.
WARNING
The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P
by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do
not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-8)). Now insert the P437 into the panel opening from the rear
so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
WARNING
When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the M3.5
screws with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters.)
If the control panel thickness is 2 mm, the longer M3.5 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-7
P437
For panels with a

thickness 2 mm,
replace the M3 bolts
with the enclosed
longer M3 bolts
Merely loosen the

upper screws and
hook device on side
plates to mount
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
Remove the lower

screws completely
prior to mounting
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
WARNING
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
5-8
1.
Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-9), and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)).
4.
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
45Z5058A
Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets.

Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
Height: 204mm
M6 x 15
Frame
for
280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-9
P437
WARNING
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a

second sub-rack to form a 19 mounting rack (see Fig. 5-6, (p. 5-10)). The
second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a
blank front panel. Fit the 19 mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. 5-7,
(p. 5-11).
Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
Fig. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19 mounting rack.
WARNING
5-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P437 in a cabinet with a 19 mounting rack.
WARNING
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-11
P437
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding

The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding
requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must
be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided.
The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm (AWG12) is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power
supply module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal connection
diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of
this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A
minimum cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) is required.
If a detachable HMI is installed, a further protective conductor (ground/earth) of
at least 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to the DHMI
protective conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these
must be located within the same substation.
All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as short
as possible.
1
2
2
3
4
PE terminal
PE terminal
surface-mount. case
flush-mount. case
Pos.
Description
Pos.
Description
Nut M4
Nut M4
Tooth lock wash.A4.3
Tooth lock wash.A4.3
Clamp bracket
Clamp bracket
Bolt M4
Bolt M4
19Y5220B
Fig. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective

grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety given by this setup.
5-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
5.6
Connection
The P437 Distance Protection Device must be connected in accordance with the
terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. The
relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P437 are to be found
either in the supporting documents supplied with the device, or in Section 5.7,
(p. 5-19).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P437.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P437. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
5.6.1.1
Power Supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P437 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
5.6.1.2
Current-Measuring Inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
WARNING
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
5.6.1.3
Connecting the Measuring Circuits

The system transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-14).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-13
P437
It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed.

If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when
making settings (see Chapter Settings).
A
B
C
1U
2U
1IA
1IB
1IC
1IN
2IN
e
n
W
N
P437
Line
Parallel line
47Z01BCA
Fig. 5-9: Standard schematic diagram.
5-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
5.6.1.4
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer

A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog
module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire
method (see Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-15)). No supply conductor compensation is
required in this case.
PT 100
P437
S8Z52H9A
Fig. 5-10: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.
5.6.1.5
Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays

The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring
these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O
modules (X) varies (see Section 2.4.7, (p. 2-12)).
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal
connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)). This is to be understood as a recommendation only.
Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIGB Interface

An IRIGB interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional
feature. It is connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a
characteristic impedance of 50 must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3
Connecting the Serial Interfaces
5.6.3.1
PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106, part 101.
5.6.3.2
Communication Interfaces
The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-15
P437
Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected

either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair
copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable
requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this
operating manual.
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P437, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P437 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at

both ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also

possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-17), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-18) as an example for channel 2 on the
communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication
module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped
electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P437. The two
devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to
terminate the data transmission conductor. In MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in
the P437, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and
can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end
of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an
electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system,
e.g. the P437, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master
device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the
master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485
communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication
5-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 resistor each. In MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P437, a
220 resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and can be
connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order
number see Chapter Accessories and Spare Parts).
-X10
200 ... 220
D1[T]
D2[R]
D2[R]
D1[T]
P437
XXXX
First participant
Last participant
connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X10
D2[R]
P437
D1[T]
D2[R]
D1[T]
XXXX
Device with halfduplex interface
19Z6480A
Fig. 5-11: 2-wire data link.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-17
P437
-X10
200 ... 220
D1[T]
D2[R]
D2[R]
D1[T]
P437
XXXX
First participant
Last participant
(e.g. the master)
-X10
D2[R]
P437
D1[T]
D2[R]
D1[T]
XXXX
Device with halfduplex interface
19Z6481A
Fig. 5-12: 4-wire data link.
5-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
5.7
Location and Connection Diagrams
5.7.1
Location Diagrams P437 412/413

Location diagrams for P437 in 84 TE case
Pin-terminal connection (P437 412)
01
02
03
04
05
CH1
CH2
4I
4V
06
07
08
09
1I
10
11
4I
12
13
6I
8O
15
6I
8O
17
18
19
6I
8O
20
21
4H
CH4
4I
5V
16
6I
8O
ETH
CH2
14
4I
8O
CH3
6O
Red.
ETH
CH2
01
02
03
04
01
02
03
05
05
ETH
CH2
06
07
4I
4V
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
16
17
18
19
20
21
Ring-terminal connection (P437 413)

04
CH1
CH2
06
08
09
1I
10
11
4I
12
13
6I
8O
14
15
6I
8O
6I
8O
4H
CH4
4I
5V
6I
8O
4I
8O
CH3
6O
Red.
ETH
CH2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. 1 module.

If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot, then these are
alternatives, depending on the ordering options (Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)).
5.7.2
Terminal Connection Diagrams P437412/413

_ is a placeholder for the slot.
See also Section 5.5, (p. 5-12), Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case
Grounding / Protective Earth
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
5-19
P437
Transformer
module
Type T
4I / 4/5V
Transformer
module
Type T
1I
Type Y
Analog
module
4I
Voltage measuring
Ring Pin
inputs
X051 X052
X031 X031
1
14
15
16
17
18
VAG
VBG
VCG
T5
T6
T7
VNG
T90
IN,par
T24
12
X032
1
Pin
X_1
X_1
Measuring outputs
K_01
valid
#
0..20 mA
Option:
11
Ring
VRef
T15
X_1
Output relays
K_07
17
18
U_09
Signal and
measuring inputs
Type X
Binary
module
4H
Ring
Pin
X_1
X_1
High-break
contacts
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
Pin
X_1
X_1
K_02
4
5
K_01
X_2
11
12
Vin
U_02
Vin
U_03
U_04
Vin
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
X_3
2
26
27
K_03
5-20
24
Type V
4I / 8O
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
25
24
26
27
9
25
26
27
U_02
Vin
U_03
Vin
U_04
Vin
U_05
Vin
U_06
Communication
Type A
module
Red. ETH / CH2
RX
X/Y
U17
X/Y
U18
X8
TX
K_02
K_03
Ethernet [IEC], Port 2

optical fiber link ST
X14
X/Y
U28
X/Y
U29
X15
K_04
K_05
K_06
K_07
K_08
TX
X10
1
2
Vin
Serial [COMM2]
wire link only
X//Y
D2[R]
U20
U_01
X_3
K_04
Vin
X7
K_01
19
U_01
Ethernet [IEC], Port 1

Output relays
Signal inputs
K_04
X_3
23
U_06
RX
1
PT100
19
X_2
10
20
0..20 mA
U_05
K_02
X_2
19
Vin
X_3
Power supply
module
Ring
K_08
Signal inputs
U_01
Vin
K_01
K_03
22
21
K_02
16
20
15
19
14
K_03
K_01
13
Pin
X_1
X_2
Ring
valid
X_3
6O
Output relays
K_02
0..20 mA
T4
Type X
K_04
K_05
K_06
18
Binary
module
IN
12
T3
X_1
12
11
IC
Pin
X_1
inputs
T2
Ring
X_2
1
IB
6I / 8O
11
10
T1
module
10
Current measuring
IA
U_08
13
Current measuring
input
Ring Pin
Type X
Binary
D1[T]
RS 422 / 485
Vin
Vin
K_05
Vin
U_02
U_03
Port supervision
7
8
Alarm Port 2
K22
IRIG-B
time synchronization
Power supply
+ Vaux
-
K21
U_04
K_06
PE
Alarm Port 1
X11
U100
#
#
U21
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Type A
Communication
module
CH1 / CH2
Per order
Serial [Channel 1]
optical fiber link
Ethernet [IEC]
X7
X//Y U17
RX
X//Y U18
TX
X//Y
D2[R]
U19
4
5
U17
Communication Type A
module (InterMiCOM) CH3
X/Y
U18
TX
Per order
COMM4
X36
X//Y U22
RX
U26
X/Y
X//Y U23
X//Y U31
1
2
U24
D1[T]
X//Y U32
or wire link
D2[R]
RS 485
RS 422 / 485
TX
X38
X//Y
3
4
D1[T]
RX
X37
or wire link
X33
X13
TX
Per order
X31
RX
Communication Type A
module (InterMiCOM) CH4
COMM3
X32
or
optical fiber link SC
or wire link
X/Y
X8
X8
ETH / CH2
Per order
X7
X9
Type A
Communication
module
X//Y
D2[R]
3
4
5
U33
D1[T]
RS 485
and wire link

X12
Serial [Channel 2]
wire link only
X10
1
2
X//Y
D1[T]
X10
RS 422 / 485
IRIG-B
time synchronization
X11
1
Serial [COMM2]
wire link
U20
X//Y U25
RJ45
D2[R]
3
5
#
#
U21
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
1
2
X//Y
D2[R]
U20
4
5
D1[T]
RS 422 / 485
5-21
P437
5-22
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6
Local Control (HMI)
6.1
Local Control Panel (HMI)

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel
(HMI). All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from
the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read
out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control
panel:
Controlling switchgear units
Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status

signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short

circuits in the power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in

testing and commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-1
P437
6 Local Control (HMI)
6.2
Display and Keypad
6.2.1
Text Display
The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.11, (p. 3-65) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display.
6.2.2
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set return time illumination (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time
illumination (LO C : Re tu rn ti me i llu min.) is set to blocked.
6.2.3
Contrast of the Display

The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local
control panel at the same time, as follows:
6-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press Up or Down (
,
) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.4
Short Description of Keys
6.2.4.1
Up and Down Keys
Panel Level: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level: Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
up and down keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
Up key: the next higher value is selected.
Down key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the up and down key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.4.2
Left and Right Keys
Menu Tree Level: Press the left and right keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and
right keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
Left key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
Right key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the left and right keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.4.3
ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
6.2.4.4
CLEAR Key
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-3
P437
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6.2.4.5
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.4.6
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered.

More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in Section 3.6,
(p. 3-39).
More details on handling function keys can be found in Section 6.8, (p. 6-10).
6-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6.3
P437
Display Levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the READ key:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-5
P437
6.4
Display Panels
The text display of the P437 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Measured Value
Panel(s)
Record View
Voltage VAB prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record
+
Device type
Parameters
Operation
Device ID
Cyclic measurements
Configuration parameters
Function parameters
Global
Control and testing

Operating data recordings
Events
Event counters
Measured fault data
Event recordings
Measured operating data
Main functions
Parameter subset 1
Parameter subset ...
Control
Physical state signals

Logical state signals
Menu tree
Fig. 6-2: Display panels and menu tree.
6-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6.5
P437
Menu Tree and Data Points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using
a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the
LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected
by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch
and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically
encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected
data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line
below.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-7
P437
6.6
List Data Points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data
points generally have more than one associated value element. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When
a list data point is selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the
LCD, indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The
individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the
case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators
such as OR.
6-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6.7
P437
Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions

The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays
can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right
of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described
in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-9
P437
6.8
6-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6.8.1
P437
Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx

Function keys [F1] to [Fx] can be assigned a password (see Section 6.11.9, (p. 631)). In such a case they are effective only after that password has been
entered. By default, no password is required to use the function key.
It is assumed for the following operating example that function key [F1] is
enabled only after the password (as assigned at F_K EY: Pass word funct. key
1) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will
remain active for the duration set at F _KE Y: R etu rn tim e fct.k ey s.
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-11
P437
Control Step / Description
Step 0
Display example.
Step 1
Press function key [F1].

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt
to enter the password if it is required.
Control
Action
Display
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
********
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step and the

next do not exist and the function key is effective
immediately as described in Step 3.)
Step 2a
If a password is set, press the keys corresponding to

the set password, for example:
Left
Down
*
Right
*
Up
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column.
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has
been entered, the active display will re-appear.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return
time.
*
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
By default, no password is required and therefore

function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b
6-12
This control step can be canceled at any time by

pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is
pressed.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 3
Press [F1] again. The function configured to this

function key is carried out.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4
When function keys are pressed during their associated

return time, then the set function is carried out directly,
i.e. without checking for the password again.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does

not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-13
P437
6.9
Changing Between Display Levels
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level

After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
Step 1
First press the up key and hold it down while pressing

the CLEAR key.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Note: It is important to press the up key first and

release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level

Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Example of a Measured Value Panel.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1
Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the

Menu Tree Level.
P437
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
6-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.10
Control at Panel Level

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel (L OC : F ct .
Op erat ion P ane l), the Overload Panel (LOC: Fct . Overload Panel), and the
Fault Panel (LOC : Fct. F aul t P ane l).
Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the
given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The
selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see
Section 6.11.5.1, (p. 6-22) for instructions regarding selection. If
MAIN: Wit hout fu nction has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault
Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset,
by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously

on the Panel.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1
If more than two measured values have been selected,

they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the
up or down keys.
Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
The device will also show the next page of the

Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC : Hold-t im e for Pan el s, located at Par/
Conf in the menu tree) has elapsed.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
or
6-15
P437
6.11
Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.11.1
Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups

All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three
main folders Settings, Measurements & Tests and Fault & Event Records,
which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the
entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
Unit
type
Folder
plane 1
PX yyy
PX yyy
Parameters
Folder
plane 2
Folder
plane 3
Function
groups
Data
points
PX yyy
Operation
PX yyy
Events
Oper/
Cyclic measurements
Oper/Cycl/
Meas. operating data
Oper/Cycl/Data/
MAIN
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Date
01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
Fig. 6-3: Basic menu tree structure.
6-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.11.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode
and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals,
and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain
text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form
of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The
active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the
following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only.
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
In this example, the user switches from plain text mode

to address mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
No (=off)
Step 1
To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice

versa, press the CLEAR key and either the left key or
the right key simultaneously. This can be done at any
+
point in the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
0
or
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-17
P437
6.11.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling function: To activate the global changeenabling function, set the LOC: P aram. cha nge enabl. parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)) are enabled without
entering the password.
Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting

change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when
the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following
example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see Section 6.11.9, (p. 6-31)), the following
description will apply accordingly.
6-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select the

LOC: Param. change enabl. parameter.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
Step 1
Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the

fourth line of the display.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
********
Step 2
Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Left
Right
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Up
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Down
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right.
Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting
can now be changed by pressing the up or down
keys.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
If an invalid password has been entered, the display

shown in Step 1 appears.
Step 3
Change the setting to Yes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
Step 4
Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out.
The unit is enabled for further setting changes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global changeenabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.11.3.1
Automatic Return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (L O C: Aut om. re tur n ti me, menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-19
P437
display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system

condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
6.11.3.2
Forced Return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN : D ev ice on-li ne, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings include
the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be
adapted to the system. The following entries in the Change column of the
Telegram Documentation (part of the separately available
DataModelExplorer) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
on: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
off: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.11.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.
Step 0
Example of a display.
In this example, the change-enabling function is
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.
Control
Action
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
Step 1
Select the desired setting by pressing the keys.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 2
Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT

MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is
highlighted by a cursor (underlined).
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 3
Press the left or right keys to move the cursor to

the left or right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 4
Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing

the up and down keys. In the meantime the device
will continue to operate with the old value.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Step 5

MODE will go out and the device will now operate with
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Step 6
If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-21
P437
6.11.5
List Parameters
6.11.5.1
Setting a List Parameter

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order
to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements
that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements
are linked by an OR operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and
NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list
items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a
Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
6-22
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Control
Action
Display
Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter

MAIN : Fct .assig.t rip cmd.1 at Par/Func/Glob/
MAIN in the menu tree). The down arrow () indicates
that a list setting has been selected.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Step 1
Press the down key. The first function and the first
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines,
respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates
the first item of the selection. If MA IN: Wi th out
funct ion appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#01 DIST
Trip zone 1
Step 2
Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing

the right and left keys.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown

on the right will appear.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#05 MAIN
?????
Step 3
Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Step 4
Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the

right and left keys in the input mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 5
Select the operator or the class using the up and

down keys. In this particular case, only the OR
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the
selection of classes.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 6
Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate
with the new settings.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 0
If no operator has been selected, the OR operator is

always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Step 7
Press the up key to exit the list at any point in the

list.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Step 8
If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE will be extinguished.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
6-23
P437
6.11.5.2
Deleting a List Parameter

If MAIN : Wit hou t fun ction is assigned to a given item, then all the following
items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6-24
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.11.6
Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8

In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.

6.11.6.1
Readout of the Operating Data Memory

The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
Step 0
Select the entry point for the operating data memory.
Control
Action
Display
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Step 1
Press the down key to enter the operating data

memory. The latest entry is displayed.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 2
Press the left key repeatedly to display the entries

one after the other in chronological order. Once the
end of the operating data memory has been reached,
pressing the left key again will have no effect.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
Enabled USER
Yes
Step 3
Press the right key to display the previous entry.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4
Press the up key at any point within the operating

data memory to return to the entry point.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-25
P437
6.11.6.2
Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory

If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring
routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning
of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum
of 30 entries is possible. After that an overflow signal is issued.
Step 0
Select the entry point for the monitoring signal

memory.
Control
Action
Display
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
Step 1
Press the down key to enter the monitoring signal

memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
Mon. signal record.

01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 2
Press the right key repeatedly to display the entries

one after the other in chronological order. If more than
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the overflow signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Mon. signal record.

01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
Exception oper. syst.
Step 3
Press the left key to display the previous entry.
Mon. signal record.

01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Step 4
If the down key is held down while a monitoring

signal is being displayed, the following additional
information will be displayed:
Mon. signal record.

01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
First
Time when the signal first occurred
Updated
First:
13:33:59.744
Updated: Yes
Acknowledged:
No
Number:
5
The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no

longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring
function.
Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the selfmonitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
Number
The signal occurred x times.
Step 5
Press the up key at any point within the monitoring

signal memory to return to the entry point.
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
6-26
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.11.6.3
Readout of the Event Memories (Records)

There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored
in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line
of the display will show the date and time the fault
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33
Step 1
Press the down key to enter the fault memory. First,

the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd
fault since the last reset.
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
Event
22
Step 2
Press the right key repeatedly to see first the

measured fault data and then the binary signals in
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or
ended.
Fault recording 1
200 ms
FT_DA
Running time
0.17 s
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
right key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Fault recording 1
241 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3
Press the left key to see the previous measured value

or the previous signal.
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Step 4
Press the up key at any point within the fault memory

to return to the entry point.
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-27
P437
6.11.7
Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section Resetting Actions in Chapter Operation.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global changeenabling function has already been activated.
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the

number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this
example.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Step 1

MODE will light up.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
Step 2
Press the Up or Down keys to change the setting to

Execute.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Execute
Step 3

MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset
to 0.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
0
Step 4
To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings

after leaving the standard control mode (the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR
key. The LED indicator will be extinguished, and the
fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection units memory. Any setting can be selected
again for a value change by pressing the keys.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
6-28
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6.11.8
P437
Password-Protected Control Actions

Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for
testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent
unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been
activated (see section Change-Enabling Function).
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the
global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a
pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If
the password has been changed by the user (see section Changing the
Password), the following description will apply accordingly.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-29
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN, select the

parameter MAI N: Man . trip cm d. USE R.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 1

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
********
Step 2
Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Left
Right
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Up
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Down
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right.
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting
can now be changed by pressing the up or down
keys.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 3
Change the setting to execute.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Step 4
Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled

EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the
command.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 5
As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on,

the control action can be terminated by pressing the
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
6-30
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
6.11.9
Changing the Password
6.11.9.1
Local Control Panel with Password Protection

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered
sequentially within a specific time interval. The left, right, up and down
keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and
4, respectively:
4
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this
change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-31
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the

LOC: P assword setting.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Step 1

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
********
Step 2
Press the left, right, up and down keys to enter

the valid password. The display will change as shown in
the column on the right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Step 3

EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an
underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a
new password.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
_
Step 4
Enter the new password, which in this example is done

by pressing the up key followed by the down key.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 5
Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third

line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line
prompts the user to enter the new password again.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 6
Re-enter the password.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
6-32
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 7a
Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been

re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Step 7b
If the password has been re-entered incorrectly, the

LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the
display shown on the right appears. The password has
to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 8
The change in password can be canceled at any time

before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is
done, the original Password continues to be valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
6.11.9.2
Local Control Panel without Password Protection

Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also
possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in
steps 4 and 6 of Table, (p. 6-32), without entering anything else. This will
configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control
actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling
function has been activated (see Change-Enabling Function, Section 6.11.3,
(p. 6-18)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
6-33
P437
6.11.9.3
Display the Password

If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD
display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and
then on again.
Step 0
Turn off the device.
Step 1
Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of

device startup, press the four directional keys (left,
right, up and down) at the same time and hold
them down.
Step 2
Step 3
When this condition is detected during startup, the

password is displayed.
Control
Action
Display
TEST
Password
1234
After the four keys are released, startup will continue.

TEST
6-34
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7
Settings
7.1
Parameters
The P437 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P437 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a cold restart. The P437 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P437_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P437 versions before P437630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named IED Configurator.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator.
Cancelling a Protection Function

The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage
system by including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration
and cancelling all others (removing them from the device configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection function:
The protection function in question must be disabled.
None of the functions of the protection function to be cancelled may be

assigned to a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary

output or an LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list

setting.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals
by way of an m out of n parameter.
The protection function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value

belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT:).
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group Binary Input (INP)
The P437 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are
shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The DataModelExplorer (available
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-1
P437
7 Settings
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence
(active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group Binary Output (OUTP)
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The DataModelExplorer (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter Technical Data). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-onsignal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators
The P437 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled HEALTHY and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled OUT OF SERVICE and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled ALARM and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the EDIT MODE. Section
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)
in Chapter Operation describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (open-circuit principle) or normally-energized (NE) mode (closed-circuit
principle) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 H 16) the colors red and green can be
independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
7-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
7.1.1
Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P437. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P437 is
modified.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-3
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Device
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DVICE: De vice t ype

437
000 000
1000
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on

Not measured
[spacer]
655.35
DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 6X X

Not measured
[spacer]
0.00
002 120
010 167
65535
DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 7X X

Not measured
010 168
65535
[spacer]
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: S W date
01.01.97
[spacer]
002 122
01.01.97 07.11.98 dd.mm.yy
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer]
DVICE: S W ve rsion communic.

Not measured
0.00
002 103
655.35
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion

Not measured
002 059
65535
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol

per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: Lang uage v ersion

0.0
0.0
002 123
899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: Text vers .dat a mode l

0
002 121
255
[spacer]
Using the text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier 0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer]
DVICE: F numb er
0
[spacer]
7-4
002 124
9999
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DVICE: AFS Orde r No.
Logic Diagram
001 000
0:
[spacer]
DVICE: PCS Or de r No.
001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer]
DVICE: Order ext . No. 1

0
[spacer]
000 010
999
000 011
999
000 012
999
000 013
999
000 014
999
000 015
999
000 016
999

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 009

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 008

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 007

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 006

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 005

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 004

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 003
000 017
999

0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
000 018
999
7-5
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
999
000 023
999
000 024
999
000 025
999
000 026
999
000 027
999

0
[spacer]
000 022

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 021

0
[spacer]
999

0
[spacer]
000 020

0
[spacer]
000 028
999

0
Logic Diagram
999

0
[spacer]
Unit
000 019

0
[spacer]
Max

0
[spacer]
Min

0
[spacer]
Address
000 029
999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer]
DVICE: M odule var. slot 1
086 050
1: Module P: 0336411
[spacer]
086 051
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 052
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 053
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 054
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 055
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 056
65535: Not fitted
7-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 8
Logic Diagram
086 057
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 9
086 058
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 0
086 059
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 061
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 062
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 063
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 064
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 065
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 066
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 067
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 068
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 069
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.

The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer]
DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1
086 193
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 194
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 195
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 196
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 197
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 198
27: Not fitted
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-7
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DVICE: M odule vers . slot 7
Logic Diagram
086 199
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 200
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 201
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 0
086 202
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 204
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 205
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 206
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 207
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 208
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 209
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 210
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
086 212
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant of module A
086 047
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Vers ion of module A
086 190
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
[spacer]
DVICE: M AC add ress module A
104 061
2:
[spacer]
7-8
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DVICE: Variant of module L
Logic Diagram
086 048
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Vers ion of module L
086 191
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant of module B
086 049
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Vers ion of module B
086 192
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant module B (a)
086 046
65535: Not fitted

[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Vers ion modul e B (a)
086 189
27: Not fitted

[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer]
DVICE: IP addres s
111 000
2:
[spacer]
DVICE: S ubnet mas k
111 001
2:
[spacer]
DVICE: M AC address
111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer]
DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
000 041
99.99

0.00
[spacer]
99.99

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
000 040
0.00
000 042
99.99

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
000 043
99.99
7-9
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.00
000 044
99.99
0.00
000 045
99.99

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
000 046
99.99

0.00
0.00
000 047
99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer]
DVICE: Location
001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer]
DVICE: De vice I D
0
000 035
9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: S ubst ation ID

0
000 036
9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: Fee de r ID
0
000 037
9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: De vice p assword 1

0
[spacer]
000 048
9999
DVICE: De vice p assword 2

0
000 049
9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
[spacer]
DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI

Not measured
7-10
0.00
002 131
655.35
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
0.00
002 132
655.35
Internal software version numbers.

Parameter
Default
Local control panel
Logic Diagram
DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI DM

1.10
[spacer]
Address
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Local HM I ex is ts
221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-11
P437
7.1.2
7 Settings
Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Default
Local control panel
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Languag e
003 020
2: Reference language
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer]
LOC: De cim al delimit er
003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Pas s word

1234
003 035
4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer]
LOC: Ass ig nment r es et ke y

060 000: MAIN: Without function
005 251
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
[spacer]
LOC: Ass ig nment r ead k e y
080 110

[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.

Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 1
030 238

[spacer]
LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 2
030 239

[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated

reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. Operation P anel

053 007
Fig. 3-2, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. Ove r load Pane l

[spacer]
7-12
053 005
Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-7)
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Fct. Fault Panel
053 003
Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-6)
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Hold- tim e for P anels

5
031 075
10
Fig. 3-2, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer]
LOC: Autom . re t ur n t ime

60
60
003 014
60000
Fig. 3-2, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer]
LOC: Re t ur n time illumi n.

60
[spacer]
60
003 023
60000
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-13
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
PC link
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PC: Bay addre ss

1
[spacer]
Address
003 068
254
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
PC: De vice addr ess

1
003 069
255
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer]
PC: Baud rate
003 081
115.2: 115.2 kBaud
Baud
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Parit y bit
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
003 181
1: Even
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P437.
[spacer]
PC: Spontan. sig. e nable
003 187
0: None
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Select. s pontan. si g.
003 189
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Trans m.enab.cyc l. dat
003 084
0: Without
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Cycl. d ata ILS t e l.
003 185
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: De lta V
3.0
003 055
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the

set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta I
3.0
003 056
0.0
15.0
%Inom
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the

set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: IP addr es s
192
7-14
111 004
255
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
Logic Diagram
255
PC: IP addr es s 2
111 006
255
PC: IP addr es s 3
2
[spacer]
Max
111 005
1
[spacer]
Min
PC: IP addr es s 1
168
[spacer]
Address
111 007
255
IP address of the Ethernet interface of the P437's processor module.

This is the Ethernet interface of the processor module and can be used for
special service activities, e.g. for uploading new firmware.
Note: In the operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at PC: IP
addr es s. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address
distributed to these four data model addresses:
PC : IP add re ss,
PC: IP addr e ss 1,
PC: IP ad dres s 2,
PC: I P ad dres s 3.
Note: This interface can only be used if it has been configured (PC: IP
addr es s, PC: Subnet mas k, PC : IP addre ss mode) and activated via
PC: IP Enable co nf ig..
[spacer]
PC: Subnet mas k

255
[spacer]
255
PC: Subnet mas k 2
111 010
255
PC: Subnet mas k 3

0
[spacer]
111 009
255
[spacer]
255
PC: Subnet mas k 1

255
[spacer]
111 008
111 011
255
Subnet mask of the Ethernet interface of the processor module.

Note: In the operating program, the complete mask is displayed at
PC: Subnet mas k. The devices front panel display only displays the mask
distributed to these four data model addresses:
PC: Subnet mask,
PC: Sub net mas k 1,
PC: S ubnet mask 2,
PC: S ubne t mask 3.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-15
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PC: IP addr es s mode
111 016
1: DHCP
[spacer]
[spacer]
Setting of the method how the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the
processor module shall be defined.
DHCP: The IP address shall be retrieved from a DHCP server.
Fix: The setting of P C: IP addre ss shall be used.
Device address: The setting of PC : IP addr ess shall be used for the
first three number values of the IP address, the fourth number value of the
IP address shall be the value of PC : De v ic e addr ess.
PC: IP Enable conf ig.
111 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Activating the Ethernet interface of the processor module.
[spacer]
PC: De lta P
15.0
003 059
0.0
15.0
%Snom
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta f
2.0
003 057
0.0
2.0
%fnom
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta meas.v.ILS te l

3.0
0.0
003 155
15.0
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta t
1
003 058
15
min
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer]
PC: Time-out
1
[spacer]
7-16
003 188
60
min
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Functio n gr oup CO MM1
056 026
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer]
COMM 1: General enabl e USE R
003 170
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Basic IE C87 0-5 e nabl

0: No
003 215
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Addit . - 10 1 e nable

0: No
003 216
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Addit . I LS e nable

0: No
003 217
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer]
COMM 1: MODB US e nable

0: No
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer]
COMM 1: DNP3 enable

0: No
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer]
COMM 1: COUR IER e nable

0: No
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Com m unicat. prot ocol

[spacer]
003 220
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
003 231
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
103 040
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
003 167
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-17
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 1: -103 pr ot. var iant
003 178
1: Private
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: MODB US prot . variant
003 214
1: Compatible
[spacer]
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Line idle stat e
003 165
1: Light on / high
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Baud rate

19.2: 19.2 kBaud
003 071
Baud
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Parity bit

2: Even
003 171
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
7-18
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P437.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Dead t ime moni toring
003 176
1: Yes
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Mon. time pol ling

25
003 202
254
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Octet comm. addre ss

1
254
003 072
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
COMM 1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP 3

0
[spacer]
255
003 240
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.

The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COM M1: Octe t comm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-19
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Pos. acknowle dge me nt
103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the

standard):
Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5

characters
Single character E5: single control character
COMM 1: Tes t m onit or on
003 166
0: No
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r

1: SE
003 161
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note:
[spacer]
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM 1: Octet address ASD U

1
255
003 073
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Spontan. s ig. enabl e

65535: All
003 177
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
7-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Se le ct. s pont an.sig.
003 179
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via logical communication

interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Transm.enab.c ycl.dat
003 074
0: Without
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication

interface.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l.
003 175
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta V
3.0
003 050
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta I
3.0
003 051
0.0
15.0
%Inom
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta P
15.0
003 054
0.0
15.0
%Snom
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-21
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Delta f
2.0
003 052
0.0
2.0
%fnom
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if

it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta m e as. v.ILS t el

3.0
0.0
003 150
15.0
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t
1
003 053
15
min
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t (e ne r gy)

Blocked
003 151
15
min
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via
the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Cont in. ge ner al scan

Blocked
10
9000
003 077
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P437 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
7-22
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Com m . addr ess le ngth

1
[spacer]
Address
003 201
Byte
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. addr.

0
[spacer]
003 200
255
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Caus e transm. le ngth
003 192
1: W/o source address

[spacer]
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU

1
[spacer]
003 193
Byte
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. ASD U

0
[spacer]
003 194
255
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Addr.le ngth inf. obj.

2
[spacer]
003 196
Byte
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.

0
[spacer]
255
003 197
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Inf .No.<- >funct.t ype

0: No
[spacer]
003 195
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-23
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Tim e tag length

3
[spacer]
Address
003 198
Byte
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the time tag length.

[spacer]
COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv .
003 190
1: Single signal
[spacer]
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
[spacer]
COMM 1: AS DU2 co nver si on
003 191
1: Single signal
[spacer]
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single

signal or double signal.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Init ializ. signal
003 199
1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Balance d ope ration
003 226
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis

(full duplex operation).
[spacer]
COMM 1: Direction bit

0
[spacer]
003 227
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Tim e- out int erv al

0.40
[spacer]
0.10
003 228
2.55
Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
7-24
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. cmds
003 210

[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. si g.
003 211

[spacer]
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . m. val.
003 212

[spacer]
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . par am.
003 213

[spacer]
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t ( MO DBUS)

5
[spacer]
003 152
120
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Autom .eve nt c onfirm.

0: Without
[spacer]
003 249
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order

for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-25
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Phys . Char act . De lay

0
[spacer]
Address
254
003 241
Bit
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Phys . Char . Time out

40
[spacer]
254
003 242
Bit
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Link Confirm. M ode
003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment
[spacer]
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Link Confirm.Timeout

0.10
[spacer]
0.05
2.54
003 244
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Link Max. Re tr ie s

2
[spacer]
003 245
10
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
[spacer]
COMM 1: Appl.Con firm.T ime out

5.0
[spacer]
0.5
25.4
003 246
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Appl. Ne ed Time De l.

60
[spacer]
254
003 247
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
7-26
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. input s
003 232

[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin.output s
003 233

[spacer]
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. count .
003 234

[spacer]
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog inp.
003 235

[spacer]
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog outp
003 236

[spacer]
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta me as. v. ( DNP 3 )

16
[spacer]
003 250
255
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in

object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t ( DNP 3)

5
[spacer]
003 248
120
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-27
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 1: Com m and sel ect ion
103 042

[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Signal s elec tion
103 043

[spacer]
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

[spacer]
COMM 1: Meas . val. sel ect ion
103 044

[spacer]
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Param et er s ele ct ion
103 045

[spacer]
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t (COURIE R)

5
[spacer]
103 046
120
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
7-28
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Functio n gr oup CO MM2
056 057
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

[spacer]
103 170
0: No
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 2: Line idle stat e
103 165
1: Light on / high
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Baud rat e
103 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud
Baud
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Parity bit
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
103 171
2: Even
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P437.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Dead t ime moni toring
103 176
1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Mon. time pol ling

25
103 202
254
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Posit ive ackn. faul t
103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after

transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-29
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Octet comm. addre ss

1
[spacer]
Address
103 072
254
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
for both addresses.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Name of manufac ture r
103 161
1: SE
[spacer]
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Octet address ASD U

1
[spacer]
103 073
255
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
for both addresses.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Spontan. s ig. enabl e
103 177
0: None
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Se le ct. s pont an.sig.
103 179
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat
103 074
0: Without
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l.
103 175
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the

communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta V
3.0
[spacer]
7-30
103 050
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Delta I
3.0
103 051
0.0
15.0
%Inom
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta P
15.0
103 054
0.0
15.0
%Snom
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta f
2.0
103 052
0.0
2.0
%fnom
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if

it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta me as. v.ILS t el

3.0
0.0
103 150
15.0
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta t
1
[spacer]
103 053
15
min
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-31
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 3: Function gr oup CO MM3
056 058
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer]
120 030
0: No
[spacer]
122 030
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 3: Baud rate

9600: 9600 baud
[spacer]
120 038
Baud
COMM 4: Baud rate

9600: 9600 baud
122 038
Baud
[spacer]
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the guidance
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Source addr es s
120 031
1: 1
[spacer]
COMM 4: Source addr es s
122 031
1: 1
[spacer]
Address for send signals.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Receiving addr es s
120 032
2: 2
[spacer]
COMM 4: Function gr oup CO MM4
056 088
0: Without
[spacer]
COMM 4: Receiving addr es s
122 032
2: 2
[spacer]
Address for receive signals.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. se nd 1
121 001

[spacer]
121 003

[spacer]
121 005
7-32
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
121 007

[spacer]
121 009

[spacer]
121 011

[spacer]
121 013

[spacer]
121 015

[spacer]
123 001

[spacer]
123 003

[spacer]
123 005

[spacer]
123 007

[spacer]
123 009

[spacer]
123 011

[spacer]
123 013

[spacer]
123 015

[spacer]
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. re c. 1
120 001

[spacer]
120 004

[spacer]
120 007

[spacer]
120 010

[spacer]
120 013
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-33
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 016

[spacer]
120 019

[spacer]
120 022

[spacer]
122 001

[spacer]
122 004

[spacer]
122 007

[spacer]
122 010

[spacer]
122 013

[spacer]
122 016

[spacer]
122 019

[spacer]
122 022

[spacer]
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals
[spacer]
COMM 3: Ope r. m ode rec eiv e 1
120 002
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 005
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 008
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 011
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 002
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 005
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 008
1: Direct intertrip
7-34
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 4: Ope r. mode rec eiv e 4
122 011
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals
1 to 4 (single-pole transmission).
[spacer]
120 014
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 017
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 020
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 023
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 014
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 017
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 020
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 023
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (two-pole transmission).
[spacer]
COMM 3: Default value rec . 1
120 060
0: 0
[spacer]
120 061
0: 0
[spacer]
120 062
0: 0
[spacer]
120 063
0: 0
[spacer]
120 064
0: 0
[spacer]
120 065
0: 0
[spacer]
120 066
0: 0
[spacer]
120 067
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-35
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 060
0: 0
[spacer]
122 061
0: 0
[spacer]
122 062
0: 0
[spacer]
122 063
0: 0
[spacer]
122 064
0: 0
[spacer]
122 065
0: 0
[spacer]
122 066
0: 0
[spacer]
122 067
0: 0
[spacer]
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Tim e- out comm.faul t

50
[spacer]
10
60000
120 033
ms
COMM 4: Tim e- out comm.faul t

50
10
60000
122 033
ms
[spacer]
This timer triggers the alarm signals COMM3: C ommunications faul t

and S F MON: Com munic .fault CO M M3 the received signals to their userdefined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has elapsed since the
most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Sig.as g. comm.fault
120 034
0: None
[spacer]
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)
COMM 4: Sig.as g. comm.fault
122 034
0: None
[spacer]
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Tim e- out link fail.

5
7-36
120 035
600
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 4: Tim e- out link fail.

5
122 035
600
[spacer]
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this timer
stage has elapsed, alarm signals C OMM 3: C omm. link failure and
SFMO N: Comm .link fail.C OMM3 are raised. These can be mapped to
give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that maintenance
attention is required.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Limit te le gr. e r r ors

Blocked
[spacer]
100
COMM 4: Limit te le gr. e r r ors

Blocked
[spacer]
120 036
100
122 036
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (CO M M3 : Lim.e x ce e d.,tel.e rr. and
SFMO N: Lim .e x c.te l.e r .COM M3). When this threshold is exceeded, the
receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
Parameter
Default
IRIGB interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
IRIGB: Function group IRIG B
056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

and signals are hidden.
[spacer]
IRIGB: Gener al e nable US ER

0: No
[spacer]
023 200
Fig. 3-22, (p. 3-38)
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-37
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSS E: Function group G SS E
056 060
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GSSE or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden. Parameters included in this function group are
only effective when function group IEC is configured and enabled and when the
parameters in this function group have been activated by setting the parameter
IEC: Switch Config. Bank.
[spacer]
GSS E: Gene ral e nabl e US E R
104 049
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.
[spacer]
GSS E: Min. cycle

10
[spacer]
104 052
60
ms
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle
time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this
formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of
a GSSE bit pair.
[spacer]
GSS E: Max. cycle

1
104 053
60
[spacer]
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see G SS E : Min. cycle. Should the
calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set
max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
[spacer]
GSS E: Incre ment

900
104 054
999
[spacer]
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see GS SE: Min. c ycle.
[spacer]
GSS E: Ope rat ing mode
104 055
0: Promiscuous
[spacer]
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address
(network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the
operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have loggedon, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on
successfully, are read and processed.
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 1 bit pair
104 101
0: No selection
7-38
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 104
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 107
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 110
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 113
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 119
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 122
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 125
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 128
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 134
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 137
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 140
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 143
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 149
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 152
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 155
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 158
0: No selection
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-39
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 161
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 164
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 167
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 170
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 173
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 176
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 179
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 182
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 185
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 188
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 191
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 194
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE
outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed
number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED)
during a send operation.
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 1 fct.assig.
104 102

[spacer]
104 105

[spacer]
104 108

[spacer]
104 111

[spacer]
104 114
7-40
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 117

[spacer]
104 120

[spacer]
104 123

[spacer]
104 126

[spacer]
104 129

[spacer]
104 132

[spacer]
104 135

[spacer]
104 138

[spacer]
104 141

[spacer]
104 144

[spacer]
104 147

[spacer]
104 150

[spacer]
104 153

[spacer]
104 156

[spacer]
104 159

[spacer]
104 162

[spacer]
104 165

[spacer]
104 168

[spacer]
104 171
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-41
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 174

[spacer]
104 177

[spacer]
104 180

[spacer]
104 183

[spacer]
104 186

[spacer]
104 189

[spacer]
104 192

[spacer]
104 195

[spacer]
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE outputs.
The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured
above.
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 1 b it pair
105 001
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 006
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 011
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 016
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 021
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 026
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 031
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 036
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 041
0: No selection
7-42
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
GSS E: Inp ut 10 bit pair
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 046
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 051
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 056
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 061
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 066
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 071
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 076
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 081
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 086
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 091
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 096
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 101
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 106
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 111
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 121
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 126
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 136
0: No selection
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-43
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 141
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 151
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 156
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is
always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a
maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 1 I ED name
105 002
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 007
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 012
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 017
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 022
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 027
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 032
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 037
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 042
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 10 IE D name
105 047
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 052
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 057
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 062
1: Remote IED
7-44
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 067
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 072
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 077
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 082
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 087
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 092
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 097
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 102
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 107
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 112
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 117
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 122
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 127
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 132
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 137
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 142
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 147
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 152
1: Remote IED
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-45
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 157
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 1 d efault
105 003
0: 0
[spacer]
105 008
0: 0
[spacer]
105 013
0: 0
[spacer]
105 018
0: 0
[spacer]
105 023
0: 0
[spacer]
105 028
0: 0
[spacer]
105 033
0: 0
[spacer]
105 038
0: 0
[spacer]
105 043
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 10 de fault
105 048
0: 0
[spacer]
105 053
0: 0
[spacer]
105 058
0: 0
[spacer]
105 063
0: 0
[spacer]
105 068
0: 0
[spacer]
105 073
0: 0
[spacer]
105 078
0: 0
[spacer]
105 083
0: 0
7-46
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 088
0: 0
[spacer]
105 093
0: 0
[spacer]
105 098
0: 0
[spacer]
105 103
0: 0
[spacer]
105 108
0: 0
[spacer]
105 113
0: 0
[spacer]
105 118
0: 0
[spacer]
105 123
0: 0
[spacer]
105 128
0: 0
[spacer]
105 133
0: 0
[spacer]
105 138
0: 0
[spacer]
105 143
0: 0
[spacer]
105 148
0: 0
[spacer]
105 153
0: 0
[spacer]
105 158
0: 0
[spacer]
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE
input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side)
is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 1 f ct.assig.
105 004

[spacer]
105 009
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-47
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 014

[spacer]
105 019

[spacer]
105 024

[spacer]
105 029

[spacer]
105 034

[spacer]
105 039

[spacer]
105 044

[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 10 fct .assig.
105 049

[spacer]
105 054

[spacer]
105 059

[spacer]
105 064

[spacer]
105 069

[spacer]
105 074

[spacer]
105 079

[spacer]
105 084

[spacer]
105 089

[spacer]
105 094

[spacer]
105 099

[spacer]
105 104
7-48
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 109

[spacer]
105 114

[spacer]
105 119

[spacer]
105 124

[spacer]
105 129

[spacer]
105 134

[spacer]
105 139

[spacer]
105 144

[spacer]
105 149

[spacer]
105 154

[spacer]
105 159

[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on
the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection or logic
functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit
pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-49
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
IEC: Function grou p IEC
056 059
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function

group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Important notice: Some of the parameters in function group IEC are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool IED Configurator, they cannot be modified
from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program, and therefore
these parameters are listed separately.
[spacer]
IEC: Ge neral enable US ER
104 000
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer]
IEC: Switch Config. Bank
104 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer]
IEC: Active Conf ig. Name
104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.

Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
[spacer]
IEC: Active Conf ig. Ve r s.
104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.

[spacer]
IEC: Inact . C onfig. Name
104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.

[spacer]
IEC: Inact . C onfig. Ve r s .
104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.

7-50
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
IEC: IED nam e
104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and neither a digit
nor the underscore character must be the first character. Note that a nonstandard name causes problems with the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer]
IEC: IP address
104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer]
IEC: Subnet m ask
104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the subnetwork and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer]
IEC: Gat eway addre s s
104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer]
IEC: SNTP s erve r 1 IP
104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

"IED Configurator".
[spacer]
IEC: SNTP s erve r 2 IP
104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.

"IED Configurator".
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-51
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
IEC: SigGGI O1 sel ect ion
104 064

[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol

IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer]
IEC: Diff . local time

0
104 206
-1440
1440
min
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer]
IEC: Diff . d ayl.s av. t ime

60
-1440
104 207
1440
min
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
[spacer]
IEC: Switch.dayl.sav .ti me
104 219
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is

wanted.
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t
104 220
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. d
104 221
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. m
104 222
3: March
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like on the last Sunday in March may be used.
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st .0:00 +

120
104 223
1440
min
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd
104 225
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd d
104 226
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd m
104 227
10: October
7-52
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.e nd 0:00 +

180
[spacer]
Address
Logic Diagram
104 228
1440
min
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-53
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GOOSE: Function group GOOS E
Logic Diagram
056 068
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Conf ig.
Bank.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Gene ral e nable US ER
106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Output 1 fct .as si g.
106 011

[spacer]
106 013

[spacer]
106 015

[spacer]
106 017

[spacer]
106 019

[spacer]
106 021

[spacer]
106 023

[spacer]
106 025

[spacer]
106 027

[spacer]
106 029

[spacer]
106 031

[spacer]
106 033
7-54
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 035

[spacer]
106 037

[spacer]
106 039

[spacer]
106 041

[spacer]
106 043

[spacer]
106 045

[spacer]
106 047

[spacer]
106 049

[spacer]
106 051

[spacer]
106 053

[spacer]
106 055

[spacer]
106 057

[spacer]
106 059

[spacer]
106 061

[spacer]
106 063

[spacer]
106 065

[spacer]
106 067

[spacer]
106 069

[spacer]
106 071
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-55
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 073

[spacer]
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1,
GosGGIO2.ST.ind2, in the datasets.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
107 006

[spacer]
107 016

[spacer]
107 026

[spacer]
107 036

[spacer]
107 046

[spacer]
107 056

[spacer]
107 066

[spacer]
107 076

[spacer]
107 086

[spacer]
107 096

[spacer]
107 106

[spacer]
107 116

[spacer]
107 126

[spacer]
107 136

[spacer]
107 146

[spacer]
107 156
7-56
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 157

[spacer]
107 158

[spacer]
107 159

[spacer]
107 160

[spacer]
107 161

[spacer]
107 162

[spacer]
107 163

[spacer]
107 164

[spacer]
107 165

[spacer]
107 166

[spacer]
107 167

[spacer]
107 168

[spacer]
107 169

[spacer]
107 170

[spacer]
107 171

[spacer]
107 172

[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1/Pos1.stVal,

GosGGIO1/Pos2.stVal, ) to a binary logical state signal on the device so that
they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions.
Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data
attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-57
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary input
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
INP: Filter
0
010 220
20
Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-42)
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer]
INP: Fct. as signm. U 801
184 002

[spacer]
184 006

[spacer]
184 010

[spacer]
184 014

[spacer]
184 018

[spacer]
184 022

[spacer]
INP: Fct. as signm. U 100 1
152 163

[spacer]
152 166

[spacer]
152 169

[spacer]
152 172

[spacer]
152 175

[spacer]
152 178

[spacer]
152 199

[spacer]
152 202

[spacer]
152 205

[spacer]
152 208
7-58
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
152 211

[spacer]
152 214

[spacer]
190 002

[spacer]
190 006

[spacer]
190 010

[spacer]
190 014

[spacer]
190 018

[spacer]
190 022

[spacer]
192 002

[spacer]
192 006

[spacer]
192 010

[spacer]
192 014

[spacer]
192 018

[spacer]
192 022

[spacer]
153 087

[spacer]
153 090

[spacer]
153 093

[spacer]
153 096

[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-59
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
INP: Oper. m ode U 801
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
184 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
INP: Oper. m ode U 100 1
152 164
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 167
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 170
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 173
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 176
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 179
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 200
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 203
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 206
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 209
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 212
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 215
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 003
1: Active "high"
7-60
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
190 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 088
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 091
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 094
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 097
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-61
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Measured data input MEASI: F unction group MEAS I
056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.

[spacer]
MEASI: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R
011 100
0: No
Fig. 3-25, (p. 3-43)

Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-52)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer]
MEASI: E nable IDC p. u.

0.000
0.000
037 190
0.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P437 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC < ope n circuit

3.0
0.0
037 191
10.0
mA
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P437 will issue an open
circuit signal.
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC 1
0.000
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 154
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 156
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 158
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 160
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 162
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 164
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 166
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC 10
Blocked
7-62
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 9
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 8
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 7
Blocked
[spacer]
037 152
MEASI: I DC 6
Blocked
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC 5
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 4
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 3
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 2
Blocked
[spacer]
037 150
037 168
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 172
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 174
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 176
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 178
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 180
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 182
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 184
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC 19
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 18
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 17
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 16
Blocked
[spacer]
037 170
MEASI: I DC 15
Blocked
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MEASI: I DC 14
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
MEASI: I DC 13
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
MEASI: I DC 12
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
MEASI: I DC 11
Blocked
[spacer]
Address
037 186
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC 20
1.200
037 188
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC ,lin 1
0.000
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 155
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 157
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 159
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 161
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 7
Blocked
[spacer]
037 153
MEASI: I DC ,lin 6
Blocked
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 5
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 4
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC ,lin 3
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC ,lin 2
Blocked
[spacer]
037 151
037 163
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 8
Blocked
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
037 165
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
7-63
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 171
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 173
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 175
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 177
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 179
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 181
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 183
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)

037 185
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 19
Blocked
[spacer]
037 169
MEASI: I DC ,lin 18
Blocked
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 17
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 16
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC ,lin 15
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC ,lin 14
Blocked
[spacer]
037 167
MEASI: I DC ,lin 13
Blocked
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MEASI: I DC ,lin 12
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
MEASI: I DC ,lin 11
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
MEASI: I DC ,lin 10
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
MEASI: I DC ,lin 9
Blocked
[spacer]
Address
037 187
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: I DC ,lin 20
1.200
037 189
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer]
MEASI: S caled val. IDC ,lin1

0
-32768
037 192
32767
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer]
MEASI: S caled val.IDC ,l in2 0

1200
[spacer]
7-64
-32768
32767
Fig. 3-29, (p. 3-47)
037 193
Fig. 3-29, (p. 3-47)
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary and analog

output
Address
Min
Max
OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 8 0 1
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 169

[spacer]
150 172

[spacer]
150 175

[spacer]
150 178

[spacer]
150 181

[spacer]
150 184

[spacer]
150 187

[spacer]
150 190

[spacer]
150 217

[spacer]
150 220

[spacer]
150 223

[spacer]
150 226

[spacer]
150 229

[spacer]
150 232

[spacer]
150 235

[spacer]
150 238

[spacer]
151 009

[spacer]
151 012
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-65
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
OUTP: Fct. ass ignm. K 1 2 03
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 015

[spacer]
151 018

[spacer]
151 021

[spacer]
151 024

[spacer]
151 027

[spacer]
151 030

[spacer]
169 002

[spacer]
169 006

[spacer]
169 010

[spacer]
169 014

[spacer]
169 018

[spacer]
169 022

[spacer]
169 026

[spacer]
169 030

[spacer]
171 002

[spacer]
171 006

[spacer]
171 010

[spacer]
171 014

[spacer]
171 018
7-66
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 022

[spacer]
171 026

[spacer]
171 030

[spacer]
173 002

[spacer]
173 006

[spacer]
173 010

[spacer]
173 014

[spacer]
173 018

[spacer]
173 022

[spacer]
151 201

[spacer]
151 204

[spacer]
151 207

[spacer]
151 210

[spacer]
151 213

[spacer]
151 216

[spacer]
151 219

[spacer]
151 222

[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer]
OUTP: Oper. mode K 8 01
150 170
1: ES updating
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-67
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 173
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 176
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 179
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 185
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 188
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 191
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 218
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 221
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 224
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 227
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 230
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 233
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 236
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 239
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 010
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 013
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 016
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 019
1: ES updating
7-68
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 022
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 025
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 028
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 027
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 027
1: ES updating
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-69
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 202
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 205
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 208
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 211
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 214
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 217
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 220
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 223
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-70
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MEASO: Functio n group M EASO
056 020
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer]
MEASO: Ge ne ral e nable US ER
031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer]
MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. BC D
053 002
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Hold t ime output BC D

0.10
0.10
10.00
010 010
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Scale d min. val. B C D

0.000
[spacer]
1.000
MEASO: Scale d max. v al. BC D

1.000
[spacer]
0.000
0.000
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
037 141
1.000
MEASO: BC D-Out min. value

0
037 140
037 142
399
7-71
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MEASO: BC D-Out max. value

399
[spacer]
Address
037 143
399
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.

For measured values in the range measured values to be issued the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. BCD ...
Scaled max. val. BCD
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; range: BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
BBCD display values for measured values Mx,min; range: BCD-Out min.
value
BCD display values for measured values Mx,max; range: BCD-Out max.
value
[spacer]
MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 1
053 000

[spacer]
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 2
053 001

[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 1

0.10
[spacer]
0.10
10.00
010 114
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 2

0.10
0.10
10.00
010 115
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer]
MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-1

0.000
[spacer]
0.000
1.000
0.000
1.000
MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-2

0.000
7-72
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)

037 105
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
MEASO: Scale d m ax. v al. A- 1

1.000
[spacer]
1.000
MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 1

Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
037 104
0.000
037 106
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)

037 110
1.000
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
037 111
1.000
MEASO: Scale d max. v al. A- 2

1.000
[spacer]
Min
MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 2

Blocked
[spacer]
Address
0.000
037 112
1.000
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is

to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range measured values to
be issued is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. Ax ...
Scaled max. val. Ax
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value in the data model: Scaled knee val. Ax
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 1

0.00
[spacer]
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
0.00
20.00
037 108
mA
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
0.00
20.00
037 109
mA
MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 2

0.00
[spacer]
mA
MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 1

20.00
[spacer]
20.00
MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 1

Blocked
[spacer]
0.00
037 107
0.00
20.00
037 113
mA
MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 2

Blocked
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
20.00
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
037 114
mA
7-73
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 2

20.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
20.00
Logic Diagram
037 115
mA
Output current range for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; designation in the data model: An-Out min. val. Ax ... An-Out max.
val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,min; designation in the data
model: An-Out min. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,max; designation in the data
model: An-Out max. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: AnOut knee point Ax
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer]
MEASO: Output value 1

0.00
[spacer]
7-74
0.00
037 121
100.00

0.00
[spacer]
100.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
037 120
0.00
037 122
100.00
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be

issued.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
LED indicators
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n
085 184
060 001: MAIN: Healthy

[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.

The function MAIN: He althy is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 2 y ell.
085 001
004 065: MAIN: Blocked/faulty

[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The function MAIN: Blocke d/ fault y is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 3 y ell.
085 004
036 070: SFMON: Warning (LED)

[spacer]

The function SFM ON: Warning (LED ) is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 red
085 007
036 251: MAIN: Gen. trip signal

[spacer]
085 057

[spacer]
085 010

[spacer]
085 060

[spacer]
085 013

[spacer]
085 063

[spacer]
085 016

[spacer]
085 066

[spacer]
085 019

[spacer]
085 069

[spacer]
085 022

[spacer]
085 072
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-75
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 red
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 025

[spacer]
LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 gre e n
085 075

[spacer]
085 028

[spacer]
085 078

[spacer]
085 031

[spacer]
085 081

[spacer]
085 034

[spacer]
085 084

[spacer]
085 037

[spacer]
085 087

[spacer]
085 040

[spacer]
085 090

[spacer]
085 043

[spacer]
085 093

[spacer]
085 131

[spacer]
085 161

[spacer]
085 134

[spacer]
085 164

[spacer]
085 137
7-76
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 0 gre e n
Logic Diagram
085 167

[spacer]
LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 1 red
085 140

[spacer]
085 170

[spacer]
085 143

[spacer]
085 173

[spacer]
085 146

[spacer]
085 177

[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
[spacer]
085 185
080 111: LOC: Edit mode

[spacer]

The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: O pe rating mode H 1
085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
085 002
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 005
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
085 008
3: ES reset (fault)
[spacer]
085 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 014
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 017
1: ES updating
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-77
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 020
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 026
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 029
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 032
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 035
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 038
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 041
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 044
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 132
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 135
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 138
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 141
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 144
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 147
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
[spacer]
085 183
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-78
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Chann.ass ign.C OMM 1/ 2
003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer]
MAIN: Prim .S ource TimeS ync
103 210
0: COMM1
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer]
MAIN: Backup SourceT ime Sy nc
103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Tim e s yn c. t ime -out

Blocked
[spacer]
103 212
60
min
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-79
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1
035 160
1: Current IA
[spacer]
035 161
2: Current IB
[spacer]
035 162
3: Current IC
[spacer]
035 163
5: Voltage A-G
[spacer]
035 164
6: Voltage B-G
[spacer]
035 165
7: Voltage C-G
[spacer]
035 166
4: Current IN
[spacer]
035 167
8: Voltage VNG
[spacer]
035 168
210: Voltage Vref

[spacer]
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.1 0
035 169
0: Without
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
DIST: Function g roup DIST
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 014
1: With
[spacer]
7-80
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSB: Function group PSB
Logic Diagram
056 001
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group PSB or including it in the configuration. If any function

signals are hidden.
Parameter
Default
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MCM ON: Function group MC MON
Logic Diagram
056 015
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration.

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Function group BUOC

time protection
Logic Diagram
056 002
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
SOT F : Funct ion group SOTF
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 003
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-81
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSIG: Function gr oup P S IG
Logic Diagram
056 004
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ARC: Function gro up ARC
Logic Diagram
056 005
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden.
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: Function gr oup AS C
Logic Diagram
056 006
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration. If any function

signals are hidden.
Parameter
Default
Ground fault (shortcircuit) protection
Address
Min
Max
GFS C: Function gr oup GF S C
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 011
0: Without
[spacer]
7-82
Cancelling function group GFSC or including it in the configuration. If any

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default

signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GSCSG: Function gr oup G SC S G
Logic Diagram
056 028
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GSCSG or including it in the configuration. If any

Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: Function group D TOC
Logic Diagram
056 008
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Inverse-time overcur IDMT: F unction group IDMT

rent protection
Logic Diagram
056 009
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden.
Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
THER M : Function group THER M
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 023
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-83
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Time-voltage protec V<>: Funct ion group V<>

tion
Logic Diagram
056 010
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
f<> : Function group f<>

Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
Logic Diagram
056 033
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
P<>: Function group P <>
Logic Diagram
056 045
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
CBF: Function g ro up CBF
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 007
0: Without
[spacer]
7-84
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
CBM: Function group CBM

Circuit breaker
condition monitoring
Logic Diagram
056 062
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration. If the function

signals are hidden.
Parameter
Default
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
LIMIT : Function group LIMI T
Logic Diagram
056 025
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC
Logic Diagram
056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Function gr oup L OG _2
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (Logic 2) or including it in the configuration.

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-85
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
COUNT : Function gr oup CO UNT
Unit
Logic Diagram
217 047
0: Without
[spacer]
7-86
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Configurable func
tion keys
003 036
030 242
4444
030 243
4444
030 244
4444
030 245
4444
F_KEY: Pas s wor d funct. key 6

0
Logic Diagram
4444

0
[spacer]

0
[spacer]
Unit

0
[spacer]
Max

0
[spacer]
Min

0
[spacer]
Address
030 246
4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F1
080 112

[spacer]
080 113

[spacer]
080 114

[spacer]
080 115

[spacer]
080 116

[spacer]
080 117

[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu

jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1 or LO C: F ct . me nu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Oper ating mode F 1
080 132
1: Key
[spacer]
080 133
1: Key
[spacer]
080 134
1: Key
[spacer]
080 135
1: Key
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-87
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
080 136
1: Key
[spacer]
080 137
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Re tur n time fct .k e ys

10
[spacer]
60000
003 037
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
7.1.3
Function Parameters
7.1.3.1
Global
Parameter
Default
PC link
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PC: Command b lock ing

0: No
003 182
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC

interface.
[spacer]
PC: Sig./m eas .val.bl ock .

0: No
[spacer]
7-88
003 086
Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured

data are transmitted through the PC interface.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. US ER
003 172
1: Yes
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication

interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Sig./ meas.block .US E R
003 076
0: No
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Com m and bloc k. US ER
103 172
0: No
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication

interface 2.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Sig./ meas.block .US E R
103 076
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-19)
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter
Default
Binary and analog

output
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OUTP: Outp .rel.block USER

0: No
[spacer]
Address
021 014
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-89
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Device on-line
003 030
0: No (= off)
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: Tes t m ode USER
003 012
0: No
Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-110)
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer]
MAIN: Nominal fr equ. fnom
010 030
50: 50 Hz
Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase s eque nce
010 049
1: A - B - C
[spacer]
Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-77)
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.

(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field's direction, either clockwise
or anticlockwise.)
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim.

1000
010 001
10000
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)

Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
[spacer]
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim.

1000
010 018
10000
Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
[spacer]
MAIN: IN,nom ,par C.T . pr im

1000
10000
010 152
Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line.
[spacer]
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim.

100.0
0.1
010 002
1000.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer]
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T . pr im.

100.0
[spacer]
7-90
0.1
010 027
1000.0
kV
Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Vref ,nom V.T. pri m.

100.0
0.1
010 100
1000.0
kV
Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom de vice
010 003
1.0: 1.0 A
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer]
MAIN: IN,nom dev ice
010 026
1.0: 1.0 A
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer]
MAIN: IN,nom ,par de v ice
010 023
1.0: 1.0 A
[spacer]
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line. This also corresponds
to the nominal device current.
[spacer]
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec.

100
50
010 009
130
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer]
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T . sec .

100
50
010 028
130
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer]
MAIN: Vref ,nom V.T. s ec .

100
50
031 052
130
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer]
MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IP

1: Standard
[spacer]
010 004
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter Installation and
Connection, then the setting must be Standard, if the P437's 'forward' decision
is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is
reversed or given a connection scheme according to Chapter Installation and
Connection if the 'forward' decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the
setting must be Opposite.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-91
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IN
010 019
1: Standard
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on the

connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter
Installation and Connection, then the setting must be Standard, if the P437's
'forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder.
If the connection direction is reversed or given a connection scheme according
to Chapter Installation and Connection if the 'forward' decision is to be in the
busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as. direct ion P,Q
006 096
1: Standard
[spacer]
[spacer]
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured operating
values:
MAIN: Active powe r P prim.
MAIN: R eac. power Q prim.
MAIN: Active powe r P p.u.
M AIN: Reac. powe r Q p. u.
MAIN: Conn.m eas .c rc .IN,par
010 020
1: Standard
Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
The directional measurement of the ground fault (short-circuit) measuring

systems depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection
is as shown in Chapter Installation and Connection, then the setting must be
Standard, if the P437's 'forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing
feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or given a connection scheme
according to Chapter Installation and Connection if the 'forward' decision is
to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as. value re l. IP

0.000
0.000
011 030
0.200
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as. value re l. IN

0.000
0.000
011 031
0.200
IN,nom
Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as.val.rel. IN,par

0.000
[spacer]
7-92
0.000
011 043
0.200
IN,nom
Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating value of the residual current of the parallel line to be
displayed.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Me as. value re l. V

0.000
0.000
011 032
0.200
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and,
if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as. val. re l. VNG

0.000
0.000
011 033
0.200
VNG,nom
Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Me as. val. re l. Vref

0.000
0.000
011 034
0.200
Vref,nom
Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism check is
displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Op. m ode ene r gy cnt .
010 138
1: Procedure 1
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy output.
1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately). 2nd procedure: Data
acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
[spacer]
MAIN: Se tt l. t. IP,max,de l
15.0
0.1
010 113
60.0
min
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 1

005 248
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 2

005 249
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER is enabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 1

[spacer]
021 021
Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-91)
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 1 (MAIN: B lock ing 1 EX T) is activated.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-93
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 2
021 022
Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 2 (MAIN: B locking 2 EX T) is activated.
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip cm d.block . USER
021 012
0: No
Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.1
021 001
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.2
021 002
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 2.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.as s.1p t ri p cmd1
002 060

[spacer]
[spacer]
Selecting signals for the phase-selective trip logic. Available are these signals:
All trip signals issued by functions DTOC, IDMT and GFSC
All output signals issued by function group LOGIC
MAIN: Par. tri p (1 p) EX T
MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 1

0.10
0.10
021 003
10.00
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
[spacer]
MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 2

0.10
0.10
021 004
10.00
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.
[spacer]
MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 1
021 023
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer]
MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 2
021 024
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer]
MAIN: Clos e cmd .puls e ti me

0.100
[spacer]
7-94
0.100
10.000
015 067
Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-95)
Setting for the duration of the close command.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: tCB,clos e
0.060
000 032
0.000
1.000
[spacer]
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power

systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism
check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only possible if
setting ASC: AR with t CB P Sx = Yes or ASC : M C with tCB PS x = Yes.
[spacer]
MAIN: RC inhib .by CB close
015 042
0: No
Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-95)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon
as the Circuit breaker closed signal starts.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re l.t . e nab. man.c md

60
3600
003 088
[spacer]
Setting for the release time of the enable for the manual close command.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct. as s ign. fault
021 031

[spacer]
Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-92)
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the

messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
Parameter
Default
Parameter subset
selection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSS: Control via USE R
003 100
0: No
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control

panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer]
PSS: Param.subs.se l. USE R
003 060
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer]
PSS: Ke ep tim e
Blocked
[spacer]
003 063
0.000
65.000
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-95
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Self-monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. warni ng
021 030
Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-113)
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals Warning
(LED) and Warning (relay) and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
ALARM. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer]
SFMO N: M on.s ig. re t enti on

Blocked
[spacer]
021 018
240
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: Fct. assig . t ri gge r
003 085
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer]
FT_RC: I>
Blocked
017 065
0.01
40.00
Inom
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase currents that will trigger
fault recording and fault data acquisition.
[spacer]
FT_RC: Pre- fault time

5
003 078
50
Periods
Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer]
FT_RC: Post -f ault ti me

5
003 079
750
Periods
Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer]
FT_RC: Max. re cording t ime

50
[spacer]
7-96
750
003 075
Periods
Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-134)
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
7.1.3.2
General Functions
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: Ge ne ral e nable U SE R

1: Yes
[spacer]
Enable/disable the distance protection function.
[spacer]
DIST: CVT s tabil iz ation

0: No
031 073
Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
010 031
Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-153)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.
[spacer]
DIST: Zone e xtens . for 1pG
011 049
0: No
[spacer]
This setting enables zone extension in the case of single-phase-to-ground fault

detection.
[spacer]
DIST: Mode t im er star t

001 236
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
If the mode With zone starting has been selected, then only the timer stage of
the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the measured
loop impedance is inside the zone.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-97
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSB: Gene ral e nable US E R
014 050
0: No
Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-183)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.
[spacer]
PSB: R
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)

014 061
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)
PSB: ne gX
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
014 060
PSB: p osX
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
006 185
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)
PSB:
75
014 062
40
90
[spacer]
Setting for the power swing polygon.
[spacer]
PSB: Op e r. value D el ta T
20
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)
014 090
60
ms
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage for operating mode PSB: Oper ating mode =
Delta Z.
[spacer]
PSB: Activation co nd. dZ
008 235
1: Power Swing polygon

[spacer]
Setting of the Activation condition for the power swing detection based on
impedance variation.
[spacer]
PSB: Fct . as s ign. block .
012 017

[spacer]
Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present.
[spacer]
PSB: Max . PS cycl e dur.

30.00
0.00
[spacer]
Time limit of the blocking effect.
[spacer]
PSB: Hold t ime

30.00
014 055
60.00
011 142
0.00
60.00
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage by which the signal for power swing blocking condition
is extended.
[spacer]
PSB: B locking t ime i nt.

0.00
[spacer]
7-98
0.00
011 143
60.00
Duration of the signal PSB: Blocke d.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSB: Max . blocking ti me

Blocked
0.00
010 179
60.00
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage by which the signal P S B: Blocked is delayed.
[spacer]
PSB: IP>
3.00
014 058
1.00
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer]
PSB: Ine g>

0.30
014 057
0.10
1.00
IP,max
[spacer]
If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is

cancelled without time delay.
[spacer]
PSB: IN>
0.40
014 056
0.10
1.00
IP,max
[spacer]
If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer]
PSB: Abort de lay

0.00
008 234
0.00
1.00
[spacer]
Setting of the extension of the blocking effect, which will become active after a
current trigger has started or after the maximum blocking time period has
elapsed.
[spacer]
PSB: R (OOS )
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
PSB: p osX ( OOS)

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
006 184
006 186
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
PSB: ne gX ( OOS)
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
006 187
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
[spacer]
Settings for the power swing polygon that is used for the enhanced countingbased tripping.
[spacer]
PSB: Pe rm. No. OOS (a)

Blocked
006 028
10
[spacer]
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the inner zone (a).
[spacer]
PSB: Pe rm. No. OOS (b)

Blocked
[spacer]
006 189
10
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the outer zone (b).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-99
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
7-100
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSB: Pe rm. No. s tab. PS

Blocked
[spacer]
Address
006 027
10
Tripping threshold value of the stable power swing counter.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MCM ON: Gener al e nable USER
014 001
0: No
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
[spacer]
MCM ON: C urre nt monitor ing
014 006
1: Yes
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be monitored.
[spacer]
MCM ON: I min curr. monitor .

0.250
0.050
2.000
010 183
Inom
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current

exceeds this setting in at least one phase.
[spacer]
MCM ON: I neg >

0.20
014 002
0.10
1.00
Imax
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the
current-measuring circuit).
[spacer]
MCM ON: Op . m ode volt. mon.
014 007
1: Vneg
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.
[spacer]
MCM ON: I min Vne g monit ori ng

0.050
0.050
2.000
010 184
Inom
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
The negative-sequence voltage monitoring function is enabled when the current

exceeds this setting in at least one phase.
[spacer]
MCM ON: Op erate delay

1.00
0.00
017 011
10.00
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay after which the 'Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty' signals will
be issued.
[spacer]
MCM ON: FF, V e nable d USE R
014 009
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Fuse Failure monitoring function.
[spacer]
MCM ON: FF,Vre f enable d US ER

0: No
[spacer]
014 013
Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-205)
Enabling or disabling the Fuse Failure monitoring function of the reference

voltage Vref.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-101
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MCM ON: Op er. de lay F F , Vre f

0.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
10.00
014 012
Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-205)
Setting for the time delay for Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage
Vref.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Gener al e nable USE R

time protection
014 011
0: No
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
[spacer]
BUOC: Oper ating mode
014 000
1: Without ARC
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode.

Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
SOT F : Ge ne ral e nable US ER
011 068
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
Enabling or disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
7-102
Logic Diagram
PSIG: General enable USE R

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
015 004
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
Disabling or enabling protective signaling.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: General e nable USE R
015 060
0: No
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling auto-reclosing control.
[spacer]
ARC: C ontrol via US E R
000 107
1: Yes
[spacer]
Setting this parameter to No enables selection of ARC operating mode via binary
signal inputs. This is possible only if the required binary signal inputs have been
configured.
[spacer]
ARC: Fct.as sgn. tLOG IC
015 033

[spacer]
Function assignment to tLOGIC.

Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ASC: General enable US ER

0: No
[spacer]
Address
018 000
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
Enabling or disabling the automatic synchronism check.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-103
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: General enable USER
018 060
0: No
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
[spacer]
GFS C: Fct.as sign. bl ock ing
006 020
Fig. 3-221, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection.
[spacer]
GFS C: Evaluat ion VNG
002 136
1: Calculated
Fig. 3-221, (p. 3-293)

Fig. 3-222, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting how the GFSC protection will determine the neutral-point displacement
voltage: It will either be internally calculated from the three measured phase-toground voltages, or measured from the open-delta VT.
[spacer]
GFS C: Virtual curr e nt pol.
006 009
0: No
[spacer]
Set to Yes if you want the device to apply virtual current polarization, i.e.
calculate the polarizing voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages. The
default is No to provide backwards compatibility.
[spacer]
GFS C: Comp . reac tance X0

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
0|0
002 135
200 | 40
[spacer]
Setting of cross-polarization parameter X0 (see section GFSC, Improved

directional measurement for series compensated line applications).
[spacer]
GFS C: IN>
0.050
018 063
0.002
0.500
Inom
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the residual current.
[spacer]
GFS C: VNG>
0.030
018 062
0.010
0.500
Vnom
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer]
GFS C: Angle phi N

0
018 061
-90
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
[spacer]
GFS C: St art. oper . de lay

1.00
[spacer]
7-104
0.00
018 064
10.00
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
Setting for the operate delay of starting.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: St art. re le as. de lay

0.00
0.00
018 065
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of the starting.
[spacer]
GFS C: t1 (forward)
Blocked
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
018 066
0.00
60.00
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a forward
decision.
[spacer]
GFS C: t2 (backward)
Blocked
018 067
0.00
60.00
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a backward
(reverse) decision.
[spacer]
GFS C: t3 (non-dir ect io nal )

Blocked
0.00
018 068
60.00
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the non-directional trip signal.
[spacer]
GFS C: Crit eria tS acti ve
018 071
1: forward
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
This setting defines the direction of time-voltage protection tripping.
[spacer]
GFS C: Operatin g mode t S
018 080
1: VNG-dependent
Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-301)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the voltage-dependent or current-dependent

tripping time characteristic shall apply.
[spacer]
GFS C: Ire f,N

Blocked
018 076
0.01
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer]
GFS C: Charact e r is tic N
0.80
Inom
018 078
0: Definite Time
Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-306)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
[spacer]
GFS C: Factor k t,N

1.00
[spacer]
Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-306)
018 077
0.05
10.00
Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-306)
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-105
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default

signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: General e nabl e USE R
023 069
0: No
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Fct.assig n. bloc king
002 180
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection.
[spacer]
GSCSG: C hanne l mode
023 078
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)

Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-315)
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)
Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-319)
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent
communication channels or with a common communication channel.
Note: Operation with a common communication channel is only possible, if the
same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The correct assignment
of signals to the functions must be done by setting the time delays
appropriately.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Op erating mode
023 079
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)

Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of ground fault (short-circuit) protection

signaling.
[spacer]
GSCSG: T rip mod e
023 088
1: 1/3-pole trip w.HSR
Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-320)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip and
whether an HSR shall be triggered.
[spacer]
GSCSG: T rip ping t ime

1.00
0.00
023 075
10.00
Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-314)
[spacer]
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release
scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating GSCSG
with the other protection functions.
[spacer]
GSCSG: R eleas e t ime se nd

0.25
0.00
023 076
10.00
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)

Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
7-106
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground fault
(short-circuit) protection has dropped out.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: t Block
1.00
023 077
0.00
10.00
Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-315)
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling in the event of a change in fault direction.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Echo on rec eiv e
023 080
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
This setting determines whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling

operates with or without echo.
Note: Use of the echo only makes sense if the signal comparison release
scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Op erate de lay ec ho

0.20
0.00
10.00
023 081
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Puls e d urat ion echo

0.05
0.00
[spacer]
Setting for echo pulse duration.
[spacer]
GSCSG: t Block echo

0.05
10.00
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
023 082
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
023 083
0.00
10.00
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a
change in fault direction.
[spacer]
GSCSG: W eak in fe ed tr ip
023 084
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-319)
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
Note: Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal comparison
release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Op .delay weak i nfe e d

0.20
0.00
10.00
023 087
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir .

0: No
Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-319)
023 089
Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in the
event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection
or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward decision.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Frequency moni toring

0: No
[spacer]
023 085
Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-315)
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-107
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: Gener al e nable USE R
031 068
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-323)
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Inverse-time overcur IDMT: Gene ral e nable US E R

rent protection
017 096
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-338)
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
THER M : Gene r al e nabl e US E R
022 050
0: No
Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-351)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
[spacer]
THER M : R e lat ive re pl ic a
022 064
1: Yes
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Disabling or enabling the Relative replica mode of operation.

Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer]
THER M : Absolut e r eplica
022 065
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Enabling or disabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.

Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Time-voltage protec V<>: General enable US ER

tion
0: No
[spacer]
7-108
023 030
Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-359)
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : Gene ral e nable USER

Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
023 031
0: No
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-373)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer]
f<> : S election me as. v olt
018 202
4: Voltage A-B
Fig. 3-294, (p. 3-374)
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage that shall be used for frequency measurement.
[spacer]
f<> : Evaluation ti me
5
018 201
Periods
Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-375)
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer]
f<> : Undervolt. block . V<

0.65
[spacer]
0.20
018 200
1.00
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-375)
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
P<>: General e nable USER

0: No
[spacer]
Address
014 220
Fig. 3-298, (p. 3-380)
Disabling or enabling the power directional protection function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-109
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: Gener al e nable USE R
022 080
0: No
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
[spacer]
CBF: S tart with man. tr ip
022 154
0: No
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
[spacer]
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
[spacer]
CBF: Fct.as signm. CBAux.
022 159
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
[spacer]
Selection of trip signals assigned to Gen. trip command 1 for which, in

addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts are
evaluated.
[spacer]
CBF: I <
1.00
022 160
0.05
20.00
Inom
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)

Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
Fig. 3-320, (p. 3-404)
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
[spacer]
CBF: Evaluation IN
022 184
0: Without
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
[spacer]
Select whether the measured or the calculated residual current shall be used for
residual current monitoring function. This choice is only possible when a
measuring input for the residual current is available, otherwise the internally
derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
[spacer]
CBF: I N<
1.00
022 180
0.05
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
Setting of the comparator threshold for residual current monitoring function.
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip 1p
022 163
0: No
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
[spacer]
Setting to Yes allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. Then a 1-pole
general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF (see section CBF 1-pole operating
mode).
[spacer]
CBF: t 1 1p
Blocked
022 164
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 1-pole operating mode.
[spacer]
CBF: t 1 3p
0.15
[spacer]
7-110
022 165
0.00
100.00
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: t 2
0.25
022 166
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.
[spacer]
CBF: M in.dur. tr ip cmd. t1

0.25
0.10
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
022 167
10.00
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
[spacer]
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
CBF: M in.dur. tr ip cmd. t2

0.25
0.10
022 168
10.00
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
[spacer]
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t 1
022 169
0: No
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
[spacer]
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t 2
022 170
0: No
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
[spacer]
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
CBF: De lay/s tart ing t rig.

0.00
0.00
022 155
100.00
Fig. 3-319, (p. 3-404)
[spacer]
The signal CB F: Trip si gnal is issued when this timer stage's time duration
has elapsed.
[spacer]
CBF: De lay/f ault beh. C B

0.12
0.00
022 171
100.00
Fig. 3-320, (p. 3-404)
[spacer]
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from
its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized
through the current criterion (see section Fault behind CB protection).
[spacer]
CBF: De lay/C B s ync.supe rv

Blocked
[spacer]
0.00
022 172
100.00
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-111
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: Gener al e nable USE R

Circuit breaker
022 010
0: No
Fig. 3-322, (p. 3-406)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
[spacer]
CBM: S ig. as g. trip cmd.
022 152

[spacer]
Using the setting for external devices the trip command issued by the control
function may be linked to the trip command 1 issued by the protection by
assigning the trip command issued by the control function by this parameter.
[spacer]
CBM: Op er ating mode
022 007
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
[spacer]
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer]
CBM: I nom,CB
2000
022 012
65000
[spacer]
Setting for the CB nominal current.
[spacer]
CBM: Per m . CB op. Inom,CB

30000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
022 013
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.
[spacer]
CBM: M e d. curr. I t ri p,CB

Blocked
[spacer]
022 014
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
Setting for the average CB disconnection current.

Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer]
CBM: Per m . CB op. Imed, CB

Blocked
[spacer]
022 015
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection

(ruptured) current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer]
CBM: M ax . curr. It r ip,CB

63000
022 016
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum CB disconnection (ruptured) current.
[spacer]
CBM: Per m . CB op. Imax,CB

20
[spacer]
7-112
65000
022 017
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum CB

disconnection (ruptured) current.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: No. CB ope rations >

10000
022 019
65000
Fig. 3-327, (p. 3-413)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.
[spacer]
CBM: R e main No. CB op. <

1000
022 020
65000
Fig. 3-326, (p. 3-413)
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at CB
nominal current.
[spacer]
CBM: Itr ip >

1000
022 022
65000
Inom,CB
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values.
[spacer]
CBM: Itr ip **2>

1000
022 081
65000
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values to the second power.
[spacer]
CBM: I* t>
1000.0
022 096
1.0
4000.0
kAs
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
[spacer]
CBM: C orr. acqu.t ime trip

0.000
0.000
007 249
0.200
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
[spacer]
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary

contacts in case of a triggering by the open command.
[spacer]
CBM: C orr. acqui s. t ime

0.000
[spacer]
-0.200
022 018
0.200
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary

contacts in case of a triggering by the position signal issued by the CB auxiliary
contacts.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-113
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : Ge neral e nable US ER
014 010
0: No
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : I>
1.10
014 004
0.10
2.40
Inom
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : I> >

1.20
014 020
0.10
2.40
Inom
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI>
1
014 031
1000
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI>>
1
014 032
1000
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : I<
0.90
014 021
0.10
2.40
Inom
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : I< <

0.80
014 022
0.10
2.40
Inom
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI<
1
014 033
1000
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI<<
1
[spacer]
7-114
014 034
1000
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : VPG>
1.10
014 023
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG>>
1.20
014 024
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG>
1
014 035
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG>>
1
014 036
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG<
0.90
014 025
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG<<
0.80
014 026
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG<
1
014 037
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG<<
1
014 038
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP>
1.10
[spacer]
014 027
0.10
1.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-115
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : VPP>>
1.20
014 028
0.10
1.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP>
1
014 039
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP>>
1
014 040
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP<
0.90
014 029
0.10
1.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP<<
0.80
014 030
0.10
1.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP<
1
014 041
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP<<
1
014 042
1000
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VNG>
0.050
014 043
0.010
1.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VNG>>
0.100
[spacer]
7-116
014 044
0.010
1.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : tVNG>
1
014 045
1000
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVNG>>
1
014 046
1000
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : Vref >

1.10
042 144
0.10
2.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : Vref >>

1.20
042 145
0.10
2.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref>
1
042 148
1000
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref>>
1
042 149
1000
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : Vref <

0.90
042 146
0.10
2.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : Vref <<

0.80
042 147
0.10
2.50
Vnom
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref<
1
[spacer]
042 150
1000
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-117
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : tVref<<
1
042 151
1000
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin>
Blocked
014 110
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin>>
Blocked
014 111
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin>
Blocked
014 112
0.00
20.00
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin>>
Blocked
014 113
0.00
20.00
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin<
Blocked
014 114
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin<<
Blocked
014 115
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin<
Blocked
014 116
0.00
20.00
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin<<
Blocked
014 117
0.00
20.00
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer]
LIMIT : T>
200
[spacer]
7-118
014 100
-20
200
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : T>>
200
014 101
-20
200
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT >
Blocked
014 103
1000
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT >>
Blocked
014 104
1000
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT : T<
-20
014 105
-20
200
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer]
LIMIT : T<<
-20
014 106
-20
200
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT <
Blocked
014 107
1000
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT <<
Blocked
[spacer]
014 108
1000
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-119
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Programmable Logic LOGIC: General enable USE R
031 099
0: No
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
034 030
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-335, (p. 3-423)
LOGIC: Se t 2 US ER
034 031
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 3 US ER
034 032
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 4 US ER
034 033
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 5 US ER
034 034
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 6 US ER
034 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 7 US ER
034 036
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 8 US ER
034 037
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm. outp. 1
030 000

[spacer]

[spacer]
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
030 004
s
030 008

[spacer]
030 012

[spacer]
030 016

[spacer]
030 020

[spacer]
030 024

[spacer]
030 028
7-120
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 032

[spacer]
030 036

[spacer]
030 040

[spacer]
030 044

[spacer]
030 048

[spacer]
030 052

[spacer]
030 056

[spacer]
030 060

[spacer]
030 064

[spacer]
030 068

[spacer]
030 072

[spacer]
030 076

[spacer]
030 080

[spacer]
030 084

[spacer]
030 088

[spacer]
030 092

[spacer]
030 096

[spacer]
031 000

[spacer]
031 004
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-121
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 008

[spacer]
031 012

[spacer]
031 016

[spacer]
031 020

[spacer]
031 024

[spacer]
030 100

[spacer]
030 104

[spacer]
030 108

[spacer]
030 112

[spacer]
030 116

[spacer]
030 120

[spacer]
030 124

[spacer]
030 128

[spacer]
030 132

[spacer]
030 136

[spacer]
030 140

[spacer]
030 144

[spacer]
030 148

[spacer]
030 152
7-122
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 156

[spacer]
030 160

[spacer]
030 164

[spacer]
030 168

[spacer]
030 172

[spacer]
030 176

[spacer]
030 180

[spacer]
030 184

[spacer]
030 188

[spacer]
030 192

[spacer]
030 196

[spacer]
030 200

[spacer]
030 204

[spacer]
030 208

[spacer]
030 212

[spacer]
030 216

[spacer]
030 220

[spacer]
030 224

[spacer]
046 000
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-123
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 004

[spacer]
045 008

[spacer]
045 012

[spacer]
045 016

[spacer]
045 020

[spacer]
045 024

[spacer]
045 028

[spacer]
045 032

[spacer]
045 036

[spacer]
045 040

[spacer]
045 044

[spacer]
045 048

[spacer]
045 052

[spacer]
045 056

[spacer]
045 060

[spacer]
045 064

[spacer]
045 068

[spacer]
045 072

[spacer]
045 076
7-124
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 080

[spacer]
045 084

[spacer]
045 088

[spacer]
045 092

[spacer]
045 096

[spacer]
045 100

[spacer]
045 104

[spacer]
045 108

[spacer]
045 112

[spacer]
045 116

[spacer]
045 120

[spacer]
045 124

[spacer]
045 128

[spacer]
045 132

[spacer]
045 136

[spacer]
LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm.outp.1 00
045 140

[spacer]
045 144

[spacer]
045 148

[spacer]
045 152
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-125
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 156

[spacer]
045 160

[spacer]
045 164

[spacer]
045 168

[spacer]
045 172

[spacer]
045 176

[spacer]
045 180

[spacer]
045 184

[spacer]
045 188

[spacer]
045 192

[spacer]
045 196

[spacer]
045 200

[spacer]
045 204

[spacer]
045 208

[spacer]
045 212

[spacer]
045 216

[spacer]
045 220

[spacer]
045 224

[spacer]
045 228
7-126
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 232

[spacer]
045 236

[spacer]
045 240

[spacer]
045 244

[spacer]
045 248

[spacer]
045 252

[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1

[spacer]
030 001
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)

030 005

[spacer]
030 009

[spacer]
030 013

[spacer]
030 017

[spacer]
030 021

[spacer]
030 025

[spacer]
030 029

[spacer]
030 033

[spacer]
LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 0
030 037

[spacer]
030 041

[spacer]
030 045
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-127
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 049

[spacer]
030 053

[spacer]
030 057

[spacer]
030 061

[spacer]
030 065

[spacer]
030 069

[spacer]
030 073

[spacer]
030 077

[spacer]
030 081

[spacer]
030 085

[spacer]
030 089

[spacer]
030 093

[spacer]
030 097

[spacer]
031 001

[spacer]
031 005

[spacer]
031 009

[spacer]
031 013

[spacer]
031 017

[spacer]
031 021
7-128
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 025

[spacer]
030 101

[spacer]
030 105

[spacer]
030 109

[spacer]
030 113

[spacer]
030 117

[spacer]
030 121

[spacer]
030 125

[spacer]
030 129

[spacer]
030 133

[spacer]
030 137

[spacer]
030 141

[spacer]
030 145

[spacer]
030 149

[spacer]
030 153

[spacer]
030 157

[spacer]
030 161

[spacer]
030 165

[spacer]
030 169
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-129
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 173

[spacer]
030 177

[spacer]
030 181

[spacer]
030 185

[spacer]
030 189

[spacer]
030 193

[spacer]
030 197

[spacer]
030 201

[spacer]
030 205

[spacer]
030 209

[spacer]
030 213

[spacer]
030 217

[spacer]
030 221

[spacer]
030 225

[spacer]
046 001

[spacer]
045 005

[spacer]
045 009

[spacer]
045 013

[spacer]
045 017
7-130
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 021

[spacer]
045 025

[spacer]
045 029

[spacer]
045 033

[spacer]
045 037

[spacer]
045 041

[spacer]
045 045

[spacer]
045 049

[spacer]
045 053

[spacer]
045 057

[spacer]
045 061

[spacer]
045 065

[spacer]
045 069

[spacer]
045 073

[spacer]
045 077

[spacer]
045 081

[spacer]
045 085

[spacer]
045 089

[spacer]
045 093
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-131
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 097

[spacer]
045 101

[spacer]
045 105

[spacer]
045 109

[spacer]
045 113

[spacer]
045 117

[spacer]
045 121

[spacer]
045 125

[spacer]
045 129

[spacer]
045 133

[spacer]
045 137

[spacer]
045 141

[spacer]
045 145

[spacer]
045 149

[spacer]
045 153

[spacer]
045 157

[spacer]
045 161

[spacer]
045 165

[spacer]
045 169
7-132
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 173

[spacer]
045 177

[spacer]
045 181

[spacer]
045 185

[spacer]
045 189

[spacer]
045 193

[spacer]
045 197

[spacer]
045 201

[spacer]
045 205

[spacer]
045 209

[spacer]
045 213

[spacer]
045 217

[spacer]
045 221

[spacer]
045 225

[spacer]
045 229

[spacer]
045 233

[spacer]
045 237

[spacer]
045 241

[spacer]
045 245
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-133
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 249

[spacer]
045 253

[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Tim e t1 output 1

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 022
600.00
0.00
030 026
600.00
0.00
030 030
600.00
0.00
030 034
600.00
0.00
030 038
600.00
0.00
030 042
600.00
0.00
030 046
600.00
0.00
030 050
600.00
0.00
030 054
600.00
0.00
030 058
600.00

0.00
7-134

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 018

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 014

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 010

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)

030 006

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 002
030 062
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 086
600.00
0.00
030 090
600.00
0.00
030 094
600.00
0.00
030 098
600.00
0.00
031 002
600.00
0.00
031 006
600.00
0.00
031 010
600.00
0.00
031 014
600.00
0.00
031 018
600.00
0.00
031 022
600.00
0.00
031 026
600.00
0.00
030 102
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 082

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 078

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 074

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 070

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 106
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 066

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
030 110
600.00
7-135
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 134
600.00
0.00
030 138
600.00
0.00
030 142
600.00
0.00
030 146
600.00
0.00
030 150
600.00
0.00
030 154
600.00
0.00
030 158
600.00
0.00
030 162
600.00
0.00
030 166
600.00
0.00
030 170
600.00
0.00
030 174
600.00
0.00
030 178
600.00
0.00
030 182
600.00

0.00
7-136

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 130

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 126

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 122

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 118

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 114

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
030 186
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 210
600.00
0.00
030 214
600.00
0.00
030 218
600.00
0.00
030 222
600.00
0.00
030 226
600.00
0.00
046 002
600.00
0.00
045 006
600.00
0.00
045 010
600.00
0.00
045 014
600.00
0.00
045 018
600.00
0.00
045 022
600.00
0.00
045 026
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 206

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 202

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 198

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 194

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 030
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 190

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 034
600.00
7-137
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 058
600.00
0.00
045 062
600.00
0.00
045 066
600.00
0.00
045 070
600.00
0.00
045 074
600.00
0.00
045 078
600.00
0.00
045 082
600.00
0.00
045 086
600.00
0.00
045 090
600.00
0.00
045 094
600.00
0.00
045 098
600.00
0.00
045 102
600.00
0.00
045 106
600.00

0.00
7-138

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 054

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 050

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 046

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 042

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 038

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 110
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 134
600.00
0.00
045 138
600.00
0.00
045 142
600.00
0.00
045 146
600.00
0.00
045 150
600.00
0.00
045 154
600.00
0.00
045 158
600.00
0.00
045 162
600.00
0.00
045 166
600.00
0.00
045 170
600.00
0.00
045 174
600.00
0.00
045 178
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 130

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 126

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 122

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 118

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 182
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 114

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 186
600.00
7-139
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 206
600.00
0.00
045 210
600.00
0.00
045 214
600.00
0.00
045 218
600.00
0.00
045 222
600.00
0.00
045 226
600.00
0.00
045 230
600.00
0.00
045 234
600.00
0.00
045 238
600.00
0.00
045 242
600.00
0.00
045 246
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 202

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 198

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 194

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 190

0.00
[spacer]
Logic Diagram

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
045 250
600.00

0.00
0.00
045 254
600.00
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer]

0.00
7-140
0.00
030 003
600.00
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 027
600.00
0.00
030 031
600.00
0.00
030 035
600.00
0.00
030 039
600.00
0.00
030 043
600.00
0.00
030 047
600.00
0.00
030 051
600.00
0.00
030 055
600.00
0.00
030 059
600.00
0.00
030 063
600.00
0.00
030 067
600.00
0.00
030 071
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 023

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 019

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 015

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 011

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 075
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 007

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
030 079
600.00
7-141
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
031 003
600.00
0.00
031 007
600.00
0.00
031 011
600.00
0.00
031 015
600.00
0.00
031 019
600.00
0.00
031 023
600.00
0.00
031 027
600.00
0.00
030 103
600.00
0.00
030 107
600.00
0.00
030 111
600.00
0.00
030 115
600.00
0.00
030 119
600.00
0.00
030 123
600.00

0.00
7-142

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 099

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 095

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 091

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 087

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 083

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
030 127
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 151
600.00
0.00
030 155
600.00
0.00
030 159
600.00
0.00
030 163
600.00
0.00
030 167
600.00
0.00
030 171
600.00
0.00
030 175
600.00
0.00
030 179
600.00
0.00
030 183
600.00
0.00
030 187
600.00
0.00
030 191
600.00
0.00
030 195
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 147

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 143

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 139

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 135

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 199
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 131

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
030 203
600.00
7-143
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 227
600.00
0.00
046 003
600.00
0.00
045 007
600.00
0.00
045 011
600.00
0.00
045 015
600.00
0.00
045 019
600.00
0.00
045 023
600.00
0.00
045 027
600.00
0.00
045 031
600.00
0.00
045 035
600.00
0.00
045 039
600.00
0.00
045 043
600.00
0.00
045 047
600.00

0.00
7-144

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 223

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 219

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 215

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 211

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 207

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 051
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 075
600.00
0.00
045 079
600.00
0.00
045 083
600.00
0.00
045 087
600.00
0.00
045 091
600.00
0.00
045 095
600.00
0.00
045 099
600.00
0.00
045 103
600.00
0.00
045 107
600.00
0.00
045 111
600.00
0.00
045 115
600.00
0.00
045 119
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 071

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 067

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 063

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 059

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 123
600.00

0.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 055

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 127
600.00
7-145
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 151
600.00
0.00
045 155
600.00
0.00
045 159
600.00
0.00
045 163
600.00
0.00
045 167
600.00
0.00
045 171
600.00
0.00
045 175
600.00
0.00
045 179
600.00
0.00
045 183
600.00
0.00
045 187
600.00
0.00
045 191
600.00
0.00
045 195
600.00
0.00
045 199
600.00

0.00
7-146

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 147

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 143

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 139

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 135

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 131

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
045 203
600.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 219
600.00
0.00
045 223
600.00
0.00
045 227
600.00
0.00
045 231
600.00
0.00
045 235
600.00
0.00
045 239
600.00
0.00
045 243
600.00
0.00
045 247
600.00
0.00
045 251
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 215

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 211

0.00
[spacer]

0.00
[spacer]
600.00

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 207

0.00
[spacer]
Logic Diagram

0.00
[spacer]
Unit

0.00
[spacer]
Max

0.00
[spacer]
Min

0.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
045 255
600.00
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1

[spacer]
044 000
Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-429)

044 002

[spacer]
044 004

[spacer]
044 006

[spacer]
044 008
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-147
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 010

[spacer]
044 012

[spacer]
044 014

[spacer]
044 016

[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 0
044 018

[spacer]
044 020

[spacer]
044 022

[spacer]
044 024

[spacer]
044 026

[spacer]
044 028

[spacer]
044 030

[spacer]
044 032

[spacer]
044 034

[spacer]
044 036

[spacer]
044 038

[spacer]
044 040

[spacer]
044 042

[spacer]
044 044

[spacer]
044 046
7-148
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 048

[spacer]
044 050

[spacer]
044 052

[spacer]
044 054

[spacer]
044 056

[spacer]
044 058

[spacer]
044 060

[spacer]
044 062

[spacer]
044 064

[spacer]
044 066

[spacer]
044 068

[spacer]
044 070

[spacer]
044 072

[spacer]
044 074

[spacer]
044 076

[spacer]
044 078

[spacer]
044 080

[spacer]
044 082

[spacer]
044 084
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-149
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 086

[spacer]
044 088

[spacer]
044 090

[spacer]
044 092

[spacer]
044 094

[spacer]
044 096

[spacer]
044 098

[spacer]
044 100

[spacer]
044 102

[spacer]
044 104

[spacer]
044 106

[spacer]
044 108

[spacer]
044 110

[spacer]
044 112

[spacer]
044 114

[spacer]
044 116

[spacer]
044 118

[spacer]
044 120

[spacer]
044 122
7-150
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 124

[spacer]
044 126

[spacer]
048 128

[spacer]
048 002

[spacer]
048 004

[spacer]
048 006

[spacer]
048 008

[spacer]
048 010

[spacer]
048 012

[spacer]
048 014

[spacer]
048 016

[spacer]
048 018

[spacer]
048 020

[spacer]
048 022

[spacer]
048 024

[spacer]
048 026

[spacer]
048 028

[spacer]
048 030

[spacer]
048 032
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-151
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 034

[spacer]
048 036

[spacer]
048 038

[spacer]
048 040

[spacer]
048 042

[spacer]
048 044

[spacer]
048 046

[spacer]
048 048

[spacer]
048 050

[spacer]
048 052

[spacer]
048 054

[spacer]
048 056

[spacer]
048 058

[spacer]
048 060

[spacer]
048 062

[spacer]
048 064

[spacer]
048 066

[spacer]
048 068

[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p.10 0
048 070
7-152
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 072

[spacer]
048 074

[spacer]
048 076

[spacer]
048 078

[spacer]
048 080

[spacer]
048 082

[spacer]
048 084

[spacer]
048 086

[spacer]
048 088

[spacer]
048 090

[spacer]
048 092

[spacer]
048 094

[spacer]
048 096

[spacer]
048 098

[spacer]
048 100

[spacer]
048 102

[spacer]
048 104

[spacer]
048 106

[spacer]
048 108
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-153
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 110

[spacer]
048 112

[spacer]
048 114

[spacer]
048 116

[spacer]
048 118

[spacer]
048 120

[spacer]
048 122

[spacer]
048 124

[spacer]
048 126

[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p. 1 (t )

[spacer]
044 001
Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-429)

044 003

[spacer]
044 005

[spacer]
044 007

[spacer]
044 009

[spacer]
044 011

[spacer]
044 013

[spacer]
044 015

[spacer]
044 017
7-154
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p.10 (t )
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 019

[spacer]
044 021

[spacer]
044 023

[spacer]
044 025

[spacer]
044 027

[spacer]
044 029

[spacer]
044 031

[spacer]
044 033

[spacer]
044 035

[spacer]
044 037

[spacer]
044 039

[spacer]
044 041

[spacer]
044 043

[spacer]
044 045

[spacer]
044 047

[spacer]
044 049

[spacer]
044 051

[spacer]
044 053

[spacer]
044 055
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-155
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 057

[spacer]
044 059

[spacer]
044 061

[spacer]
044 063

[spacer]
044 065

[spacer]
044 067

[spacer]
044 069

[spacer]
044 071

[spacer]
044 073

[spacer]
044 075

[spacer]
044 077

[spacer]
044 079

[spacer]
044 081

[spacer]
044 083

[spacer]
044 085

[spacer]
044 087

[spacer]
044 089

[spacer]
044 091

[spacer]
044 093
7-156
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 095

[spacer]
044 097

[spacer]
044 099

[spacer]
044 101

[spacer]
044 103

[spacer]
044 105

[spacer]
044 107

[spacer]
044 109

[spacer]
044 111

[spacer]
044 113

[spacer]
044 115

[spacer]
044 117

[spacer]
044 119

[spacer]
044 121

[spacer]
044 123

[spacer]
044 125

[spacer]
044 127

[spacer]
048 129

[spacer]
048 003
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-157
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 005

[spacer]
048 007

[spacer]
048 009

[spacer]
048 011

[spacer]
048 013

[spacer]
048 015

[spacer]
048 017

[spacer]
048 019

[spacer]
048 021

[spacer]
048 023

[spacer]
048 025

[spacer]
048 027

[spacer]
048 029

[spacer]
048 031

[spacer]
048 033

[spacer]
048 035

[spacer]
048 037

[spacer]
048 039

[spacer]
048 041
7-158
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 043

[spacer]
048 045

[spacer]
048 047

[spacer]
048 049

[spacer]
048 051

[spacer]
048 053

[spacer]
048 055

[spacer]
048 057

[spacer]
048 059

[spacer]
048 061

[spacer]
048 063

[spacer]
048 065

[spacer]
048 067

[spacer]
048 069

[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p1 00( t)
048 071

[spacer]
048 073

[spacer]
048 075

[spacer]
048 077

[spacer]
048 079
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-159
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 081

[spacer]
048 083

[spacer]
048 085

[spacer]
048 087

[spacer]
048 089

[spacer]
048 091

[spacer]
048 093

[spacer]
048 095

[spacer]
048 097

[spacer]
048 099

[spacer]
048 101

[spacer]
048 103

[spacer]
048 105

[spacer]
048 107

[spacer]
048 109

[spacer]
048 111

[spacer]
048 113

[spacer]
048 115

[spacer]
048 117
7-160
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 119

[spacer]
048 121

[spacer]
048 123

[spacer]
048 125

[spacer]
048 127

[spacer]
logic equation.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-161
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Programmable Logic LOG_2: General e nabl e USE R
011 137
0: No
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer]
LOG_2: Fct.assig nm. outp. 1
050 000

[spacer]
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)

[spacer]
050 004
050 008

[spacer]
050 012

[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer]
LOG_2: Op . m ode t output 1
050 001

[spacer]
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)
050 005

[spacer]
050 009

[spacer]
050 013

[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1
0
[spacer]
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)
050 006
60000
0
[spacer]
60000
0
[spacer]
050 002
050 010
60000
0
050 014
60000
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer]
0
[spacer]
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)

050 007
60000
0
7-162
60000
0
[spacer]
050 003
050 011
60000
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0
[spacer]
Address
050 015
60000
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
[spacer]
LOG_2: S ig.as sig. o ut p. 1
064 000

[spacer]
064 002

[spacer]
064 004

[spacer]
064 006

[spacer]
logic equation.
[spacer]
LOG_2: S ig.as sig.out p. 1 (t )
064 001

[spacer]
064 003

[spacer]
064 005

[spacer]
064 007

[spacer]
logic equation.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-163
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COUNT : General enable US ER
217 000
0: No
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling binary counts.
[spacer]
COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount. 1

3
[spacer]
1000
ms
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
1000
217 161
ms

3
[spacer]
217 160

3
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
1000
217 162
ms

3
1000
217 163
ms
[spacer]
Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.
[spacer]
COUNT : Limit count e r 1

Blocked
[spacer]
217 222
65000

Blocked
[spacer]
65000

Blocked
[spacer]
217 221
217 223
65000

Blocked
217 224
65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer]
COUNT : Cycle t.count t r ans m

0: No transmission
217 007
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer]
COUNT : IEC61850 pulsQty

1
[spacer]
221 096
1000
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal pulsQty).
7-164
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
7.1.3.3
Param eter S ubs e ts

Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MAIN: Neut r.p t. treat . PSx
Logic Diagram
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
001 250
001 251
002 001
[spacer]
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.
[spacer]
MAIN: Ground starti ng PSx
001 249
1: IN> OR VNG>
[spacer]
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r for 1p P Sx
010 040
001 079
001 080
001 081
1: Ground
[spacer]
For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground

starting or another phase starting needs to be triggered. The user may choose
to always activate the ground starting or as a function of current magnitude
ratios to trigger ground or phase starting.
[spacer]
MAIN: Op. m ode rus h r. P Sx
017 097
0: Without
001 088
001 089
001 090
017 082
017 083
Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
[spacer]
MAIN: Funct.R u sh r est r. PS x
017 093
017 064
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Select the protection elements that shall be blocked when the inrush
stabilization is triggered.
[spacer]
MAIN: Rush I(2fn) /I( fn) PS x

20
10
017 098
35
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
[spacer]
MAIN: I> lif t rush r. PS x

10.0
1.0
Inom
001 092
001 093
001 086
001 087
Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
017 095
20.0
001 091
001 085
Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for disabling the inrush stabilization.
[spacer]
MAIN: kPar PS x
0.70
025 097
0.70
024 017
024 077
025 037
2.00
[spacer]
Setting for a correction factor by which the different grounding conditions for
line and parallel line shall be equalized.
[spacer]
MAIN: t lift rus h r st r. PSx

Blocked
[spacer]
0.01
019 001
10.00
019 002
019 003
019 004
Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
Setting for the maximum duration of inrush stabilization.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-165
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MAIN: 3p tr.if HSR off PS x
Logic Diagram
015 065
024 034
024 094
025 054
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether single-pole trip commands shall be converted to a

three-pole trip command when ARC is disabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: 3p transf 1p tr p PSx

Blocked
0.00
002 184
10.00
002 185
002 186
002 187
[spacer]
Setting the time delay period for the 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is issued if
no phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible.
[spacer]
MAIN: Enable 1p t ri p PS x
002 061
002 062
002 063
002 064
0: No
[spacer]
7-166
Enabling the phase-selective trip logic.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Fault data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
FT_DA: Line le ngth PS x

10.00
0.01
Logic Diagram
010 005
500.00
km
010 006
010 007
010 008
Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-129)
[spacer]
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Line reac tance P S x

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
0.1 |
0.02
010 012
200 | 40
010 013
010 014
010 015
Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-129)
[spacer]
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Flt.loc. de t e rm. PSx

0: with GS
008 007
008 008
008 009
008 027
Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Select whether the fault location shall be determined only for short-circuits with
a general starting (with GS) or also in case of a sole neutral starting, e.g. during
a short-duration grounding (with GS or N).
[spacer]
FT_DA: S tart data acqu. PS x

1: End of fault
010 011
010 042
010 043
010 044
Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault data
should take place.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Outp . f lt.locat . P Sx

1: Always
010 032
010 033
010 034
010 035
Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location is output.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Mutual comp. PS x
025 096
024 016
024 076
025 036
0: Without
[spacer]
Setting for the conditions under which the residual current of the parallel line is
used to calculate the fault location.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-167
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: I>> PS x
1.00
010 054
0.10
20.00
Inom
Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting.
[spacer]
DIST: I> ( Ib l) PS x
010 068
0.05
1.00
Inom
010 094
011 014
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
0.20
010 074
010 088
011 008
011 028
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance starting is

enabled.
[spacer]
DIST: Ope rat. mode V< PS x
010 067
2: With V< start.PG,PP
Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting.
[spacer]
DIST: V< PS x
010 069
0.10
0.90
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting.
[spacer]
DIST: Ope rat. mode Z< PS x
010 066
2: With Z< start.PG,PP
010 089
011 009
011 029
010 086
011 006
011 026
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.
[spacer]
DIST: Xfw PS x
010 050
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.
[spacer]
DIST: Rfw,PG PS x
010 051
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
010 070
010 090
011 010
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
011 027
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
011 007
Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
0.70
010 087
010 071
010 091
011 011
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-ground

loops.
[spacer]
DIST: Rfw,PP PS x
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
010 052
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
010 072
010 092
011 012
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-phase

loops.
[spacer]
DIST: PS x
30
[spacer]
7-168
010 063
15
65
010 083
011 003
011 023
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
Angle setting for load blinder of underimpedance starting characteristic.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DIST: Zfw,PG PSx

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
Logic Diagram
010 101
0|0
300 | 60
010 102
010 103
010 104
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]
Setting for the circular reach (load-angle-independent limit) of underimpedance

starting characteristic for phase-to-ground loops.
[spacer]
DIST: Zfw,PP PSx

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
010 105
0|0
300 | 60
010 106
010 107
010 108
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]
Setting for the circular reach (load-angle-independent limit) of underimpedance

starting characteristic for phase-to-phase loops.
[spacer]
DIST: Zbw/ Zfw PSx

0.50
010 053
0.00
4.00
010 073
010 093
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
[spacer]
Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse)

direction.
[spacer]
DIST: Z evaluation PSx
025 093
1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN)
[spacer]
011 013
024 013
024 073
025 033
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
This setting determines whether the P437 will carry out the starting impedance
calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase current corrected by
the set ground factor or using twice the phase current.
Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in lowimpedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in healthy
lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is calculated by
the distance measuring system using solely the phase current corrected by the
set ground factor.
[spacer]
DIST: IN> PS x
0.20
010 055
0.05
2.00
Inom
010 075
010 095
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
[spacer]
DIST: tIN> PS x
0.100
010 057
0.000
0.500
011 015
010 077
010 097
011 017
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)

Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
[spacer]
In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN> should

be set so as to avoid erroneous transient ground starting resulting from residual
current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-to-ground
capacitances.
Note: For single-phase faults, neutral starting does not proceed before tIN> has
elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that starting transfer does not
occur.
[spacer]
DIST: VNG> PS x
0.10
[spacer]
010 056
0.02
1.00
Vnom
010 076
010 096
011 016
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-169
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: VNG>> PS x
0.50
010 062
0.20
1.00
Vnom
010 082
011 002
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
[spacer]
DIST: tVNG>> PSx

1.000
010 061
0.000
60.000
010 081
011 001
011 021
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger.
[spacer]
DIST: Meas. start. 1 pG PSx
012 172
1: PG loops
011 022
012 173
012 174
012 175
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the distance measuring system shall process
single-pole phase-to-ground faults.
[spacer]
012 176
1: PG loops
012 177
012 178
012 179
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, in the event of two-phase-to-ground faults, the

distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase loops or the
phase-to-ground loops.
[spacer]
012 180
1: PG loops
012 181
012 182
012 183
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, in the event of three-phase-to-ground faults, the

distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase loops or the
phase-to-ground loops.
[spacer]
DIST: Characteristic P Sx
012 040
2: Polygon
073 097
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
[spacer]
DIST: X1,PG ( polygon) PS x
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
012 051
013 001
013 051
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

012 002
012 052
013 002
013 052
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)

012 003
012 053
013 003
013 053
012 004
012 054
013 004
013 054
012 100
012 101
012 102
012 103

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
7-170

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
012 001

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
075 097
Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-160)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
074 097
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
0.05 |
0.01
Logic Diagram
012 104
200 | 40
012 105
012 106
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
[spacer]
DIST: X1,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
002 078
002 081
002 082
002 084
002 085
002 086
002 087
002 089
002 090
002 091
002 092
002 093
002 094
002 095
002 096
002 097
002 098
002 099
002 126
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
[spacer]
DIST: R1,PG ( polygon) PS x
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
013 005
013 055
012 057
013 007
013 057
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)

012 009
012 059
013 009
013 059
012 011
012 061
013 011
013 061
012 108
012 109
012 110
012 111

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
012 055
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

012 007

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
012 005

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
002 083
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
002 079

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
002 077
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

002 080

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
400 | 80

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
002 076

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
012 107
7-171
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
Address
0.1 |
0.02
Logic Diagram
012 116
200 | 40
012 117
012 118
012 119
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
Note: The specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8, i.e.:
Rn,PG / Xn < 8
[spacer]
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) P Sx

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
013 006
013 056
012 058
013 008
013 058
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)

012 010
012 060
013 010
013 060
012 012
012 062
013 012
013 062
012 112
012 113
012 114
012 115
012 120
012 121
012 122
012 123

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
012 056
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

012 008

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40

device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
012 006
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
Note: The specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8, i.e.:
Rn,PP / Xn < 8
[spacer]
DIST: 1 ( polyg on) PSx

75
[spacer]
90
DIST: 2 ( polyg on) PSx

75
7-172
40
012 013
40
013 013
013 063
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

012 014
90
012 063
012 064
013 014
013 064
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
40
90
40
90
40
90
40
90
012 015
012 065
013 015
013 065
012 016
012 066
013 016
013 066
012 124
012 125
012 126
012 127
012 128
012 129
012 130
012 131
DIST: 6 ( polygon) PSx

75
Logic Diagram

75
[spacer]
Max

75
[spacer]
Min

75
[spacer]
Address
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
R-direction (resistance line).
[spacer]
DIST: 1 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
20
-20
20
-20
20
-20
20
-20
20
075 086
073 087
074 087
075 087
Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)

072 088
073 088
074 088
075 088
072 089
073 089
074 089
075 089
012 156
012 157
012 158
012 159
012 160
012 161
012 162
012 163
0
074 086
0
[spacer]
-20
073 086
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)

072 087
0
[spacer]
0
[spacer]
20
0
[spacer]
-20
072 086
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
X-direction (reactance line).
[spacer]
DIST: Z1 (circle) PS x
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
074 091
075 091
073 092
074 092
075 092
Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-164)

012 044
073 093
074 093
075 093
012 045
073 094
074 094
075 094
012 148
012 149
012 150
012 151
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
073 091
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

012 043
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
012 042
7-173
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
Logic Diagram
012 152
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
012 153
012 154
[spacer]
Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular

characteristic (in secondary values).
[spacer]
DIST: 1 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
90
10
90
10
90
10
90
10
90
073 095
074 095
072 096
073 096
074 096
075 096
072 099
073 099
074 099
075 099
012 164
012 165
012 166
012 167
012 168
012 169
012 170
012 171
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active
(DI ST : Arc comp. ci rc le P Sx=Yes). In this case, the setting at this
address determines the angle where arc compensation becomes active in
zones 1 to 6.
[spacer]
DIST: Ar c com p. circle P Sx
012 038
0: No
012 090
012 091
Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is

selected.
[spacer]
DIST: Dir ectional char PS x

10
002 234
80
002 235
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
[spacer]
DIST: Dir ection N1 PSx



[spacer]

[spacer]

7-174
002 236
002 237
013 023
013 073
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 092
Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-162)
[spacer]
[spacer]
075 095
Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-164)
[spacer]
45
075 090
75
074 090
75
[spacer]
10
073 090
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

072 095
75
[spacer]
75
[spacer]
90
75
[spacer]
072 090
10
012 155
012 023
012 073
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)

012 024
012 074
013 024
013 074
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)

012 025
012 075
013 025
013 075
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)

012 026
012 076
013 026
013 076
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)

012 027
012 077
013 027
013 077
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
012 132
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
012 133
012 134
012 135
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
012 136
012 137
012 138
012 139
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to 6 or

final timer stage 7 measure relative to the basic measuring direction
determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at
MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IP.
[spacer]
DIST: Ope r.val.Vme mory P Sx

0.15
0.01
2.00
010 109
Vnom
010 116
010 117
010 118
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the measured
fault angle is used for the direction determination and the impedance
calculation.
[spacer]
DIST: t1 PS x
0.00
[spacer]
0.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
DIST: t8 PS x
7.00
60.00
012 080
013 030
013 080
012 081
013 031
013 081
012 082
013 032
013 082
012 083
013 033
013 083
012 141
012 142
012 143
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 144
0.00
013 079
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 140
0.00
013 029
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 033
0.00
012 079
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 032
0.00
013 078
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 031
0.00
013 028
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

012 030
DIST: t7 PS x
6.00
[spacer]
60.00
DIST: t6 PS x
5.00
[spacer]
0.00
012 078
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)

012 029
DIST: t5 PS x
4.00
[spacer]
DIST: t4 PS x
3.00
[spacer]
60.00
DIST: t3 PS x
2.00
[spacer]
0.00
DIST: t2 PS x
1.00
[spacer]
012 028
012 145
012 146
012 147
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional and
non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
[spacer]
DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG P Sx
012 039
012 089
013 039
013 089
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines the conditions under which the zone extension occurs in
zone 1 in the event of single-phase-to-ground fault detection.
[spacer]
DIST: kze,PG HS R PS x
1.50
1.00
012 034
450.00
012 084
013 034
013 084
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-175
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: kze,PP HS R PSx

1.50
1.00
012 035
450.00
012 085
013 035
013 085
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-tophase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)X1
R1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)R1, if D IST: k ze (poly gon) PSx = R and X
R1,zeHSR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DIS T : k ze (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeHSR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeHSR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)Z1
Z1,zeHSR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
The zone extension HSR is controlled by
[spacer]
Protective signaling,
Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective signaling is

not ready,
a reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready,
Switch on to fault protection,
an appropriately configured binary signal input.
DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx

1.50
1.00
012 046
450.00
012 096
013 046
013 096
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
7-176
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DIST: kze,PP TDR PS x

1.50
1.00
Logic Diagram
012 047
450.00
012 097
013 047
013 097
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-tophase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)X1
R1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)R1, if DIST: kze (polygon ) PSx = R and X
R1,zeTDR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DI S T: kz e (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeTDR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeTDR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)Z1
Z1,zeTDR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as a
further TDR is permitted.
[spacer]
DIST: kze (polygon) P S x
010 186
010 195
010 196
010 197
2: R and X
[spacer]
Select whether the impedance zone 1 of the polygon characteristic shall be

extended only in reactance direction (Only X) or for both reactance and
resistance (R and X).
[spacer]
DIST: t1,ze PSx

Blocked
[spacer]
026 025
0.00
10.00
027 025
028 025
029 025
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.
Note: This timer is only used if zone extension is activated from binary input.
When controlled from internal function, extended zone trip time is set from that
function (e.g. PSIG trip time).
[spacer]
DIST: Ab s . value k G P Sx
1.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
012 037
8.00
012 087
013 037
013 087
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
7-177
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
[spacer]
Min
Unit
DIST: Angle kG PSx

0
[spacer]
Max
Logic Diagram
012 036
-180
180
012 086
013 036
013 086
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
Setting for the absolute value and angle of the complex ground factor kG.
kG =
Z0 - Zpos
3 Zpos
Z0: zero-sequence impedance

Zpos: positive-sequence impedance
Angle(kG ) = arctan
| kG |
X 0 - X pos
R0 - Rpos
- arctan
X pos
Rpos
( X 0 - X pos)2 + (R0 - Rpos)2

2
2
3 X pos
+ Rpos
R0: resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos: resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X0: reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
Xpos: reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value should
be set.
[spacer]
DIST: kG,par abs .v alue P Sx

1.00
7-178
0.00
012 049
8.00
012 099
013 049
013 099
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
[spacer]
Min
Unit
DIST: kG,par angle P Sx

0
[spacer]
Max
-180
Logic Diagram
012 048
180
012 098
013 048
013 098
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
Setting the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor kG,par
k G,par =
Z 00
3 ZL
Z00: coupling impedance in the zero-sequence system of the parallel line

ZL: positive-sequence impedance
| kG , par |
2
2
X 00
+ R00
3 X L2 + RL2
kG Anglepar = arctan
X 00
R00
- arctan
XL
RL
R00: resistance component of coupling impedance in the zero-sequence system

of the double-circuit line
RL: resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X00: reactance component of coupling impedance in the zero-sequence system
of the double-circuit line
XL: reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value should
be set.
[spacer]
DIST: Mutual comp. P Sx
025 095
0: Without
024 015
024 075
025 035
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether distance protection operates with or without

zero current compensation.
[spacer]
DIST: IN,par> PSx

0.20
012 184
0.10
2.00
Inom
012 185
012 186
012 187
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
The residual current of the parallel line is monitored to determine whether it

exceeds the set threshold. This monitoring function is only used for signaling
purposes and has no functional effects on distance measurement.
[spacer]
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PS x

3: 3-pole
[spacer]
DIST: Trip zone 2 PG PS x
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)

010 171
010 172
010 173
010 174
3: 3-pole
[spacer]
For zone 1 and zone 2 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the
event of phase-to-ground faults shall be single-pole or three-pole.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a
reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here
should be 1-pole.
[spacer]
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PS x

3: 3-pole
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)
7-179
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DIST: Trip zone 2 PP PS x
Logic Diagram
010 175
010 176
010 177
010 178
3: 3-pole
[spacer]
For zone 1 and zone 2 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the
event of phase-to-phase faults shall be single-pole or three-pole. Where a singlepole trip has been selected, there is a choice as to whether the trip in the event
of a two-pole starting should be for the leading or the trailing phase.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a
reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here
should be 1-pole leading phase or 1-pole trailing phas.
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSB: Enab le PS x
015 090
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
015 091
015 092
015 093
Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-183)
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking function
is enabled.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: I> PS x

time protection
1.00
Logic Diagram
010 058
0.10
20.00
Inom
010 078
010 098
011 018
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I> of the phase current of the backup overcurrenttime protection.
[spacer]
BUOC: tI> PS x
1.00
010 059
0.00
10.00
010 079
010 099
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
[spacer]
BUOC: IN> PS x
0.20
[spacer]
010 064
0.10
20.00
Inom
011 019
010 084
011 004
011 024
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note: For isolated / compensated networks it is possible to use the residual
stage as a backup; in this case the operate threshold has to be set greater than
the maximum ground-fault current (earth-fault current).
[spacer]
BUOC: tIN> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
7-180
010 065
0.00
10.00
010 085
011 005
011 025
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
SOT F : Enab le PS x
Logic Diagram
001 203
0: No
001 204
001 205
001 206
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which function group SOTF is
enabled.
[spacer]
SOT F : Operating mode PS x
011 061
4: Trip with starting
001 184
001 185
001 186
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is running, a
general starting will lead to a trip command (Trip with starting) or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone extension
factor DIST : k ze,PG HSR P S x (Trip with overreach).
[spacer]
SOT F : Activation mode PS x
006 142
1: Trigger
006 143
Select the SOTF activation mode (either Trigger or Line Dead State).
[spacer]
SOT F : Man. close t ime r P Sx

0.00
10.00
011 060
001 181
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
[spacer]
SOT F : With V< e nabl e PSx
006 005
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
006 138
600.00
SOT F : Releas e delay PS x

1.00
001 183
006 006
006 007
006 008
Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-211)
SOT F : Operate delay PS x

110.00
001 182
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 145
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
1.00
006 144
0.00
006 140
006 141
Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-211)

002 128
10.00
006 139
002 129
002 133
002 134
Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-211)
If SOT F: Wit h V< e nable P Sx is set to Yes, then a Line dead condition is
determined if all 3 measured voltages are below a fixed threshold, conditioned
by settable operate and release timer stages.
If the Line dead condition is fulfilled either triggering of SOTF through binary
input is enabled or SOTF is permanently activated, depending on the SOTF
activation mode.
[spacer]
SOT F : Tripping t ime PSx

0.00
0.00
010 218
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay of SOTF tripping.
[spacer]
SOT F : I> PSx

Blocked
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the phase current operate value I>.
[spacer]
SOT F : tI> PS x
0.00
[spacer]
10.00
010 222
006 131
006 132
006 133
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
006 134
0.00
010 221
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
006 130
0.10
010 219
006 135
006 136
006 137
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
Setting for the operate delay of stage I>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-181
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
SOT F : Evaluation IN PS x
Logic Diagram
001 191
1: Calculated
001 192
001 193
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored: the residual
current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
SOT F : IN> (me as.) PSx

Blocked
[spacer]
0.01
001 189
4.00
Inom
SOT F : IN> (calc.) PSx

Blocked
0.10
Inom
001 196
001 198
001 199
[spacer]
SOT F : tIN> PS x
[spacer]
7-182
001 177
10.00
001 202
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
Settings for operate values of neutral current IN> (meas.) and IN> (calc.).
0.00
001 197
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)

001 190
4.00
001 195
[spacer]
0.00
001 194
001 178
001 179
001 180
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
Setting for the operate delay of stages IN> (meas.) or IN> (calc.).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
PSIG: Enab le PS x
0: No
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 014
015 015
015 016
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is

enabled.
[spacer]
PSIG: No. t ele co m. ch. P Sx

1: 1 channel
015 017
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)
Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-223)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-234)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
Setting for the number of communication channels for protective signaling.
[spacer]
PSIG: Blk.f.t elcom.flt PS x

1: Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty
012 246
012 247
012 248
012 249
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Depending on this setting the Protective Signaling gets blocked if the

communication is faulty on either channel (setting value Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty), or
on both channels (setting value Ch. (A)AND(B) faulty).
[spacer]
PSIG: Operating mode PS x

2: PUTT
015 000
024 060
025 020
Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.
[spacer]
PSIG: Oper. mode s end P Sx

024 000
015 036
015 037
015 040
015 041
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal as a
function of direction or distance.
[spacer]
PSIG: Oper. mode t rip P S x

2: Dist.-dependent
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a

function of direction or distance.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-183
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSIG: Tripping time PS x

0.08
0.00
Logic Diagram
015 011
10.00
024 003
024 063
Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
[spacer]
PSIG: Re lease t. se nd PSx

0.25
0.00
015 002
10.00
025 023
024 001
024 061
025 021
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
[spacer]
PSIG: Echo on recei ve P S x
015 003
0: Without
024 002
024 062
025 022
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or without

echo.
[spacer]
PSIG: Op. delay e cho P Sx

0.00
0.00
015 022
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
[spacer]
PSIG: Pulse dur. echo P Sx

0.10
0.00
[spacer]
Setting for echo pulse duration.
[spacer]
PSIG: Trip s ignal V< P S x
024 009
024 069
024 007
024 067
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
[spacer]
PSIG: V< weak infee d PSx

0.10
015 020
0.90
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.
[spacer]
PSIG: tV< PS x
015 019
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
[spacer]
PSIG: St art cond. t V< P Sx

1: V<
[spacer]
7-184
025 027
024 006
024 066
025 026
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
0.20
025 029
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
0.60
025 028
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
015 021
0: No
024 068
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
015 023
10.00
024 008
024 005
024 065
025 025
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
006 148
006 149
006 150
006 151
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
Select whether the undervoltage timer stage is started if the undervoltage

condition is present (V<), or if both the undervoltage condition and the weakinfeed starting are present (V< & WI start).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSIG: tBlock PSx

0.05
Logic Diagram
015 024
0.00
10.00
024 010
025 030
Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
[spacer]
PSIG: 3ende d line prot PS x

0: No
024 070
006 039
006 046
006 047
006 048
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-215)
[spacer]
Select whether the PS IG: Re ce ive ( A) E XT or PSIG: Receive (B ) EXT

signals shall be used in an OR combination (setting: No) or in an AND
combination (setting: Yes).
[spacer]
PSIG: Fre quency monit. PS x

0: No
[spacer]
015 025
024 011
024 071
025 031
Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-216)
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-185
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ARC: Enable PS x
Logic Diagram
015 046
0: No
015 047
015 048
015 049
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.
[spacer]
ARC: C B clos.pos .s ig. PS x
015 050
0: Without
024 024
024 084
025 044
Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be taken into account or
not. If the setting is With, a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
Then the ARC function is ready only if the CB is closed.
[spacer]
ARC: Op erating mode P Sx
015 100
1: HSR/TDR permitted
015 101
015 102
015 103
Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-240)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only TDR, or
only a test HSR.
[spacer]
ARC: Op erative time 1 P Sx

0.30
[spacer]
0.00
015 066
10.00
024 035
024 095
025 055
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
Setting for operative time 1.

If the fault is cleared within this time, the fixed dead time 1p or 3p (depending
on the trip condition and HSR operating mode) is started.
[spacer]
ARC: Op erative time 2 P Sx

0.30
[spacer]
0.00
015 083
10.00
024 042
025 002
025 062
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
Setting for operative time 2.

If the fault is cleared within this time, the maximum dead time is started.
[spacer]
ARC: HSR op er. mode PS x
015 051
3: 3-pole
024 025
024 085
025 045
Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-246)

Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
The selection for the HSR operating mode defines whether a single-pole, single-/
three-pole, or three-pole HSR shall take place.
Note: If a single-pole HSR is to be carried out, then the user must select the 1pole setting at either DIST : Tr ip z one 1 P G P Sx or DIST: Trip zone 1
PP PS x, and at either DIST : Trip zone 2 P G PSx or DIST: Trip zone
2 PP PS x.
[spacer]
ARC: T rip tim e HSR PS x

0.08
[spacer]
7-186
0.00
015 072
10.00
024 040
025 000
025 060
Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-245)
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly if a HSR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ARC: HSR op er. mode 2 PS x
Logic Diagram
015 044
2: Start-dependent
024 022
024 082
025 042
Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether ARC will be controlled by the starting decisions
(Start-dependent) or the trip decisions (Trip-dependent).
[spacer]
ARC: Dead tim e 1p PSx

1.00
0.10
015 055
600.00
[spacer]
Dead time setting for a single-pole HSR.
[spacer]
ARC: Dead tim e 3p PSx

1.00
0.10
600.00
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
[spacer]
ARC: Dead tim e max P Sx

0.10
600.00
Setting for the maximum dead time.
[spacer]
ARC: t Discrim. PSx
600.00
024 030
024 090
025 050
024 043
025 003
025 063
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
018 051
0.00
025 049
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
015 084
[spacer]
1.00
024 089
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
015 056
[spacer]
1.00
024 029
024 049
025 009
025 069
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
Setting for the discrimination time during which there will be a switch from a
single-pole HSR to a three-pole HSR when a secondary fault occurs.
[spacer]
ARC: Zone e x t . f. HS R P Sx
015 059
0: No
[spacer]
024 033
024 093
025 053
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by the
zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and while the
operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
[spacer]
ARC: No. permit . T DR PS x

0
015 068
024 037
024 097
025 057
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting,
only one HSR is carried out.
[spacer]
ARC: T rip tim e TDR PS x

0.08
0.00
015 073
10.00
024 041
025 001
025 061
Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-245)
[spacer]
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly if a TDR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
[spacer]
ARC: T DR d ead time PSx

1.00
[spacer]
0.10
015 057
600.00
024 031
024 091
025 051
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
Setting for the TDR dead time.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-187
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: Zone e x t . f . T DR PS x
015 071
0: No
024 039
024 099
025 059
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended prior to
a TDR.
[spacer]
ARC: Enable R R C PSx
015 085
0: No
024 044
025 004
025 064
Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.
[spacer]
ARC: t RRC PSx

0.20
015 086
0.10
2.00
Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).
[spacer]
ARC: V> RR C PSx
015 087
0.40
0.90
025 005
025 065
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
0.75
024 045
024 046
025 006
025 066
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC to
be carried out.
[spacer]
ARC: Zone e x t .d ur. RC P S x
015 088
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
024 047
025 007
025 067
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
This setting defines whether the following takes place:
A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR that
is not synchronism-checked.
Zone extension will occur with each reclose command.
ARC: R eclaim time PS x

1.00
1.00
[spacer]
Setting for the reclaim time.
[spacer]
ARC: Block. tim e int . P Sx

5
015 054
600.00
024 088
025 048
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
015 043
600
024 028
024 021
024 081
025 041
Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by internal functions, such as SOTF.
[spacer]
ARC: Block. tim e e xt. PS x

5
015 058
600
024 032
024 092
025 052
Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
[spacer]
ARC: Op . m ode ex t ARC PS x

0: Without
[spacer]
7-188
015 045
024 023
024 083
025 043
Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-269)
This setting defines the operating mode for an external ARC working together
with the P437.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
ARC: M on. PS IG re cv . PSx

0: No
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 082
024 050
025 010
025 070
Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-270)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is monitored
during the dead time.
[spacer]
ARC: Paralle l trip PS x

0: Without function
[spacer]
015 053
024 027
024 087
025 047
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
This setting defines whether and how the trip command(s) of a protection device
operating in parallel to the P437 will affect operation of the ARC function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-189
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: Enab le PS x
Logic Diagram
018 020
0: No
018 021
018 022
018 023
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism check
(ASC) is enabled.
[spacer]
ASC: Active for HSR PS x
018 001
0: No
077 030
078 030
079 030
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer]
ASC: Active for TDR PS x
018 002
0: No
077 031
078 031
079 031
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer]
ASC: Active for RRC PS x
018 006
077 033
078 033
079 033
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required before
reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
[spacer]
ASC: Clos .rej.w.block PS x
018 003
0: No
077 032
078 032
079 032
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by ASC.
[spacer]
ASC: Op erative time PS x

100.0
0.0
018 010
6000.0
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time for ASC.
[spacer]
ASC: Me asur e ment loop P Sx
[spacer]
078 034
079 034
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-287)
031 060
4: Loop A-B
077 034
077 044
078 044
079 044
Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-273)
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage, must be

selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to
phases A & B. The measurement loop should be set to Loop A-B.
[spacer]
ASC: Phi off set PS x

0
018 034
-180
180
077 042
078 042
079 042
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
[spacer]
ASC: AR op. m ode P Sx

1: Voltage-checked
[spacer]
7-190
018 025
018 026
018 027
018 028
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
Auto-reclosing control: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: AR with tCB PSx
Logic Diagram
000 038
000 039
000 050
000 051
0: No
[spacer]
Function ASC provides a choice as to whether the CB operating time (tCB), as

configured at M AI N: tCB ,clos e is to be taken into account for the precisely
synchronized reclosure (AR) or not.
[spacer]
ASC: AR Op.m ode v- chk .P Sx
018 029
1: Vref but not V
018 030
018 031
018 032
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer]
ASC: AR V> volt.che ck PS x

0.80
[spacer]
0.10
026 017
1.20
077 043
078 043
079 043
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground

voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
Voltage present.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer]
ASC: AR V< volt.che ck PS x

0.20
[spacer]
0.10
018 017
1.20
077 040
078 040
079 040
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground

voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as No voltage.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer]
ASC: AR tmin v- check PS x

0.10
0.00
018 018
10.00
077 041
078 041
079 041
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
ASC: AR V> s ync.che ck PS x

0.80
0.40
1.20
018 011
077 035
078 035
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to

obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer]
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx

0.10
[spacer]
0.02
018 012
0.40
079 035
Vnom
077 036
078 036
079 036
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential voltage between

measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-191
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: AR delta f max PS x

0.20
0.01
Logic Diagram
018 014
2.00
Hz
077 038
078 038
079 038
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential frequency between

[spacer]
ASC: AR delta p hi max PS x

15
018 013
100
077 037
078 037
079 037
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential angle between

[spacer]
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PS x

0.10
0.00
018 015
10.00
077 039
078 039
079 039
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
ASC: MC op. mod e P Sx
000 056
1: Voltage-checked
000 057
000 058
000 059
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
[spacer]
ASC: MC wit h tCB P Sx
000 102
000 103
000 104
000 105
0: No
[spacer]
Manual close command: In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this

parameter to Yes ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into
account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close
command.
[spacer]
ASC: MC op.mode v- chk. PSx

1: Vref but not V
000 060
000 061
000 062
000 063
Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
[spacer]
Manual close command: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer]
ASC: MC V> volt .che ck PSx

0.80
[spacer]
0.10
000 064
1.20
000 065
000 066
000 067
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
Voltage present.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
7-192
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: MC V< volt .che ck PSx

0.20
[spacer]
Address
0.10
Logic Diagram
000 068
1.20
000 069
000 070
000 071
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as No voltage.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
[spacer]
ASC: MC tm in v-che ck P Sx
0.10
0.00
000 072
10.00
000 073
000 074
000 075
Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
ASC: MC V> sync .che ck P Sx

0.80
0.40
1.20
000 052
000 053
000 054
000 055
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer]
ASC: MC delta Vmax PS x

0.10
0.02
000 080
0.40
Vnom
000 081
000 082
000 083
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential voltage between

[spacer]
ASC: MC delta f max P Sx

0.20
0.01
000 084
2.00
Hz
000 086
000 087
000 088
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential frequency between

[spacer]
ASC: MC delta phi max P Sx

15
000 089
100
000 091
000 092
000 093
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential angle between

[spacer]
ASC: MC tm in s ync.chk PS x
0.10
[spacer]
0.00
000 098
10.00
000 099
000 100
000 101
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-193
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GFS C: Enable PSx
018 072
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
018 073
018 074
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection is enabled.
Parameter
Default

signaling
GSCSG: Enable PSx
0: No
[spacer]
7-194
018 075
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
023 071
023 072
023 073
023 074
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling is enabled.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: Enable PSx
Logic Diagram
072 098
0: No
073 098
074 098
075 098
Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent

[spacer]
DTOC: I> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
20.00
Inom
0.10
20.00
Inom
20.00
Inom
DTOC: I>>>> PSx

1.00
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value of the overcurrent stage.
[spacer]
DTOC: tI> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
0.00
30.00
30.00
DTOC: tI>>>> PSx

1.00
30.00
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage.
[spacer]
DTOC: Ineg> PSx
[spacer]
Inom
0.10
20.00
Inom
20.00
Inom
DTOC: Ineg>>>> PSx

1.00
0.10
Inom
074 010
075 010
073 019
074 019
075 019
073 020
074 020
075 020
073 021
074 021
075 021
073 022
074 022
075 022
073 011
074 011
075 011
073 012
074 012
075 012
073 013
074 013
075 013
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

072 014
20.00
073 010
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

072 013
0.10
075 009
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

072 012
DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
20.00
DTOC: Ineg>> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
072 011
0.10
074 009
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
[spacer]
1.00
073 009
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 022
0.00
075 008
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 021
0.00
074 008
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 020
DTOC: tI>>> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
DTOC: tI>> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
30.00
073 008
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
072 019
0.00
075 007
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 010
0.10
074 007
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 009
0.10
073 007
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

072 008
DTOC: I>>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
0.10
DTOC: I>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
072 007
073 014
074 014
075 014
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIneg > PSx

1.00
072 023
0.00
30.00
073 023
074 023
075 023
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-332)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-195
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 024
0.00
30.00
072 025
0.00
30.00
0.00
072 026
30.00
074 024
075 024
073 025
074 025
075 025
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: tIneg >>>> P Sx

1.00
073 024
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: tIneg >>> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
Min
DTOC: tIneg >> PSx

1.00
[spacer]
Address
073 026
074 026
075 026
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIneg > (1p HSR ) P Sx
002 160
0: Normal
[spacer]
002 161
002 162
002 163
Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-332)
DTOC: tIneg >> (1pHSR ) P Sx
002 164
002 165
002 166
002 167
002 168
002 169
002 170
002 171
002 172
002 173
002 174
002 175
0: Normal
[spacer]
DTOC: tIneg >>> (1pHSR ) P Sx

0: Normal
[spacer]
DTOC: tIneg >>>>(1 pHS R) P Sx

0: Normal
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the negativesequence system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR)
of an ARC cycle. (See: Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of
HSR.)
[spacer]
DTOC: Evaluat ion IN P S x
073 189
2: Measured
073 190
073 202
073 219
Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-327)
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or
the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
DTOC: IN> PS x
1.00
072 015
0.10
20.00
Inom
Setting for operate value IN> (IN= residual current).
[spacer]
DTOC: IN>> PS x
072 016
0.10
20.00
Inom
Setting for operate value IN>> (IN= residual current).
[spacer]
DTOC: IN>>> PS x
[spacer]
7-196
072 017
0.10
20.00
Inom
075 015
073 016
074 016
075 016
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
[spacer]
1.00
074 015
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
[spacer]
1.00
073 015
073 017
074 017
075 017
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN= residual current).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: IN>>>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
Address
Logic Diagram
072 018
0.10
20.00
Inom
073 018
074 018
075 018
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Chapter Technical Data).
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN tim er start P Sx
002 138
002 139
002 142
002 143
1: With starting
[spacer]
With this setting the triggering of the timers for the residual current system can
now be set as direction-dependent.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN> PSx

1.00
072 027
0.00
30.00
073 027
074 027
075 027
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)

Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-333)
Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>> PSx

1.00
072 028
0.00
30.00
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>>> PSx
072 029
0.00
30.00
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx
072 030
0.00
30.00
073 029
074 029
075 029
073 030
074 030
075 030
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN> (1pHSR ) P Sx

0: Normal
075 028
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
[spacer]
1.00
074 028
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
[spacer]
1.00
073 028
002 144
002 145
002 146
002 147
Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-333)

Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>> (1pHSR ) P Sx
002 148
002 149
002 150
002 151
002 152
002 153
002 154
002 155
002 156
002 157
002 158
002 159
0: Normal
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>>> (1pHSR) PSx

0: Normal
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>>>> (1pHSR) PSx

0: Normal
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the residual current
system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC
cycle. (See: Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of HSR.)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-197
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: VNG> PSx

0.030
Logic Diagram
010 045
0.010
0.500
Vnom
010 060
010 080
Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-329)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement
voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
[spacer]
DTOC: Angle phi N P Sx

0
-90
004 092
90
010 139
004 247
004 248
004 249
Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-329)
[spacer]
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
[spacer]
DTOC: Direction t IN> P Sx
072 032
072 042
072 082
072 091
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)

Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-333)
Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
DTOC: Direction t IN>> P Sx
072 033
[spacer]
072 083
DTOC: Direction t IN>>> P Sx
072 034
072 044
072 084
072 093
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)
DTOC: Direction t IN>>>>PS x
072 035
072 045
072 085
072 094
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)
[spacer]
The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement

direction of the residual current stages.
[spacer]
DTOC: Puls.prol.I N>,int PSx

0.08
072 092
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)
[spacer]
072 043
0.00
017 055
10.00
073 042
074 042
075 042
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
[spacer]
Setting for the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>,inte rm. P Sx

Blocked
0.00
017 056
100.00
073 038
074 038
075 038
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground faults.
[spacer]
DTOC: Hold- t. tI N>,int mPSx

0.0
[spacer]
7-198
0.0
600.0
017 057
073 039
074 039
075 039
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
Setting for the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Inverse-time overcur IDMT: E nable PSx

rent protection
Logic Diagram
072 070
0: No
073 070
074 070
075 070
Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-338)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which IDMT protection is enabled.
[spacer]
IDMT: I ref ,P PSx

1.00
072 050
0.10
4.00
Inom
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: F actor KI,P PS x

1.00
007 250
10.00
074 050
075 050
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
1.00
073 050
007 251
007 252
007 253
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all types of characteristics.
This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable threshold along the X
axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not result in a shifting of the
characteristic itself.
[spacer]
IDMT: C haracte ri stic P PSx
072 056
0: Definite Time
073 056
075 056
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: F actor k t,P PS x

1.00
074 056
0.05
072 053
10.00
073 053
074 053
075 053
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: M in. trip t ime P PS x

1.00
0.00
072 077
10.00
073 077
074 077
075 077
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). As a rule, this value
should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
[spacer]
IDMT: Hold t ime P PSx

0.00
0.00
072 071
600.00
073 071
074 071
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (phase current
system).
[spacer]
IDMT: R e le as e P PS x
072 059
1: Without delay
073 059
074 059
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: I ref ,neg PS x
[spacer]
075 059
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
[spacer]
1.00
075 071
072 051
0.01
4.00
Inom
073 051
074 051
075 051
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-199
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
IDMT: F actor KI,ne g PS x

1.00
1.00
Logic Diagram
007 254
10.00
007 255
008 002
008 005
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all Ineg types of
characteristics. This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable
threshold along the X axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not
result in a shifting of the characteristic itself.
[spacer]
IDMT: C haracter. ne g. P Sx
072 057
0: Definite Time
073 057
074 057
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: F actor k t,ne g PS x

1.00
075 057
0.05
072 054
10.00
073 054
074 054
075 054
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: M in.trip time ne gP Sx

1.00
0.00
10.00
072 078
073 078
074 078
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (negative-sequence current system).

As a rule, this value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
[spacer]
IDMT: Hold t ime neg PSx

0.00
0.00
072 072
600.00
073 072
074 072
075 072
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (negative-sequence

current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: R e le as e neg. PSx
072 060
1: Without delay
075 078
073 060
074 060
075 060
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
[spacer]
IDMT: E valuatio n IN P Sx
072 075
2: Measured
073 075
074 075
075 075
Fig. 3-271, (p. 3-348)
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or
the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
IDMT: I ref ,N PS x
1.00
[spacer]
072 052
0.01
4.00
Inom
073 052
074 052
075 052
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).

Depending on the setting of IDMT: E val uation IN PSx, either the
calculated or the measured reference current is used.
7-200
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
IDMT: F actor KI,N PS x

1.00
1.00
Logic Diagram
001 173
10.00
001 174
001 175
001 176
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
[spacer]
The set factor I D MT: Fact or KI, N PS x is multiplied by the reference

quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the current
in the residual current measuring system.
[spacer]
IDMT: C haracte ri stic N P Sx
072 058
0: Definite Time
073 058
075 058
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: F actor k t,N P S x

1.00
074 058
0.05
072 055
10.00
073 055
074 055
075 055
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT: M in. trip t ime N P S x

1.00
0.00
072 079
10.00
073 079
074 079
075 079
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system.
This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded.
After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of
the current.
[spacer]
IDMT: Hold t ime N P Sx

0.00
0.00
072 073
600.00
073 073
074 073
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (residual current
system).
[spacer]
IDMT: R e le as e N PSx
1: Without delay
[spacer]
075 073
072 061
073 061
074 061
075 061
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
Setting for for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-201
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
THER M : Enable PSx
Logic Diagram
072 175
0: No
073 175
074 175
075 175
Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-351)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
THER M : Ir ef PSx
1.00
072 179
0.10
4.00
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer]
THER M : S tar t .f act.OL_RC PS x

1.15
1.05
Inom
Setting for the starting factor to trigger overload recording.
[spacer]
THER M : Tim.const .1 ,>Ibl PSx

1.0
1000.0
075 179
073 180
074 180
075 180
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
30.0
074 179
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
072 180
1.50
073 179
072 187
min
073 187
074 187
075 187
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer]
THER M : Tim.const .2 ,<Ibl PSx

30.0
[spacer]
1.0
1000.0
072 188
min
073 188
074 188
075 188
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer]
THER M : M ax.obje ct temp. P Sx

120
300
072 182
073 182
074 182
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer]
THER M : O/ T f .Iref pe r s. PS x
80
300
072 167
073 167
074 167
Setting for overtemperature resulting from a persistent limit current (max a,max).
[spacer]
THER M : Warning t emp. PS x
[spacer]
300
072 153
075 167
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
95
075 182
073 153
074 153
075 153
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Setting for the temperature (in C) to trigger a warning alarm.

Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
[spacer]
THER M : M ax. cool. t emp. PSx

40
[spacer]
70
072 185
073 185
074 185
075 185
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
7-202
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
THER M : S ele ct me as.input PS x
Logic Diagram
072 177
073 177
074 177
075 177
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether coolant temperature (ambient) shall be measured

and, if so, whether data acquisition shall take place via the PT 100 or the 20 mA
input.
[spacer]
THER M : Coolant t emp. PS x

40
-40
072 186
70
073 186
074 186
075 186
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
[spacer]
THER M : M inimu m te mper at.PS x

-40
-40
100
076 178
077 178
078 178
079 178
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used for trip time calculation
if a cable runs in an underground tunnel system.
[spacer]
THER M : Funct.f.CT A fai l. PSx
076 177
3: Blocking
077 177
078 177
079 177
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
[spacer]
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will continue to
operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. User can select
between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and Blocking.
[spacer]
THER M : warn ing PSx

95
50
072 184
200
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer]
THER M : t rip PS x
100
[spacer]
200
074 184
075 184
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
072 181
50
073 184
073 181
074 181
075 181
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.

Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here
will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
[spacer]
THER M : Hyste re s. ,tr ip P Sx

2
30
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer]
THER M : Warning pre-t rip PS x

30.0
[spacer]
0.0
1000.0
072 183
074 183
075 183
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
072 191
min
073 183
073 191
074 191
075 191
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-203
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
THER M : R e tain re pl ic a PS x
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
009 019
009 030
009 032
009 039
0: No
[spacer]
7-204
With this parameter it can be configured whether the thermal replica is retained
in the non-volatile section of the device's memory so that it will still be available
after an interruption of the supply voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
Min
Max
Unit
Time-voltage protec V<>: Enable PS x

tion
Logic Diagram
076 000
077 000
078 000
079 000
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer]
V<>: Ope rating mode PSx
076 001
1: Delta
[spacer]
077 001
078 001
079 001
Fig. 3-281, (p. 3-361)
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages ('Star' operating

mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages ('Delta' operating mode) will be
monitored.
Note: In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection
function, the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/
3 in the Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the following
example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of 80 V (phase-tophase):
Setting value =
operate value
80V
=
= 0.80
V nom
100V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of 46.2 V (phase-tophase):
Setting value =
[spacer]
operate value
46.2V
46.2V 3
=
=
= 0.80
V nom
100V
100V
3
3
V<>: V> PSx

1.10
076 003
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer]
V<>: V> > PSx

1.10
0.20
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer]
V<>: V> >> PS x

0.20
Setting for operate value V>>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV> PS x
1.50
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV>> PS x
[spacer]
076 006
0.00
100.00
078 004
079 004
011 076
011 077
011 078
077 005
078 005
079 005
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
[spacer]
1.00
077 004
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
076 005
0.00
079 003
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
011 075
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 003
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
076 004
[spacer]
1.10
1.50
077 003
077 006
078 006
079 006
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-205
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
V<>: tV>>> PS x
1.00
Logic Diagram
011 079
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV> 3-pole PS x
076 027
0.00
100.00
011 081
011 082
Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
[spacer]
1.00
011 080
077 027
078 027
079 027
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
V<>: tV>> 3- pole P S x

1.00
0.00
011 092
100.00
011 094
011 095
011 096
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>> when all three trigger
[spacer]
V<>: tV>>> 3- pole P Sx

1.00
0.00
011 099
100.00
011 105
011 117
011 118
Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>> when all three trigger
[spacer]
V<>: V< PSx

0.80
076 007
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer]
V<>: V< < PSx

0.80
0.20
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer]
V<>: V< << PS x

0.20
Setting for operate value V<<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tV< PS x
1.50
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< PS x
076 010
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< PS x
[spacer]
7-206
011 088
0.00
100.00
079 008
011 084
011 085
011 086
077 009
078 009
079 009
077 010
078 010
079 010
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
[spacer]
1.00
078 008
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
[spacer]
1.00
077 008
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
076 009
0.00
079 007
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
011 083
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 007
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
076 008
[spacer]
0.80
1.50
077 007
011 089
011 090
011 091
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<<.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
V<>: tV< 3-pole PS x

1.00
Logic Diagram
076 028
0.00
100.00
077 028
078 028
079 028
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< 3- pole P S x

1.00
0.00
011 119
100.00
011 124
011 125
011 126
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<< when all three trigger
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< 3- pole P Sx

1.00
0.00
011 127
100.00
011 128
011 129
011 130
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<< when all three trigger
[spacer]
V<>: Vpo s> PS x

1.10
076 015
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vpo s>> PSx

1.10
Vnom/3
0.20
Setting for operate value Vpos>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVp os> PSx
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVp os>> PSx
076 018
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vpo s< PS x
076 019
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos<.
[spacer]
V<>: Vpo s<< PSx

0.80
0.20
Setting for operate value Vpos<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tVp os< PSx
[spacer]
Vnom/3
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
077 017
078 017
079 017
077 018
078 018
079 018
077 019
078 019
079 019
077 020
078 020
079 020
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
076 021
0.00
079 016
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
076 020
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 016
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
[spacer]
0.80
077 016
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
[spacer]
1.00
079 015
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
076 017
0.00
078 015
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
076 016
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
077 015
077 021
078 021
079 021
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-207
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
V<>: tVp os<< PSx

1.00
076 022
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.
[spacer]
V<>: Vneg> PS x
076 023
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vneg>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vneg>> PS x
Blocked
Vnom/3
0.20
Setting for operate value Vneg>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVneg> PSx
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVneg>> PSx
076 026
0.00
100.00
078 023
077 024
078 024
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.
[spacer]
V<>: Evaluation VNG PS x
076 002
1: Calculated
077 025
078 025
077 026
078 026
077 002
078 002
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be

monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P437 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
[spacer]
V<>: VNG> PS x
076 011
0.02
[spacer]
Setting for operate value VNG>.
[spacer]
V<>: VNG>> PSx
1.00
0.02
Setting for operate value VNG>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVNG> PS x
1.00
076 013
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tVNG>> PS x
076 014
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vref> PS x
[spacer]
7-208
007 064
1.50
078 011
079 011
077 012
078 012
079 012
077 013
078 013
079 013
077 014
078 014
079 014
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)
[spacer]
0.20
077 011
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.
1.10
079 002
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)
[spacer]
1.00
079 026
Vnom(/3) Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)
076 012
[spacer]
1.00
079 025
Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-370)
[spacer]
Blocked
079 024
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)
[spacer]
Blocked
079 023
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)
[spacer]
1.00
077 023
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)
076 025
0.00
079 022
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)
076 024
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 022
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
[spacer]
Blocked
077 022
Vref,nom
007 071
007 075
007 079
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
Setting for operate value Vref>.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
V<>: Vref>> PSx

1.10
007 065
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref>>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vref>>> PS x
1.10
1.50
Vref,nom
0.20
Setting for operate value Vref>>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVref> PSx
1.50
Vref,nom
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVref>> PSx
007 067
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tVref>>> PSx
010 254
0.00
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>>>.
[spacer]
V<>: Vref< PS x
007 086
0.20
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref<.
[spacer]
V<>: Vref<< PSx

0.80
0.20
Setting for operate value Vref<<.
[spacer]
V<>: Vref<<< PS x
1.50
Vref,nom
0.20
Setting for operate value Vref<<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tVref< PSx
1.50
Vref,nom
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tVref<< PSx
007 096
100.00
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tVref<<< PSx
[spacer]
011 071
0.00
100.00
007 070
007 074
007 078
010 255
011 020
011 035
007 097
007 101
007 105
007 098
007 102
007 106
011 062
011 069
011 070
007 099
007 103
007 107
007 100
007 104
007 108
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
[spacer]
1.00
007 077
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<.
0.00
007 073
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
[spacer]
1.00
007 069
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
007 088
0.00
010 253
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
011 059
[spacer]
1.00
Vref,nom
007 087
[spacer]
0.80
1.50
010 252
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
[spacer]
0.80
010 251
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
[spacer]
1.00
007 076
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
[spacer]
1.00
007 072
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
007 066
0.00
007 068
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
010 250
[spacer]
1.00
Logic Diagram
011 072
011 073
011 074
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref<<<.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-209
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
V<>: Op. mode V< mon. P Sx
Logic Diagram
001 162
0: Without
001 163
001 164
001 165
Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-360)
[spacer]
Activation of the minimum current monitoring mode for undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
V<>: I enable V< PSx

0.10
0.04
001 155
1.00
Inom
001 159
001 160
001 161
Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-360)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the minimum current monitoring for
undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
V<>: tT rans ient pulse P Sx

1.00
0.00
076 029
100.00
077 029
078 029
079 029
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
[spacer]
V<>: Hyst . V<> meas. PSx

3
076 048
10
077 048
078 048
079 048
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
[spacer]
V<>: Hyst . V<> de duc . P Sx

3
[spacer]
7-210
10
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring deduced voltages
such as Vneg and VNG.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
f<> : Enable PSx

Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
Logic Diagram
018 196
0: No
018 197
018 198
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-373)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency

[spacer]
f<> : Oper. m ode f1 PS x
018 120
1: f
[spacer]
018 199
018 121
018 122
018 123
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)
018 144
018 145
018 146
018 147
018 168
018 169
018 170
018 171
018 192
018 193
018 194
018 195
1: f
[spacer]

1: f
[spacer]

1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency

protection.
[spacer]
f<> : f1 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
70.00
Hz
40.00
70.00
40.00
70.00
40.00
70.00
018 102
018 103
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

018 124
018 125
018 126
018 127
018 148
018 149
018 150
018 151
018 172
018 173
018 174
018 175
Hz
f<> : f4 PS x
49.80
018 101
Hz
f<> : f3 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
40.00
f<> : f2 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
018 100
Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer]
f<> : tf1 PSx

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
f<> : tf2 PSx

0.00
[spacer]
018 104
0.00
10.00
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0.00
10.00
018 106
018 107
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

018 128
018 129
018 130
018 131
018 152
018 153
018 154
018 155
f<> : tf3 PSx

0.00
018 105
7-211
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : tf4 PSx

0.00
018 176
0.00
10.00
018 177
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer]
f<> : df1/dt PS x
[spacer]
0.1
10.0
0.1
10.0
0.1
10.0
018 109
018 110
018 111
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

018 132
018 133
018 134
018 135
018 156
018 157
018 158
018 159
018 180
018 181
018 182
018 183
Hz/s
Hz/s
f<> : df4/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
Hz/s
f<> : df3/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
10.0
f<> : df2/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
018 108
0.1
018 179
[spacer]
2.0
018 178
Hz/s
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer]
f<> : De lta f1 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
Hz
0.01
5.00
0.01
5.00
0.01
5.00
018 113
018 114
018 115
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

018 136
018 137
018 138
018 139
018 160
018 161
018 162
018 163
018 184
018 185
018 186
018 187
Hz
Hz
0.30
[spacer]
5.00
0.30
[spacer]
0.01
0.30
[spacer]
018 112
Hz
Setting for Delta f.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer]
f<> : De lta t1 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
0.04
3.00
0.04
3.00
0.04
3.00
018 117
018 118
018 119
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

018 140
018 141
018 142
018 143
018 164
018 165
018 166
018 167
018 188
018 189
018 190
018 191
0.30
[spacer]
3.00
0.30
[spacer]
0.04
0.30
[spacer]
018 116
Setting for Delta t.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
7-212
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
P<>: Enabled PSx
014 252
0: No
014 253
014 254
014 255
Fig. 3-298, (p. 3-380)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
P<>: P> PS x
0.500
017 120
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value P> for the active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay P > PSx

0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay P > PSx

0.00
0.00
017 128
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage P>.
[spacer]
P<>: Direction P> PS x
017 129
017 130
017 131
017 133
017 134
017 135
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
017 136
017 202
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
017 132
100.00
017 201
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
[spacer]
0.10
017 200
017 137
017 138
017 139
Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-383)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx

0.95
0.05
017 124
0.95
017 125
017 126
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: P>> PS x
0.500
017 140
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value P>> for the active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay P >>PS x

0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay P >>P Sx

0.00
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage P>>.
[spacer]
P<>: Direction P>> PS x

[spacer]
017 148
017 142
017 143
017 149
017 150
017 151
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
017 152
017 141
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
[spacer]
Blocked
017 127
017 153
017 154
017 155
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
017 156
017 157
017 158
017 159
Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-383)
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-213
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>P S x

0.95
0.05
Logic Diagram
017 144
0.95
017 145
017 146
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q> PS x
0.500
017 160
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value Q> of the reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay Q> P Sx

0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay Q> P Sx

0.00
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>.
[spacer]
P<>: Direction Q> PS x
017 168
017 163
017 169
017 170
017 171
017 173
017 174
017 175
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
017 176
017 162
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
017 172
017 161
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
[spacer]
Blocked
017 147
017 177
017 178
017 179
Fig. 3-303, (p. 3-385)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal will
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> P Sx

0.95
0.05
017 164
0.95
017 165
017 166
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q>> PS x
0.500
017 180
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value Q>> of the reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay Q>>P Sx

0.00
100.00
017 188
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay Q>>P Sx

0.00
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>>.
[spacer]
P<>: Direction Q>> PS x
017 183
017 189
017 190
017 191
017 193
017 194
017 195
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
017 196
017 182
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
017 192
017 181
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
[spacer]
Blocked
017 167
017 197
017 198
017 199
Fig. 3-303, (p. 3-385)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PS x

0.95
[spacer]
7-214
0.05
017 184
0.95
017 185
017 186
017 187
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
P<>: P< PS x
0.500
017 030
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay P < PSx

0.10
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay P < PSx

0.00
0.00
017 061
017 062
017 063
017 227
017 228
017 229
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<.
[spacer]
P<>: Direction P< PS x
017 230
017 033
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
017 226
100.00
017 032
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
017 060
017 031
017 231
017 232
017 233
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal will
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx

1.05
1.05
017 034
20.00
017 035
017 036
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P< of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: P<< PS x
0.500
017 234
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value P<< of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay P <<PS x

Blocked
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<<.
[spacer]
P<>: R eleas e de lay P <: Direction P<< PS x
017 250
017 237
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
017 246
017 236
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
017 242
017 235
017 251
017 252
017 253
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal will
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PS x

1.05
1.05
017 238
20.00
017 239
017 240
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P<< of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q< PS x
0.500
[spacer]
018 035
0.010
0.500
017 241
Snom
018 036
018 037
018 038
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
7-215
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
P<>: Op erate de lay Q: R eleas e de lay Q: Direction Q< PS x
018 081
018 054
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
018 056
018 053
018 082
018 083
018 084
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal will
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q: Q<< PS x
0.500
018 085
0.010
0.500
Snom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Op erate de lay Q<: R eleas e de lay Q<: Direction Q<< PS x
018 242
018 087
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
018 236
018 086
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
018 213
[spacer]
0.00
018 047
018 243
018 244
018 245
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<: t Transient pulse P Sx

1.00
0.00
018 246
100.00
018 098
018 247
018 248
018 249
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
[spacer]
7.1.3.4
7-216
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by stages P<, P<<, Q< and
Q<< after the respective operate delays have elapsed.
Cont rol
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
8
Information and Control Functions
8.1
Operation
The P437 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P437_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
8.1.1
Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1
M e as ur ed Ope rating Dat a

Parameter
Default
Device
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DVICE: Process or fre quency

Not measured
[spacer]
Address
25
100
104 099
MHz
Display of the clock frequency of the processor on processor module P.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-1
P437
8 Information and Control Functions
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 3: No. t el. err ors p.u.

0.0
[spacer]
Address
0.0
100.0
120 040
COMM 4: No. t el. err ors p.u.

0.0
0.0
100.0
Logic Diagram
122 040
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer]
COMM 3: No.t.err.,max,st ore d

0.0
[spacer]
0.0
100.0
120 041
COMM 4: No.t.err.,max,st ore d

0.0
0.0
100.0
122 041
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Loop back res ult
120 057
....: Not measured

[spacer]
COMM 3: Loop back rec eiv e

Not measured
[spacer]
120 056
255
COMM 4: Loop back res ult
122 057
....: Not measured

[spacer]
COMM 4: Loop back rec eiv e

Not measured
[spacer]
8-2
122 056
255
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Measured data input MEASI: Curr e nt IDC

Not measured
004 134
0.00
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer]
MEASI: Curr e nt IDC p.u.

Not measured
0.00
24.00
mA
004 135
1.20
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer]
MEASI: Curr . IDC ,lin p.u.

Not measured
0.00
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
004 136
1.20
IDC,nom
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer]
MEASI: S caled value IDC, lin

Not measured
-32000
32000
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer]
MEASI: T emp eratur e

Not measured
004 180
Fig. 3-29, (p. 3-47)
004 133
-40.0
215.0
Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-48)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature input on the

analog p/c board.
[spacer]
MEASI: T emp eratur e p.u.

Not measured
-0.40
004 221
2.15
100C
Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-48)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature input on the

analog p/c board referred to 100C.
[spacer]
MEASI: T emp eratur e Tmax

Not measured
[spacer]
-40.0
004 233
215.0
Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-48)
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature

input on the analog p/c board.
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 100
0.00
20.00
mA
MEASO: Curr ent A- 2

0.00
[spacer]
Min
MEASO: Curr ent A- 1

0.00
[spacer]
Address
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)

005 099
0.00
20.00
mA
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-3
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Date
01.01.97
003 090
01.01.97 07.11.98 dd.mm.yy Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer]
MAIN: Tim e of day

00:00:00
003 091
00:00:00 24:00:00 hh:mm:ss
Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer]
MAIN: Tim e s witch ing
003 095
0: Standard time
[spacer]
Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-104)
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
[spacer]
MAIN: Fre que ncy f

Not measured
004 040
40.00
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer]
MAIN: IA prim,demand
Not measured
[spacer]
Hz
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-83)
006 226
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IB prim,demand
Not measured
[spacer]
70.00
006 227
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IC prim ,demand

Not measured
006 228
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display the three delayed phase currents (demand values) as primary

quantities.
[spacer]
MAIN: IA prim,demand st or.

Not measured
[spacer]
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IB prim,demand st or.

Not measured
[spacer]
006 223
25000
006 224
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IC prim ,demand stor .

Not measured
25000
006 225
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display the three stored phase currents (demand values) as primary quantities.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,m ax prim.

Not measured
[spacer]
8-4
005 050
25000
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: IP,max p rim.,delay

Not measured
005 036
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p rim.,s tor ed

Not measured
005 034
25000
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim.

Not measured
005 055
25000
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current A pr im.

Not measured
005 040
25000
[spacer]
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current B prim.

Not measured
006 040
25000
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current C pr im.

Not measured
25000
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current ( IP) pri m.

0
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
007 040
[spacer]
Not measured
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
005 010
25000
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN pr im.

Not measured
004 043
25000
Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity. The
measured residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN,par pr im.

Not measured
008 000
25000
Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim.

Not measured
0.0
008 042
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim.

Not measured
[spacer]
0.0
009 042
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-5
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Voltage A-G prim.

Not measured
0.0
005 042
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim.

Not measured
0.0
006 042
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage C- G pr im.

Not measured
0.0
007 042
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. (VPG )/ 3 pr im.

Not measured
0.0
005 012
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated neutral-displacement voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage VNG pr im.

Not measured
0.0
004 041
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90

as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage Vref pri m.

Not measured
0.0
005 046
3000.0
kV
Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim.

Not measured
0.0
008 044
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. VPP,min prim.

Not measured
0.0
009 044
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage A-B pri m.

Not measured
0.0
005 044
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim.

Not measured
[spacer]
8-6
0.0
006 044
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary

quantity.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Voltage C- A prim.

Not measured
0.0
007 044
2500.0
kV
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary

quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Appar . po we r S pri m.

Not measured
-1399.9
1400.0
005 025
MVA
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Active powe r P pr im.

Not measured
-3200.0
3200.0
004 050
MW
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q prim.

Not measured
-3200.0
004 052
3200.0
Mvar
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Active powe r fac tor

Not measured
-1.000
004 054
1.000
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power factor.
[spacer]
MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim

2:
[spacer]
008 065
MWh
MAIN: Act.energy inp. pr im

2:
[spacer]
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
008 066
MWh
MAIN: Re act.en. outp. pri m

2:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
008 067
Mvarh
8-7
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Re act. en. inp. pr im
008 068
2:
[spacer]
Unit
Mvarh
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
At run-time, the value is displayed with 32 bit precision. (But note that for
technical reasons, this value is internally stored as a text value.)
Value ranges:
MAIN: Act .e ne rgy outp.pr im 0 6,553,500.00 MWh
MAIN: Act.ene rgy inp. pri m 0 6,553,500.00 MWh
MAIN: Re act.e n. out p. pr im 0 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
MAIN: Re act. e n. inp. prim 0 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
Note: As an alternative, the same values also exist as numbers with 16 bit
precision:
[spacer]
(005 061) M AIN: Act .e ne rgy out p.prim
(005 062) M AI N: Act .e ne r gy inp. pri m
(005 063) M AIN: Re act .e n. out p. prim
(005 064) M AIN: Reac t. e n. inp. prim
MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim

0.00
[spacer]
MWh
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
0.00
005 062
655.35
MWh
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
MAIN: Re act.en. outp. pri m

0.00
8-8
655.35
MAIN: Act.energy inp. pr im

0.00
[spacer]
0.00
005 061
0.00
655.35
005 063
Mvar h
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Re act. en. inp. pr im

0.00
[spacer]
Address
0.00
005 064
655.35
Mvar h
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
The value is displayed as a number with 16 bit precision.
The setting at M AIN: Op. mode e nergy cnt . decides which procedure
shall be used to determine the active and reactive energy:
If procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined

every 2 s (approximately).
If procedure 2 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined

every 100 ms (approximately).
Procedure 2 obviously gives more precise results but puts more strain on the
system.
Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded,
the determination of the energy output is restarted, and the value that
exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle. Moreover, a counter is
incremented:
(009 090) M AIN: No.ove rfl.act .e n.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: Act .e nergy out p.pr im
(009 091) M AI N: No.ov e r fl.act .e n.inp: Counter for value overflow

of M AIN: Act .e ner gy inp. pr im
(009 092) M AIN: No. ov/ fl.r e ac. en.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: R eact .en. out p. prim
(009 093) MAIN: No.ov/ fl. r e ac.e n.i np: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Re act . en. i np. pr im
Note that the maximum value of these counters is 10000.

As an alternative to these 16 bit numbers, there are also 32 bit precision values
available:
[spacer]
(008 065) M AIN: Act .e ne rgy o ut p.pri m
(008 066) M AIN: Act .ene rgy i np. prim
(008 067) M AIN: R eact .e n. outp. pri m
(008 068) M AIN: R eact . en. inp. pri m
MAIN: Load angle phi A

Not measured
-180.0
004 055
180.0
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.
[spacer]
MAIN: Load angle phi B

Not measured
-180.0
004 056
180.0
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.
[spacer]
MAIN: Load angle phi C

Not measured
[spacer]
-180.0
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
004 057
180.0
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-9
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Angle phi N

Not measured
004 072
-180.0
180.0
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle VPG vs. IN

Not measured
-180
005 009
180
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase re l. I N vs IP
004 073
....: Not measured
Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-82)
[spacer]
Display of the phase relation of measured and calculated residual current. (The
phase relation is displayed as either Equal phase or Reverse phase.)
[spacer]
MAIN: Fre que ncy f p.u.

Not measured
0.200
004 070
4.000
[spacer]
Display of system frequency referred to fn.
[spacer]
MAIN: IA p.u.,de mand

Not measured
[spacer]
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-83)
006 235
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IB p.u.,de mand

Not measured
[spacer]
0.000
fnom
0.000
006 236
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IC p.u.,de mand

Not measured
0.000
006 237
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display of the delayed phase currents referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: IA p.u.,de mand s t or.

Not measured
[spacer]
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IB p.u.,de mand s tor.

Not measured
[spacer]
0.000
006 232
0.000
006 233
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
MAIN: IC p.u.,de mand st or.

Not measured
0.000
006 234
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored phase currents referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IP,max p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 051
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p .u.,delay

Not measured
[spacer]
8-10
0.000
005 037
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: IP,max p .u.,st or ed

Not measured
0.000
005 035
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IP,min p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 056
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current A p.u.

Not measured
005 041
0.000
25.000
[spacer]
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current B p.u.

Not measured
0.000
25.000
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current C p.u.
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
007 041
0.000
25.000
[spacer]
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ipos p.u.

Not measured
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
006 041
[spacer]
Not measured
Inom
0.000
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
009 016
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ine g p.u.

Not measured
0.000
009 015
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current ( IP) p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 011
25.000
Inom
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN p. u.
Not measured
0.000
004 044
25.000
IN,nom
Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom. The measured
residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN par p.u.

Not measured
0.000
008 001
25.000
IN,nom
Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)
[spacer]
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line referred to Inom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage VP G,max p.u.

Not measured
[spacer]
0.000
25.000
008 043
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-11
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u.

Not measured
0.000
25.000
009 043
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle VPG/IN p.u.

Not measured
-1.80
005 072
1.80
phi,ref
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN referred to 100.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 043
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u.

Not measured
0.000
006 043
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage C- G p. u.
Not measured
0.000
007 043
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u.

Not measured
0.000
009 018
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage Vne g p.u.

Not measured
0.000
009 017
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Volt. (VPG )/ 3 p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 013
12.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u.

Not measured
0.000
004 042
25.000
VNG,nom
Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90

referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u.

Not measured
[spacer]
8-12
0.000
005 047
3.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-79)
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to Vnom.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Voltage VP P,max p.u.

Not measured
0.000
25.000
008 045
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage VP P,min p.u.

Not measured
0.000
25.000
009 045
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage A- B p.u.

Not measured
0.000
005 045
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u.

Not measured
0.000
006 045
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage C- A p.u.

Not measured
0.000
007 045
25.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Appar . po we r S p.u.

Not measured
-10.700
005 026
10.700
Snom
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Active powe r P p. u.

Not measured
-7.500
004 051
7.500
Snom
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent power
Snom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q p.u.

Not measured
-7.500
004 053
7.500
Snom
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u

Not measured
-1.80
005 073
1.80
phi,ref
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A referred to 100C.
[spacer]
MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u

Not measured
[spacer]
-1.80
005 074
1.80
phi,ref
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B referred to 100C.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-13
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u

Not measured
-1.80
005 075
1.80
phi,ref
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C referred to 100C.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi N p.u.

Not measured
-1.80
005 076
1.80
phi,ref
Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG referred to 100.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle VAG, IN

Not measured
[spacer]
008 004
-180.0
180.0
MAIN: Angle VAG, IN,par

Not measured
-180.0
008 003
180.0
[spacer]
Display of the angle between VAG and the two residual currents for the purpose
of checking correct connection of the transformer for measuring IN,par.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current I unfilt .

Not measured
0.000
004 074
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
[spacer]
MAIN: Dumm y entry

Not measured
8-14
000 031
0.000
25.000
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Address
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
THER M : S tatus THERM replica

Not measured
-25000
25000
004 016
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer]
THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm pr im

Not measured
[spacer]
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm p. u

Not measured
[spacer]
25000
007 220
0.000
2.400
007 221
Iref
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Display of the thermal current (as a primary quantity, or as a per unit quantity,
respectively).
These measured operating values are calculated as follows:
I therm,prim =
I therm,p.u. =
Statustherm. repl.
100
I ref I nom,CT,prim
I therm,prim
I ref I nom,CT,prim
With:
Itherm,prim = THER M: C urr e nt I,t he rm prim
Itherm,p.u. = THE RM: C ur r ent I,t he rm p.u
Statustherm. repl. = THE RM : Stat us THE RM r eplica
Iref = THER M: Ire f P Sx
Inom,CT,prim = MAIN: Inom C.T. prim.
In a measured values message the thermal current is processed as a per-unit

variable referred to Iref.
[spacer]
THER M : Object te mpe r at ur e

Not measured
-40
300
004 137
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer]
THER M : Coolant t empe ratur e

Not measured
[spacer]
-40
200
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
004 149
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer]
THER M : Pre - trip t ime left

Not measured
[spacer]
0.0
004 139
1000.0
min
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (time-to-trip).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-15
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
THER M : The rm . replica p.u.

Not measured
-2.50
2.50
004 017
100%
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer]
THER M : Object te mp. p.u.

Not measured
-0.40
004 179
3.00
100C
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100C.
[spacer]
THER M : Coolant t emp. p.u.

Not measured
-0.40
004 178
2.00
100C
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100C.
[spacer]
THER M : Te m p. offse t re pli ca

Not measured
[spacer]
-25000
25000
004 109
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Logic Diagram
217 100
65535
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)

217 080
65535
217 081
65535
COUNT : Count 4
0
[spacer]
Unit
COUNT : Count 3
0
[spacer]
Max
COUNT : Count 2
0
[spacer]
Min
COUNT : Count 1
0
[spacer]
Address
217 082
65535
Display of the updated count.

Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
8-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
8.1.1.2
Physical St ate Sign als

Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
COMM 3: State r ece iv e 1
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 000
0: 0
[spacer]
120 003
0: 0
[spacer]
120 006
0: 0
[spacer]
120 009
0: 0
[spacer]
120 012
0: 0
[spacer]
120 015
0: 0
[spacer]
120 018
0: 0
[spacer]
120 021
0: 0
[spacer]
122 000
0: 0
[spacer]
122 003
0: 0
[spacer]
122 006
0: 0
[spacer]
122 009
0: 0
[spacer]
122 012
0: 0
[spacer]
122 015
0: 0
[spacer]
122 018
0: 0
[spacer]
122 021
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the relevant receive signal.
[spacer]
COMM 3: State send 1
121 000
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-17
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 3: State s end 2
121 002
0: 0
[spacer]
121 004
0: 0
[spacer]
121 006
0: 0
[spacer]
121 008
0: 0
[spacer]
121 010
0: 0
[spacer]
121 012
0: 0
[spacer]
121 014
0: 0
[spacer]
123 000
0: 0
[spacer]
123 002
0: 0
[spacer]
123 004
0: 0
[spacer]
123 006
0: 0
[spacer]
123 008
0: 0
[spacer]
123 010
0: 0
[spacer]
123 012
0: 0
[spacer]
123 014
0: 0
[spacer]
8-18
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
GSS E: Output 1 st ate
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 100
0: 0
[spacer]
104 103
0: 0
[spacer]
104 106
0: 0
[spacer]
104 109
0: 0
[spacer]
104 112
0: 0
[spacer]
104 115
0: 0
[spacer]
104 118
0: 0
[spacer]
104 121
0: 0
[spacer]
104 124
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 10 st at e
104 127
0: 0
[spacer]
104 130
0: 0
[spacer]
104 133
0: 0
[spacer]
104 136
0: 0
[spacer]
104 139
0: 0
[spacer]
104 142
0: 0
[spacer]
104 145
0: 0
[spacer]
104 148
0: 0
[spacer]
104 151
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-19
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 154
0: 0
[spacer]
104 157
0: 0
[spacer]
104 160
0: 0
[spacer]
104 163
0: 0
[spacer]
104 166
0: 0
[spacer]
104 169
0: 0
[spacer]
104 172
0: 0
[spacer]
104 175
0: 0
[spacer]
104 178
0: 0
[spacer]
104 181
0: 0
[spacer]
104 184
0: 0
[spacer]
104 187
0: 0
[spacer]
104 190
0: 0
[spacer]
104 193
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 1 s tat e
105 000
0: 0
[spacer]
105 005
0: 0
[spacer]
105 010
0: 0
[spacer]
105 015
0: 0
8-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 5 st at e
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 020
0: 0
[spacer]
105 025
0: 0
[spacer]
105 030
0: 0
[spacer]
105 035
0: 0
[spacer]
105 040
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 10 stat e
105 045
0: 0
[spacer]
105 050
0: 0
[spacer]
105 055
0: 0
[spacer]
105 060
0: 0
[spacer]
105 065
0: 0
[spacer]
105 070
0: 0
[spacer]
105 075
0: 0
[spacer]
105 080
0: 0
[spacer]
105 085
0: 0
[spacer]
105 090
0: 0
[spacer]
105 095
0: 0
[spacer]
105 100
0: 0
[spacer]
105 105
0: 0
[spacer]
105 110
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-21
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 115
0: 0
[spacer]
105 120
0: 0
[spacer]
105 125
0: 0
[spacer]
105 130
0: 0
[spacer]
105 135
0: 0
[spacer]
105 140
0: 0
[spacer]
105 145
0: 0
[spacer]
105 150
0: 0
[spacer]
105 155
0: 0
[spacer]
8-22
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
GOOSE: Output 1 stat e
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 010
0: 0
[spacer]
106 012
0: 0
[spacer]
106 014
0: 0
[spacer]
106 016
0: 0
[spacer]
106 018
0: 0
[spacer]
106 020
0: 0
[spacer]
106 022
0: 0
[spacer]
106 024
0: 0
[spacer]
106 026
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Output 10 s tate
106 028
0: 0
[spacer]
106 030
0: 0
[spacer]
106 032
0: 0
[spacer]
106 034
0: 0
[spacer]
106 036
0: 0
[spacer]
106 038
0: 0
[spacer]
106 040
0: 0
[spacer]
106 042
0: 0
[spacer]
106 044
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-23
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 046
0: 0
[spacer]
106 048
0: 0
[spacer]
106 050
0: 0
[spacer]
106 052
0: 0
[spacer]
106 054
0: 0
[spacer]
106 056
0: 0
[spacer]
106 058
0: 0
[spacer]
106 060
0: 0
[spacer]
106 062
0: 0
[spacer]
106 064
0: 0
[spacer]
106 066
0: 0
[spacer]
106 068
0: 0
[spacer]
106 070
0: 0
[spacer]
106 072
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 1 st ate
106 200
0: 0
[spacer]
106 201
0: 0
[spacer]
106 202
0: 0
[spacer]
106 203
0: 0
8-24
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 204
0: 0
[spacer]
106 205
0: 0
[spacer]
106 206
0: 0
[spacer]
106 207
0: 0
[spacer]
106 208
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 10 st at e
106 209
0: 0
[spacer]
106 210
0: 0
[spacer]
106 211
0: 0
[spacer]
106 212
0: 0
[spacer]
106 213
0: 0
[spacer]
106 214
0: 0
[spacer]
106 215
0: 0
[spacer]
106 216
0: 0
[spacer]
106 217
0: 0
[spacer]
106 218
0: 0
[spacer]
106 219
0: 0
[spacer]
106 220
0: 0
[spacer]
106 221
0: 0
[spacer]
106 222
0: 0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-25
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 223
0: 0
[spacer]
106 224
0: 0
[spacer]
106 225
0: 0
[spacer]
106 226
0: 0
[spacer]
106 227
0: 0
[spacer]
106 228
0: 0
[spacer]
106 229
0: 0
[spacer]
106 230
0: 0
[spacer]
106 231
0: 0
[spacer]
8-26
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary input
INP: State U 801
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
184 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 802
184 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 803
184 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 804
184 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 805
184 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 806
184 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 1
152 162
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 2
152 165
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 3
152 168
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 4
152 171
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 5
152 174
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 100 6
152 177
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 1
152 198
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 2
152 201
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 3
152 204
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 4
152 207
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 5
152 210
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 120 6
152 213
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 140 1
190 001
0: "Low"
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-27
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
INP: State U 1402
190 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1403
190 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1404
190 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1405
190 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1406
190 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1601
192 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1602
192 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1603
192 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1604
192 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1605
192 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1606
192 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2001
153 086
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2002
153 089
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2003
153 092
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2004
153 095
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
"Low": Not energized.
"High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
8-28
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary and analog

output
OUTP: St ate K 801
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 168
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 802
150 171
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 803
150 174
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 804
150 177
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 805
150 180
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 806
150 183
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 807
150 186
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 808
150 189
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: St ate K 100 1
150 216
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 219
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 222
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 225
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 228
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 231
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 234
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 237
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 008
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 011
0: Inactive
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-29
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 014
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 020
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 023
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 026
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 025
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 017
0: Inactive
8-30
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 025
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 200
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 203
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 206
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 209
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 212
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 215
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 218
0: Inactive
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-31
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 221
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
8-32
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
LED indicators
LED: S tat e H 1 green
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 180
1: Active
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 2 ye ll.
085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 3 ye ll.
085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 4 re d
085 006
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 012
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 015
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 018
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H10 re d
085 024
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 027
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 030
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 033
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 036
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 039
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 042
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H17 re d.
085 181
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 130
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 133
0: Inactive
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-33
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LED: S tat e H20 red
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 136
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 139
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 142
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 145
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 4 g reen
085 056
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 059
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 062
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 065
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 068
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 071
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H10 gr e en
085 074
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 077
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 080
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 083
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 086
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 089
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 092
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 160
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 163
0: Inactive
8-34
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 166
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 169
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 172
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 176
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
Active: The LED indicator is energized.
Parameter
Default
Configurable func
tion keys
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
F_KEY: St ate F1
080 122
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F2
080 123
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F3
080 124
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F4
080 125
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F5
080 126
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F6
080 127
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
"Off": The function key is in the Off position.
"On": The function key is in the On position.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-35
P437
8.1.1.3
Logic S tat e Sig nals

Parameter
Default
Local control panel
Address
Min
LOC: Ed it mode
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer]
LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 1 E XT
030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer]
LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 2 E XT
030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer]
LOC: Illum ination on EX T
037 101
0: No
[spacer]
8-36
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. E X T
003 173
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: Sig./ meas. block EX T
037 074
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: Com m and bloc king
003 174
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
COMM 1: Sig./ meas.v al.block.
037 075
0: No
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
COMM 1: IEC 870-5 -10 3
003 219
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: IEC 870-5 -10 1
003 218
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: IEC 870-5 , ILS
003 221
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: MODB US
003 223
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: DNP3
003 230
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: COUR IER
103 041
0: No
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
COMM 3: Res et No.t lg. er r.EX T
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 054
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 3: Com m unicati ons fault
120 043
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 3: Com m . link fai lur e
120 044
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 3: Lim.ex ce e d.,te l.e rr .
120 045
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-37
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 4: Res et No.t lg. er r.EX T
011 243
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 4: Com m unicati ons fault
122 043
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 4: Com m . link fai lur e
122 044
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 4: Lim.ex cee d.,te l.e rr .
122 045
0: No
Parameter
Default
IRIGB interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
IRIGB: Enabled
023 201
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-22, (p. 3-38)
IRIGB: S ynchron. re ady
023 202
0: No
Fig. 3-22, (p. 3-38)
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Logic Diagram
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GSS E: IE D link f aulty
Logic Diagram
105 181
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured

GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
Parameter
Default
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
IEC: Com m . link fault y
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 180
0: No
[spacer]
8-38
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
GOOSE: IE D01 link fault y
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 180
0: No
[spacer]
107 181
0: No
[spacer]
107 182
0: No
[spacer]
107 183
0: No
[spacer]
107 184
0: No
[spacer]
107 185
0: No
[spacer]
107 186
0: No
[spacer]
107 187
0: No
[spacer]
107 188
0: No
[spacer]
107 189
0: No
[spacer]
107 190
0: No
[spacer]
107 191
0: No
[spacer]
107 192
0: No
[spacer]
107 193
0: No
[spacer]
107 194
0: No
[spacer]
107 195
0: No
[spacer]
107 200
0: No
[spacer]
107 201
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-39
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 202
0: No
[spacer]
107 203
0: No
[spacer]
107 204
0: No
[spacer]
107 205
0: No
[spacer]
107 206
0: No
[spacer]
107 207
0: No
[spacer]
107 208
0: No
[spacer]
107 209
0: No
[spacer]
107 210
0: No
[spacer]
107 211
0: No
[spacer]
107 212
0: No
[spacer]
107 213
0: No
[spacer]
107 214
0: No
[spacer]
107 215
0: No
[spacer]
8-40
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not

available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the protection and control unit monitors the time period at
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GOOSE: IE D link fault y
107 250
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured

GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
[spacer]
GOOSE: IE D01-16 link ed
107 251
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: IE D17-32 link ed
107 252
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: Or dRun01 -1 6 link ed
107 248
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: Or dRun17 -3 2 link ed
107 249
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: Uniquene ss 1- 16
Not measured
[spacer]
007 217
65535
GOOSE: Uniquene ss 17-3 2

Not measured
007 218
65535
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Measured data input MEASI: Rs t. temp. T max E X T
006 076
0: No
[spacer]
MEASI: E nable d
0: No
035 008
Fig. 3-25, (p. 3-43)

Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-52)
[spacer]
MEASI: PT 100 fault y

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-48)
MEASI: O ve rload 2 0 mA input

0: No
[spacer]
040 190
040 191
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
MEASI: O pe n circ. 2 0 mA inp.

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
040 192
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
8-41
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary and analog

output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OUTP: Block outp .r el. EXT
040 014
0: No
[spacer]
OUTP: Re s e t latch. E XT
040 015
0: No
[spacer]
OUTP: Outp . relays blocke d

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
OUTP: Latching res et

0: No
8-42
021 015
040 088
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MEASO: Outp. e nabled E XT
036 085
1: Yes
[spacer]
MEASO: Rese t output EX T
036 087
0: No
[spacer]
MEASO: Enab led
037 102
0: No
[spacer]
MEASO: Output r ese t

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

037 056
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

037 057
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

037 058
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

037 059
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

037 060
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

069 014
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
MEASO: Value A- 1 out put

0: No
[spacer]
037 055
MEASO: Value A- 1 valid

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)
MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BC D)

0: No
[spacer]
037 054
MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BC D)

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)
MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BC D)

0: No
[spacer]
037 053

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

0: No
[spacer]
037 052

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)
MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (B C D)

0: No
[spacer]
037 051

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

0: No
[spacer]
037 050

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-53)
MEASO: Valid BC D value

0: No
[spacer]
037 117
MEASO: Value A- 2 valid
037 118
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)

069 015
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-43
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
MEASO: Value A-2 out put
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
037 119
0: No
8-44
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
MAIN: Enable prot ect . E XT
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: Dis able prot ect . E XT
003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: General re s et E XT
005 255
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Group res e t 1 E XT
005 209
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Group res e t 2 E XT
005 252
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t indicat. EX T
065 001
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t latch.tr ip E X T
040 138
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t.c.cl ./ tr.c EXT
005 210
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rs t I P,m ax,st or. E X T
005 211
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rs t me as.v.e ne r. E X T
005 212
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB open 3p E XT
031 028
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d 3 p EXT
036 051
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d A EXT
031 029
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d B E XT
031 030
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d C EX T
031 031
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 1 E X T
040 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 2 E X T
040 061
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
004 061
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip VNG E X T
002 183
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-45
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vr e f E XT
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 086
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip cm d. block . E XT
036 045
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. E XT
037 018
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man def. tri p A EX T
038 030
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man def. tri p B E X T
038 031
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man def. tri p C E X T
038 032
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip EX T
037 019
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip A E XT
036 052
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip B E XT
036 053
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip C E XT
036 054
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Par. trip ( 1p) E XT
002 066
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p. E X T
120 046
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p A EX T
120 047
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p B EX T
120 048
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p C E X T
120 049
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 1p trip E XT
041 078
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.e nabl. EXT
041 023
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. E X T
041 022
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Manual close E XT
036 047
0: No
8-46
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Tes t m ode EXT
037 070
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Tim e s witc hing E X T
003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer]
MAIN: Min-puls e c lock EXT
060 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Healthy
060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer]
MAIN: Tim e s yn chr oniz ed
009 109
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocked/fault y
1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-88)

010 224
Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-88)

010 225
Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-88)

031 040
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)

031 039
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)

031 032
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
MAIN: CB open B
0: No
[spacer]
010 223
MAIN: CB open A
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-88)
MAIN: CB open >=1p

0: No
[spacer]
038 046
MAIN: CB open 3p
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-88)
MAIN: Current flow C

0: No
[spacer]
003 028
MAIN: Current flow B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-110)
MAIN: Current flow A

0: No
[spacer]
037 071
MAIN: Prot. ex t. dis able d

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-92)
MAIN: Prot. ex t. e nable d

0: No
[spacer]
004 060
MAIN: Tes t m ode

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-92)
MAIN: Device not re ady

1: Yes
[spacer]
004 065
031 033
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
MAIN: CB open C
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
031 034
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
8-47
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
031 036
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)

031 037
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)

031 041
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)

021 013
Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-103)
MAIN: Latch. trip c. res et

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
MAIN: Trip cm d. block ed

1: Yes
[spacer]
031 035
MAIN: CB pos .s ig. implaus.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
MAIN: CB close d C
0: No
[spacer]
031 038
MAIN: CB close d B
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-94)
MAIN: CB close d A
0: No
[spacer]
031 042
MAIN: CB close d >= 1p

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MAIN: CB close d 3 p
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
040 139
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
MAIN: Gen. t rip command
035 071
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Gen. t rip command 1

0: No
[spacer]
036 073
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)

036 074
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Gen. t rip command 2

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Trip com mand 1, C

0: No
[spacer]
036 072
MAIN: Trip com mand 1, B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Trip com mand 1, A

0: No
[spacer]
036 071
036 022
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Gen. t rip signal
036 251
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 1

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)

036 007
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Trip s ignal 1, C

0: No
8-48
036 006
MAIN: Trip s ignal 1, B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Trip s ignal 1, A

0: No
[spacer]
036 005
036 008
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
037 253
Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-99)

036 023
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MAIN: Final trip

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-99)
MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 2

0: No
[spacer]
037 252
MAIN: Trip s ignal 1, 3p

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Trip s ignal 1, 1p

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
038 103
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip
001 207
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip A
001 208
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip B
001 209
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip C
001 210
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Manual t ri p s ignal

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-102)

034 048
Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-102)
MAIN: Manual t ri p s ignal C

0: No
[spacer]
034 047
MAIN: Manual t ri p s ignal B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-102)
MAIN: Manual t ri p s ignal A

0: No
[spacer]
034 017
MAIN: Man. cl. cmd.enabl.
034 049
Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-102)

039 113
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. clos e command
037 068
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Clos e command
037 009
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Clos e aft .man.cl.rqu
037 012
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rush re str . A trig.
041 027
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rush re str . B tr ig.
041 028
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rush re str . C t ri g.
041 029
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-49
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MAIN: General star ting
036 000
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: St arting A
036 001
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: St arting B
036 002
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: St arting C
036 003
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: St arting GF
036 004
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: Short circuit AG
006 011
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Short circuit BG
006 012
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Short circuit C G
006 013
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Dumm y entry
004 129
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Without func tion
060 000
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Without func tion
061 000
0: No
Parameter
Default
Fault data
acquisition
FT_DA: Tr igger EX T
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 088
0: No
8-50
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Parameter subset
selection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSS: Control via user EX T
036 101
0: No
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 1 EX T
065 002
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 003
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 004
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 005
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSS: Control via user

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)

036 097
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)

003 062
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)

036 090
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)

036 091
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
PSS: PS 3 active
0: No
[spacer]
036 096
PSS: PS 2 active
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
PSS: PS 1 active
1: Yes
[spacer]
036 095
PSS: Actual p ar am. s ubs e t

[spacer]
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
PSS: PS 4 activat ed ext .

0: No
[spacer]
036 094

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)

0: No
[spacer]
003 061

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
PSS: Ex t.s el.param.s ubse t

0: No param. subset sel
[spacer]
036 102
036 092
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
PSS: PS 4 active
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
036 093
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
8-51
P437
Parameter
Default
Self-monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: C B faulty E X T
098 072
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: W arning (LE D)

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-113)
SFMO N: W arning (re lay )

0: No
[spacer]
036 070
SFMO N: W arm restart e x ec.
036 100
Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-113)

041 202
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re star t exe c.
041 201
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re st. che ck sum
093 024
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re st. SW updat e
093 025
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: B locking HW failur e
090 019
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty
041 200
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: Hardware clock fai l.
093 040
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: B at te ry failure
090 010
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM
093 026
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: +15V s upply faulty
093 081
0: No
[spacer]
093 082
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty
093 080
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong m odule s lot 1
096 100
0: No
[spacer]
096 101
0: No
[spacer]
096 102
0: No
[spacer]
096 103
0: No
8-52
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
SFMO N: W rong module s lot 5
Unit
Logic Diagram
096 104
0: No
[spacer]
096 105
0: No
[spacer]
096 106
0: No
[spacer]
096 107
0: No
[spacer]
096 108
0: No
[spacer]
096 109
0: No
[spacer]
096 110
0: No
[spacer]
096 111
0: No
[spacer]
096 112
0: No
[spacer]
096 113
0: No
[spacer]
096 114
0: No
[spacer]
096 115
0: No
[spacer]
096 116
0: No
[spacer]
096 117
0: No
[spacer]
096 118
0: No
[spacer]
096 119
0: No
[spacer]
096 120
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus
096 123
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong module HM I
096 124
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-53
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
SFMO N: W rong m odule C omm
Unit
Logic Diagram
096 125
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus
096 126
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot 1
097 000
0: No
[spacer]
097 001
0: No
[spacer]
097 002
0: No
[spacer]
097 003
0: No
[spacer]
097 004
0: No
[spacer]
097 005
0: No
[spacer]
097 006
0: No
[spacer]
097 007
0: No
[spacer]
097 008
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot10
097 009
0: No
[spacer]
097 010
0: No
[spacer]
097 011
0: No
[spacer]
097 012
0: No
[spacer]
097 013
0: No
[spacer]
097 014
0: No
[spacer]
097 015
0: No
[spacer]
097 016
0: No
8-54
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 017
0: No
[spacer]
097 018
0: No
[spacer]
097 019
0: No
[spacer]
097 020
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y
093 110
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y
093 111
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 01
097 086
0: No
[spacer]
097 087
0: No
[spacer]
097 088
0: No
[spacer]
097 089
0: No
[spacer]
097 090
0: No
[spacer]
097 091
0: No
[spacer]
097 092
0: No
[spacer]
097 093
0: No
[spacer]
097 102
0: No
[spacer]
097 103
0: No
[spacer]
097 104
0: No
[spacer]
097 105
0: No
[spacer]
097 106
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-55
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 107
0: No
[spacer]
097 108
0: No
[spacer]
097 109
0: No
[spacer]
097 118
0: No
[spacer]
097 119
0: No
[spacer]
097 120
0: No
[spacer]
097 121
0: No
[spacer]
097 122
0: No
[spacer]
097 123
0: No
[spacer]
097 124
0: No
[spacer]
097 125
0: No
[spacer]
097 134
0: No
[spacer]
097 135
0: No
[spacer]
097 136
0: No
[spacer]
097 137
0: No
[spacer]
097 138
0: No
[spacer]
097 139
0: No
[spacer]
097 140
0: No
[spacer]
097 141
0: No
8-56
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 150
0: No
[spacer]
097 151
0: No
[spacer]
097 152
0: No
[spacer]
097 153
0: No
[spacer]
097 154
0: No
[spacer]
097 155
0: No
[spacer]
097 156
0: No
[spacer]
097 157
0: No
[spacer]
097 166
0: No
[spacer]
097 167
0: No
[spacer]
097 168
0: No
[spacer]
097 169
0: No
[spacer]
097 170
0: No
[spacer]
097 171
0: No
[spacer]
097 182
0: No
[spacer]
097 183
0: No
[spacer]
097 184
0: No
[spacer]
097 185
0: No
[spacer]
097 186
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-57
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 187
0: No
[spacer]
097 188
0: No
[spacer]
097 189
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code
093 010
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion
093 030
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call
093 031
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k
093 032
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref.
093 033
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion
093 034
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op.
093 011
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt
093 012
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t .
093 013
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure
090 021
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C he ck s um error param
090 003
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror
093 041
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC

0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block .
090 012
Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-117)

093 015
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: T im e -out module Y
093 112
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d
096 121
0: No
8-58
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI
093 145
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nval. SW ve r s .C OMM1
093 075
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC
093 079
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y
093 113
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nom not adjust able
093 118
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD
093 124
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng A-1

0: No
[spacer]
093 114
Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
093 115
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC

0: No
[spacer]
098 035
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
SFMO N: S etting e rror f<>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM

0: No
[spacer]
093 116
098 028
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)
SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M
098 020
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: Pe riphe ral fault

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-221, (p. 3-293)

098 011
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)

098 001
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
SFMO N: Vne g> tr igger e d

0: No
[spacer]
098 132
SFMO N: Phas e se qu. V faulty

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip Vref

0: No
[spacer]
098 000
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip VNG

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V

0: No
[spacer]
098 018
098 014
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
SFMO N: U nd er volt age

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
098 009
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
8-59
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
098 022
Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-205)

098 023
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
SFMO N: M eas . cir c. V f aul ty

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-203)
SFMO N: M .circ. V,Vref fl ty.

0: No
[spacer]
098 021
SFMO N: F F, Vref trigge re d

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
098 017
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
SFMO N: M eas .circ .VNG faulty
098 254
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: M .circ. Vre f fault y
098 255
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: B UOC not act iv e

0: No
[spacer]
098 005
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)

098 016
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)

098 015
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
SFMO N: M eas . cir cuits GF S C

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
SFMO N: Z ero-se qu. s tart ing

0: No
[spacer]
098 004
SFMO N: M eas .circ .V,I fault y

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y

0: No
[spacer]
098 003
SFMO N: B UOC act ive wit h ARC

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
SFMO N: B UOC act ive w/ o ARC

0: No
[spacer]
098 002
SFMO N: C ommunic.fault C OMM 3
098 013
Fig. 3-237, (p. 3-308)

093 140
0: No
[spacer]
093 146
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: Hardware e r ror COM M3
093 143
0: No
[spacer]
093 149
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C omm.link fail.C OMM3
093 142
0: No
[spacer]
093 148
0: No
8-60
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: L im .e x c.te l.e r .COM M3
093 141
0: No
[spacer]
093 147
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: T elecom. faulty / PSI G

0: No
[spacer]
098 019
Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-218)
SFMO N: T elecom.faulty / GSC SG

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)
SFMO N: O p.mode PS IG inv al.

0: No
[spacer]
098 006
SFMO N: C B pos .s ig. implaus.
098 027
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)

098 124
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B No. C B op. >
098 066
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B rem. No. C B op. <
098 067
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B I trip >
098 068
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B I trip**2 >
098 069
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> A
098 070
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> B
098 071
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> C
098 077
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc
093 120
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30
098 053
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t)
098 054
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31
098 055
0: No
[spacer]
098 056
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 32
098 057
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-61
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
098 058
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit
098 024
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-48)
SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input
098 025
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp.
098 026
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-46)
SFMO N: C T A error
098 034
0: No
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OP_R C: Res e t record. EX T
005 213
0: No
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MT _RC: Res et record. E XT
005 240
0: No
Parameter
Default
Overload recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OL_RC: R e s et reco rd. EXT
005 241
0: No
[spacer]
OL_RC: R e cord. in progr es s
035 003
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-120)
OL_RC: Over l. me m. ove rfl ow
035 007
0: No
Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-121)
Parameter
Default
Ground fault
recording
Address
Min
GF_R C: Re se t recor d. E X T
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 242
0: No
8-62
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: Res et record. E XT
005 243
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigg er E X T
036 089
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigg er
0: No
[spacer]
037 076
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
FT_RC: I> triggere d
040 063
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Record. t rig acti ve

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)

035 004
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
FT_RC: Fault m e m. ov e rf low

0: No
[spacer]
035 000
FT_RC: Syst e m dis t urb. runn

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
FT_RC: Record. i n progre ss

0: No
[spacer]
002 002
FT_RC: Faulty time t ag
035 001
Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-132)

035 002
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-63
P437
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT
036 034
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Blocking Z1,ze E XT
036 036
0: No
[spacer]
036 037
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG E X T
038 025
0: No
[spacer]
036 039
0: No
[spacer]
036 041
0: No
[spacer]
036 044
0: No
[spacer]
036 061
0: No
[spacer]
036 067
0: No
[spacer]
036 068
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 065
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)

040 097
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)

040 067
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)

040 075
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: Starting V< C

0: No
8-64
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: Starting V> C

0: No
[spacer]
011 139
DIST: Starting I>> B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Starting I>> A

0: No
[spacer]
036 240
DIST: Starting I>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
DIST: Ge ne ral s tarti ng

0: No
[spacer]
036 104
040 096
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
040 052
Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-139)

036 015
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)

036 021
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)

036 105
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)

036 016
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: Fault for ward / LS

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed

0: No
[spacer]
040 072
DIST: tIN> running

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: Zero-s e qu . st art ing

0: No
[spacer]
040 071
DIST: VNG>> t riggere d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: Start. swit ch. t o PG

0: No
[spacer]
040 070
DIST: Starting Z < C

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-148)
DIST: Starting Z < B

0: No
[spacer]
036 241
DIST: Starting Z < A

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
DIST: Starting Z <

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
036 018
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: Fault for wd. / LS , A
038 010
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault for wd. / LS , B
038 012
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault for wd. / LS , C
038 014
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault back war d / BS

0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault back wd / BS, A
036 019
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)

038 011
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault back wd / BS, B
038 013
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Fault back wd / BS, C
038 015
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Dir ect. using Vme as
038 045
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Dir .us ing Vmeas S ys2
038 105
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-65
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: Dir .us ing Vmeas S ys3
038 108
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Dir ect. us ing me mory
038 047
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Dir .us ing Vmem S y s2
038 106
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Dir .us ing Vmem S y s3
038 109
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Forw. w/o me asure m.
038 044
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Forw. w/o me as. S ys2
038 104
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Forw. w/o me as. S ys3
038 107
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: tVme m ory r unning

0: No
[spacer]
040 034
Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-154)
DIST: Zone e xtens ion

0: No
036 065
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
DIST: Zone e xtens ion E XT
036 046
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Zone e xtens ion HS R

0: No
036 103
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
DIST: Zone e xt. HSR 1pG

0: No
[spacer]
039 029
Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-161)
DIST: Zone e xtens ion T D R

0: No
038 022
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
DIST: Zone e xt. 1 pG acti ve

0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Zone 1 s tart ing
039 028
Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-161)

001 094
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Zone 1,ze s tart ing
002 067
0: No
[spacer]
001 095
0: No
[spacer]
001 096
0: No
8-66
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
001 097
0: No
[spacer]
001 098
0: No
[spacer]
001 099
0: No
[spacer]
001 100
0: No
[spacer]
001 101
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: t1 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 031
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

037 127
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

037 128
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)

036 009
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

035 072
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)

035 074
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip s ig. zone 2 -8

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
DIST: Trip s ignal Z1,ze

0: No
[spacer]
036 030
DIST: Trip s ignal zone 1

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
DIST: Trip s ignal

0: No
[spacer]
036 029
DIST: t8 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
DIST: t7 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 028
DIST: t6 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-175)
DIST: t5 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 027
DIST: t4 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)
DIST: t3 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
035 079
DIST: t2 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)
DIST: t1,ze elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
036 026
035 073
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
041 084
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
8-67
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 059
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

037 129
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

037 130
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

037 200
Fig. 3-133, (p. 3-181)

038 039
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
DIST: IN,par> trigger ed

0: No
8-68
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: With mutual comp.

0: No
[spacer]
040 058
DIST: Impe dance in zone 6

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

0: No
[spacer]
040 057

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)

0: No
[spacer]
040 056

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram

0: No
[spacer]
Unit

0: No
[spacer]
Max
037 210
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSB: B locking E XT
008 248
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: B locked
011 144
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: B locking init. EX T
036 069
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: Enab led

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-183)
PSB: Z within polygon

0: No
[spacer]
040 095
PSB: B locking initi ated
036 024
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)

036 032
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: T rip s ignal
036 025
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: T rip s ignal OOS ( a)
006 035
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: T rip s ignal OOS ( b)
006 192
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: T rip s ignal st ab. P S
006 030
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: IP> tr igge re d
036 012
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: Ine g> tr igge re d
036 011
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: IN> t r iggere d
036 010
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-69
P437
Parameter
Default
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MCM ON: Blocking FF, V E X T
002 182
0: No
[spacer]
MCM ON: Enabled

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)

041 079
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)

035 081
Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-203)

038 100
Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-205)
MCM ON: M e as . circ . V faulty

0: No
[spacer]
038 049
MCM ON: FF, Vr e f tr iggere d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
MCM ON: FF, V t rigge re d

0: No
[spacer]
038 038
MCM ON: Vneg> trigger ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
MCM ON: Phas e s equ. V faulty

0: No
[spacer]
040 087
MCM ON: Und ervolt age

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-198)
MCM ON: M e as . circ . I faul ty

0: No
[spacer]
040 094
038 023
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
MCM ON: M .circ. Vre f fault y
007 213
0: No
[spacer]
MCM ON: M .circ. VNG f aul ty
007 214
0: No
[spacer]
MCM ON: M .circ. V,Vr ef fl ty.

0: No
[spacer]
041 080
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)

038 024
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
MCM ON: M e as . volt age o.k .

0: No
8-70
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
MCM ON: Peripheral fault

0: No
[spacer]
037 020
MCM ON: Ze ro-s equ. star ting

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-197)
MCM ON: M e as .circ.V, I fault y

0: No
[spacer]
040 078
038 048
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-200)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Enabled

time protection
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)

036 013
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Tr ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
037 021
BUOC: St arting
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Active
0: No
[spacer]
040 093
036 014
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Ze ro-se qu. star ting

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
010 185
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
8-71
P437
Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SOT F : Trigge r EXT
002 127
0: No
[spacer]
SOT F : Par. ARC r unning EX T
039 063
0: No
[spacer]
SOT F : Enab led

0: No
[spacer]
040 069
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
SOT F : Line d ead
006 147
0: No
[spacer]
SOT F : Active
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)

001 187
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)

006 129
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)

001 188
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-209)
SOT F : Trip s ignal

0: No
8-72
006 128
SOT F : tIN> elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
SOT F : tI> e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
035 076
SOT F : Starting I N>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
SOT F : Starting I >

0: No
[spacer]
036 063
SOT F : Z1 extended
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
SOT F : tManual-close runn.

0: No
[spacer]
006 146
036 064
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Enab le EX T
037 025
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSIG: Dis able EXT
037 026
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSIG: Blocking E X T
036 049
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Tes t telecom. EXT
036 038
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Tes t telecom. 1 E X T
038 085
0: No
[spacer]
038 086
0: No
[spacer]
038 087
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Telec.fault y (A) EXT

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)
PSIG: Telec.fault y (B) EXT

0: No
[spacer]
004 064
PSIG: Block. we ak inf. E XT
008 094
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)

036 255
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Weak inf . t rigg. E XT
043 062
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Fre q. mon. tr ig. E XT
038 080
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive ( A) E XT
036 048
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive ( B ) EX T
006 037
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Chan. A1 r ece ive EX T
038 091
0: No
[spacer]
038 092
0: No
[spacer]
038 093
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Chan. B1 rec eiv e EXT
008 241
0: No
[spacer]
008 242
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-73
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
008 243
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Channe l 1 re cei ve

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)

037 027
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)

037 028
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)

036 060
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)

012 244
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)
PSIG: Telecom . f aulty ( B)

0: No
[spacer]
015 008
PSIG: Telecom . f aulty ( A)

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
PSIG: Telecom . f aulty

0: No
[spacer]
037 023
PSIG: Not re ady

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-215)
PSIG: Re ady
0: No
[spacer]
008 246
PSIG: Enab le d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-215)
PSIG: Ex t./us e r enable d

1: Yes
[spacer]
008 245

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-215)

0: No
[spacer]
008 244
012 245
Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-216)
PSIG: Transie nt bloc king
037 255
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Tes t telecom. chann.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)

034 027
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
PSIG: Tes t telecom. ch. 3

0: No
[spacer]
034 026

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)

0: No
[spacer]
034 016
034 028
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
PSIG: Se nd
0: No
012 243
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
8-74
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Se nd (s ignal)
0: No
036 035
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
PSIG: Channe l 1 se nd
0: No
038 081
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
0: No
038 082
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
0: No
038 083
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-219)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-238)
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive
0: No
[spacer]
006 036
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-215)
PSIG: Re ceive ( s ignal)

0: No
037 029
Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)

Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
PSIG: Z1 ex te nde d
0: No
[spacer]
043 064
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
PSIG: Trip V<, A

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-232)
PSIG: Weak inf ee d s tar t.

0: No
[spacer]
035 075
006 152
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
PSIG: Trip V<, B

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
006 153
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
8-75
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Trip V<, C

0: No
[spacer]
Address
006 154
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
PSIG: Trip s ignal

0: No
038 007
Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)

Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
8-76
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: R ese t counte rs E X T
005 244
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: Enable EXT
037 010
2: Not configured
[spacer]
ARC: Disable EXT
037 011
2: Not configured
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R A E XT
037 014
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R B E XT
037 015
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R C EXT
037 016
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R A- B- C E X T
037 017
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: General s tarti ng EXT
037 096
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: Blocking E XT
036 050
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: C B d rive ready EX T
004 066
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: 1p- HS R enable EXT
000 108
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: 3p- HS R enable EXT
000 109
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: 3p- HS R(1p) enab. EXT
000 110
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: Enable e xt. ARC EX T
038 003
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: 3p trans fe r t r ip E X T
038 043
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: Ex t./us er enable d

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
ARC: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
037 013
015 064
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
ARC: T est HS R A
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
034 020
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
8-77
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)

034 022
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)

034 023
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
ARC: Blocke d
0: No
[spacer]
034 021
ARC: T est HS R A-B- C

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
ARC: T est HS R C
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
ARC: T est HS R B
0: No
[spacer]
Max
004 069
Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-244)
ARC: S tart by LOGIC
037 078
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

037 002
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

037 066
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

037 067
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

037 069
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

039 087
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

037 003
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: R eclaim time running

0: No
8-78
037 065
ARC: Dead tim e TDR r unn.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: t Discrim running

0: No
[spacer]
037 005
ARC: M ax . d ead time runn.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: Dead tim e 3p running

0: No
[spacer]
037 000
ARC: Dead tim e 1p running

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-244)
ARC: Dead tim e running

0: No
[spacer]
037 004
ARC: Op er. tim e 2 running

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
ARC: Op er. tim e 1 running

0: No
[spacer]
036 055
ARC: C ycle running

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-243)
ARC: Block. tim e running

0: No
[spacer]
037 008
ARC: R eject tes t HS R

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-243)
ARC: Not ready

1: Yes
[spacer]
004 068
036 042
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: ( Re)close r e que st

0: No
[spacer]
Max
037 077
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: ( Re)close s ignal HSR

0: No
037 007
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
ARC: ( Re)close s ignal TD R

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)

036 040
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: Ex t. 1p t rip pe rm.

0: No
[spacer]
036 062
ARC: S ig.inte rr. CB tr ip

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: R eclosure s uc ce ss ful

0: No
[spacer]
037 006
039 086
Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-270)
ARC: 3p final tr ip
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
036 043
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
8-79
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ASC: R es et counter s E XT
006 074
0: No
[spacer]
ASC: Enab le EXT
037 049
2: Not configured
[spacer]
ASC: Disable EXT
037 061
2: Not configured
[spacer]
ASC: Blocking EXT
037 048
0: No
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t AR clos e r . E XT
000 106
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode automatic reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t M C close r. EXT
037 064
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode manual reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: Enab l.close re qu.E X T
037 063
1: Yes
[spacer]
ASC: MC Close r eques t EXT
037 062
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: AR close re que st E X T
008 236
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: Ext./us e r enabled

1: Yes
[spacer]
038 018
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)

037 079
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
ASC: Not re ady

1: Yes
8-80
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
ASC: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
018 024
ASC: Blocked
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
ASC: Enab le d
0: No
[spacer]
037 092
037 082
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ASC: Te s t AR clos e r equ.

0: No
008 240
Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t M C clos e re qu.

0: No
034 019
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: AR close re que st

0: No
008 239
Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode

[spacer]
ASC: MC Close r eques t

0: No
034 018
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode

manual reclosure.
[spacer]
ASC: Cycle running

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-287)
ASC: Op erat.t ime running

0: No
[spacer]
038 019
037 093
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-287)
ASC: Clos e e nable

0: No
037 083
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)

Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
[spacer]
ASC: Clos e e nable,vol t.ch

0: No
037 085
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-282)

Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-283)
[spacer]
ASC: Clos e e nable,sy nc. ch

0: No
037 084
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
ASC: Clos e re je ct ion

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
037 086
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-287)
8-81
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: Enable EXT
039 095
2: Not configured
[spacer]
GFS C: Dis able EXT
039 096
2: Not configured
[spacer]
GFS C: Blocking EXT
043 068
0: No
[spacer]
GFS C: Ex t. enabled
1: Yes
[spacer]
039 089
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)

038 096
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)

039 090
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)

039 091
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)

038 097
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)

038 098
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)

038 099
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
GFS C: Trip s ignal

0: No
8-82
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
GFS C: t3 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
043 061
GFS C: t2 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
GFS C: t1 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
039 088
GFS C: Fault backward / B S

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-237, (p. 3-308)
GFS C: Fault forward / LS

0: No
[spacer]
038 095
GFS C: St arting
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
GFS C: VNG> trigge r ed

0: No
[spacer]
039 094
GFS C: Direct.d et erm. e nabl .

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
GFS C: IN> t riggered

0: No
[spacer]
039 093
GFS C: Monit or. tr iggere d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
GFS C: Not re ady

1: Yes
[spacer]
038 094
GFS C: Re ady
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
GFS C: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
039 097
039 092
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default

signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: Enable E XT
043 050
2: Not configured
[spacer]
GSCSG: Disab le EXT
043 051
2: Not configured
[spacer]
GSCSG: Blocking E X T
043 052
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: T elecom. fault y EXT
043 053
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.trigd. E X T
043 054
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: R eceive EXT
043 055
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: T es t tele com. EX T
043 056
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)

043 058
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)

034 029
Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-322)
GSCSG: T elecom. fault y

0: No
[spacer]
043 057
GSCSG: T es t tele com. chann.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
GSCSG: Not ready

1: Yes
[spacer]
043 066
GSCSG: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
GSCSG: Ex t. enabled
1: Yes
[spacer]
023 070
046 060
Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-313)
GSCSG: S end s i gnal

0: No
043 059
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)

Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
GSCSG: T rip s ignal

0: No
043 060
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)

Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
GSCSG: T rip ping t ime e laps .

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
043 063
Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-314)
8-83
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
GSCSG: T rans ient block ing
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
037 254
0: No
8-84
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EX T
002 176
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blck. dir. tIN>> EX T
002 177
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blk. dir. t IN>>> E XT
002 178
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Bl. d ir. tIN>>>> EXT
002 179
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t I> EX T
041 060
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t I>> EX T
041 061
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t I>> > EX T
041 062
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t I>> >> E X T
041 100
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t Ine g> EXT
041 102
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t Ine g>> EXT
041 103
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Block. tIne g>>> EX T
041 104
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Block. tIne g>>>> EX T
041 105
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t IN> EX T
041 063
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t IN> > EX T
041 064
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t IN> >> EX T
041 065
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Blocking t IN> >>> E X T
041 101
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 120
Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-323)
DTOC: St arting I>

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
035 020
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
8-85
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 011
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

040 012
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

035 032
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)

035 024
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

035 025
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

035 026
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: St arting I neg>>>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
DTOC: St arting I neg>>>

0: No
[spacer]
040 010
DTOC: St arting I neg>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
DTOC: St arting I neg>

0: No
[spacer]
035 023
DTOC: tI>>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
DTOC: tI>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
035 022
DTOC: tI>> elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-324)
DTOC: tI> e lap sed

0: No
[spacer]
035 021
DTOC: St arting I >>>>

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
DTOC: St arting I >>>

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
DTOC: St arting I >>

0: No
[spacer]
Max
035 027
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: tIneg > e laps ed

0: No
035 033
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-332)
[spacer]
DTOC: tIneg >> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)

035 028
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)

035 029
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
DTOC: St arting I N>>>

0: No
8-86
035 036
DTOC: St arting I N>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: St arting I N>

0: No
[spacer]
035 035
DTOC: tIneg >>>> e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-326)
DTOC: tIneg >>> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
035 034
035 030
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)

035 047
Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-329)
DTOC: Fault N back ward

0: No
[spacer]
035 031
DTOC: Fault N forward

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
DTOC: St arting IN>>>>

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
035 048
Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-329)
DTOC: tIN> e lapse d

0: No
035 037
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)

Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-333)
Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
DTOC: tIN>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
035 039
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
DTOC: tIN>>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
DTOC: tIN>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
035 038
035 040
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-328)
DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tIN>

0: No
035 043
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)

Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-333)
Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tIN>>

0: No
[spacer]
035 046
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)

040 086
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
DTOC: tIN>,inte rm. e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,i . runn

0: No
[spacer]
035 045
DTOC: Tr ip s ign. t IN>>>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-330)
DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tIN>>>

0: No
[spacer]
035 044
040 099
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
DTOC: Tr ip s ig. t IN>, int m.

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
039 073
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
8-87
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Inverse-time overcur IDMT: B lock. tIr e f,P > EX T

rent protection
040 101
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT: B lock. tIr e f,neg>EX T
040 102
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT: B lock. tIr e f,N> EXT
040 103
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT: E nabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 109
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)

040 113
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)

040 111
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)

040 081
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)

040 083
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)

040 054
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
IDMT: M em ory N clear

1: Yes
8-88
Fig. 3-270, (p. 3-347)
IDMT: Hold t ime N r unning

0: No
[spacer]
040 107
IDMT: t I re f,N> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: S tar t ing Ir e f,N>

0: No
[spacer]
040 110
IDMT: M em ory neg cle ar

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: Hold t ime neg r unn.

0: No
[spacer]
040 053
IDMT: t I re f,neg> elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: S tar t ing Ir e f,ne g>

0: No
[spacer]
040 082
IDMT: M em ory P cl ear

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: Hold t ime P runni ng

0: No
[spacer]
040 080
IDMT: t I re f,P> elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-338)
IDMT: S tar t ing Ir e f,P>

0: No
[spacer]
040 100
040 112
Fig. 3-272, (p. 3-349)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
THER M : B lock re plica EXT
041 074
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : R e s et re pli ca E XT
038 061
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : CTA e rror EX T
038 062
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
040 068
Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-351)
THER M : Not r eady
040 035
1: Yes
[spacer]
THER M : R e s et re pli ca
0: No
[spacer]
039 025
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)

041 109
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THER M : Tr ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THER M : Within pre-t rip t ime

1: Yes
[spacer]
041 108
THER M : Warning
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-278, (p. 3-358)
THER M : S tar t in g k*Ire f>

0: No
[spacer]
039 061
039 020
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THER M : R e clos ur e block e d
039 024
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : B uf fer empty

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THER M : CTA e rror

0: No
[spacer]
039 112
039 111
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
THER M : S et ting e rror,bl ock .

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
039 110
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
8-89
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Time-voltage protec V<>: Blocking tV> E XT

tion
Unit
Logic Diagram
041 068
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV>> E XT
041 069
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV>>> E XT
010 246
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV< E XT
041 070
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV<< E XT
041 071
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV<<< E XT
010 247
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT
041 090
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT
041 091
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT
041 092
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT
041 093
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVne g> EX T
041 094
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVne g>> EX T
041 095
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVNG > EX T
041 072
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVNG >> EX T
041 073
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVre f> EX T
007 036
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVre f>> EX T
007 037
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Block. tVref>>> E XT
010 248
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tVre f< EX T
007 039
0: No
8-90
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
V<>: Blocking tVre f<< EX T
007 046
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Block. tVre f<<< E XT
010 249
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

041 032
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

041 033
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

041 030
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
V<>: Starting V>>

0: No
[spacer]
041 031
V<>: Starting V>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-359)
V<>: Starting V>/ >> C( -A)

0: No
[spacer]
042 004
V<>: Starting V>/ >> B(-C )

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-359)
V<>: Starting V>/ >> A(-B)

0: No
[spacer]
042 003
V<>: Not ready

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-359)
V<>: Ready
0: No
[spacer]
040 066
041 096
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
V<>: Starting V>>>

0: No
010 231
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V> 3-pol e

0: No
[spacer]
041 097
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
V<>: Starting V>> 3 -pole
010 226
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V>>> 3 -pole

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

041 035
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
V<>: tV>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
041 034
V<>: tV>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
V<>: tV> elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
010 232
010 233
Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
V<>: tV> 3-pole elaps e d

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
041 098
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)
8-91
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
V<>: tV>> 3- pole e laps e d

0: No
010 227
Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-362)

Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
[spacer]
V<>: tV>>> 3- pole e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
010 235
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)

042 005
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

010 228
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

010 236
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)

041 041
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

041 042
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: tV<<< elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: tV<< elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
041 099
V<>: tV< elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Starting V<<< 3 -pole

0: No
[spacer]
041 037
V<>: Starting V<< 3 -pole

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Starting V< 3-pol e

0: No
[spacer]
041 040
V<>: Starting V<<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Starting V<<

0: No
[spacer]
041 039
V<>: Starting V<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Starting V</ << C( -A)

0: No
[spacer]
041 038
V<>: Starting V</ << B(-C )

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-363)
V<>: Starting V</ << A(-B)

0: No
[spacer]
010 234
010 237
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
V<>: tV< elaps . transient

0: No
042 023
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< elap se d t rans .

0: No
042 025
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< elap s.transien

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
V<>: tV</ <</<<< el .t rans

0: No
8-92
010 238
042 007
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Logic Diagram
V<>: tV< 3-pole elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
042 006
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: tV<< 3- pole e laps e d
010 229
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< 3- pole e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
010 239
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
V<>: tV< 3p elaps . tr ans.

0: No
042 024
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< 3p e laps . tr ans

0: No
010 230
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< 3p e laps .t rans

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)

011 133
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)

042 010
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)

042 011
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)

042 012
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)

042 013
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Starting Vpos <

0: No
[spacer]
011 132
V<>: tVp os>> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: tVp os> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
041 111
V<>: Starting Vpos >>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
V<>: Starting Vpos >

0: No
[spacer]
011 134
V<>: Fault V<<< 3 -pol e

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Fault V<< 3 -pol e

0: No
[spacer]
041 112
V<>: Fault V< 3 -pol e

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-364)
V<>: Fault V<<<

0: No
[spacer]
041 110
V<>: Fault V<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-365)
V<>: Fault V<

0: No
[spacer]
010 240
042 014
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Starting Vpos <<

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
042 015
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
8-93
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
042 020
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)

042 021
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)

042 022
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)

041 044
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)

042 008
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)

041 045
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)

041 046
Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-370)

007 051
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)

007 052
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)

010 241
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
V<>: tVref> elap se d

0: No
8-94
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-369)
V<>: Starting Vref>>>

0: No
[spacer]
042 019
V<>: Starting Vref>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Starting Vref>

0: No
[spacer]
041 114
V<>: tVNG>> e lapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: tVNG> e lapse d

0: No
[spacer]
041 113
V<>: Starting VNG>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Starting VNG>

0: No
[spacer]
042 018
V<>: tVneg>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: tVneg> elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
042 027
V<>: Starting Vne g>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Starting Vne g>

0: No
[spacer]
042 017
V<>: Fault Vpos<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: Fault Vpos<

0: No
[spacer]
042 026
V<>: tVp os</<< e lap.t r ans

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-368)
V<>: tVp os<< elaps .t r ans .

0: No
[spacer]
042 016
V<>: tVp os<< elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
V<>: tVp os< elaps . t rans.

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
V<>: tVp os< elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Max
007 047
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
007 055
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)

007 056
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)

010 243
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)

007 053
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: tVref<< elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
V<>: tVref< elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
010 242
V<>: Starting Vref<<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-371)
V<>: Starting Vref<<

0: No
[spacer]
007 048
V<>: Starting Vref<

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
V<>: tVref>>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
V<>: tVref>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Max
007 054
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: tVref<<< elapse d
010 244
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: tVref< elaps. trans.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)

007 063
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)

007 061
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: Fault Vr ef<<

0: No
[spacer]
010 245
V<>: Fault Vr ef<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: tVref</<</ <<< e l.t r.

0: No
[spacer]
007 060
V<>: tVref<<< elaps.tr ans

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: tVref<< elaps.tr ans.

0: No
[spacer]
007 057
007 062
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
V<>: Fault Vr ef<<<

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
011 135
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-372)
8-95
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : R es e t me as. vals EXT

Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
006 075
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Blocking f1 E XT
042 103
0: No
[spacer]
042 104
0: No
[spacer]
042 105
0: No
[spacer]
042 106
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
042 107
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

042 108
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

042 109
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

042 110
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)
f<> : Trip signal f1

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-375)
f<> : De lta t1 e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
042 102
f<> : De lta f1 t rigge red

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-373)
f<> : S tarting f1/df1

0: No
[spacer]
042 140
f<> : S tarting f1
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-373)
f<> : Blocked b y V<

0: No
[spacer]
042 101
f<> : Not ready

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-373)
f<> : R ead y
0: No
[spacer]
042 100
f<> : S tarting f2
042 111
Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-378)

042 115
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f2/df2
042 116
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : De lta f2 t rigge red
042 117
0: No
[spacer]
042 118
0: No
8-96
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 119
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f3
042 123
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f3 /df3
042 124
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : De lta f3 t ri gge red
042 125
0: No
[spacer]
042 126
0: No
[spacer]
042 127
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f4
042 131
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f4 /df4
042 132
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : De lta f4 t ri gge red
042 133
0: No
[spacer]
042 134
0: No
[spacer]
042 135
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-97
P437
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
P<>: Blocking tP> EX T
035 082
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tP>> EX T
035 083
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tQ> EXT
035 084
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tQ>> EXT
035 085
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tP< EX T
035 050
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tP<< EX T
035 051
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT
035 052
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT
035 053
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)

035 088
Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-383)

035 091
Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-383)

035 092
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)

035 095
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
P<>: S ignal Q> d elay ed

0: No
8-98
035 090
P<>: S tarting Q>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
P<>: S tarting Q>

0: No
[spacer]
035 087
P<>: T rip s ignal P>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
P<>: T rip s ignal P>

0: No
[spacer]
035 089
P<>: S ignal P>> de laye d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-300, (p. 3-382)
P<>: S ignal P> de lay e d

0: No
[spacer]
035 086
P<>: S tarting P>>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-298, (p. 3-380)
P<>: S tarting P>

0: No
[spacer]
036 250
035 093
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

035 062
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

035 178
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

035 057
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

035 063
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)

035 058
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)

035 064
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)

035 059
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)

035 065
Fig. 3-305, (p. 3-389)

035 066
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: S tarting Q<<

0: No
[spacer]
035 056
P<>: S tarting Q<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
P<>: T rip s ig. P<< tr ans .

0: No
[spacer]
035 061
P<>: T rip s ignal P< trans

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
P<>: T rip s ignal P<<

0: No
[spacer]
035 055
P<>: T rip s ignal P<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
P<>: Fault P<<

0: No
[spacer]
035 060
P<>: Fault P<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-304, (p. 3-387)
P<>: t P</tP<< el aps.tr ans

0: No
[spacer]
035 054
P<>: t P<< elapse d trans.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-303, (p. 3-385)
P<>: t P< elaps e d trans.

0: No
[spacer]
035 097
P<>: S ignal P<< de laye d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-303, (p. 3-385)
P<>: S ignal P< de lay e d

0: No
[spacer]
035 094
P<>: S tarting P<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-302, (p. 3-384)
P<>: S tarting P<

0: No
[spacer]
035 096
P<>: T rip s ignal Q>>

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
P<>: T rip s ignal Q>

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
P<>: S ignal Q>> delay ed

0: No
[spacer]
Max
035 010
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: S ignal Q< delay ed

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
035 067
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
8-99
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)

035 155
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)

035 176
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)

035 156
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)

035 177
Fig. 3-308, (p. 3-393)

035 181
Fig. 3-310, (p. 3-395)

035 191
Fig. 3-310, (p. 3-395)

035 193
Fig. 3-311, (p. 3-395)
P<>: Direction Q back w.

0: No
8-100
035 049
P<>: Direction Q for w.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: Direction P bac kw.

0: No
[spacer]
035 069
P<>: Direction P forw.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: T rip s ig. Q<< t rans.

0: No
[spacer]
035 179
P<>: T rip s ig. Q< t rans.

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: T rip s ignal Q<<

0: No
[spacer]
035 016
P<>: T rip s ignal Q<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: Fault Q<<

0: No
[spacer]
035 068
P<>: Fault Q<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-307, (p. 3-391)
P<>: t Q</t Q<< elaps. trans

0: No
[spacer]
035 011
P<>: t Q<< elaps ed t rans.

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
P<>: t Q< elaps ed t rans.

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
P<>: S ignal Q<< delay ed

0: No
[spacer]
Max
035 194
Fig. 3-311, (p. 3-395)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: Enable EXT
038 041
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF: Disable EXT
038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF: Blocking EXT
038 058
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tart e nable E X T
038 209
1: Yes
[spacer]
CBF: S tart 3p EXT
038 205
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tarting trig. EX T
038 016
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: C B f aulty EX T
038 234
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: Ex t./ us er enabled

1: Yes
[spacer]
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
CBF: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
038 040
040 055
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
CBF: R eady
038 009
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: Not r e ady

1: Yes
[spacer]
040 025
Fig. 3-313, (p. 3-397)
CBF: S tart A EXT
038 206
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tart B EXT
038 207
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tart C EXT
038 208
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: C B p os . implausi ble

0: No
[spacer]
038 230
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
CBF: C urre nt f low B

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-315, (p. 3-399)
CBF: C urre nt f low A

0: No
[spacer]
038 210
038 231
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
CBF: C urre nt f low C

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
038 232
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
8-101
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: C urre nt f low Phx

0: No
[spacer]
Max
038 233
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
CBF: C urre nt f low N

0: No
038 235
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
[spacer]
Signal that the residual current is greater than the set value CBF: IN<.
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup 3p
038 211
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup A
0: No
[spacer]
038 212
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
CBF: S tartup B
038 213
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup C
038 214
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)

038 221
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)

038 222
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)

038 223
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)

038 224
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)

036 017
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: S tarting
0: No
8-102
038 220
CBF: C B f ailure
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: T r ip comm and t 2

0: No
[spacer]
038 219
CBF: T r ip comm and t 1, C

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: T r ip comm and t 1, B

0: No
[spacer]
038 218
CBF: T r ip comm and t 1, A

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: T r ip comm and t 1

0: No
[spacer]
038 217
CBF: T r ip s ignal t2
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , C
0: No
[spacer]
038 216
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , B
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-317, (p. 3-402)
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , A
0: No
[spacer]
038 215
038 021
Fig. 3-319, (p. 3-404)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Fig. 3-320, (p. 3-404)

038 226
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)

038 227
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)
CBF: C Bs ync.superv B ope n

0: No
[spacer]
038 225
CBF: C Bs ync.superv A ope n

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-319, (p. 3-404)
CBF: T r ip Sig C Bsync.super

0: No
[spacer]
040 026
CBF: Fault behi nd CB

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
CBF: T r ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
038 228
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)
CBF: C Bs ync.superv C ope n

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
038 229
Fig. 3-321, (p. 3-405)
8-103
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: R e se t m eas .val . E XT

Circuit breaker
005 247
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: Blocking EXT
044 128
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-328, (p. 3-414)

044 135
Fig. 3-327, (p. 3-413)
CBM: S ig. R em . No .C B op.<

0: No
[spacer]
044 199
CBM: S ig. No. CB op. >

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-322, (p. 3-406)
CBM: Blocked
0: No
[spacer]
044 130
CBM: S ignal I trip>
044 136
Fig. 3-326, (p. 3-413)

044 137
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: S ignal I trip**2>
044 138
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: S ignal I *t>
044 139
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C ycle running A
044 205
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C ycle running B
044 206
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C ycle running C
044 207
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: t max > A
044 177
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: t max > B
044 178
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: t max > C
044 179
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C urr. flow e nded A
044 201
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C urr. flow e nded B
044 202
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: C urr. flow e nded C
044 203
0: No
8-104
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
CBM: S e tting e rr or C BM
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 204
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-105
P437
Parameter
Default
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : Enabled
0: No
040 074
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)

Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI> elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
040 228
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)

040 229
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)

040 230
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)

040 231
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)

040 168
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)

040 169
Fig. 3-331, (p. 3-418)

042 152
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)

042 153
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
LIMIT : tVref< e lapse d

0: No
8-106
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
LIMIT : tVref>> e lapse d

0: No
[spacer]
040 227
LIMIT : tVref> e lapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
LIMIT : tVNG>> elapse d

0: No
[spacer]
040 226
LIMIT : tVNG> e lapsed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
LIMIT : tVPP<< e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 225
LIMIT : tVPP< e laps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-330, (p. 3-417)
LIMIT : tVPP>> e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 224
LIMIT : tVPP> e laps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
LIMIT : tVPG<< elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 223
LIMIT : tVPG< e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
LIMIT : tVPG>> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 222
LIMIT : tVPG> e laps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
LIMIT : tI<< elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
040 221
LIMIT : tI< elaps e d

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-329, (p. 3-416)
LIMIT : tI>> elap se d

0: No
[spacer]
040 220
042 154
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 186
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)

040 187
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)

040 170
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 171
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 172
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 173
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 174
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 175
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

040 176
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)
LIMIT : tT << elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : tT < elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 185
LIMIT : St arting T <<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : St arting T <

0: No
[spacer]
040 184
LIMIT : tT >> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : tT > elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 183
LIMIT : St arting T >>

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : St arting T >

0: No
[spacer]
040 182
LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : tIDC,lin< elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
040 181
LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin<<

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-332, (p. 3-419)
LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin<

0: No
[spacer]
040 180
LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-333, (p. 3-420)
LIMIT : tIDC,lin> elaps ed

0: No
[spacer]
042 155
LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin>>

0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin>

0: No
[spacer]
Unit
LIMIT : tVref<< e lapse d

0: No
[spacer]
Max
LIMIT : tIPxx trigge re d
040 177
Fig. 3-334, (p. 3-421)

221 232
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPGxx t rigger e d
221 233
0: Not triggered
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-107
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LIMIT : tVPPxx t rigger ed
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
221 234
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVNGxx t riggere d
221 235
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVrefx x trigge re d
221 237
0: Not triggered
8-108
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Input 01 EXT
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 000
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 02 EXT
034 001
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 03 EXT
034 002
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 04 EXT
034 003
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 05 EXT
034 004
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 06 EXT
034 005
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 07 EXT
034 006
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 08 EXT
034 007
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 09 EXT
034 008
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 10 EXT
034 009
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 11 EXT
034 010
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 12 EXT
034 011
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 13 EXT
034 012
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 14 EXT
034 013
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 15 EXT
034 014
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT
034 015
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 17 EXT
034 086
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 18 EXT
034 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 19 EXT
034 088
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-109
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 20 EXT
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 21 EXT
034 090
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 22 EXT
034 091
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 23 EXT
034 092
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 24 EXT
034 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 25 EXT
034 094
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 26 EXT
034 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 27 EXT
034 096
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 28 EXT
034 097
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 29 EXT
034 098
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 30 EXT
034 099
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 31 EXT
034 100
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 32 EXT
034 101
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 33 EXT
034 102
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 34 EXT
034 103
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 35 EXT
034 104
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 36 EXT
034 105
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 37 EXT
034 106
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 38 EXT
034 107
0: No
8-110
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOGIC: Input 39 EXT
034 108
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 40 EXT
034 109
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 1 EXT
034 051
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 2 EXT
034 052
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 3 EXT
034 053
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 4 EXT
034 054
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 5 EXT
034 055
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 6 EXT
034 056
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 7 EXT
034 057
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 8 EXT
034 058
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 1 E XT
034 059
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 060
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 061
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 062
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 063
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 064
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 065
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 066
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: 1 has been s et

0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
034 067
Fig. 3-335, (p. 3-423)
8-111
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 068
0: No
[spacer]
034 069
0: No
[spacer]
034 070
0: No
[spacer]
034 071
0: No
[spacer]
034 072
0: No
[spacer]
034 073
0: No
[spacer]
034 074
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 1 se t e xternally
0: No
[spacer]
034 075
Fig. 3-335, (p. 3-423)
034 076
0: No
[spacer]
034 077
0: No
[spacer]
034 078
0: No
[spacer]
034 079
0: No
[spacer]
034 080
0: No
[spacer]
034 081
0: No
[spacer]
034 082
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
042 032
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
LOGIC: Output 01 (t)

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
LOGIC: Output 01
0: No
[spacer]
034 046
LOGIC: Output 02
042 033
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)

042 034
0: No
8-112
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 2 (t)
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 3
042 036
0: No
[spacer]
042 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 4
042 038
0: No
[spacer]
042 039
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 5
042 040
0: No
[spacer]
042 041
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 6
042 042
0: No
[spacer]
042 043
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 7
042 044
0: No
[spacer]
042 045
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 8
042 046
0: No
[spacer]
042 047
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 9
042 048
0: No
[spacer]
042 049
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1 0
042 050
0: No
[spacer]
042 051
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1 1
042 052
0: No
[spacer]
042 053
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-113
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 12
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 054
0: No
[spacer]
042 055
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 13
042 056
0: No
[spacer]
042 057
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 14
042 058
0: No
[spacer]
042 059
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 15
042 060
0: No
[spacer]
042 061
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 16
042 062
0: No
[spacer]
042 063
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 17
042 064
0: No
[spacer]
042 065
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 18
042 066
0: No
[spacer]
042 067
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 19
042 068
0: No
[spacer]
042 069
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 20
042 070
0: No
[spacer]
042 071
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 21
042 072
0: No
8-114
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 073
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 2
042 074
0: No
[spacer]
042 075
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 3
042 076
0: No
[spacer]
042 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 4
042 078
0: No
[spacer]
042 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 5
042 080
0: No
[spacer]
042 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 6
042 082
0: No
[spacer]
042 083
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 7
042 084
0: No
[spacer]
042 085
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 8
042 086
0: No
[spacer]
042 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 9
042 088
0: No
[spacer]
042 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 3 0
042 090
0: No
[spacer]
042 091
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-115
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 31
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 092
0: No
[spacer]
042 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 32
042 094
0: No
[spacer]
042 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 33
042 180
0: No
[spacer]
042 181
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 34
042 182
0: No
[spacer]
042 183
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 35
042 184
0: No
[spacer]
042 185
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 36
042 186
0: No
[spacer]
042 187
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 37
042 188
0: No
[spacer]
042 189
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 38
042 190
0: No
[spacer]
042 191
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 39
042 192
0: No
[spacer]
042 193
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 40
042 194
0: No
8-116
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 195
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 1
042 196
0: No
[spacer]
042 197
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 2
042 198
0: No
[spacer]
042 199
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 3
042 200
0: No
[spacer]
042 201
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 4
042 202
0: No
[spacer]
042 203
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 5
042 204
0: No
[spacer]
042 205
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 6
042 206
0: No
[spacer]
042 207
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 7
042 208
0: No
[spacer]
042 209
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 8
042 210
0: No
[spacer]
042 211
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 9
042 212
0: No
[spacer]
042 213
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-117
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 50
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 214
0: No
[spacer]
042 215
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 51
042 216
0: No
[spacer]
042 217
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 52
042 218
0: No
[spacer]
042 219
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 53
042 220
0: No
[spacer]
042 221
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 54
042 222
0: No
[spacer]
042 223
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 55
042 224
0: No
[spacer]
042 225
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 56
042 226
0: No
[spacer]
042 227
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 57
042 228
0: No
[spacer]
042 229
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 58
042 230
0: No
[spacer]
042 231
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 59
042 232
0: No
8-118
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 233
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 0
042 234
0: No
[spacer]
042 235
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 1
042 236
0: No
[spacer]
042 237
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 2
042 238
0: No
[spacer]
042 239
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 3
042 240
0: No
[spacer]
042 241
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 4
042 242
0: No
[spacer]
042 243
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 5
047 128
0: No
[spacer]
047 129
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 6
047 002
0: No
[spacer]
047 003
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 7
047 004
0: No
[spacer]
047 005
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 8
047 006
0: No
[spacer]
047 007
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-119
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 69
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 008
0: No
[spacer]
047 009
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 70
047 010
0: No
[spacer]
047 011
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 71
047 012
0: No
[spacer]
047 013
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 72
047 014
0: No
[spacer]
047 015
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 73
047 016
0: No
[spacer]
047 017
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 74
047 018
0: No
[spacer]
047 019
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 75
047 020
0: No
[spacer]
047 021
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 76
047 022
0: No
[spacer]
047 023
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 77
047 024
0: No
[spacer]
047 025
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 78
047 026
0: No
8-120
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 027
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 7 9
047 028
0: No
[spacer]
047 029
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 0
047 030
0: No
[spacer]
047 031
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 1
047 032
0: No
[spacer]
047 033
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 2
047 034
0: No
[spacer]
047 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 3
047 036
0: No
[spacer]
047 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 4
047 038
0: No
[spacer]
047 039
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 5
047 040
0: No
[spacer]
047 041
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 6
047 042
0: No
[spacer]
047 043
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 7
047 044
0: No
[spacer]
047 045
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-121
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 88
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 046
0: No
[spacer]
047 047
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 89
047 048
0: No
[spacer]
047 049
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 90
047 050
0: No
[spacer]
047 051
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 91
047 052
0: No
[spacer]
047 053
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 92
047 054
0: No
[spacer]
047 055
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 93
047 056
0: No
[spacer]
047 057
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 94
047 058
0: No
[spacer]
047 059
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 95
047 060
0: No
[spacer]
047 061
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 96
047 062
0: No
[spacer]
047 063
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 97
047 064
0: No
8-122
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 065
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9 8
047 066
0: No
[spacer]
047 067
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9 9
047 068
0: No
[spacer]
047 069
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 0
047 070
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 0 ( t )
047 071
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 1
047 072
0: No
[spacer]
047 073
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 2
047 074
0: No
[spacer]
047 075
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 3
047 076
0: No
[spacer]
047 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 4
047 078
0: No
[spacer]
047 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 5
047 080
0: No
[spacer]
047 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 6
047 082
0: No
[spacer]
047 083
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-123
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LOGIC: Output107
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 084
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output107 ( t )
047 085
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output108
047 086
0: No
[spacer]
047 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output109
047 088
0: No
[spacer]
047 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output110
047 090
0: No
[spacer]
047 091
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output111
047 092
0: No
[spacer]
047 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output112
047 094
0: No
[spacer]
047 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output113
047 096
0: No
[spacer]
047 097
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output114
047 098
0: No
[spacer]
047 099
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output115
047 100
0: No
[spacer]
047 101
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output116
047 102
0: No
8-124
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 103
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 7
047 104
0: No
[spacer]
047 105
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 8
047 106
0: No
[spacer]
047 107
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 9
047 108
0: No
[spacer]
047 109
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 0
047 110
0: No
[spacer]
047 111
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 1
047 112
0: No
[spacer]
047 113
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 2
047 114
0: No
[spacer]
047 115
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 3
047 116
0: No
[spacer]
047 117
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 4
047 118
0: No
[spacer]
047 119
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 5
047 120
0: No
[spacer]
047 121
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-125
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOGIC: Output126
047 122
0: No
[spacer]
047 123
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output127
047 124
0: No
[spacer]
047 125
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output128
047 126
0: No
[spacer]
047 127
0: No
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Enable d

0: No
[spacer]
052 032
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)
LOG_2: Out put 1 (t )

0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)
LOG_2: Out put 1

0: No
[spacer]
011 138
LOG_2: Out put 2
052 033
Fig. 3-337, (p. 3-425)

052 034
0: No
[spacer]
052 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Out put 3
052 036
0: No
[spacer]
052 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Out put 4
052 038
0: No
[spacer]
052 039
0: No
8-126
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COUNT : Se t counte r 1 E X T
217 130
0: No
[spacer]
217 085
0: No
[spacer]
217 086
0: No
[spacer]
217 087
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Transmit count s E XT
217 009
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Re s e t EX T
217 004
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Enab led
217 001
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
COUNT : Transmit count s
217 010
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
COUNT : Re s e t
217 005
0: No
[spacer]
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
COUNT : Warnin g count 1
217 191
0: No
[spacer]
217 192
0: No
[spacer]
217 193
0: No
[spacer]
217 194
0: No
[spacer]
8.1.2
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
Control and Testing

Parameter
Default
Device
Address
Min
Max
DVICE: S e rvice info 03 1 08 0
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 080
0: No
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-127
P437
Parameter
Default
Local control panel
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Param . change enabl.
003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st
003 180
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t
003 184
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as starting.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig. end
003 186
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-18)
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as ending.

Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st

[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t

0: don't execute
103 180
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-20)
103 184
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer]
COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig. end

0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-128
103 186
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-20)
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COMM 3: Rse t No.tlg.e rr .US ER
Logic Diagram
120 037
0: don't execute
[spacer]
COMM 4: Rse t No.tlg.e rr .US ER
122 037
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting counter for number of telegram errors.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Se nd s ignal for t es t
120 050
0: None
[spacer]
COMM 3: Log. s tat e for t est
120 051
1: 1
[spacer]
COMM 3: Se nd s ignal , te st
120 053
0: don't execute
[spacer]
COMM 3: Loop back se nd

170
[spacer]
120 055
255
COMM 4: Loop back se nd

170
122 055
255
[spacer]
Setting a bit pattern consisting of 3 bits.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Loop back t est
120 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
COMM 4: Loop back t est
122 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carrying out a loop back test with the PCOMM interface.
[spacer]
COMM 3: Hold time for te s t

10
[spacer]
600
COMM 4: Hold time for te s t

10
[spacer]
120 052
122 052
600
Selecting the hold time (in seconds) for the functional testing.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-129
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
COMM 4: Se nd s ignal for t es t
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 050
0: None
[spacer]
COMM 4: Log. s tat e for t est
122 051
1: 1
[spacer]
COMM 4: Se nd s ignal , te st
122 053
0: don't execute
8-130
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSS E: Re s et s tat isti cs
105 171
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
[spacer]
GSS E: Enr oll. I EDs fl ags L

Not measured
105 160
65535
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
[spacer]
GSS E: Enr oll. I EDs fl ags H

Not measured
105 161
65535
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32).
[spacer]
GSS E: T x m es s age c ounter

Not measured
105 162
65535
[spacer]
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSS E: Re s et s tat isti cs.
[spacer]
GSS E: Rx m es s age c ounter

Not measured
105 163
65535
[spacer]
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

[spacer]
GSS E: No. bin.s tate c hang.

Not measured
105 164
65535
[spacer]
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

[spacer]
GSS E: T x last s equence

Not measured
105 165
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
GSS E: T x last me ssage

Not measured
105 166
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
GSS E: No. re je ct . mes sage s

Not measured
[spacer]
105 167
65535
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by G SS E: Res et statistics.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-131
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSS E: IE D vie w s ele ct ion
105 170
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to
be displayed.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D receiv. me ssages

Not measured
65535
[spacer]
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D R x las t se quenc e

Not measured
105 172
105 173
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D R x las t me ss age

Not measured
105 174
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D m iss ed me s s age s

Not measured
105 175
65535
[spacer]
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by GS SE : Re se t statistics.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D m iss ed change s

Not measured
105 176
65535
[spacer]
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by GS SE : Re se t statistics.
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D t ime-out s
Not measured
[spacer]
8-132
105 177
65535
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed.
This counter is reset by GS SE : Res e t st atisti cs.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
IEC: Se l.s pontan.si g.t est
104 245

[spacer]
IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig.s tar t
104 246
0: don't execute
[spacer]
IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig. end
104 247
0: don't execute
[spacer]
IEC: Se l. pos . d ev .t es t
104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
IEC: Tes t pos ition DEV
104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Measured data input MEASI: Rs t. temp. T max US ER
003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to

updated measured values.
Parameter
Default
Binary and analog

output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OUTP: Re s e t latch. US ER
021 009
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer]
OUTP: Re lay assign. f.t e st
003 042
Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-51)
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer]
OUTP: Re lay te st
003 043
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-51)
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d time f or tes t.
[spacer]
OUTP: Hold- tim e for t e st

1
[spacer]
003 044
10
Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-51)
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-133
P437
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MEASO: Rese t output USE R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-134
Logic Diagram
037 116
Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-53)
Resetting the measured data output function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 002
Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-107)
Reset of the following memories:
All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
MAIN: Re s e t indicat. USE R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MAIN: General re s et USER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Unit
021 010
Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-107)
Reset of the following displays:
LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rs e t .lat ch.t rip US ER

0: don't execute
021 005
Fig. 3-318, (p. 3-403)
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. cUS ER

0: don't execute
003 007
Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-95)

Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t IP,max,s t .USER

0: don't execute
003 033
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t m eas .v. en.USE R

0: don't execute
003 032
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
[spacer]
MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
005 253
005 254
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107)
Group of resetting commands.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-135
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. US ER
003 040
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel.

Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
[spacer]
MAIN: En.m an.clos .cmd.USE R
003 105
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the local control panel
(enables manual breaker close operations).
[spacer]
MAIN: Man.trip cmd. A US E R
003 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
MAIN: Man.trip cmd. B USE R
003 018
0: don't execute
[spacer]
MAIN: Man.trip cmd. C US E R
003 019
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A phase-selective trip command is issued from the local control panel for
100 ms.
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. US ER

0: don't execute
018 033
Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-95)
[spacer]
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time.
[spacer]
MAIN: Sof t War m re st art
003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart of the software is carried out. The device functions as it does
when the power supply is turned on, except that no hardware tests are carried
out.
[spacer]
MAIN: Warm re star t
010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer]
MAIN: Sof t Cold re star t
000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-136
A cold restart of the software is carried out. This means that all settings and
recordings are cleared, but no tests of the hardware are carried out during the
restart. Parameter values used by the P437 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P437 is blocked after a cold restart.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Cold rest art
009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P437 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P437 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
OP_R C: Res e t record. USE R
100 001
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-116)
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MT _RC: Res et record. USE R
003 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-117)
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.

Parameter
Default
Overload recording
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
OL_RC: R e s et rec ord. US E R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Max
100 003
Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-121)
Reset of the overload memory.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-137
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: Trigg er US E R
003 041
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer]
FT_RC: Res et record. USE R
003 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-132)
Reset of the following memories:
LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
PSB: R e se t counters
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 029
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-138
Reset of the counters that are used for the enhanced counting-based tripping.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Enab le USE R

0: don't execute
003 132
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
PSIG: Dis able US ER

0: don't execute
003 131
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
PSIG: Tes t telecom. USE R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
[spacer]
PSIG: Tes t telecom. 1 US ER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
015 027
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)

015 028
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)

0: don't execute
[spacer]
015 009
015 029
Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-239)
A channel-selective send signal is issued for 500 ms.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-139
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: Enable US ER
0: don't execute
003 134
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
ARC: Disable USER

0: don't execute
003 133
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
ARC: T est- HS R A USE R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
A test HSR is triggered in phase A.
[spacer]
ARC: T est- HS R B USE R

0: don't execute
[spacer]
A test HSR is triggered in phase B.
[spacer]
ARC: T est- HS R C USE R

0: don't execute
011 063
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
011 064
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
011 065
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
[spacer]
A single pole test HSR is triggered with phase selectivity.
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R A-B- C US ER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
[spacer]
ARC: R ese t counte rs US ER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-140
011 066
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
003 005
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
The ARC counters are reset.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ASC: Enab le USER

0: don't execute
003 136
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
ASC: Disable USER

0: don't execute
003 135
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
ASC: AR close re qu. US E R

0: don't execute
008 238
Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer]
ASC: MC clos e r e qu. USE R

0: don't execute
018 004
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t AR clos e r .US ER

0: don't execute
008 237
Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t M C clos e r US ER
0: don't execute
018 005
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer]
ASC: R es et coun ter s US ER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
003 089
Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-289)
The ASC counters are reset.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-141
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: Enable USER
003 138
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
GFS C: Dis able US ER
003 137
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter
Default

signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: Enable US ER
003 140
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer]
GSCSG: Disab le USER
003 139
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer]
GSCSG: T es t telecom. USE R
023 086
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-322)
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.

Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
8-142
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
THER M : R e s et re pli ca USER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Address
022 061
Fig. 3-278, (p. 3-358)
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : R es e t me as.val. US E R
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
003 080
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: M ax. frequ. for

f> and f<>: Min. fre qu. for f<.
Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: Enable US ER
0: don't execute
003 016
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
CBF: Disable USER

0: don't execute
[spacer]
003 015
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-143
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: I nitialize value s

Circuit breaker
003 011
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Values are initialized to trigger circuit breaker condition monitoring.
[spacer]
CBM: Blocking USER
022 150
0: No
Fig. 3-328, (p. 3-414)
[spacer]
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection

injection testing.
[spacer]
CBM: R e se t m eas .val . USER
003 013
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting circuit breaker condition monitoring
[spacer]
CBM: S e t No. CB oper. A

Blocked
[spacer]
[spacer]
Set the number of CB operations.
[spacer]
CBM: S e t remain. CB op. A

Blocked
[spacer]
Set the remaining CB operations.
[spacer]
CBM: S e t Itrip A
Blocked
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

022 135
65000
022 136
65000
022 137
65000
Inom,CB
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

022 138
65000
Inom,CB
022 139
65000
Inom,CB
022 140
65000
Inom,CB** Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

2
CBM: S e t Itrip** 2 B
Blocked
8-144
022 134
CBM: S e t Itrip** 2 A
Blocked
[spacer]
65000
CBM: S e t Itrip C
Blocked
[spacer]
022 133
CBM: S e t Itrip B
Blocked
[spacer]
65000
CBM: S e t remain. CB op. C

Blocked
[spacer]
022 132
CBM: S e t remain. CB op. B

Blocked
[spacer]
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: S e t No. CB oper. C

Blocked
[spacer]
65000
CBM: S e t No. CB oper. B

Blocked
[spacer]
022 131
022 141
65000
Inom,CB**
2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
022 142
65000
Inom,CB**
2
022 143
0.0
4000.0
kAs
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

022 144
0.0
4000.0
kAs
CBM: S e t I*t C
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
CBM: S e t I*t B
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
CBM: S e t I*t A
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
CBM: S e t Itrip **2 C

Blocked
[spacer]
Address
022 145
0.0
4000.0
kAs
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1

0: don't execute
[spacer]
034 038
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
LOGIC: Trigger 2
034 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 3
034 040
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 4
034 041
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 5
034 042
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 6
034 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 7
034 044
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 8
0: don't execute
[spacer]
034 045
Fig. 3-336, (p. 3-424)
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-145
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
COUNT : Transm it count s USE R
217 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer]
COUNT : Re s e t USE R
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
217 003
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8.1.3
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
Count reset.
Operating Data Recording

Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OP_R C: Ope rat. data re cor d.

0
[spacer]
Address
003 024
1000
Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-116)
Point of entry into the operating data log.

Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
8-146
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MT _RC: Mon. s ignal rec ord.

0
[spacer]
Address
003 001
30
Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-117)
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
8.2
Events
8.2.1
Event Counters
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 042
65535
COMM 4: No. t ele gram er ror s

0
[spacer]
Min
COMM 3: No. t ele gram er ror s

0
[spacer]
Address
122 042
65535
Number of corrupted telegrams.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-147
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: No. g ene ral s tart .
004 000
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer]
MAIN: No. g en.tri p cmds . 1
Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-96)
004 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 1.
[spacer]
MAIN: No. t rip cmds. 1, A
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
005 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
MAIN: No. t rip cmds. 1, B
005 007
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
MAIN: No. t rip cmds. 1, C
005 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 1 per phase.
[spacer]
MAIN: No. g en.tri p cmds . 2
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
009 050
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 2.
[spacer]
MAIN: No. f inal t rip c mds .
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
004 005
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of final trip commands.
[spacer]
MAIN: No. close c ommands
Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
009 055
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of close commands.
[spacer]
MAIN: No.overfl.act.e n. out
009 090
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer]
MAIN: No.overfl.act.e n. inp
009 091
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input
was exceeded.
8-148
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
MAIN: No.ov/f l.re ac.e n.out
009 092
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
[spacer]
MAIN: No.ov/f l.re ac.e n.inp
009 093
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OP_R C: No. oper. data sig.

0
[spacer]
Address
100 002
1000
Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-116)
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.

Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MT _RC: No. m onit. signals

0
[spacer]
Address
004 019
30
Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-117)
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.

Parameter
Default
Overload recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OL_RC: No. overload

0
[spacer]
Address
004 101
9999
Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-120)
Number of overload events.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-149
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Unit
004 020
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer]
FT_RC: No. sys te m dis t urb.

0
9999
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
004 010
9999
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
Number of system disturbances.

Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: No. of f aults

0
[spacer]
Max
Address
Min
Max
PSB: No. s tab . PSwi ng
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 025
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of stable power swing trajectories.
[spacer]
PSB: No. OO S-S wi ng
006 026
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-150
Number of unstable power swings.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ARC: No. of HSR A
004 001
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
[spacer]
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase A.
[spacer]
ARC: No. of HSR B
004 002
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
[spacer]
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase B.
[spacer]
ARC: No. of HSR C
004 003
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
[spacer]
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase C.
[spacer]
ARC: No. of HSR A-B - C
004 004
0: don't execute
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
[spacer]
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
[spacer]
ARC: Num be r T DR
004 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-272)
Number of time-delay reclosures.

Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: No. R C aft. man.clos

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
[spacer]
ASC: No. clos e re que st s

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of close requests.
[spacer]
ASC: No. clos e re je ct ions

0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
004 009
Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-289)
009 033
Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-289)
009 034
Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-289)
Number of close rejections.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-151
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: No. of trip s ignals
009 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-308)
Number of trip signals.

Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: No. of CB ope r. A

Circuit breaker
0
[spacer]
65000
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: No. of CB ope r. B

0
[spacer]
008 011
008 012
65000
CBM: No. of CB ope r. C

0
008 013
65000
[spacer]
Number of mechanical switching operations made.
[spacer]
CBM: R e main. No. CB op. A

30000
[spacer]
8-152
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

008 015
65000
CBM: R e main. No. CB op. C

30000
[spacer]
65000
CBM: R e main. No. CB op. B

30000
[spacer]
008 014
008 016
65000
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear with

reference to the CB wear characteristic).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
8.2.2
Measured Event Data

Parameter
Default
Fault data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_DA: Fault d uration

Not measured
0.0
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Running t ime

Not measured
008 010
6500.0
Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-122)
004 021
0.00
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault t ype
65.00
Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-122)
010 198
....: Not measured

[spacer]
Display of the fault type. This value is determined from the starting signals of
the function group MAIN.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Me as . loop s ele ct e d
004 079
....: Not measured
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curre nt P prim

Not measured
25000
010 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curre nt P p.u.

Not measured
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
Display of the fault current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Flt.volt . PG/ P P prim

Not measured
0.0
2500.0
004 025
Inom
010 217
kV
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Flt.volt . PG/ P P p.u.

Not measured
0.000
004 026
3.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault loop angle P

Not measured
-180
[spacer]
Display of the fault angle.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u.

Not measured
[spacer]
0.00
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
004 024
180
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
004 049
100.00
Inom
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-153
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_DA: Fault curr. N pri m.

Not measured
010 216
25000
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault cur.N,par pr im

Not measured
[spacer]
25000
012 242
FT_DA: Fault curr.N,par p.u

Not measured
0.00
100.00
004 059
Inom
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current of the parallel line (as a primary quantity or
referred to IN,par,nom, respectively).
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault loop angle N

Not measured
-180
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault angle.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault react ., pr im.

Not measured
-320.00
004 048
180
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
004 029
320.00
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault react ance, se c.

Not measured
-320.00
320.00
004 028
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault im pedance , s e c

Not measured
0.00
320.00
004 023
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault locat. pe rce nt

Not measured
-320.00
320.00
004 027
Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-129)
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: Line reactance P S x.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault location

Not measured
[spacer]
8-154
-500.0
004 022
500.0
km
Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-129)
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
004 087
0.000
3.000
Vnom
ASC: Volt. se l. me as. loop

Not measured
[spacer]
Min
ASC: Voltage Vref

Not measured
[spacer]
Address
0.000
004 088
3.000
Vnom
ASC: Volt. m agn. diff.

Not measured
-3.000
004 091
3.000
Vnom
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop voltage

and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom. The display
only appears if ASC is operating.
[spacer]
ASC: Angle dif fe re nce

Not measured
-180.0
004 089
180.0
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Display of the angle difference between measured voltage and reference

voltage at the time of the close request (in degrees).
This display only appears when the automatic synchronism check function is
active.
[spacer]
ASC: Fre qu. dif fe re nce

Not measured
-5.00
004 090
5.00
Hz
Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Display of the frequency difference between measured voltage and reference

voltage at the time of the close request (in Hz). This display only appears when
the automatic synchronism check function is active.
Parameter
Default
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GFS C: Angle VNG/ IN

Not measured
[spacer]
Address
009 098
360
Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-307)
Angle between residual current and neutral-displacement voltage when triggers

IN> and VNG> are both operating.
This display only appears when the ground fault (short-circuit) protection
function is active.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-155
P437
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DTOC: Angle VNG/IN

Not measured
[spacer]
Address
009 004
360
Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-329)
Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : M ax. frequ. for f>

Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
Not measured
12.00
005 002
70.00
Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer]
f<> : M in. frequ. for f<

Not measured
[spacer]
8-156
12.00
005 001
70.00
Hz
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: I tr ip,p rim A

Circuit breaker
Not measured
[spacer]
65000
A
009 214
65000
A
009 047
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 048
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 049
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 051
0.0
6000.0
Inom,CB** Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

2
009 052
0.0
6000.0
Inom,CB**
2
CBM: I tr ip** 2 C
Not measured
009 053
0.0
6000.0
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Ruptured currents and their squared values.
[spacer]
CBM: Itr ip A
0
[spacer]
009 071
65000
Inom,CB
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: Itr ip B
0
[spacer]
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: I tr ip** 2 B
Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip** 2 A
Not measured
[spacer]
009 213
CBM: I tr ip C
Not measured
[spacer]
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: I tr ip B
Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip A
Not measured
[spacer]
65000
CBM: I tr ip,p rim C

Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip,p rim B

Not measured
[spacer]
009 212
009 073
65000
Inom,CB
CBM: Itr ip C
0
009 076
65000
Inom,CB
[spacer]
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer]
CBM: Itr ip **2 A

0
[spacer]
009 077
65000
Inom,CB** Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

2
CBM: Itr ip **2 B

0
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
009 078
65000
Inom,CB**
2
8-157
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBM: Itr ip **2 C

0
009 079
65000
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer]
CBM: I *t A
Not measured
[spacer]
60000
As
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)
CBM: I *t B
Not measured
[spacer]
009 061
009 062
60000
As
CBM: I *t C
Not measured
009 063
60000
As
[spacer]
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
[spacer]
CBM: I* t A
0.0
[spacer]
8-158
4000.0
kAs
Fig. 3-325, (p. 3-412)

009 088
0.0
4000.0
kAs
CBM: I* t C
0.0
[spacer]
0.0
CBM: I* t B
0.0
[spacer]
009 087
009 089
0.0
4000.0
kAs
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Overload data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OL_DA: Ove rload dur ation

Not measured
0.0
004 102
6500.0
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer]
OL_DA: S tatus THERM r e pl ic a

Not measured
250
Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-118)
004 147
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer]
OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HERM

Not measured
0.00
3.00
004 058
Inom
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THE RM

Not measured
-40
300
004 035
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer]
OL_DA: C oolant te mp. T HERM

Not measured
[spacer]
-40
215
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
004 036
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THE RM

Not measured
0.0
1000.0
004 148
min
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (time-to-trip).
[spacer]
OL_DA: Of fs et THERM r epl ic a

Not measured
[spacer]
-25000
25000
004 154
Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-119)
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-159
P437
8.2.3
Event Recording
Parameter
Default
Overload recording
8-160
Logic Diagram
033 020
Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-121)

033 021
033 022
9999
033 023
9999
033 024
9999
033 025
9999
033 026
9999
OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 8

0
[spacer]

0
[spacer]
Unit
9999

0
[spacer]

0
[spacer]
9999

0
[spacer]

0
[spacer]
Max

0
[spacer]
Min

0
[spacer]
Address
033 027
9999
Point of entry into the overload log.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
9999
033 003
9999
033 004
9999
033 005
9999
033 006
9999
FT_RC: Fault re cor ding 8

0
[spacer]
033 002

0
[spacer]
9999

0
[spacer]
033 001

0
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
9999

0
[spacer]
Unit
003 000

0
[spacer]
Max

0
[spacer]
Min

0
[spacer]
Address
033 007
9999
Point of entry into the fault log.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
8-161
P437
8-162
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9
IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator

This chapter lists all IEC 61850-specific settings, that are carried out with the
configuration tool IED Configurator.
The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree of the IED Configurator.
However, only those setting parameters are described that are mandatory for
establishing the IEC 61850 communication.
Further setting parameters are listed in the Settings chapter under the function
groups IEC, GOOSE, GSSE. A list of all available Logical Nodes can be found in a
separate document.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-1
P437
9.1
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator
Manage IED
The menu item Manage IED allows for establishing a connection between the
IED Configurator and the device.
The P437 features two memory banks one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via IED Configurator or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via IED Configurator
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the Switch Banks
button.
Parameter
Active Bank
SCL File ID
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item Manage IED).
SCL File Version
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item Manage IED).
Parameter
Inactive Bank
SCL File ID
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item Manage IED).
SCL File Version
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item Manage IED).
9-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.2
IED Details
The category IED Details contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
SCL Details
Parameter
Default Value
SCL File ID
PX437
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
SCL File Version
650.230
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
IED Details
Parameter
Address
Name
104 057
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Template Details
ICD Template
SCL Schema Version
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column Template Details only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-3
P437
9.3
Communications
The category Communications contains the general network-related settings.
Connected SubNetwork
Parameter
Default Value
Connected Sub-Network
NONE
Optional name available to identify the Ethernet network.

Access Point
AP1
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Address
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 001
Assigned IP address of the P437 for the server function in the system.
SubNet Mask
0.0.0.0
104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the subnetwork and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
104 011
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
General
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Media
Fibre
Network hardware provided as fiber optics (Fibre) or twisted pair copper wires
(Copper).
TCP Keepalive
5 seconds
Communication monitoring at TCP level.

Database Lock Timeout
2 minutes
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.4
SNTP
The category SNTP contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1
Client Operation
General Config
Parameter
Default Value
Poll Rate (seconds)
64
Polling interval for clock synchronization.

Accepted Stratum Level
All levels (0 - 15)
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,

cannot be modified.
9.4.2
External Server 1
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 202
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the Use Anycast button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
9.4.3
External Server 2
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 210
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the Use Anycast button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-5
P437
9.5
Dataset Definitions
Parameter
Dataset Definitions
Name
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.
Location
Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.
Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.
The GOOSE Capacity display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is
irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P437 if the
Dataset sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is
recommended to limit the Dataset size(s) to max. 120% of the GOOSE
capacity.
9-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.6
GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1
System/LLN0
Network Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Multicast MAC Address
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
Application ID (hex)
0000
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned ID-number of the GOOSE.

VLAN Identifier (hex)
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
Repeat Message
Transmission
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Minimum Cycle Time
10 ms
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Maximum Cycle Time
1s
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment
900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-7
P437
Message Data
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
GOOSE Identifier
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$GO$gcb01
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
Revision status of the configuration.
9-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.7
GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1
Mapped Inputs
Source Network
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.

ID-number of the GOOSE.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-9
P437
Parameter
GOOSE Source
Parameters
Default Value
Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

Data Obj Type
Unknown
Structure of the data object; possible settings:
Unknown
Boolean (logical value)
Int8 (Integer, with 8 digits)
UInt8 (Positive integer, with 8 digits)
Float (Floating-point number)
BStr2 (Binary state, with 2 digits)
SPS (Single-pole signal)
DPS (Two-pole signal)
Quality Obj Index
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
9-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Destination
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Evaluation Expression
Equal to
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set

integer value; the parameter is not supported in the device.
Equal to (Compared to: equal)
Not equal to (Compared to: unequal)
Greater than (Compared to: greater)
Less than (Compared to: less)
Pass through (Do not compare)
Default Input Value
False
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
False not set
True set
Last Known Value retain last value received
Double Point: intermediate (00) switching device in intermediate position
Double Point: Off (01) switching device open
Double Point: On (10) switching device closed
Double Point: Bad state (11) switching device in intermediate position
Invalidity Quality bits

Quality criterion, which is to be tested.
Invalid / Questionable: Invalid / questionable
Source: Information source is faulty
Relay test: Sending device is set to test mode
OperatorBlocked: Blocked by operator
and
Overflow: Measured value has exceeded its capacity
OutofRange: Measured value has exceeded its range
BadReference: Referenced value is faulty
Oscillatory: Value is volatile
Failure: Faulty
OldData: Information is out-of-date
Inconsistent: Information is unreliable
Inaccurate: Information is inaccurate
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-11
P437
9.8
Report Control Blocks
9.8.1
System/LLN0
Parameter
Report Parameters
Default Value
Report Type
Report type:
Unbuffered (updating)
Buffered (saving)
Report ID
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Revision status of the configuration.
9-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.9
Controls
9.9.1
Control Objects
Parameter
Control Object
Parameters
ctlModel
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:
Status only (manually operated switching device)
Direct control with enhanced security (direct command issue with

extended monitoring of command effecting)
SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security (switching device

selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting)
sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without issuing a command.
9.9.2
Source Network
Parameters
Uniqueness of Control
Parameter
Default Value
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.

ID-number of the GOOSE.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-13
P437
Parameter
GOOSE Source
Parameters
Default Value
Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

Default Input Value
True
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
9-14
False not set
True set
Last Known Value retain last value received
Double Point: intermediate (00) switching device in intermediate position
Double Point: Off (01) switching device open
Double Point: On (10) switching device closed
Double Point: Bad state (11) switching device in intermediate position
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
9.10
Measurements
Parameter
Scaling
Unit Multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported.
Parameter
Range configuration
Scaled Measurement Range: Min

Scaled Measurement Range: Max
Lower / Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Deadband
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Deadband
100
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
9-15
P437
9.11
Configurable Data Attributes
9.11.1
System/LLN0
Mod.measCyc
Parameter
Default Value
Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead

band evaluations.
Mod.enCyc
Parameter
Default Value
Value
65535
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Mod.comtrade
Parameter
Default Value
Value
BINARY
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Mod.distExtr
Parameter
Default Value
Value
true
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.
9-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10
Commissioning
10.1
Safety Instructions
DANGER
DANGER
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter Installation and Connection (Chapter 5, (p. 5-1)) must
be observed.
DANGER
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately
marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The
cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12 or thicker) is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The
cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
DANGER
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is
connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-1
P437
10 Commissioning
DANGER
insulation.
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit
current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
DANGER
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
DANGER
When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the P437
must always be installed outside of this hazardous area.
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore,
when connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the
socket contacts.
WARNING
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance
with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see Technical
Data, Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)).
10-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
WARNING
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify
that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-3
P437
10 Commissioning
10.2
Commissioning Tests
10.2.1
Preparation
After the P437 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 51), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.14, (p. 3-113)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P437 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type P437 and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.11.3, (p. 618)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.11.4, (p. 6-21).
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P437 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:
10-4
DV IC E: De vice pas sword 1
DV IC E: De vice pas sword 2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
Par/Conf menu branch:
PC: Bay ad dre ss
PC : D e vice addr es s
PC : Baud rat e
PC : Parit y bit
COMM1: Fun cti on grou p COMM1
CO MM1: General en able USER
COMM1: N ame of man ufactu rer
CO MM1: L ine i dle s tat e
CO MM1: Bau d r ate
C OM M1: Parity bit
COMM1: C ommu nicat. protocol
COMM1: Oct et comm. addres s
C O MM 1: Octe t addre ss ASDU
COMM2: Fu nction group COMM2
COMM2: Ge n eral e nabl e USER
COMM2: N am e of m anuf actur e r
COMM2: L ine idle s tate
C OM M2: Bau d rate
COMM2: P arity bit
COMM2: Oct e t comm. addres s
COMM2: Oct et addre ss ASD U
COMM3: Function grou p COMM3
CO MM3: Gen eral e nable USE R
COMM3: Baud rate
COMM4: Fun cti on grou p COMM4
C O MM4: Gen eral en able USER
C OM M4: Bau d rate
Par/Func/Glob menu branch:
PC : C omm and blockin g
PC: S ig./me as.val .block.
COMM1: C ommand block. USER
C O MM1: S ig ./me as .block.USE R
COMM2: Comman d block. USER
C OMM2: Sig ./meas .block.USE R
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters Settings and Information

and Control Functions.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter Settings for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-5
P437
10 Commissioning
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob menu branch):
10.2.2
MA IN: D e vice on-lin e = Yes (= on)
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P437, it is possible to
determine whether the P437 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Trip cmd.block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for
100 ms through MAI N: Man . tr ip cmd. USER (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command
from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see
Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P437 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to

activate the test mode via MA IN : Te st mode USER (Par/Func/Glob menu
branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are
then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
10.2.3
Checking the Binary Signal Inputs

By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch), it is
possible to determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized
correctly by the device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
"Low": Not energized.
"High": Energized.
Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
10.2.4
Checking the Output Relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test
purposes (time setting at OUTP: Hold-ti me f or test in Oper/CtrlTest menu
branch). First select the output relay to be tested (OUTP: Relay assign.
f.test, Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Test triggering then occurs via OU TP : R elay te st (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
It is password-protected (see Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)).
10-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
10.2.5
Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals

When using the IEC 608705103, IEC 8705101 or ILSC interface protocols,
each signal generated in the P437 can be transmitted to the connected control
station for test purposes. First select the signal to be tested
(C OM M1: Sel.spon tan .s ig.tes t, CO MM2: Sel .spontan.sig.te st, menu
branch Oper/CtrlTest).
The respective signal is transmitted according to CO MM1: Test
spont .sig .st art or C OMM1 : Te st s pont.s ig. en d (or COMM2: Te st
spont.sig.st art, COMM2 : Te st s pont.s ig. en d, all in menu branch Oper/
CtrlTest).
Signal generation is password-protected (see Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)).
10.2.6
Checking the Protection Function

Four parameter subsets are stored in the P437, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter
subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at PSS: Act ual
p ar am . subset (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
10.2.6.1
Checking Distance Protection

Before checking the distance protection function using a single-phase testing
device, disable the measuring circuit monitoring function (MC MON: Ena ble d,
Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch) and the fuse failure monitoring function
(MC MON: FF, V e nabl e d USE R, Par/Func/Gen menu branch) since they would
otherwise always operate and block distance protection after the set operate
delay had elapsed. Furthermore, the signal at the binary signal input configured
for MAI N: M.c.b . tri p V E XT must have a logic value of 0.
10.2.6.1.1
Checking Starting
The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Fig. 10-1, (p. 108)). The slope of the impedance line plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of
the settings for underimpedance starting and the phase displacement between
the measured values (see Fig. 10-2, (p. 10-9)).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-7
P437
10 Commissioning
V/Vnom(/3)
1.0
DIST:
V< PSx
[*]
0.5
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
[*]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
I>> PSx
[*]
1.0
DIST:
V< PSx
010
010
011
011
069
089
009
029
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
010
010
011
011
068
088
008
028
2.0
I/Inom
DIST:
I>> PSx
010
010
010
011
054
074
094
014
D5Z50DFA
Fig. 10-1: Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram.
Checking I>(Imin), V< and I>>:

The phase displacement between the measured values V and I should be
selected so as to be smaller than the angle set at DIST: PSx.
Checking Z<:
The phase displacement between the measured values V and I should be
selected so as to be greater than the angle set at DIST: PSx.
The measured values should be selected in accordance with the selected operate
values such that only one starting measuring system operates. Operation of the
checked starting threshold is possible by checking the phaseselective and
startingselective state signals.
10-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
X
DIST:
Xfw PSx
[ * ]
Z<(Z)
70
L
R
DIST:
PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Xfw PSx
010 050
010 070
010 090
011 010
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
010 051
010 071
010 091
011 011
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
010 052
010 072
010 092
011 012
DIST:
PSx
010 063
010 083
011 003
011 023
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
010 053
010 073
010 093
011 013
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
010 101
010 102
010 103
011 104
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
010 105
010 106
010 107
011 108
D5Z52DGA
Fig. 10-2: Characteristic of underimpedance starting.
When checking underimpedance starting using single-phase test current, we

obtain the following relation for the operate condition for phase-to-phase
starting:
Vtest
Itest
= 2 Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= 2 | Z< | e
jZ
For absolute value and angle this means:

| Vtest |
| Itest |
= 2 | Z< |
test = Z
where:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-9
P437
10 Commissioning
Z< = Starting Impedance
Z = Impedance Angle
Vtest = Test Voltage
Itest = Test Current
test = Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle Z in the range
L<Z<110, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
| Z< | =
X fw
sinZ
Xfw = DI ST: Xfw PSx setting

The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and
resistance limits and is calculated as follows:
L = arctan
X fw
Rfw
Rfw = D I ST: Rfw,P G PSx or D IST: Rfw ,P P P Sx setting

If underimpedance starting is to be checked under all angle conditions, then the
starting impedances for the individual angle ranges are calculated according to
the following equations:
Angle Range
Starting Impedance
Z G
(180+) Z (180+G)
(180+G) < Z 290
| Z< | =
Rfw
cosZ
| Z< | =
Rfw
cosZ
| Z< | =
X fw
sinZ
: DIS T: PSx setting
Zbw / Zfw: DIS T: Zbw/Zf w P Sx setting
Z bw
Z fw
Z bw
Z fw
When phase-to-ground starting conditions are checked, the DIST: Z

e valuat ion PSx setting must be taken into account. If ZPG=VPG/2*IP is set,
then the equations given for phase-to-phase starting apply. If, on the other hand,
ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN) is set, then the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D IST: Abs . value kG PSx is not equal to
one and/or the setting for DI ST: A ngle kG PSx is not equal to 0. When the
test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the
operate condition is obtained:
Vtest
Itest
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ

| Vtest |
| Itest |
10-10
= 1 + | kG|2 + 2 | kG | cosG | Z< |
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
sinZ + | kG | sin(Z + G)
Z + | kG | cos(Z + G)
test = arctan cos

or
sintest + | kG | sin(test - G)
test + | kG | cos(test - G)
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z< = Starting Impedance
Z = Impedance Angle
|kG| = DI ST: Abs . val ue kG PSx setting
G = D IST: A ngl e kG PSx setting
Vtest = Test Voltage
Itest = Test Current
test = Phase angle between test voltage and test current
From the input measured values, the P437 calculates the residual current IN and
the neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting.
They are calculated according to the following equations:
|IN| = |IA + IB + IC|
|VNG| = |VAG + VBG + VCG|
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation
formula for VNG given above is that the DIST: V NG> PSx or D IST: VNG>>
PSx triggers operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
| Vtest | = 3 V NG>
V nom
3
VNG> = setting DIS T: V N G> P Sx or DIST: VNG>> P Sx

For a single-phase test where |IB| = |IC| = 0, the following applies to currents:
|Itest| = IN>Inom
IN> = DI ST: IN > PSx setting
Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LED indicator if starting also
operates in a phase. The operation of ground starting can be observed,
independently of the operation of phase starting, at DI ST: Zero-s equ.
st ar t ing (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The values determined by the P437 for the residual current IN and the neutralpoint displacement voltage VNG are displayed by the operating data display
(current: MAIN : C urre nt IN p. u. and voltage: MA IN : V oltage VNG p.u. in
the Oper/Cycl/Data menu branch).
10.2.6.1.2
Checking Distance and Directional Measurement

When checking the impedance zones using single-phase test current we obtain
the following relation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phase loop:
Vtest
Itest
= 2 Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= 2 | Z< | e
jZ
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-11
P437
10 Commissioning
| Vtest |
| Itest |
= 2 | Z< |
test = Z
where:
10.2.6.1.3
Z<: Tripping Impedance
Z: Impedance Angle
Vtest: Test Voltage
Itest: Test Current
test: Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Characteristics
With the P437, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern
calculation of the tripping impedances.
10.2.6.1.3.1
Circle Characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the
P437. If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the
characteristic shown in the following diagram is obtained when measuring with
sinusoidal quantities.
+135
Forward direction
Zn
Z
R
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5025A
Fig. 10-3: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Circle setting.
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges 45 < Z < and 135 < Z < (
+180) is then calculated as follows:
|Ztrip| = |Z|(1+sin)
In the range 45 < Z < , the following relation applies: = Z
10-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
In the range 135 < Z < (+180), the following relation applies: = Z
+180
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
Z: settings DI ST: Z1 (ci rcl e ) P Sx to DIST: Z6 ( circle ) PSx
Z: Impedance Angle
: settings D I ST: 1 ( circle ) P Sx to DI ST: 6 ( circle) PSx
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must
be taken into account if the setting for DIST: Abs . valu e k G PSx is not equal
to one and/or the setting for DIST: A n gl e kG P Sx is not equal to 0. When the
test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the
operate condition is obtained:
Vtest
Itest
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ

| Vtest |
| Itest |
= 1 + | kG|2 + 2 | kG | cosG | Z< |

Z + | kG | cos(Z + G)
test = arctan cos

or
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z: Impedance Angle
|kG|: DI ST: Abs. valu e kG P Sx setting
G:DIS T: Angle kG PSx setting
Vtest: Test Voltage
Itest: Test Current
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze Z1
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
kze:
DIS T: k ze,PG HSR PSx or
D IST: kze,PP H SR P Sx or
D IS T: k ze,PG TDR P Sx or
D IST: kze,PP TD R PSx setting
Z1: D IST: Z1 ( circle ) P Sx setting
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-13
P437
10 Commissioning
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
An appropriately configured signal input.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone
extension factor kzeTDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing
function. Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension
factor kzeHSR may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly.
10.2.6.1.3.2
Polygon (Quadrilateral) Characteristic

The tripping impedance is calculated in the range of the reactance limits (for
impedance angle Z this means in the range L < Z < 90) as follows:
| Z< | =
X
sinZ
X: D IST: X1 ,PG ( pol ygon ) PSx to D IST: X6, PG (polygon) PSx setting
The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and
resistance limits and is calculated as follows:
| L | = arctan
X
X
R + tan
R:
Settings DIS T: R1, PG ( pol ygon) P Sx
to D IS T: R 6,P G (polygon ) PSx
or D I ST: R1,PP ( polygon) P Sx
to D I ST: R6,PP (polygon ) PSx
: DIS T: 1 (pol ygon) PSx to DIST: 6 ( ci rcle) PSx
+135
DIST:
Xn
Z<
DIST:
n
Z
L
R
DIST:
Rn,PG
DIST:
Rn,PP
45
D5Z50DJA
Fig. 10-4: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Polygon setting.
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the
range of 0 < Z L), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the
following equation:
10-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
| Z< | =
R
sinZ
cosZ - tan
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG
must be taken into account if the setting for DIST: Abs . valu e k G PSx is not
equal to one and/or the setting for DIST: A n gl e kG PSx is not equal to 0.
When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation
for the operate condition is obtained:
Vtest
Itest
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ

| Vtest |
| Itest |
= 1 + | kG|2 + 2 | kG | cosG | Z< |

Z + | kG | cos(Z + G)
test = arctan cos

or
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z: Impedance Angle
|kG|: DI ST: Abs. valu e kG P Sx setting
G:DIS T: Angle kG PSx setting
Vtest: Test Voltage
Itest: Test Current
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze R1
Xtrip = kze X1
where:
Rtrip: Actual tripping resistance
Xtrip: Actual tripping reactance
kze:
setting DI ST: kze,P G H SR P Sx
or D I ST: kze ,P P H SR P Sx
or DI ST: kze,P G TDR P Sx
or D IST: kze,P P TDR PSx
R1: DIS T: R 1,P G (polygon) P Sx or DIST: R1 ,PP (polygon ) PSx setting

X1: DI ST: X1,P G (polygon) P Sx setting
Whether the kze HSR zone extension factors are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-15
P437
10 Commissioning
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to zone extension
factor kzeTDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, zone extension factor kzeHSR
may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly.
10.2.6.1.4
Checking the Voltage Memory

The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination. The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain
cases for direction determination.
If the voltage memory is to be tested using a single-phase test device, checking
should only be done for an AB fault.
The voltage memory is cleared, if the following two conditions are fulfilled:
Voltage |VAB| is greater than the threshold set at

D IST: Oper.val.Vm e mory P Sx.
The frequency is in the range 0.95fnom < f < 1.05fnom .
With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing
voltage (VAB), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement
for 2 s maximum.
The P437 determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether
the direction will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the
set angle (D I ST: 1 (pol ygon) P Sx, , DIST: 6 ( polygon) PSx). The
following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:
V memory
0.002Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x
Vmeas < 0.002Vnom
Enabled
Not enabled
X: Angle determined using the stored voltage

F: Angle determined using the selected measured values
Vmeas: Selected measuring voltage
The method for determining X is described in Section 3.21, (p. 3-135).
The user can check to make sure connection to the systems current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data
displays for load angle (MA IN: Load angle phi A, MAIN: Load angle phi B,
and MA IN : Load ang le ph i C in the Oper/Cycl/Data menu branch). The load
angles for all three phases must be approximately equal. The load angles are
only determined if at least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.
10.2.6.2
Checking Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

Both the current- and voltage-measuring circuits are monitored. Operation of the
monitoring functions can be observed by selecting logic state signals
MC MON: Me as.circ.V ,I f aul ty (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch ) or
MC MON: M.circ. V ,Vref fl ty. (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch). The monitoring
signals can also be entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by
reading out the monitoring signal memory.
10-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
10.2.6.2.1
Current-Measuring Circuits
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125Inom flows in at
least one phase. The P437 determines the absolute value of the negativesequence component, from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence
component is calculated according to the following equation:

1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is:

|Ineg| (Ineg>)|IP,max|
With
Ineg>: MC MON: I ne g> setting
With a single-phase test current we obtain:
|Ineg| = |Itest|
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
|Itest| (Ineg>)|Itest|
0,333 (Ineg>)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits
with single-phase test current is only possible if the threshold operate value is
set at less than 0.333.
For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:
| Ineg | =
1
3
| Itest + a2 ( Itest) | =
1
3
| Itest |
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
1
3
| Itest | (I neg>) | Itest |
0.577 (Ineg>)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits
with a two-phase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold
operate value is set at less than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the
monitoring function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current
greater than 0.125Inom after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed.
10.2.6.2.2
Voltage-Measuring Circuits
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at
least one phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/3. Other enabling
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-17
P437
10 Commissioning
criteria that can be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling
criteria at MC MON : Op. mode vol t. mon. in the Par/Func/Main/ menu
branch):
One of the phase currents must exceed 0.05Inom.
The signal at the binary signal input configured for MAIN: CB close d 3 p
EX T must have a logic value of 1.
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, the P437 determines the

absolute value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following equation:
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotating
field)
V
neg
1
3
| (V
+ a2 V
A-G
+ aV
B-G
)|
C-G
1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |

Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating
field)
V
neg
1
3
| (V
+ aV
A-G
B-G
+ a2 V
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |

Symbols used:
)|
C-G
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at 0.2Vnom/3. The result of a

single-phase test using |VBG| = |VCG| = 0 and also of the calculation formula for
Vneg given above is that the trigger operates when the test voltage exceeds the
following value:
| Vtest | 3 0.2
V nom
3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
10.2.6.3
Checking Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection

The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) provided it has been
appropriately set is brought about by the measuring-circuit monitoring function
or the tripping of the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker on the line
side.
If the current exceeds the set operate value (BU OC: I> PSx), then starting
occurs in the corresponding phase(s). After the set time delay (BUOC : tI> PSx)
has elapsed, the P437 trips. If MAI N: Neu tr.pt. treat. PSx is set to Lowimped. grounding then SN starting occurs if the residual current IN calculated by
the P437 exceeds the operate value set at BUOC: IN> PSx. After the set time
delay has elapsed (BUOC: tIN> PSx), the P437 trips.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked.
If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages BUOC: tI> PSx
BUOC : tI N> PSx are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then
issued instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 ms delay for zero-
10-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
sequence starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the
ARC hold time is elapsing.
The P437 calculates the resultant current IN according to the following equation:
|IN| = |IA+IB+IC|
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test
current is obtained:
|Itest| = IN>Inom
At this test current the operate value (BUOC : I N> PSx) is reached.
10.2.6.4
Checking Protective Signaling

The protective signaling function can only be tested if protective signaling is
ready. This can be determined by checking logic state signal PSIG: Ready
(Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
Protective signaling is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking PSIG: En able d in the Oper/Cycl/Log
menu branch.)
This may be due to the following reasons:
PSI G: Gen eral en abl e USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) is set to No

PSIG: Enable PSx (in one of the Par/Func/PSx menu branches,
depending on the parameter subset) is set to No.
Protective signaling is disabled via an appropriately configured binary
signal input or from the integrated local control panel. (This can be
determined by checking logic state signal P SIG: Ex t. /us e r enabled in
the Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly

configured binary signal input (P SI G: Bl ocking EXT).
A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be

determined by checking logic state signal PSI G: Telecom . fau lty in the
Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal
for test purposes using a setting parameter (P SI G: Tes t telecom. U SER in the
Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary
signal input. This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set
reset time. If the with echo setting has been selected in the protection device
at the remote station, then the received signal will be returned.
10.2.6.5
Checking the Auto-Reclosing Function

The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal AR C: CB driv e r eady E XT (Oper/
Cycl/Log).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-19
P437
10 Commissioning
The ARC function is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking logic state signal ARC: Enabl ed,
(Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch)). This can have the following causes:
ARC : Ge ne ral e nable USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) is set to No

ARC : Enable PSx (in one of the Par/Func/PSx menu branches,
depending on the parameter subset) is set to No.
ARC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a
setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal ARC: Ext ./user
e na bl ed, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch)
The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, backup DTOC

protection, Ground Fault protection, Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection
Signaling, a manual trip command or via an appropriately configured signal
input (ARC : Blockin g EXT). (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ARC : Blocke d, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input

configured for ARC: CB dri ve re ady E XT.
There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input

configured for MA IN: C B cl ose d 3p E XT. The circuit breaker position
signal is only necessary if the setting at A RC : C B clos.pos.sig. PSx is
Yes.
An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic

state signal ARC : Cycl e runn in g in the Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
An ASC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic

state signal AS C: Cycl e ru n ni ng, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes using a setting parameter or by
triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
10.2.6.6
Checking the Automatic Synchronism Check

The automatic synchronism check can only take place if it is ready. This can be
determined by checking logic state signal ASC: R eady.
The possible reasons for the ASC function not being ready are as follows:
The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ASC : Enable d, (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.) This can have
the following causes:
ASC : Gener al en able USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) has been

set to No.
ASC : Enab le PSx (Par/Func/PSx menu branch, depending on the
parameter subset) has been set to No.
ASC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a
setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC: Ext ./use r
e nabled, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
A logic 1 signal is present at the binary signal inputs configured for

M AI N: M.c.b. t rip V EXT.
The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input
configured for A SC: Bl ocking E XT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of
blocking.
10-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
10 Commissioning
For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms using ASC: Test
M C close r USER the setting parameter (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by
triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input (A SC: Tes t MC close
r. EXT). The check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The
P437 checks whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set
conditions. If a positive decision is reached, then there is an A SC : C lose
enable signal. No (re-)close command takes place! If the check determines that
enabling is not permitted, the signal ASC: Cl ose rejection is issued.
10.2.6.7
Checking Ground Fault Short-Circuit Protection

Ground fault short-circuit protection can be checked only if it is ready. It can be
interrogated via the logic state signal GFSC: Re ady (Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch).
If ground fault short-circuit protection is not ready, this may be due to the
following reasons:
Ground fault short-circuit protection is not enabled. (This can be

determined by checking logic state signal GFSC: En abled, Oper/Cycl/Log
menu branch). This may be due to the following reasons:
GF SC : Ge ne ral e nabl e U SER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) has been

set to No.
GFS C: Enabl e PSx (Par/Func/PSx menu branch, depending on the
parameter subset) has been set to No.
Ground fault short-circuit protection is disabled via an appropriately
configured binary signal input or a setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal GFSC: Ext .
ena bled, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
On the binary signal input configured to MA IN: M.c. b. trip V EXT a logic
1 signal is present.
The ground fault short-circuit protection function calculates the neutral

displacement voltage VN-G via the three phase-to-ground voltages according to
the following equation:
|VN-G| = |VA-G+VB-G+VC-G|
In the case of a single-phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the
calculation formula for VN-G given above is that trigger GF SC : V NG> operates
when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
| Vtest | = 3 V NG>
V nom
3
VN-G> > : Setting GF SC : VN G>

The operation of the trigger can be determined by checking logic state signal
GFSC: VNG> t riggere d (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch)
10.2.6.8
Checking Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling

Ground fault short-circuit protection signaling can be checked using a setting
parameter (GSC SG: Tes t tele com. USER) or by triggering an appropriately
configured binary signal input (GSCSG: Te st te l ecom. EXT). The P437 then
generates a send signal for 500 ms.
10.2.7
Completing Commissioning
Before the P437 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
10-21
P437
10 Commissioning
(Reset at MAI N: Ge ne ral re se t USER (password-protected) and

MT_RC : Reset r ecor d. USE R, both in Oper/CtrlTest menu branch.)
Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.

(OU TP: Out p.re l.bl ock U SER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.

(MAI N: Trip cmd.bl ock. USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
The device is on-line.

(MAI N: D e vice on-lin e, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting Yes (= on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling

HEALTHY (H1) should be on.
10-22
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
11
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P437 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-3) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
WARNING
WARNING
Before checking further, disconnect the P437 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
Problem
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection

points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P437 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
The P437 issues an Alarm signal on LED H 3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal

memory (see Section 6.11.6.2, (p. 6-26)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. ass ign. warning), the faulty area,
the P437's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
Warning and Blocked/faulty.
Key
: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-1
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
Self-monitoring
SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. war ning
021 030
[spacer]
SFMO N: M on.s ig. re t enti on
021 018
11-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Self-monitoring
SFMO N: C B faulty E X T
[spacer]
The external input CBF : CB fault y EX T has become active.
P437
Address
098 072
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
SFMO N: W arning (LE D)
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer]
SFMO N: W arning (re lay )
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer]
SFMO N: W arm re start e x ec.
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re star t exe c.
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re st. che ck sum
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
036 070
036 100
041 202
041 201
093 024
1st device reaction: Warm restart

2nd device reaction: Device blocking
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
[spacer]
SFMO N: C old re st. SW updat e
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
093 025

[spacer]
SFMO N: B lockin g HW failur e
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
090 019
'Warning' output relay: Updating

[spacer]
SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
041 200
Device reaction:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-3
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
SFMO N: Hardware clock fail.
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
Address
093 040
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: B at te ry failure
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
090 010
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
093 026

[spacer]
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 081

[spacer]
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 082

[spacer]
SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty
[spacer]
The 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 080

[spacer]
096 100
[spacer]
096 101
[spacer]
096 102
11-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
096 103
[spacer]
096 104
[spacer]
096 105
[spacer]
096 106
[spacer]
096 107
[spacer]
096 108
[spacer]
096 109
[spacer]
096 110
[spacer]
096 111
[spacer]
096 112
[spacer]
096 113
[spacer]
096 114
[spacer]
096 115
[spacer]
096 116
[spacer]
096 117
[spacer]
096 118
[spacer]
096 119
[spacer]
096 120
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.

[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 123

[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong module HM I
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 124

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-5
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong m odul e Comm
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 125

[spacer]
SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 126

[spacer]
097 000
[spacer]
097 001
[spacer]
097 002
[spacer]
097 003
[spacer]
097 004
[spacer]
097 005
[spacer]
097 006
[spacer]
097 007
[spacer]
097 008
[spacer]
097 009
[spacer]
097 010
[spacer]
097 011
[spacer]
097 012
[spacer]
097 013
[spacer]
097 014
[spacer]
097 015
[spacer]
097 016
[spacer]
097 017
[spacer]
097 018
[spacer]
097 019
11-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
P437
Address
097 020
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
093 110
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
093 111
Device reaction:
[spacer]
097 086
[spacer]
097 087
[spacer]
097 088
[spacer]
097 089
[spacer]
097 090
[spacer]
097 091
[spacer]
097 092
[spacer]
097 093
[spacer]
097 102
[spacer]
097 103
[spacer]
097 104
[spacer]
097 105
[spacer]
097 106
[spacer]
097 107
[spacer]
097 108
[spacer]
097 109
[spacer]
097 118
[spacer]
097 119
[spacer]
097 120
[spacer]
097 121
[spacer]
097 122
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-7
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 12 0 6
097 123
[spacer]
097 124
[spacer]
097 125
[spacer]
097 134
[spacer]
097 135
[spacer]
097 136
[spacer]
097 137
[spacer]
097 138
[spacer]
097 139
[spacer]
097 140
[spacer]
097 141
[spacer]
097 150
[spacer]
097 151
[spacer]
097 152
[spacer]
097 153
[spacer]
097 154
[spacer]
097 155
[spacer]
097 156
[spacer]
097 157
[spacer]
097 166
[spacer]
097 167
[spacer]
097 168
[spacer]
097 169
[spacer]
097 170
[spacer]
097 171
[spacer]
097 182
[spacer]
097 183
[spacer]
097 184
[spacer]
097 185
[spacer]
097 186
[spacer]
097 187
[spacer]
097 188
[spacer]
097 189
[spacer]
Output relay K xxx defective.

Device reaction:
11-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
P437
Address
093 010

[spacer]
SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
093 030

[spacer]
SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
093 031

[spacer]
SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
093 032

[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref.
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a

(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
093 033

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-9
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: U ne xpe ct ed ex ce ption
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this

error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
093 034

[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op.
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
093 011

[spacer]
SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
093 012

[spacer]
SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t .
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
093 013

[spacer]
SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected

an error.
090 021

[spacer]
SFMO N: C he ck s um error param
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
090 003

11-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the

time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
093 041
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
090 012
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block .
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
093 015
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: T im e -out module Y
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
093 112
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
096 121

[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display

(DHMI).
093 145
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nval. SW ve r s .C OMM1
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
093 075
Device reaction:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-11
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I E C
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
Address
093 079
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
093 113
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nom not adjust able
[spacer]
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.
093 118
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
093 124
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.

[spacer]
093 114
[spacer]
093 115
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
093 116

[spacer]
SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
098 035
Device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload protection.

11-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: S etting e rror f<>
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for 'overfrequency'

monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
098 028
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function

[spacer]
SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.
098 020
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

[spacer]
SFMO N: Pe riphe ral fault
[spacer]
Multiple signal.
098 018

[spacer]
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
098 000
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.

[spacer]
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip VNG
[spacer]
The m.c.b. monitoring the neutral-displacement voltage has tripped.
098 132
The Ground fault protection (GFSC and GSCSG) is blocked (if these function
groups are operated with measured neutral-displacement voltage)
[spacer]
SFMO N: M .c.b. trip Vref
[spacer]
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
098 011
Device reaction: Blocking of automatic synchronism check (ASC).

[spacer]
SFMO N: Phas e se qu. V faulty
[spacer]
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of the

phase-to-ground voltages.
098 001

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-13
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: Vne g> tr igge re d
[spacer]
The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring has

been triggered.
098 014

[spacer]
SFMO N: U nd er volt age
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.
098 009

[spacer]
SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit.
098 021

[spacer]
SFMO N: F F, Vref trigge re d
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.
098 022

[spacer]
SFMO N: M .circ. V,Vref fl ty.
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or the

reference voltage faulty.
098 023

[spacer]
SFMO N: M eas . cir c. V f aul ty
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
098 017

[spacer]
SFMO N: M eas .circ .VNG faulty
[spacer]
The voltage-measuring circuits for the neutral-point displacement voltage are

faulty.
098 254
Device reaction: Selective blocking of the neutral-point displacement voltage

monitor (in function group V<>) if it were set so that it would evaluate the
measured value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
11-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
SFMO N: M .circ. Vre f fault y
[spacer]
The voltage-measuring circuits for the reference voltage are faulty.
P437
Address
098 255
Device reaction: Selective blocking of the neutral-point displacement voltage

monitor in function groups V<> and LIMIT as well as blocking of ASC.
[spacer]
SFMO N: B UOC n ot act iv e
[spacer]
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been

blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
098 002

[spacer]
SFMO N: B UOC act ive w/ o ARC
[spacer]

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC
is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
098 003

[spacer]
SFMO N: B UOC act ive wit h ARC
[spacer]

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC
is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
098 004

[spacer]
SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the currentmeasuring circuits.
098 005

[spacer]
SFMO N: M eas .circ .V,I fault y
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
098 016

[spacer]
SFMO N: Z ero-se qu. s tart ing
[spacer]
The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered without

phase starting.
098 015

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-15
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: M eas . cir cuit s G FS C
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection monitoring has been triggered.
098 013

[spacer]
093 140
[spacer]
093 146
[spacer]
The set time C OMM3: T ime -out comm.faul t (or COM M4: Time -out
comm.fault, resp.) has elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram
was received. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
[spacer]
[spacer]
The device has detected a hardware error in the effective connection

InterMiCOM (communication interface 3).
093 143

[spacer]
[spacer]
The device has detected a hardware error in the effective connection

InterMiCOM (communication interface 4).
093 149

[spacer]
093 142
[spacer]
093 148
[spacer]
Timer stage COM M3: T ime -out link fail . (or COMM4: Time-out l ink
fail., resp.) has elapsed indicating a persistent failure of the transmission
channel. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
[spacer]
093 141
[spacer]
093 147
[spacer]
The threshold set for timer stage COMM3: Limit telegr. e rrors was
exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
[spacer]
SFMO N: T elecom. faulty / PSI G
[spacer]
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
098 006
Device reaction: Blocking of protective signaling.

11-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: O p.mode PS IG inv al.
[spacer]
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling are not identical.
098 019

[spacer]
SFMO N: T elecom.faulty / GSC SG
[spacer]
The transmission channel of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is

faulty.
098 027

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B pos .s ig. implaus.
[spacer]
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's
(CB) status signals.
098 124

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B No. C B op. >
[spacer]
The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.
098 066

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B rem. No. C B op. <
[spacer]
The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has fallen

below the threshold.
098 067

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B I trip >
[spacer]
The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.
098 068

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B I trip**2 >
[spacer]
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power has
been exceeded.
098 069

[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> A
098 070
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> B
098 071
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-17
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> C
[spacer]
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.
098 077

[spacer]
SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
093 120
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30
098 053
[spacer]
098 054
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31
098 055
[spacer]
098 056
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 32
098 057
[spacer]
098 058
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
[spacer]
SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit
[spacer]
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer PT100 to the analog I/O module Y.
098 024

[spacer]
SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
098 025

[spacer]
SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp.
[spacer]
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
098 026

11-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: C T A error
[spacer]
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.
098 034

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-19
P437
11-20
11 Troubleshooting
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
12
Maintenance
WARNING
The P437 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
12-1
P437
12.1
12 Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area

Replacement of the power supply module must be carried out by trained
personnel, and the power supply voltage must be turned off while the work is
being performed.
DANGER
Always turn off the power supply voltage before removing a hardware
module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed.
Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
WARNING
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
NOTICE
The replaced power supply module must be disposed of in compliance with
applicable national regulations.
In general, the electronic components of the MiCOM P30 family of devices are
designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend
preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P437 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
12-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
12 Maintenance
If the P437 is continuously connected to the auxiliary power supply, then

there is no discharging of the battery, and the battery will thus not be
depleted during its service life.
Should the P437 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-4) must be carried out.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
12-3
P437
12.2
12 Maintenance
Routine Functional Testing

The P437 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection
tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out
approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be
performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years 4 years at the maximum.
The P437 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing
basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the
self-monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The
respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such
cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device
from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
12-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
12 Maintenance
12.3
Analog Input Circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the selfmonitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the
devices general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is
still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the
analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the
primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement
function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A small measured value (such
as the nominal current in the current path) and a large measured value (such
as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the
measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire
dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1%. An important factor in
evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison
with previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This
can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a
two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current
should be such that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the
device's terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing
instrument that correctly replicates the two-phase ungrounded fault should be
used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of
a few less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical
expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be
outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the
starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information
processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current
and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type
testing.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
12-5
P437
12.4
12 Maintenance
Binary Opto Inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a
testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each
input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch). This check should be
performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
12-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
12 Maintenance
12.5
Binary Outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
12-7
P437
12.6
12 Maintenance
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
13
Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled Technical Data). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P437 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
13-1
P437
13-2
13 Storage
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
14
Accessories and Spare Parts

The P437 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators
that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips
supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing waterresistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description
Order No.
Cable bushings
88512-4-0337414-301
Resistor 200
255.002.696
84 TE frame
88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows
On request (MiCOM S1)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
14-1
P437
14-2
14 Accessories and Spare Parts
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
15
Order Information
Module Configuration Variants

Order Information MiCOM P437
P 4 37-
-311 -4xx -650
-7xx
-46x -9x x -9x x
-8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection,
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection,
7
8
-412
-413
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8output relays

and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display
3
4
Current transformer:
Inom =1A / 5 A (T1...
T4) 2)
Parallel Line Mutual Compensation CT:

Without
Inom =1A / 5 A (T24) 2)
0
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom =50 ...130 V (4-pole)
Vnom =50 ...130 V (5-pole) for Automatic Synchronism Check
4
5
Additional binary I/O options:

Without
With 1binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8output relays)
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)
With 3 binary modules (add. 18 binary inputs and 24 output relays) 23)
With 4 binary modules (add. 24 binary inputs and 32 output relays) 3)
0
1
2
3
4
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:

VA,nom =24 60 VDC
VA,nom =60 ...250 VDC / 100 ...230 VAC
VA,nom =24 ...60 VDC and 6 output relays
VA,nom =60 ...250 VDC / 100 ...230 VAC and 6 output relays
VA,nom =24 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts
VA,nom =60 ...250 VDC / 100 ...230 VAC and 4 high break contacts
Further add. options:

Without
With analog module
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
0
2
15-1
P437
15 Order Information
Further Options
Order information MiCOM P437
P 4 37-
-311 -4xx -650
-7xx
-46x -9x x -9x x
-8xx
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant)
Without order extension No.
>90 V (60...70%of VA,nom =125...1

50 V) 8)
-461
-462
-463
-464
>155V (60...70%of VA,nom =220...250 V) 8)

>73 V (67%of VA,nom =110 V) 8)
>146 V (67%of VA,nom =220 V) 8)
With communication / information interface:
Without

-90
Protocol can be switched between:

IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
1
2
4
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated

For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector
-90
Protocol IEC 61850, single connection
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ 45

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ 45

-98
Protocol IEC 61850, redundant connection
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, SHP

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, RSTP

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, dual homing
With guidance / protection interface:
Without

-95
-96
Protocol InterMiCOM, Channel 1

Protocol InterMiCOM, Channel 2
1
4
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated

For connection to glass fiber, ST connector
Language:
English (German)4)
German (English)4)
French(English)4)
Spanish (English)4)
Polish (English)4)
Russian (English)4) 7)
15-2
Not yet available - on request

-801
-802
-803
-804
-805
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Key
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM interface (95x) is

ordered.
4) Second included language in brackets.
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West

European characters.
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not

explicitly required by the application.
23) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM Channel 2 interface

(96x) is ordered.
Information about Ordering Options

Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension
number (805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option
supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference
menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western
European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported.
Consequently, selecting the Russian / English ordering option means that it will
not be possible to download Western European data models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in
most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also Technical Data,
Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)) are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
15-3
P437
15-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A1
Function Groups
ARC
Auto-reclosing control
ASC
Automatic synchronism check
BUOC
Backup overcurrent-time protection
CBF
Circuit breaker failure protection
CBM
Circuit breaker condition monitoring
COMM1
Logical communication interface 1
COMM2
Logical communication interface 2
COMM3
InterMiCOM interface
COMM4
InterMiCOM interface
COUNT
Binary counts
DIST
Distance protection
DTOC
Definite-time overcurrent protection
DVICE
Device
F_KEY
Configurable function keys
f<>
Over-/underfrequency protection
FT_DA
Fault data acquisition
FT_RC
Fault recording
GF_RC
Ground fault recording
GFSC
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
GOOSE
Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
GSCSG
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
GSSE
IEC Generic Substation Status Events
IDMT
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
IEC
IEC 61850 Communication
INP
Binary input
IRIGB
IRIGB interface
LED
LED indicators
LIMIT
Limit value monitoring
LOC
Local control panel
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A1-1
P437
A1-2
A1 Function Groups
LOG_2
Programmable Logic
LOGIC
Programmable Logic
MAIN
Main function
MCMON
Measuring-circuit monitoring
MEASI
Measured data input
MEASO
Measured data output
MT_RC
Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA
Overload data acquisition
OL_RC
Overload recording
OP_RC
Operating data recording
OUTP
Binary and analog output
P<>
Power directional protection
PC
PC link
PSB
Power swing blocking
PSIG
PSS
SFMON
Self-monitoring
SOTF
THERM
Thermal overload protection
V<>
Time-voltage protection
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2
Internal Signals
ARC: 3-pole RRC
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: 3-pole transfer int.
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: CB closed
Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-243)
ARC: Close command
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: Enable dist.tripZ1ze
Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-269)
ARC: External trip A
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: External trip B
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: External trip C
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: HSR A
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: HSR A-B-C
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: HSR B
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: HSR C
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: Meas.r.extd. ext.ARC
Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-269)
ARC: Switch to tPmax
Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-270)
ARC: TDR
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: TDR permitted
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: Test HSR A, internal
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
ARC: Test HSR B, internal
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
ARC: Test HSR C, internal
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-257)
ARC: Trip time elapsed
Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-245)
ARC: tRRC running
Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-271)
ARC: V> for RRC triggered
Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-260)
ARC: Zone extension HSR
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
ARC: Zone extension RC
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
ARC: Zone extension TDR
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-267)
ASC: Active
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
ASC: Close enable w.block
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
ASC: Close reject.w.block
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-275)
ASC: Gen. close request
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-1
P437
A2 Internal Signals
ASC: Manual close request
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
ASC: Select. meas.loop PG
Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-273)
ASC: Test
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
ASC: Vmeas
Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-273)
BUOC: Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
BUOC: Block. Starting
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
BUOC: IA> triggered
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: IB> triggered
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: IC> triggered
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: SN
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Trip A
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Trip B
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
BUOC: Trip C
Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-207)
CBF: IN
Fig. 3-314, (p. 3-398)
CBF: Start >1p
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
CBF: Start A
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
COMM1: Communication error
Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-12)

Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-13)
Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-17)
A2-2
COMM1: Count 1
Fig. 3-345, (p. 3-431)
COMM1: Selected protocol
Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-11)
DIST: |Zmeas|
Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-162)
DIST: 1-pole starting
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Bl.Start. I>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DIST: Bl.Start. Z<
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DIST: Dir.using Vmeas y
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: Dir.using Vmem y
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)
DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, B
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, C
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, A
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, B
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, C
Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-177)
DIST: Dist.decis.Z1 stored
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
DIST: Dist.decision Z1, x
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
DIST: Dist.decision Z1ze,x
Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
DIST: Dist.decision zone n
Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-164)

Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-168)
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, A
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, B
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, C
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: Enable ZA-B starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZA-G starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZB-C starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZB-G starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZC-A starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZC-G starting
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Enable ZP-G
Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-142)
DIST: Fault backwd / BS, x
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, x
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: Forw. w/o meas. y
Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-157)
DIST: I>> triggered
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
DIST: I>>> triggered
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
DIST: IA,corr.
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
DIST: IA(1+kG)
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg.
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: IA>> triggered
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
DIST: IB,corr.
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
DIST: IB(1+kG)
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-3
P437
A2-4
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: IB>(Ibl) trigg.
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: IB>> triggered
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
DIST: IC,corr.
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
DIST: IC(1+kG)
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
DIST: IC>(Ibl) trigg.
Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-140)
DIST: IC>> triggered
Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-137)
DIST: IkG,par
Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
DIST: Imeas
Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-153)
DIST: INkG
Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-144)
DIST: Multipole starting
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: N1,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,bw, A
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,bw, B
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,bw, C
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,fw, A
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,fw, B
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N1,fw, C
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N2,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N2,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N3,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N3,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N4,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N4,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N5,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N5,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N6,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N6,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N7,bw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: N7,fw
Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-176)
DIST: RF
Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-166)
DIST: Select.meas.loop A-B
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: Select.meas.loop A-G
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop B-C
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop B-G
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop C-A
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop C-G
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop P-G
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Select.meas.loop P-P
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-150)
DIST: Signal block start.G
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)
DIST: Start. IN> triggered
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: Start.VNG> triggered
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: Start.ZPP< triggered
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
DIST: Starting A
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Starting B
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Starting blocked
Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
DIST: Starting C
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Starting G
Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-139)
DIST: Starting N1
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-147)
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-174)
DIST: tIN> elapsed
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: Trip signal Z1, A
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)
DIST: Trip signal Z1, B
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)
DIST: Trip signal Z1, C
Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-182)
DIST: Trip zone 1
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1, A
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1, B
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1, C
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-178)
DIST: Trip zone 2
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: Trip zone 3
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-5
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: Trip zone 4
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: Trip zone 5
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: Trip zone 6
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: Trip zone 7
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: Trip zone 8
Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-179)
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: VA-B (stored)
Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-154)
DIST: VA< triggered
Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
DIST: VB< triggered
Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
DIST: VC< triggered
Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
DIST: Vmeas
Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-153)
DIST: VNG>> exceeded
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-138)
DIST: Voltage mem. enabled
Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-154)
DIST: VPP< triggered
Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-141)
DIST: XF
Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-166)
DIST: ZA< start. triggered
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
DIST: ZB< start. triggered
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
DIST: ZC< start. triggered
Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-145)
DIST:
Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-164)

Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)
Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-170)
A2-6
DIST: corr
Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-154)
DIST: F
Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-155)
DIST: X
Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-155)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I>>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Bl.Start. Ineg>>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block. Start. IN>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block. Start. IN>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block. Start. IN>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DTOC: Block. Start. IN>>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block.Start. Ineg>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block.Start. Ineg>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: Block.Start. Ineg>>>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
DTOC: IN
Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-327)
DTOC: Pulse prolong. runn.
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
DTOC: t2 N
Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-335)
f<>: fMeas
Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-375)
f<>: No. periods reached
Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-375)
f<>: VMeas
Fig. 3-294, (p. 3-374)
FT_DA: IMeas
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Outp. fault location
Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
FT_DA: Output meas. values
Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
FT_DA: Select. meas.loop PG
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-B
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-G
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-C
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-G
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-A
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-G
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_DA: Trigger N
Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-139)
FT_DA: VMeas
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-126)
FT_RC: Fault recording n
Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-132)
FT_RC: Trigger N
Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-139)
GFSC: Blocked
Fig. 3-221, (p. 3-293)
GFSC: Curr.-dep. trip sig.
Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-306)
GFSC: IN filtered
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
GFSC: VNG
Fig. 3-222, (p. 3-293)
GFSC: VNG filtered
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
GFSC: Volt.-dep. trip sig.
Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-301)
GFSC: Voltage present
Fig. 3-222, (p. 3-293)

Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-294)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-7
P437
A2 Internal Signals
GSCSG: Bl. PSIG weak infeed
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)
GSCSG: Blocking ARC
Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-320)
GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered
Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-315)
GSCSG: Send internal signal
Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-317)

Fig. 3-244, (p. 3-318)
Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-321)
Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-322)
GSCSG: Transient blocking
Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-315)
GSCSG: Trip A
Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-320)
GSCSG: Trip B
Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-320)
GSCSG: Trip C
Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-320)
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,N>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
IDMT: IN
Fig. 3-271, (p. 3-348)
IDMT: Starting A
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: Starting B
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
IDMT: Starting C
Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-345)
INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx
Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-42)

Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-52)
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-88)
Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-112)
Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-205)
Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-213)
Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-242)
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-274)
Fig. 3-209, (p. 3-276)
Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-277)
Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-291)
Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-310)
Fig. 3-312, (p. 3-396)
Fig. 3-315, (p. 3-399)
Fig. 3-316, (p. 3-401)
Fig. 3-335, (p. 3-423)
Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-429)
A2-8
INP: Oper. mode U xxx
Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-42)
INP: State U xxx
Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-42)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2 Internal Signals
LED: Fct.assig. Hxx red
Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-68)
LED: Oper. mode H xx
Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-68)
LED: State Hxx red
Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-68)
MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions
Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-91)
MAIN: Blck.2 sel.functions
Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-91)
MAIN: Protection active
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-88)
MAIN: Reset LED
Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-107)
MAIN: Time tag
Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-104)
MAIN: Trip A
Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-98)

Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-99)
MAIN: Trip B
Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-98)

Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-99)
MAIN: Trip C
Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-98)

Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-99)
MAIN: Trip signal 1
Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-100)
MEASO: Enable
Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-52)
MEASO: Output value x
Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-57)

Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp.
Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-53)
OUTP: Fct.assignment K xxx
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)

Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-63)
OUTP: Oper. mode K xxx
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
OUTP: State K xxx
Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-50)
P<>: P
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
P<>: P-
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
P<>: P+
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
P<>: Q
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
P<>: Q-
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
P<>: Q+
Fig. 3-299, (p. 3-381)
PSB: Asyn. power swing
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-184)
PSB: Ready
Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-183)
PSIG: Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-234)
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-234)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-9
P437
A2 Internal Signals
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-234)
PSIG: Frequ. monit. trigg.
Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-216)
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. A
Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-235)
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. B
Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-235)
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. C
Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-235)
PSIG: Receive
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed
Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-214)
PSIG: Transient blocking
Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-217)
PSIG: Trip channel 1
Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)

Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)

Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-220)

Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-222)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
PSIG: Trip enable
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 1
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-224)

Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-231)
A2-10
PSIG: Trip time elapsed
Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-214)
PSIG: Trip V<
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)
PSIG: V< triggered
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-236)

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A2 Internal Signals
PSIG: Weak inf. blocked
Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-233)
PSIG: Weak inf. ready
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-233)
Signal 1 EXT
Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-429)
Signal 2 EXT
Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-429)
SOTF: ARC blocked
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
SOTF: Line dead trig. en.
Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-211)
SOTF: Trip time elapsed
Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-210)
THERM: Block. by CTA error
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
THERM: I
Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-357)
THERM: With CTA
Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-353)
V<>: V< ready
Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-360)
V<>: Vneg
Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-367)
V<>: VNG
Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-370)
V<>: Vpos
Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-367)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A2-11
P437
A2-12
A2 Internal Signals
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A3
Glossary
Modules
A:
Communication module
B:
Digital bus module
L:
MMI module
Transient ground fault evaluation module
P:
Processor module
T:
Transformer module
V:
Power supply module
X:
Binary I/O module
Y:
Analog I/O module
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992,
IEC 617-12: modified 1991
Analog information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January
1981. To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols
have been used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom.
Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left
side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A3-1
P437
A3 Glossary
Symbol
Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of related
elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if
the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common
contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction.
Note:
D5Z08X1B
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or

more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control
block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements whose
common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow
direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or
more qualifiers.
Description of the example symbol in the left column
D5Z08X2B
Blue line: Contur
Dark red lines: Inputs
Green lines: Outputs
Green hash characters: Preferred location for the general

function qualifying symbol
Dark blue asterisk characters: Alternative location for the

general function qualifying symbol
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to several
symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger
elements, for example.
D5Z08X3B
Output block
An output block contains an output function common to several
symbols.
D5Z08X4B
A3-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A3 Glossary
Settable control block

The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address under
which the function shown in the text is implemented.
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
D5Z08X5B
Settable control block with function blocks

The digits in the function block show the settings that are
possible for this function.
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
1.0
5.0
1.0: 1.0 A
5.0: 5.0 A
The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding unit or

meaning to each setting.
D5Z08X6B
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
D5Z08XBB
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
D5Z08XAB
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
D5Z08X8B
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
D5Z08X7B
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
D5Z08X9B
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.
&
D5Z08XCB
OR element
D5Z08XDB
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is

1.
A3-3
P437
A3 Glossary
Threshold element
D5Z08XEB
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables

are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other
number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1.
D5Z08XFB
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number

if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
Delay element
t1
t2
D5Z08XGB
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time

delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time
delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds
or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
1
100ms
D5Z08XHB
The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to

1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, regardless of the
duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-flop is
retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any
other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
D5Z08XJB
Subtractor
D5Z08XKB
The output variable is the difference between the two input

variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to
a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal
D5Z08XLB
The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a

specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input
signal drops below the threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
D5Z08XMB
A3-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A3 Glossary
Non-stable flip-flop
D5Z08XNB
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is

generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts
with the input variable transition (synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with
the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.
D5Z08XOB
Band pass filter

50Hz
D5Z08XPB
The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input

signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are
attenuated.
Counter
+
R
D5Z08YFB
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are

counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1
resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.
D5Z08YGB
Signal level converter
L+
with electrical isolation between input and output.
V1
LD5Z08XQB
L+ = pos. voltage input

L = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A3-5
P437
A3 Glossary
Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to

DIN EN 60445)
A.1
A.2
IA
T1
D5Z08XRB
Phase identifiers for current inputs:
for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs
via transformer 1:
for
for
for
for
A: 1U
B: 1V
C: 1W
N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Item identifiers
for current transformers:
for
for
for
for
A: T1
B: T2
C: T3
N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for
for
for
for
A: T5
B: T6
C: T7
N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
D5Z08XSB
Special symbol
D5Z08XTB
A3-6
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit

operation).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A3 Glossary
V24
PC interface
12V
+12V
0V
RXD
TXD
with pin connections
D5Z08XVB
Multiplier
D5Z08XWB
The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two

input variables.
Divider
D5Z08XXB
The output variable is the result of the division of the two input
variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are
equal to the function in the function block.
D5Z08XYB
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy
the equation in the function block
2.5
D5Z08XZB
Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter Operation as follows:
Signal Name
Description
FT_RC: Fault recording n
Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address.

In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The
small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that
is irrelevant to the user.
305 100
The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in
Appendix.
DIST: VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
Signal names coded by a data model address are represented

by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is
given in Chapters Setting and Information and Control
Functions.
MAIN: General reset USER

[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal

name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A3-7
P437
A3 Glossary
Symbols Used
Symbol
Meaning
Time duration
Voltage, potential difference
Complex voltage
Electrical current
Complex current
Complex impedance
|Z|
Modulus of complex impedance
Frequency
Temperature in C
Sum, result
Unit of electrical resistance
Angle
Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current

and a defined voltage.
Time constant
Temperature difference in K
A3-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A4
Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101

(Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a
general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems.
A4.1.1
Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets
and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement
specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This
means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other
parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of
subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the
parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system
components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all
partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked [see National Preface
of EN 60870-5-101].
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain
parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling
factors for individually addressable measured values.
A4.1.1.1
Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
[]
Point-to-point configuration
[]
Multipoint-party line configuration
[]
Multiple point-to-point configuration
[]
Multipoint-star configuration
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-1
P437
A4.1.1.2
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

(See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction)
(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28,

Standardized
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[] 100 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 200 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 300 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 600 bit/s
[] 19200 bit/s
[] 1200 bit/s
[] 38400 bit/s
[] 56000 bit/s
[] 64000 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction)

(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28,
Standardized
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[] 100 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 200 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 300 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 600 bit/s
[] 19200 bit/s
[] 1200 bit/s
[] 38400 bit/s
[] 56000 bit/s
[] 64000 bit/s
A4-2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4.1.1.3
P437
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used
exclusively in this companion standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
[]
Balanced transmission
[]
Unbalanced transmission
Address Field of the Link
[]
Not present (balanced transmission only)
[]
One octet
[]
Two octets (balanced transmission only)
[]
Structured
[]
Unstructured
Frame Length
[240]
Maximum length L (number of octets)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-3
P437
A4.1.1.4
Application Layer
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
[]
One octet
[]
Two octets
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)

[]
One octet
[]
Structured
[]
Two octets
[]
Unstructured
[]
Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
[]
One octet
[]
Two octets (with originator address)
Selection of Standard ASDUs

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
[]
<1>
Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
[]
<2>
Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
[]
<3>
Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
[]
<4>
Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
[]
<5>
Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
[]
<6>
Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
[]
<7>
Bit string of 32 bit
M_BO_NA_1
[]
<8>
Bit string of 32 bit with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
[]
<9>
Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
[]
<10>
Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_ME_TA_1
[]
<11>
Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
[]
<12>
Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_TB_1
[]
<13>
Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
[]
<14>
Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
[]
<15>
Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
[]
<16>
Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
[]
<17>
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
[]
<18>
Packed start events of protection equipment with time

tag
ME_EP_TB_1
[]
<19>
Packed output circuit information of protection

equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
[]
<20>
Packed single-point information with status change

detection
M_PS_NA_1
[]
<21>
Measured value, normalized value without quality

descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

(Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-5
P437
[]
<45>
Single command
C_SC_NA_1
[]
<46>
Double command
C_DC_NA_1
[]
<47>
Regulating step command
C_IT_NA_1
[]
<48>
Set point command, normalized value
C_RC_NA_1
[]
<49>
Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
[]
<50>
Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
[]
<51>
Bit string of 32 bit
C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

[]
<70>
End of initialization
ME_EI_NA_1
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

[]
<100>
Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
[]
<101>
Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
[]
<102>
Read command
C_RD_NA_1
[]
<103>
Clock synchronization command
C_CS_NA_1
[]
<104>
Test command
C_TS_NB_1
[]
<105>
Reset process command
C_RP_NC_1
[]
<106>
Delay acquisition command
C_CD_NA_1

Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[]
<110> =
Parameter of measured value, normalized value
P_ME_NA_1
[]
<111> =
Parameter of measured value, scaled value
P_ME_NB_1
[]
<112> =
Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
[]
<113> =
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-6
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
[]
<120>
File ready
F_FR_NA_1
[]
<121>
Section ready
F_SR_NA_1
[]
<122>
Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
[]
<123>
Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
[]
<124>
Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
[]
<125>
Segment
F_SG_NA_1
[]
<126>
Directory
F_DR_TA_1
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-7
P437
A4.1.1.5
Basic Application Functions

Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[]
Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
[] Global
[] Group 1
[] Group 7
[] Group 13
[] Group 2
[] Group 8
[] Group 14
[] Group 3
[] Group 9
[] Group 15
[] Group 4
[] Group 10
[] Group 16
[] Group 5
[] Group 11
[] Group 6
[] Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[]
Clock synchronization
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
[]
Direct command transmission
[]
Select and execute command
[]
Direct set point command

transmission
[]
Select and execute set point

command
[]
C_SE ACTTERM used
[]
No additional definition
[]
Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the

outstation)
[]
Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the

outstation)
[]
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific
Parameter)
A4-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
[]
Counter request
[]
General request counter
[]
Counter freeze without reset
[]
Request counter group 1
[]
Counter freeze with reset
[]
[]
Counter reset
[]
[]
Addresses per group have to be specified

Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
[]
Threshold value
[]
Smoothing value
[]
Low limit for transmission of measured value
[]
High limit for transmission of measured value

Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
[]
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
[]
File transfer in monitor direction
F_FR_NA_1
[]
File transfer in control direction
F_FR_NA_1
A4.2
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103

This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions
applicable to the P437.
A4.2.1
Interoperability
A4.2.1.1
Physical Layer
A4.2.1.1.1
Electrical Interface
[]
EIA RS 485
[]
No. of loads: 32 for one device

Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be
operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-9
P437
A4.2.1.1.2
Optical Interface
[]
Glass fiber
[]
Plastic fiber
[]
F-SMA connector
[]
BFOC/2.5 connector
A4.2.1.1.3
Transmission Rate
[]
9600 bit/s
[]
19200 bit/s
A4.2.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
A4.2.1.3
Application Layer
A4.2.1.3.1
Transmission Mode for Application Data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 6087054 is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
A4.2.1.3.2
Common Address of ASDU
[]
One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
[]
More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
A4.2.1.3.3
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
[]
<0>
End of general interrogation
[]
<0>
Time synchronization
[]
<2>
Reset FCB
[]
<3>
Reset CU
[]
<4>
Start / restart
[]
<5>
Power on
A4-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Status Indications in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<16>
Auto-recloser active
(015 064) A RC : En able d
[]
<17>
Teleprotection active
(015 008) P SIG: Enabl ed
[]
<18>
Protection active
(003 030) MA IN: Devi ce on-l i ne
[]
<19>
LED reset
(021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. USER
[]
<20>
Blocking of monitor direction
(037 075) C OMM1 : Si g./meas .val. blo ck.
[]
<21>
Test mode
(037 071) MA IN: Te st mode
[]
<22>
Local parameter setting
[]
<23>
Characteristic 1
(036 090) P SS: PS 1 active
[]
<24>
Characteristic 2
[]
<25>
Characteristic 3
[]
<26>
Characteristic 4
[]
<27>
Auxiliary input 1
(034 000) L OGIC : I npu t 01 EXT
[]
<28>
Auxiliary input 2
(034 001) L OGIC : I npu t 02 EXT
[]
<29>
Auxiliary input 3
(034 002) L OGIC : I npu t 03 EXT
[]
<30>
Auxiliary input 4
(034 003) L OGIC : I npu t 04 EXT
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-11
P437
Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<32>
Measurand supervision I
(040 087) MCMON: Mea s. circ. I faulty
[]
<33>
Measurand supervision V
(038 023) MCMON: Mea s. circ. V fault y
[]
<35>
Phase sequence supervision
(038 049) MCMON: Ph ase se qu. V f aul ty
[]
<36>
Trip circuit supervision
(041 200) SFMON: Rel ay K xx faulty
(The message content is

formed from the OR operation
of the individual signals.)
[]
<37>
I>> back-up operation
(037 021) BUOC : A ctive
[]
<38>
VT fuse failure
(004 061) MA IN: M.c. b. trip V EXT
[]
<39>
Teleprotection disturbed
(036 060) P SI G: Te le com. fau lty
[]
<46>
Group warning
(036 100) SFMON: Warnin g ( re lay)
[]
<47>
Group alarm
(004 065) MA IN: Blocke d/f aul ty
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<48>
Earth fault A
[]
<49>
Earth fault B
[]
<50>
Earth fault C
[]
<51>
Earth fault forward, i.e. line
[]
<52>
Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
A4-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<64>
Start / pick-up A
(036 001) MA IN: Starti ng A
[]
<65>
Start / pick-up B
(036 002) MA IN: Starti ng B
[]
<66>
Start / pick-up C
(036 003) MA IN: Starti ng C
[]
<67>
Start / pick-up N
(036 004) MA IN: Starti ng GF
[]
<68>
General trip
(036 071) MA IN: Gen . tri p command 1
[]
<69>
Trip A
(036 072) MA IN: Tri p comman d 1, A
[]
<70>
Trip B
(036 073) MA IN: Tri p comman d 1, B
[]
<71>
Trip C
(036 074) MA IN: Tri p comman d 1, C
[]
<72>
Trip I>> (back-up operation)
(036 014) BUOC : Tri p s ignal
[]
<73>
Fault location X in ohms
(004 029) F T_DA : F aul t re act., pri m.
[]
<74>
Fault forward/line
(036 018) D IST: Fault f orw ard / LS
[]
<75>
Fault reverse/busbar
(036 019) D IST: Fault backw ar d / B S
[]
<76>
Teleprotection signal
transmitted
(036 035) P SI G: Sen d ( sign al)
[]
<77>
Teleprotection signal received
(037 029) P SI G: R ece ive (s ignal )
[]
<78>
Zone 1
(036 026) D IST: t1 e l apse d
[]
<79>
Zone 2
[]
<80>
Zone 3
[]
<81>
Zone 4
[]
<82>
Zone 5
[]
<83>
Zone 6
[]
<84>
General starting
(036 000) MA IN: Gen eral startin g
[]
<85>
Breaker failure
(036 017) C BF: CB failu re
[]
<86>
Trip measuring system A
[]
<87>
Trip measuring system B
[]
<88>
Trip measuring system C
[]
<89>
Trip measuring system N
[]
<90>
Trip I>
[]
<91>
Trip I>>
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-13
P437
INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<92>
Trip IN>
[]
<93>
Trip IN>>
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<128>
CB on by AR
(037 007) A RC : (Re ) clos e si gn al HSR
[]
<129>
CB on by long-time AR
(037 006) A RC : (Re ) clos e si gn al TDR
[]
<130>
AR blocked
(037 008) A RC : Not re ady
Measurands in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<144>
Measurand I
(006 041) MA IN: Cu rre nt B p. u.
(only with setting

COMM1: Tran sm.e n ab.cycl
.dat to ASDU 3.1 per IEC)
[]
<145>
Measurands I, V
(only with setting

(005 045) MA IN: V oltage A -B p.u.
COMM1: Tran sm.e n ab.cycl
[]
<146>
Measurands I, V, P, Q
(only with setting

(005 045) MA IN: V oltage A -B p.u.
COMM1: Tran sm.e n ab.cycl (004 051) MAIN: A ctive powe r P p. u.
(004 053) MA IN: Reac. pow er Q p.u.
[]
<147>
Measurands IN, VEN
(005 011) MA IN: Current ( IP ) p.u.
(005 013) MAI N: V olt. ( VP G)/3 p.u.

(only with setting
C OM M1 : Tran sm.en ab.cycl
[]
<148>
Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f (005 041) MAI N: Cu rre nt A p.u.

(006 041) MAIN: Curren t B p.u .
(only with setting
C OMM1 : Transm.e nab.cycl (007 041) MAI N: Cu rre nt C p. u.
.dat to ASDU 9 per IEC)
(005 043) MAIN: V ol tage A-G p.u .
(006 043) MA IN: Voltage B-G p.u .
(007 043) MA IN: Voltage C-G p. u.
(004 051) MA IN: Act ive power P p.u.
(004 053) MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q p.u.
(004 040) MAIN: Fre que ncy f
A4-14
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction

INF
Description
[]
<240>
Read headings of all defined groups
[]
<241>
Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[]
<243>
Read directory of a single entry
[]
<244>
Read value or attribute of a single entry
[]
<245>
General interrogation of generic data
[]
<249>
Write entry with confirmation
[]
<250>
Write entry with execution
[]
<251>
Write entry abort
A4.2.1.3.4
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
System Functions in Control Direction

INF
Description
[]
<0>
Initiation of general interrogation
[]
<0>
Time synchronization
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-15
P437
General Commands in Control Direction

INF
Description
P437 Designations
[]
<16>
Auto-recloser on/off
(015 064) A RC : En able d
[]
<17>
Teleprotection on/off
(015 008) P SIG: Enabl ed
[]
<18>
Protection on/off
(003 030) MA IN: Devi ce on-l i ne
[]
<19>
LED reset
(021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. U SER
[]
<23>
Activate characteristic 1
(003 060) P SS: Param .s u bs. se l. USE R
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
1.)
[]
<24>
(Switches
2.)
[]
<25>
(Switches
3.)
[]
<26>
(Switches
4.)
A4-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Generic Functions in Control Direction

INF
Description
[]
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
[]
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[]
<243> Read directory of a single entry
[]
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
[]
<245> General interrogation of generic data
[]
<248> Write entry
[]
<249> Write entry with confirmation
[]
<250> Write entry with execution
[]
<251> Write entry abort
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A4-17
P437
A4.2.1.3.5
Basic Application Functions
[]
Test mode
[]
Blocking of monitor direction
[]
Disturbance data
[]
Generic services
[]
Private data
A4.2.1.3.6
Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in
Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value.
In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is
only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value
Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by
1.2
or
2.4
Current A
[]
[]
Current B
[]
[]
Current C
[]
[]
Voltage A-G
[]
[]
Voltage B-G
[]
[]
Voltage C-G
[]
[]
Enabled power P
[]
[]
Reactive power Q
[]
[]
Frequency f
[]
[]
Voltage A-B
[]
[]
A4-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
A5
P437 Version History
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
301
Initial product release.
401
601
Diagram
Release: 2000-06-09

Software
P437
Hardware
301
No changes.
401
601-701
Diagram
Release: 2000-08-28
No changes.
Software
COMM1
Bug fixing:
P437
Hardware
302
As an alternative there is now an optional

communication module available providing an IRIG-B
input for clock time synchronization.
402
602
Release: 2000-11-20
Bug fixing in MODBUS protocol.
Diagram
The updated diagram now includes the new IRIG-B
interface.
Software
IRIGB
P437
Hardware
302
No changes.
402
602-702
New function used for clock time synchronization as per

IRIG-B standard.
Diagram
Release: 2001-02-20
No changes.
Software
COMM1
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Various modifications of protocols to be consistent with

MiCOM standards.
A5-1
P437
A5 P437 Version History
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
302
No changes.
402
602-703
Diagram
Release: 2001-07-27
No changes.
Software
MAIN
P437
Realization of a single-pole enabling/disabling of the

protection via the binary input function (003 026)
MA IN: Disable protect. EX T.
Hardware
303
An additional variant with ring-terminal connection is

now available.
402/403
603
As an alternative there is now an optional

communication module available, providing two serial
interfaces and an IRIG-B input for time synchronization.
Release: 2002-01-28
Installing the devices into a panel is now possible in

two variants: with and without angle brackets. The
dimensional drawings for the cases and the required
panel cutouts are included in the supporting documents
supplied with the devices. Also included in the
supporting documents are assembly diagrams and
terminal connection diagrams.
The binary (I/O) module X(6xO) is now optionally
available with rapid-response output by 4 thyristors.
Diagram
The updated diagram 402 now includes the additional
COMM2 interface.
Diagram 403 describes the variant with ring terminal
connection.
Software
A5-2
FT_DA
Extended setting range for fault location output.
SFMON
Correction in the range of peripheral fault signals

SFMON: Me as. ci rc. V f aul ty.
PSIG, ARC,
ASC, GFSC,
GSCSG
New functionality with equal-priority enabling or

disabling of a function via any device interface.
PSB
The Power Swing Blocking function has been revised

completely. An Out of Step tripping has also been
added.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
The permissive signaling scheme logic is further

accelerated by processing the send and trip decisions
within the distance task.
Improvement of the weak-infeed logic.
P437
COMM2
Logical communication interface 2 (function group

COMM2) added to communication.
DIST
Minimum starting time is now reduced to less than

10 ms. The distance zones may now be blocked
individually via appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
603-704
Diagram
Release: 2002-02-13
No changes.
Software
f<>
P437
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
603-705
Bug fixing.
Diagram
Release: 2002-08-09
No changes.
Software
LOC
P437
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
604
The Russian character set has been corrected.
Diagram
Release: 2002-10-29
No changes.
Software
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
MAIN
The acquisition of pole-selective CB status signals has

been added, and the application of these status signals
adapted to and enhanced in functions ARC, PSIG,
GSCSG and MCMON.
PSIG, ARC,
ASC, GFSC,
GSCSG
The functionality of equal-priority enabling or disabling

a function via any device interface is modified now in
such a way, that the functions are enabled by default.
A5-3
P437
Version
Changes
MEASO
P437
Hardware
304
A new communication module A, providing the

InterMiCOM protective interface COMM3 (InterMiCOM),
is available now as an ordering option.
404/405
605
Release: 2002-11-19
Scaling of the BCD coded output of measurands now

allows the setting of an output values range. This
feature is required if signed event measurands are
assigned to the BCD output (like fault location or shortcircuit reactance,).
Diagram
The new connection diagrams include the InterMiCOM
communication interface (function group COMM3).
P437-404 (pin-terminal connection)
P437-405 (ring-terminal connection)
Software
IDMT
Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the

characteristic IEC extremely inverse is now within the
claimed tolerance range.
Residual current measuring system: it is now possible
to select whether the residual current value calculated
from the three phase currents or the current value
measured by the fourth CT is to be applied.
The enable logic within the parameter subsets has
been enhanced and adapted to the other devices in the
MiCOM Px3x range.
DTOC
Residual current measuring system: it is now possible

to select whether the residual current value calculated
from the three phase currents or the current value
measured by the fourth CT is to be applied.
DTOC ground fault protection is now able to operate in
directional mode.
MAIN
The values range for the primary power measured

values has been expanded.
New input signals allow direct transfer tripping without
use of protective signaling scheme logic (function
group PSIG).
A5-4
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1
P437
IEC-60850-5-103: The trip signal of back-up

overcurrent (BUOC) was transmitted with ASDU 1
(instead of ASDU 2).
IEC 60870-5-103: For the reclose commands of

high-speed and time-delayed reclosing (Function
Type 80h, Information Numbers 80h and 81h), the
status changes On to Off were signaled
spontaneously and were transmitted as part of
the response to a general scan.
GSCSG
The status signal GSCSG: Te lecom. f aul ty EXT was

made available in conjunction with the implementation
of the InterMiCOM protective interface.
f<>
Measurements of minimum frequency during an

underfrequency situation and maximum frequency
during an overfrequency situation have been added.
COMM3
New function group COMM3 (InterMiCOM protection

interface) permits end-end channel-aided schemes to
be configured, without the need of discrete carrier
equipment.
Hardware
304
No changes.
404/405
605-706
Bug fixing:
Diagram
Release: 2003-01-30
No changes.
Software
IDMT
When ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior

according to characteristic are selected, the trip signal
now resets as soon as 3% of the reset time has been
exceeded. In previous versions the trip signal was only
reset when the reset time had elapsed completely.
The direction characteristic for short circuit direction
measurement based on negative-sequence current and
voltage is now corrected.
DTOC
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
DTOC ground fault protection stages set with no time

delay (e.g. DTOC: tI N> P Sx = 0 s) are processed with
a higher priority so as to ensure tripping times of
< 30 ms.
A5-5
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC
Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the

characteristic IEC extremely inverse is now within the
claimed tolerance range.
Bug notice: With this version only non-directional
timer stage t3 will not operate when timer stage t2 is
set to blocked.
P437
Hardware
304
No changes.
404/405
605-707
Diagram
Release: 2003-02-12
No changes.
Software
COMM3
P437
Minor modifications so that telegram errors on

communication channels with heavy noise interference
are better identified.
Hardware
304
Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold

are now available. Installation is only recommended if
the application specifically requires such binary signal
inputs.
404/405
605-708
Release: 2003-07-28
Diagram
No changes.
Software
COMM1
DIST
Advanced communications software was designed to

cope with communication problems with ESC field
units.
Bug fixing:
DIST, PSIG
A5-6
The distance protection function could fail to

operate when angle settings 0 and zone
extension factors kze > 2 were combined.
The PSIG send signal is now being processed within the

distance protection function to get very short signal
processing times.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
Bug fixing:
ARC
Bug fixing:
P437
Voltage-measuring circuit monitoring was

incorrectly blocked by the general starting
(instead of the distance protection starting). This
bug does not apply to the processing of the m.c.b.
trip signal input and the fuse failure monitoring
function.
If configured into the trip command 1 the signal

(120 046) MAIN: Trans fe r tri p. E XT did not
lead to a start of ARC.
Hardware
305
This version is project-specific and only available on

request!
406/407
606
The Ethernet communication module is available.
Release: 2003-11-11
Diagram
The updated connection diagrams now include the

interfaces for the Ethernet communication module:
P437 406 (for 84 TE case, pin-terminal

connection)
P437 407 (for 84 TE, ring-terminal connection)
Software
UCA2
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
607
Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication

protocol.
Diagram
Release: 2004-05-03
No changes.
Software
SOTF
Bug fixing:
UCA2
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A transient undervoltage starting could occur with

the switching on of a feeder, which led to an
overreaction when the function SOTF was applied,
with the operating mode set to Trip with starting.
Extension to the expanded spontaneous signaling

range. In addition, GOOSE messages and fault
transmission are now supported.
A5-7
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
The transient blocking has been extended to block any

distance zone trip decisions for 2 cycles after the global
direction decision changed from backwards to forwards
(only).
DTOC
In order to better control transient effects with the

protection of series-compensated lines the direction
determination of the DTOC ground fault protection now
operates with a 2-cycle Fourier filter.
PSB
Extension of the power swing detection function by the

operating mode Z. Here the rate of change of the
resistance component of positive-sequence impedance,
when entering the power swing polygon, is interpreted.
SFMON
A number of device bugs previously led to a blocking

with the second entry to the monitoring signal memory
(i.e. if the recurring fault was already stored in the
monitoring signal memory see Chapter
Troubleshooting in the Technical Manual). This
reaction was modified in such a manner that device
blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the
same device fault lies within a set memory retention
time (021 018) SF MON : Mon .sig. re te ntion. This
makes it possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting
from control actions, without having to clear the
monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to
accommodate this new feature. The time stamp now
represents the last appearance of the fault.
MAIN
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
608
The parameter (010 049) MAI N: Rotar y f iel d was

renamed to (010 049) MA IN: P hase s e que nce. In
addition the parameter selection for clockwise and
anticlockwise was also changed to A-B-C and A-C-B.
Diagram
Release: 2004-07-23
No changes.
Software
A5-8
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
The new signals (037 252) MAIN: Trip si gn al 1, 1 p

and (037 253) MAIN: Tri p si gnal 1, 3p replace the
previous signals MA IN: 1-pol e tr ip and MA IN: 3pole tri p.
The CB close time (e.g. time from close command to
closing of CB contacts) can now be set at MA IN:
tCB,close (000 032). This time duration may be
applied in the function ASC for the new functionality
switch on at point of synchronism.
PSIG
The new signal (037 255) PSIG: Trans ie nt blocking

is now available.
ARC
HSR was extended by the 3-pole (only for 1p) operating

mode. With this setting there is a three-pole HSR only
with single-pole ground faults.
The operating mode may now be set via binary signal
inputs.
The setting range of the discrimination time has been
extended to 0.00 600.00 s.
GSCSG
COMM1
ASC
The new signal (037 254) GSC SG: Tran si ent

bl ocki ng is now available.
Bug fixing:
DNP3: Double transmission of spontaneous

signals is now reliably prevented.
MODBUS: Status signals of LED indicators are now

supported.
IEC 870-5-101: Conversion from the 3-byte time

tag (only for time of day) to the 7-byte time tag
(time of day and date) at COMM1: Time tag
l en gt h is now supported.
New functionality Switch on at point of synchronism:

In slightly asynchronous networks the reclose
command can be controlled in such a way that it will be
issued at the exact point of synchronism.
The close command conditions can now be set
individually for ARC and manual closing.
The reference voltage Vref and the voltage from the
corresponding measuring loop are stored as event
data.
FT_RC
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
The signal (036 050) A RC: Bl ockin g EXT is now

stored in the fault recording (previously only the
resulting signal (004 069) A RC: Blocke d was
recorded).
A5-9
P437
Version
Changes
COMM2
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
608-711
It is now possible to select by setting (103 203)

COMM2: P ositi ve ackn . fault whether a fault read
out at COMM2 is to be acknowledged positively and
consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface or not.
Diagram
Release: 2004-10-21
No changes.
Software
FT_DA
The measuring window for fault data acquisition is

determined by the distance element for fault durations
shorter than 55 ms.
The output of the primary short-circuit reactance
(004 029) F T_DA : F au lt react., prim. is now made
in the same way as the fault location.
Bug fixing:
Fault locations of numerical values >655.35%

were falsely displayed as small values.
COMM1
The fault location (004 029) FT_DA : Fau lt react. ,

prim. (Function Type 80h, Information Number 49h),
will no longer be sent spontaneously, if its value is Not
measured.
PSIG
The blocking logic for the weak-infeed logic was

extended.
With the occurrence of a general starting no longer an
immediate output of the send signal is done when the
operating mode was set to Blocking scheme. It is now
only possible to send the blocking signal within the
distance protection task after the distance directional
decision backward or zone 6 decision is determined
(depending on the operating mode set for sending).
ARC
P437
Function change: There is no longer a zone extension

with a rapid reclosure (RRC) when the parameter at
A RC: Zone ext.du r. RC P Sx (015 088) is set to
Following HSR.
Hardware
306
406/407
609
Release: 2005-02-25
A5-10
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering

option, additional operating thresholds for the binary
signal inputs:
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) (Order ext. No.

463)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) (Order ext. No.

464)
Installation of the standard variant is generally

recommended if the application does not specifically
require such binary signal inputs with higher operating
thresholds.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
FT_RC
COMM1
The recording duration for binary tracks is now limited

to 1 minute in order to prevent recording of endless
events.
Bug fixing:
MAIN
DIST
The direct transfer trip function has now been extended

by dedicated send signals so as to avoid latching,
which could occur when the trip signal was used as a
send signal.
Bug fixing:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Where the Courier protocol was selected a device

warm restart occurred when individual
communication parameters (e.g. baud rate,
address, etc.) were changed.
An erroneous loop selection could occur with a

two-phase short circuit fault between phases C
and A, which then led to incorrect distance and
directional decisions, when only the overcurrent
starting for phase A was triggered and phase C
starting was only activated because of a current
plausibility check [setting (010 040) MAIN:
Tran sfe r f or 1p = P or G =f(Imed,Imax)]
A5-11
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
Bug fixing:
SOTF
In one case an unwanted overreaction of the fuse

failure monitoring function was observed, which
led to distance protection blocking when a short
circuit in the power system had occurred. In the
new version the functional sequence has been
enhanced and the default value for the negative
voltage threshold was set to a higher value:
(031 056) MCMON: Vne g>, F F = 0.16 Vnom).
The function parameters are now available in the

parameter subsets so as to provide adjustment to
changed operating conditions.
An additional sensitive ground overcurrent threshold is
now available.
Bug notice: Unfortunately this current threshold is
permanently active (not limited to the duration of the
manual close time) and can therefore not be applied
as intended.
PSIG
The tripping logic in the Zone extension operating

mode has been accelerated by additionally processing
this logic within the distance protection task. Now
typical tripping times of 20 30 ms can be obtained
(without delay from signal transmission).
The weak-infeed logic has been extended by an
external blocking option: P SIG: Bl ock. we ak i nf .
EXT
ARC
Bug fixing:
IDMT
The change of operating mode via binary inputs

previously was only accepted if the relay was
switched from off-line mode back to on-line mode.
Bug notice: In this version the directional dependence

of the residual current stage is not operational.
The residual current stage has been enhanced by a
minimum trip time and a minimum trip current
threshold.
P437
Hardware
306
No changes.
406/407
609-712
Diagram
Release: 2005-0x-xx
No changes.
Software
A5-12
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
P437
Hardware
306
No changes.
406/407
609-713
When P SI G: Operati ng mode PSx = Release

scheme and P SI G: Oper. mode se nd P Sx = Direct.dependent are combined, a send signal with
interruptions may occur.
Diagram
Release: 2005-10-30
No changes.
Software
ASC
P437
Bug fixing:
The internal timer clock was corrupted during the

ASC operative time. This led to implausible time
tags added to binary signals, which in turn made
fault records difficult to interpret. Protection
functions were in no way affected.
The offset angle ASC: P hi off se t P Sx) was

taken into account but by a factor of 10 less than
required (for instance when set to 90 an internal
value of only 9 was taken into account).
Hardware
307
An optional processor board with a DSP coprocessor is

now available. This coprocessor provides a better
overall performance of the supplementary functions of
the device.
408/409
610
Release: 2006-02-26
Diagram
The designation texts of the binary signal inputs and

output relays have been replaced by the standard Px3x
texts, i.e. the designation comprises the board location
number (1 or 2 digits) followed by a consecutive
number (2 digits).
Example: K2001 replaces K201 (= first relay in slot 20).
Software
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-13
P437
Version
Changes
SFMON
The configuration table of the user defined alarm

condition has been extended by the instantaneous and
timed outputs 3032(t) of the programmable LOGIC:
(098 053) SFMON: Ou tput 30 ~ (042 090)

LOGI C: Ou tpu t 30
(098 054) SFMON: Output 30 ( t) ~ (042 091)

LOGIC: Outpu t 30 (t)
(098 055) SFMON: Ou tput 31 ~ (042 092)

LOGI C: Ou tput 31
(098 056) SF MO N: Ou tpu t 31 (t) ~ (042 093)

L O GIC : Outpu t 31 ( t)
(098 057) SF MO N: Outpu t 32 ~ (042 094)

LO GIC : Output 32
(098 058) SFMON: Ou tpu t 3 2 (t) ~ (042 095)

LOGIC: Output 3 2 ( t)
These logic outputs are included in the warning signals

by setting SFMON: Fct. ass ign . war nin g and they
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal
under complex application conditions. This signaling
has no influence on the device's operation (i.e. no
warm restart or blocking).
MAIN
Priority control of clock synchronization is now settable.

In view of the 3-pole (only for 1p) ARC operating
mode the phase-selective direct transfer trip logic has
been modified so that no 3-pole transfer trip will occur
with single-pole faults.
A distance-based phase selection logic has been
implemented, which allows phase selective 1-pole
tripping of ground faults by integrated supplementary
functions (e.g. GFSC or DTOC ground fault protection)
or from external parallel protection devices operating in
3-pole mode (e.g. phase comparison protection).
CBF
A5-14
The complete revision of the circuit breaker failure

protection function now includes a current breaking-off
criterion.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
DIST
The ground fault starting condition has been made

settable by an OR-linked or an AND-linked
condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds, if the system
star point is low-impedance grounded (setting at
(001 249) MA IN: Ground s tarti ng P Sx).
It can be selected whether grading timers are triggered
from the general starting condition or with the
respective zone starting signal.
Zone 1 and 2 now can be blocked during 1-pole HSR
dead time.
The reactance reach of the zones can now be set
separately for phase-ground and phase-phase
measuring loops.
The max. settable reach value has been extended to
400 .
MCMON
FT_RC
Fuse failure detection is blocked now during CB open

conditions.
Bug fixing:
The logging of the following signals was done in

the next processing cycle, typically 10 ms later
than when the actual state changed:
SOTF
(037 254) GSCSG: Trans ie nt blocki ng

(035 047) DTOC: Fau lt N f orward
(035 048) DTOC: Faul t N backward
The function has been supplemented by a Line dead

detector e.g. SOTF will only be active if the line has
been de-energized for at least a set minimum time
period.
The parameters (011 060) SO TF : Man . clos e timer
PSx and (011 061) SOTF: Ope ratin g mode P Sx
have been moved to the parameter sets.
Bug fixing:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
The residual current stage is now active only

during the manual close time.
PSIG
In view of the 3-pole (only for 1p) ARC operating

mode the weak-infeed logic has been modified so that
no 3-pole trip will occur with single-pole faults.
ARC
The function is now also available when DIST is blocked

by a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit (MCMON)
and BUOC is not configured (external backup
protection), but it is without rapid reclosure (RRC).
A5-15
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC
By setting a parameter, either the internally calculated

value or the measured value for the neutral-point
displacement voltage can now be used.
The directional measurement has been enhanced by a
settable compensation reactance (zero-sequence
current compensation method) to allow correct
operation on series-compensated lines irrespective of
the power system's supply conditions.
GSCSG
The user-settable blocking conditions have been

expanded so as to deal safely with time-critical
applications in conjunction with the ARC function.
DTOC
Triggering of the residual current timer stages can now

occur either when the current threshold is exceeded or,
additionally when a directional decision is made
(settable).
Negative-sequence and residual current stages may
now be set so that they are blocked during the 1-pole
dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC
cycle.
The directional dependence of the ground fault stages
may now be blocked by a binary signal input function;
when blocked the respective stage operates as nondirectional.
IDMT
Directional measurement, based on the negativesequence current has been adapted to the new method
as implemented in GFSC, and the previously fixed
compensation impedance has been replaced by a
settable compensation reactance.
Bug fixing:
INP
The ground fault stage operated always as nondirectional, regardless of the setting.
The mean acquisition time for binary input signals has

been reduced:
with DSP: mean value is 2.1 ms (range 0 6 ms)
without DSP: mean value is 6.5 ms (range 0

12 ms).
Note: This software version is compatible to all

previous hardware versions.
A5-16
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
IEC, GOOSE,
GSSE
Implementation of the new substation communication

protocol per IEC 61850 standard.
Implementation of communication procedures for the
exchange of binary information in an Ethernet network
section.
Function group GSSE is compatible to previous UCA2GOOSE. Function group GOOSE is acc. to IEC 61850GOOSE.
UCA2
COMM3,
OUTP, LED,
MAIN, LOGIC
P437
Bug fixing:
In the selection list for the configuration of the

output relays, LED indicators, the InterMiCOM
communication interface, of the trip commands
and of the function assignment of the Boolean
equations the signal L OGIC: Out put 32 ( t)
(042 095) was missing.
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
610-714
The substation communication protocol per UCA2

standard is not supported with this firmware version.
Diagram
Release: 2006-09-20
No changes.
Software
MCMON
BUOC
Bug fixing:
The Ineg monitoring was without function.
The signal (040 087) MCMON: Meas . circ. I

f aul ty could not become active.
Bug fixing:
P437
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
610-715
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Correct BUOC tripping times were re-established.

With the last version a change was implemented
to allow that ARC remains ready in case of a
voltage measurement circuit failure, even if no
BUOC protection is configured. Unfortunately, due
this change, the BUOC then tripped
instantaneously if ARC was ready. Moreover, an
HSR cycle was initiated from the BUOC trip, even
if the BUOC operating mode is set to Without
ARC.
Diagram
A5-17
P437
Version
Changes
Release: 2006-10-09
No changes.
Software
COMM1
IEC
P437
Bug fixing:
If communication was interrupted during control

access via the Ethernet interface using the
operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control
access was only possible after a warm restart of
the P437.
Previously a break in the client-server

communications link could occur after
approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes.
GOOSE and GSSE are not affected.
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
611
The upgraded communications software 3.18 is now

implemented. Various small bugs have been fixed in
communication protocols per IEC 60870-5-101 and
MODBUS.
Diagram
Release: 2007-02-28
No changes.
Software
COMM1
DIST
The following spontaneous messages were missing in

the IEC 608705 protocol:
(034 047) MA IN: Man ual tri p s ignal A
(034 048) MA IN: Manu al trip si gn al B
(034 048) MA IN: Man ual tri p s ignal C
Improved measuring logic to provide fast 3-pole

tripping in case of phase-phase-ground faults, with one
phase-ground loop impedance getting significantly
slower into zone 1.
The underimpedance starting logic has been improved
to pick up faster in case of faults with almost no change
in current magnitude.
The directional characteristic is now settable.
A5-18
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
PSB
Separate counters for number of stable swings as well

as number of pole slips have been implemented. These
counters are equipped with settable limits at which
binary signals are raised that could be used for tripping
purposes.
Bug fixing:
The measurement of Delta Z was not always

carried out correctly when the positive-sequence
impedance moved into the power swing polygon
from left to right.
The maximum blocking time is now re-started

again with each entry into the power swing
polygon.
SOTF
The SOTF dead line detection logic can now be enabled

or disabled.
PSIG
Transient blocking timer is now always started upon

reset of DIST backward direction decision.
The scheme logic has been enhanced to cope 3-ended
line applications.
The distance dependent send logic has been modified
for improved operation in case of 2pG faults: If fault
direction signals forward and backward are present at
the same time, the send signal is based on the
selective Z1 decision only (not on Z1e).
Bug fixing:
ARC
In distance-dependent blocking scheme, the PSIG

tripping time was not started, if the zone timing
setting was (001 236) DIST: Zone tim er
start = With zone starting.
Zone 1 extension tripping during reclosing is now

executed from ARC (in case of setting (015 088) ARC:
Zon e ext.dur. R C P Sx = Following HSR or Always),
even if PSIG is in operation.
The duration of the zone extension is as long as the set
reclose command (015 067 MA IN: Cl ose cmd.pulse
time), even if the reclose command is stopped
because of the close-signal from the CB (015 042
MA IN: R C i nh ib.by CB clos e = Yes).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-19
P437
Version
Changes
ASC
The selection of voltage control conditions (operating

modes) has been enlarged by an exclusive-OR
condition, i.e. (re-)closing is enabled, if exactly one side
is dead while the other side must be live (setting
abbreviated N V&Vref or V&n Vref means (NOT V
AND Vref) OR (V AND NOT Vref)).
When the operating mode is set to Vref & Z1 but not V
the significance of Z1 is extended so that with a trip
from distance zone 1 OR a PSIG trip the condition is
met. This then makes reclosing possible if the primary
fault was on the protected line.
GSCSG
Transient blocking timer is now always started upon

reset of a GSCSG backward direction decision (039 091
GFSC: Fau lt backward / BS).
The selection list for user defined blocking conditions
(002 180 GSCSG: Fct.ass ign. bl ocking) has been
further expanded by internal trip decisions as well as
parallel and transfer trip signals.
In case of (006 009) GF SC : V irtual curr en t pol . =
Yes the tripping timer is now started from (039 088)
GFSC: IN> tri gge r ed signal only.
P<>
Directional power protection function is now available.
GFSC
The user settable blocking condition of the function has

been changed to an m-out-of-n selection, using the
same enlarged list as for GSCSG. Consequentially, the
previous setting (002 137) GFSC: Block. w. DIST
start is removed.
For ground faults with small neutral displacement
voltage an optional virtual current polarisation has
been implemented. This feature uses a faulty phase
selector, which is based on the measured change of
phase currents.
P437
GFSC, GSCSG
The priority of GFSC and of the signaling scheme

(GSCSG) has been changed to provide faster 1-pole
trips.
IEC
Implementation of the communication protocol has

been extended:
A second SNTP server is supported.
VLAN priority can be set.
Hardware
308
408/409
612
Release: 2007-12-31
A5-20
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
The device is now equipped with a new HMI, which

provides 6 additional keys and LED indicators.
Six freely configurable LEDs (H18 to H23) are

situated next to six freely configurable function
keys.
All of the freely configurable LEDs (H4 to H16 and

H18 to H23) are provided as multi-color type
LEDs.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
IEC
Implementation of active monitoring of the

communications data links to logged-on clients with the
parameter (104 062) IEC: TCP ke e p-al ive t im e r.
This active monitoring now replaces previous passive
monitoring by parameter (104 050) IEC: I nact ivi ty
ti me r.
Instead of setting a router address and target network,
so as to establish a communication link to a client
situated exterior to the local network, now only the
setting of the gateway address is required via
(104 011) IEC: Gat eway addr es s.
Now unbuffered reports are available for all logical
nodes.
I EC : De adban d val ue (104 051) was divided into
several individual settings:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
(104 229) I EC: Update Me as u rem en ts
(104 230) I EC : De ad band IP
(104 231) IE C: D ead ban d IN
(104 232) IE C: D ead ban d V PP
(104 233) I EC : De ad band VP G
(104 234) IE C: D ead ban d f
(104 235) IEC : De ad band P
(104 236) IEC: Dead ban d ph i
(104 237) IEC: Dead ban d Z
(104 238) IEC: De ad band mi n/max
(104 239) I EC: De ad band ASC
(104 240) IEC: Dead ban d te mp.
(104 241) I EC: De ad band 2 0mA
A5-21
P437
Version
Changes
With this version resetting options have been extended

such that now there is a corresponding external signal
available for each manual reset function; now the
respective counter or memory can be reset by an
appropriately assigned binary signal.
Similar to this all manual reset parameters have been
renamed by adding the phrase USER to the
descriptive text (it may be abbreviated so that the max
number of characters allowed is not exceeded).
Example:
LOC
MAIN: Ge ne ral r e se t was renamed to MAIN:

Gen eral re set USER.
A selection of memories to be reset may now be

assigned (with the new parameter LOC: Fct. rese t
k ey) to the CLEAR key situated on the local control
panel. Now each time the CLEAR key is pressed not
only the LED indicators and the display are reset but
the selected memory is also reset immediately.
Additionally two menu jump lists are now available that
can have functions assigned by setting these new
parameters:
LOC: Fct. men u jmp l is t 1 and
LOC: Fct. men u jmp l is t 2
The parameter (080 110) has been renamed to LO C:

Fct. rea d ke y (080 110) without any changes in their
functionality.
LOC, MAIN
F_KEY
Two menu jump lists may now be configured. These

menu jump lists make it possible to select individual
menu points (i.e. set values, counters, triggering
functions, event logs) in a freely definable sequence.
(030 238) L OC : Fct. me nu jmp l ist 1
(030 239) LOC: Fct. men u jmp l is t 2
The new control panel (HMI) is fitted with 6 freely

configurable function keys which may be used either as
switches or keys, and are password protected.
Because of this the function group F_KEY Configurable
Function Keys has been added.
A5-22
LED
The function group LED was enhanced to do the colorspecific settings related to the multi-colored LEDs.
SFMON
The following signals have been added to the selection

lists for the warning (Alarm) signaling:
(098 132) SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG
(098 128) SFMON: Se ttin g e r ror P SB
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
The following signal has been added to the selection

list for relay fault (Blocked/faulty) signaling:
DIST
(098 132) SFMON: M.c. b. trip V NG
The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/

3 (instead of Vnom):
DIST: V NG> P Sx
DIST: VNG>> P Sx
Bug fixing:
In the unlikely case that mutual compensation is

used and the ground factor angle kG of the line
was set > 0, the impedance measurement of
phase-ground loops was using a wrong neutral
current compensation. This error affects only
standard processor hardware without DSP
coprocessor (up to 306). It results in false
directional decisions, which would have been
identified during normal commissioning tests.
PSB
The Out of Step tripping feature is enhanced by a new

Counting-based Tripping features and settable OOS
detection zones, which allow different operation,
depending on whether the electrical center of the
power swing is on the protected line or outside.
SOTF
A new option SOTF: A cti vation mode PSx allows for

switching the function permanently active during dead
line condition.
The undervoltage threshold of the dead line detector is
changed to the new value 0.7 Vnom/3. Furthermore,
the dead line detector has been enhanced by an
undercurrent detector and an operate-delay timer.
The detection of a dead line and SOTF activation is
now signaled:
(006 147) SOTF: Li ne dead
(006 146) SOTF: Acti ve
SOTF is enhanced by an additional phase overcurrent

detection.
PSIG
A new option PSIG: Start cond. tV< PSx (006 148)

allows for having the weak-infeed timer triggered only
if the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed
starting are both present.
There is now a phase-selective signaling of tripping of
the weak-infeed logic:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
(006 152) P SIG: Tri p V <, A
(006 153) PSIG: Tri p V<, B
(006 154) PSI G: Tri p V <, C
A5-23
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC, GSCSG
The signal DIST: Ge ne ral starting (036 240) has

been added to the selection lists for user-defined
GFSC / GSCSG blocking conditions.
GSCSG
The current reversal condition has been changed so

that transient blocking gets established each time the
GFSC: Fau lt backward / BS (039 091) decision
resets (whether or not a forward decision comes up is
of no relevance any more).
The GSCSG Trip timer is now triggered by GFSC: Fault
forward / LS (039 090) decision instead of starting
condition only.
The blocking of the function in case of a voltage
measuring circuit failure is now changed in the same
way as done with GFSC since version 610: If GFSC
operates on measured VNG, then the functions get only
blocked, if this VNG measuring circuit is defect,
otherwise, if GFSC operates on VNG calculated from the
3 phase voltages, then the functions get blocked, if the
3phase voltage measuring circuit is defect.
DTOC
The following parameter is now set in units of Vnom/3

(instead of Vnom):
LIMIT
CBF
P437
The following parameter isnow set in units of Vnom/3

(instead of Vnom):
(014 043) LIMIT: V NG>
(014 044) L IMIT: V NG>>
The signal (036 017) C BF: CB f ailu re is now available

as compatible IEC 608705103 spontaneous message.
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
613
DTOC: VNG> PSx
Diagram
Release: 2009-06-15
No changes.
Software
A5-24
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
MMXU: Limitation of number of reports: Only those

measured values out of a report are transmitted the
value of which has changed by a delta greater than the
dead band. (Previously all values were transmitted
whenever one of the values changed by a delta greater
than the dead band.)
Bug fixing:
Comtrade fault transmission: Error with 5 A

nominal current. The rated secondary current
(1 A / 5 A) is taken into account for scaling of the
measured values.
The automatically generated data file names are

now correct with fault numbers exceeding 999.
Data file names are issued according to this
format:
yyyymmdd_HHMMSS_xxx_rNNNN.eee
With: yyyy = year
mm = month
dd = day
HH = hour
MM = minute
SS = second
xxx = millisecond
r = permanent single character
NNNN = fault number
eee = file extension
In previous versions the dot (.) was overwritten
for fault numbers exceeding 999.
MAIN
Circuit breaker position signaling operates correctly

now even if only the binary input MA IN: C B closed
3 p EXT is configured.
The option COMM1 for the source of clock
synchronization was renamed to COMM1/IEC.
Bug fixing:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Without external clock synchronization (IRIG-B or

via communication protocol) there were leaps
(typ. 7 hours) in the system time.
The setting parameter MAI N: Grou nd st arting

P Sx was without function, ground starting always
occured based upon IN> OR VNG>.
A5-25
P437
Version
Changes
DIST
The following parameters have been given new default

values:
DIST: Zfw,PG PSx 0
D IST: Zf w,P P P Sx 0
D IST: kze ,PG HSR PSx 1.50
DIST: kze ,P P H SR P Sx 1.50
D IST: kze ,PG TDR P Sx 1.50
D IST: kze ,PP TDR P Sx 1.50
The selection of formulae for calculating the PG

impedances of the starting measuring system (to avoid
under impedance startings due to apparent
impedances) was enhanced by another option, which
uses the real value of the ground factor kG:
ZPG =
VPG
I P (1 + kG )
This calculation method is selected by setting D IST: Z

e val uati on P Sx
to ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG).
PSIG
The following parameter has a new default value:
PSIG: Echo on re cei ve P Sx Without
The echo is issued (in consideration of the operating

delay and the CB status signals) as soon as at least one
PSIG signal is received (independent of P SI G: 3ended
l in e prot PSx) and there is no distinct general
starting.
The following change was introduced with version 611:
If for a 2pG fault or for an inter-system fault on double
circuit lines there are forward and backward (reverse)
decisions present at the same time, then the send
signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on
Z1e).
This was again modified as of the current version, so
that this is not the case with the setting P SIG:
3 en de d li ne prot PSx = Yes, because this
functionality could result in an under functioning of the
Protective Signaling in case of 3-ended line applications
(different lengths of the line parts, different feed-in
power).
With triple-ended applications the fault signals of both
communication channels are now available for separate
use.
(004 064) PSIG: Tele c.faulty ( A) EXT
(008 094) PSIG: Tel ec.f aul ty (B) EXT
Bug fixing:
A5-26
After changing an offline parameter no more echo

was issued until the warm restart.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1
FT_DA
Bug fixing:
In the MODBUS protocol only the eight VDEW

channels were transmitted, but not the analog
channels Vref and IN,par.
Under special circumstances discrepancies

between the timestamps of a spontaneous
message and the operating data recording were
possible.
Bug fixing:
FT_RC
Bug fixing:
PSB
The calculation of (004 029) FT_DA : Fault

react., pr im . used only Vnom = 100 V.
The messages (036 024) PSB: Z wi thi n

pol ygon and (006 192) P SB: Tri p s ignal OOS
(b) were not logged in the fault recording.
The duration of a starting signal issued at an instable

power swing was limited to 100 ms:
(006 035) P SB: Trip s ign al OO S (a)
(006 192) PSB: Tri p si gnal OOS ( b)
The counter (006 188) PSB: No. OOS-Swing (b) was

removed, and therefore (006 026) was renamed from
P SB: No. OO S-Swi ng (a) to PSB: No. OOS-Swing.
Bug fixing:
P437
LOGIC
Increase of the number of logic inputs from 16 to 40.
CBF
The parameter (011 067) C BF: tCBF has been

removed. This time-delay is no longer required by the
new circuit breaker failure function which includes the
undercurrent criterion.
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
630
The counters (for the number of stable and

instable cycles of the last power swing) were
reset when the max. blocking time elapsed.
Diagram
Release: 2009-09-10
No changes.
Software
CBF
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
The parameter designation for (022 160) CBF: I> was

changed to (022 160) CBF : I<.
A5-27
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
New logic state signals for clock synchronization:

The parameter: MA IN: Ti me synch ron ized
(009 109) shows whether an external clock
synchronization had been carried out. This signal is
reset after 10 minutes.
Bug fixing:
DIST
In the offline operation mode the fault trigger

(036 089) FT_RC: Trigge r EXT was not
functioning.
Bug fixing:
For all previous versions these signals were

signaled as not ending:
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
045)
105)
108)
047)
106)
109)
044)
104)
107)
DIST:
DI ST:
D IST:
D IST:
DIST:
DIST:
D IST:
D IST:
DIST:
Di r.u s in g V me as Sys1
Di r.u sing Vme as Sys2
D ir.us in g V meas Sys3
D ir.us in g V mem Sys1
Di r.u s in g V me m Sys2
Dir. usi ng Vme m Sys3
Forw . w/o me as . Sys1
F orw . w/o meas . Sys2
Forw. w/o me as . Sys3
(The distance protection function was in no way

affected.)
A5-28
The calculation of the impedance angle was

corrected which, with distorted current signals,
may have led to erroneous zone decisions by the
distance protection function.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
PSB
The settable extension of the blocking effect is now

available which will become active after a current
trigger has started or after the maximum blocking time
period has elapsed.
Load blinding is now available within the power swing
polygon.
With (008 248) P SB: Blocki ng EXT a blocking signal
is now available with which PSB protection can be
blocked.
Bug fixing:
In the operating mode S the threshold value

could be exceeded in case of low values of the
apparent power.
This was caused by natural fluctuations of the
measured value during normal operation and
resulted in spurious signaling of (036 058) P SB:
Operate del ay ru nn..
To cope with this problem the apparent power is
now measured only after it has entered the power
swing polygon.
PSIG
The three-ended line feature has been extended by

phase-selective input signals.
ASC
When the operating mode is set to Vref & Z1 but not V

(setting parameters A SC: A R Op.m ode v-chk .PS x,
A SC: MC op.mode v-chk. PSx) the meaning of the
condition Z1 has been changed such that it is now no
longer dependent on the tripping signals issued by
individual protections but on the recognition that the
General trip has occurred during operative time 1 of
the ARC.
A test triggering by RC parameters is now available for
functional testing.
IEC, GOOSE
Phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communications protocol has

been implemented.
COMM1
Enhancement of the IEC 608705103 protocol: These

signals are now transmitted spontaneously in the
private range:
F_KEY
(008 094) PSIG: Tel ec.f aul ty (B) EXT
(040 055) CBF: En abl ed
The default setting of passwords for function keys has

been changed. A password is now no longer required
when pressing a function key.
However, a password may still be configured
individually for each function key.
P437
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Hardware
A5-29
P437
Version
Changes
308
No changes.
408/409
614
Diagram
Release: 2011-01-07
No changes.
Software
IEC
In order to guarantee full compatibility with PACiS the

neutral-point displacement voltage (calculated and
measured) as well as the residual current (calculated
and measured) were assigned to the node MMXU so
that the node MSQI would then include only the
positive-sequence and negative-sequence values.
F_KEY
The default setting of passwords for function keys has

been changed. A password is now no longer required
when pressing a function key.
However, a password may still be configured
individually for each function key.
PC
The following parameter has been removed: P C:

Name of manufacturer (003 183).
Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the
operating program continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1
The data point (003 214) COMM1: MODB US prot.

vari an t may now be used to select between the
MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The
protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the
MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40
protection devices. The protocol variant Private
corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS
protocol.
Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the
MODBUS protocol is enabled.
A5-30
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1,
COMM2
The menu points (003 161) COMM1: Name of

manuf acturer and (103 161) COMM2: Name of
man uf actu re r can no longer be set by using a
selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in
individual cases, it may become necessary to enter
texts differing from the default.
Notes:
P437
These parameters can only be set using the

operating program and it is not possible to set
them locally using the integrated local control
panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8
characters and designations exceeding this will
be truncated.
The parameter COMM1 : Name of

ma nufactu re r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5
protocol is enabled.
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
631
Diagram
Release: 2011-01-07
No changes.
Software
IEC
FT_RC
In order to guarantee full compatibility with PACiS the

neutral-point displacement voltage (calculated and
measured) as well as the residual current (calculated
and measured) were assigned to the node MMXU so
that the node MSQI would then include only the
positive-sequence and negative-sequence values.
Bug fixing:
PSIG
Bug fixing:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
The signal (036 037) DIST: Block ing Z2 EXT

was not recorded by the fault recording function.
Tripping times were always longer than 40 ms

when the operating mode was set to Release
scheme with Direct.-dependent tripping. This was
because the execution of a process contained in
the distance protection function was not
terminated immediately with the start of the
tripping condition. This delay was added, under
certain conditions, to an intentional time-delay
set at data point P SIG: Tri ppi ng time PSx.
A5-31
P437
Version
Changes
PC
The following parameter has been removed: P C:

Name of manufacturer (003 183).
Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the
operating program continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1
The data point (003 214) COMM1: MOD B US prot.

varian t may now be used to select between the
MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The
protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the
MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40
protection devices. The protocol variant Private
corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS
protocol.
Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the
MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1,
COMM2
The menu points (003 161) COMM1: Name of

manuf acturer and (103 161) COMM2: Name of
manuf acturer can no longer be set by using a
selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in
individual cases, it may become necessary to enter
texts differing from the default.
Notes:
P437
These parameters can only be set using the

operating program and it is not possible to set
them locally using the integrated local control
panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8
characters and designations exceeding this will
be truncated.
The parameter COMM1: Name of

manu factu rer is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5
protocol is enabled.
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
614-722
Diagram
Release: 2012-02-01
No changes.
Software
A5-32
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
GOOSE
PC, COMM2
Bug fixing:
If single-pole signals of function group SIG_1 were

active during device startup, this could lead to an
aborted initialization of the Ethernet
communication module.
During the process of connection with clients that

use the IntegrityPeriod option, sporadically the
MMS communication of the Ethernet
communication module would crash without an
internal monitoring response to re-establish the
functionality. (GOOSE messaging and other
communication tasks were not affected.)
Reports of events could get lost if too many state

changes occurred in a short period of time,
especially during secondary injection testing.
The GOOSE Time Allowed to Live (TAL) supervision is

enhanced with respect to simultaneous state changes
of multiple GOOSE messages.
Bug fixing:
EK_SV
P437
If clients did connect to the device immediately

after startup of the Ethernet communication
module, the initialization of the second internal
communication interface could remain
incomplete. As a consequence, access by the
operating program via the COMM2 interface or by
tunneling was not possible in this case.
An der Auslselogik des ErdkurzschlussSignalvergleiches wurden mit der vorliegenden

Softwareversion nderungen vorgenommen, die die
Gefahr einer falschen Auslsung weiter verringern.
Hardware
309
410/411
631-723
Release: 2012-02-01
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-33
P437
Version
Changes
The P437 is now fitted with an improved power supply

module.
Note that the voltage range has changed for DC input:
For the DC / AC variant, the range is
now 60 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC

(previously 48 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC).
For the DC-only variant, the range is
now 24 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC).
A new communication module (REB = Redundant

Ethernet Board) is now available as an ordering
option.
This module can be used for redundant communication
via IEC 61850 and may be fitted to slot 2, as an
alternative to the other communication modules. The
following communication protocols are supported:
SHP (Self-Healing Protocol).
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
DHP (Dual-Homing Protocol).
A detailed description of the module and the

appropriate network connections is available as a
separate document (Redundant Ethernet Board,
Application Guide).
Diagram
The diagrams now include the new REB module.
P437 -420: case 40 TE, pin-terminal connection
P437 -421: case 40 TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pinterminal connection
P437 -422: case 84 TE, ring-terminal connection
The diagrams now include the new REB module.
P437 -410: case 84 TE, pin-terminal connection
P437 -411: case 84 TE, ring-terminal connection
Software
A5-34
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
GOOSE
PC, COMM2
Bug fixing:
If single-pole signals of function group SIG_1 were

active during device startup, this could lead to an
aborted initialization of the Ethernet
communication module.
During the process of connection with clients that

use the IntegrityPeriod option, sporadically the
MMS communication of the Ethernet
communication module would crash without an
internal monitoring response to re-establish the
functionality. (GOOSE messaging and other
communication tasks were not affected.)
Reports of events could get lost if too many state

changes occurred in a short period of time,
especially during secondary injection testing.
Events that occured after a communication link

had been interrupted and before this interruption
had been detected by the server, were not sent
as Buffered reports after the connection was reestablished.
The GOOSE Time Allowed to Live (TAL) supervision is

enhanced with respect to simultaneous state changes
of multiple GOOSE messages.
Bug fixing:
EK_SV
P437
An der Auslselogik des ErdkurzschlussSignalvergleiches wurden mit der vorliegenden

Softwareversion nderungen vorgenommen, die die
Gefahr einer falschen Auslsung weiter verringern.
Hardware
310
The P437 is now fitted with an improved

communication module for the InterMiCOM protocol.
410/411
632
Release: 2013-12-09
If clients did connect to the device immediately

after startup of the Ethernet communication
module, the initialization of the second internal
communication interface could remain
incomplete. As a consequence, access by the
operating program via the COMM2 interface or by
tunneling was not possible in this case.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
No changes.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-35
P437
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
311
The binary I/O module X(4H) with four high-break

contacts is now available.
412/413
650
The P437 is now fitted with an improved processor

module.
Release: 2014-06-17
A second InterMiCOM communication module is now

optionally available.
Diagram
The updated terminal connection diagrams include the
terminal connection diagrams for the new modules:
P437 412 (for 84 TE pin-terminal connection)
P437 413 (for 84 TE ring-terminal connection)
Software
MEASI
Addition of this per unit measurand
(004 017) TH ER M: Th erm . re pli ca p.u .
The maximum temperature value since the last reset is

now displayed by the new measured operating value at
(004 233) MEA SI: Tempe rature Tmax.
This measured operating value is reset by the new
triggering parameter (003 045) MEA SI: Rs t. temp.
Tmax USER.
CBM
A5-36
Function group circuit breaker monitoring (CBM) has

been added.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
The following per unit measured operating values have

been added:
(004 070) MA IN: Freque ncy f p.u .
(005 072) MAIN: An gle V PG/IN p.u.
(005 073) MA IN: L oad an gl e phi A p.u
(005 074) MA IN: Load angl e ph i B p.u
(005 075) MA IN: Load angl e ph i C p. u
(005 076) MAIN: A ngle phi N p.u.
The parameter (006 096) MAI N: Meas . direct ion

P ,Q allows for setting the sign of the following
measured operating data values for active and reactive
power:
(004 050) MAIN: Active power P pri m.
(004 052) MA IN: R eac. powe r Q pri m.
(004 051) MA IN: A ctive powe r P p.u.
(004 052) MA IN: Reac. powe r Q p.u .
The following measured operating data for delayed/

stored phase current values have been added:
M AIN: I A prim,de mand (006 226)
MAI N: IB pri m,deman d (006 227)
MA IN : IC pri m,de man d (006 228)
MAIN: IA prim ,de m and stor. (006 223)
MAI N: I B pr im ,dem an d s tor. (006 224)
MA IN: IC prim,deman d s tor . (006 225)
MA IN : IA p.u.,de mand (006 235)
MAI N: IB p.u .,de mand (006 236)
MAI N: IC p.u .,de mand (006 237)
MAIN: IA p.u. ,demand s tor. (006 232)
MA IN : I B p.u.,deman d s tor. (006 223)
MAIN: I C p.u. ,de mand s tor. (006 234)
New addresses with a 32 bit measured value display

have been added for the 4 energy measured values:
(008 065) MA IN: A ct.e ne rgy ou tp.prim
(008 066) MAIN: A ct.e ne rgy inp. prim
0 ... 6,553,500.00 MWh
(008 067) MA IN: Re act.e n. outp. prim
0 ... 6,553,500.00 MWh
0 ... 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
(008 068) MAIN: Re act. e n. in p. pri m
0 ... 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
It is now possible to set the reset time of the manual

close command enable using this parameter:
(003 088) MA IN : Rel .t. e nab. man .cmd
IDMT and DTOC with settable inrush stabilization per

parameter subset: Stabilization selectable per stage
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-37
P437
Version
Changes
(Phase; E/F and I2 stages): MAIN: Fu n ct.Rush

res tr .PSx (017 093, 017 064, 017 082, 017 083).
Settable maximum timer, for which inrush stabilization
should be effective: Blocked (w/o timer) or settable
from 0.01 to 10s. (019 001, 019 002, 019 003,
019 004) MA IN: t l ift rush rstr.P Sx.
The value range of (015 067) MA IN: C lose
cmd.pu ls e time has been increased to 0.100
10.000 s.
The previously available parameters (003 039) MAIN:
W arm res tart und (000 085) MA IN: C old re start
have been relabeled MAIN: Sof t W arm res tart and
MAI N: Sof t Col d re start, respectively. They still
trigger a restart of the device, but now the hardware
tests are not carried out anymore during the startup
phase. (This way the restart needs less time.)
For a restart including hardware tests, the following
new parameters can now be used:
(010 166) MA IN: Warm re start
(009 254) MA IN: C old re start
A setting for the release time of the enable for the

manual close command is now available:
(003 088) MA IN: R el. t. en ab. man.cmd
The manual trip command is enabled by:
(003 105) MAI N: E n.man .clos. cmd.USER
The enabling is signaled by the following new signal:
(039 113) MA IN: Man. cl. cm d.e nabl.
There is a phase-selective current flow monitoring

available now, identical to but independent of that in
function group CBF.
(010 223) MA IN: Curre nt f l ow A
(010 224) MA IN: C urr e nt flow B
(010 225) MA IN: C urr en t flow C
The MAIN: Fct.as si g.trip cmd.1 (021 001) is now

provided with a dedicated reduced selection table. This
prevents the configuration of signals that are already
linked in fixed logic such as DIST: Trip signal. This in
turn avoids jeopardizing fixed logic and thereby avoids
an unwanted 3-pole trip or non-selective trip of
extended zone 1.
INP
A5-38
The setting INP: Fi lter (010 220) is now available for

conformity with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
The following new signals are now available:
(007 213) MCMON: M. circ. V ref fau lty
(007 214) MC MO N: M.ci rc. VN G f aul ty
This permits blocking of only the associated voltage

timer stages in V<>, without blocking the entire V<>
function group.
V<>
There are now time voltage protection stages available

for Vref.
Stages V>>>, V<<<, Vref>>> and Vref<<< have been
added, including a separate timer for each of these new
stages.
For all three phase stages the 3p logic OR and AND
results are signaled.
IDMT
For all IP and Ineg types of characteristics the enable

threshold for the IDMT protection starting can now be
set with the factor KI (values range: 1 to 10) dependent
on Iref. This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the
enable threshold along the X-axis of the respective
characteristic. The factor will not result in a shifting of
the characteristic itself.
Parameters:
IDMT: Factor KI ,P PSx
IDMT: F actor K I,ne g PSx
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
(007 250, 007 251, 007 252, 007 253)

(007 254, 007 255, 008 002, 008 005)
PC
The default value of (003 081) PC: Baud r ate has

been changed to 115.2 kBaud.
F_KEY
The value range of (003 037) F _KEY: Re tu rn t im e

fct .ke ys has been increased to 1 60000 s, the
default value has been changed to 10 s.
FT_RC
The maximum value of (003 079) FT_RC: Post-fault

tim e and (003 075) F T_R C: Max. re cordi ng t im e
has been increased to 750 periods.
GFSC
The value range of (018 062) GFSC: VNG> has been

changed to 0.010 0.500 Vnom.
PSB
The Power Swing Blocking function has been revised.

Inparticular, the S operating mode has been removed,
and PSB blocking has been enhanced.
COUNT
Function group COUNT has become available. Four

binary counters can be used to count the positive pulse
edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately
A5-39
P437
Version
Changes
Many parameter labels have been modified so that

they harmonize with other MiCOM P30 devices.
DVICE
PC, DVICE
Instead of one parameter for the software version

(previously: (002 120) DVIC E: Software vers ion)
the version numbers 6XX and 7XX are now separately
stored in two new parameters:
(010 167) DV ICE: Sof tware ve rsi on 6XX
(010 168) DV ICE: Sof tware ve rsi on 7XX
It is now possible to upload new firmware into the

device via the TCP/IP protocol. For this purpose there
are several new network settings that are not identical
to the ones already existing within function group IEC:
(111 004) P C : IP addre ss
(111 005) PC: IP addre ss 1

(111 006) P C: I P addre s s 2
(111 006) P C: I P addres s 3
(111 008) P C : Su bn et mask
(111 009) PC: Subne t mask 1

(111 016) PC: IP addre ss mode
(111 017) P C: IP E nabl e confi g.
For testing purposes, information parameters store the

updated network settings for this firmware uploading
network.
IEC
A5-40
(111 000) D VIC E: I P addre s s
(111 001) DV IC E: Su bne t mask
(111 003) DV ICE: MAC addre s s
The number of clients for a report has been increased:

An unbuffered report (urcbA urcbP) can be allocated
to max. 8 clients (previously: 1), and a buffered report
(brcbA brcbH) can be allocated to max. 4 clients
(previously: 1).
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
Version
Changes
FT_DA
The following measured fault data values have been

introduced:
(010 198) FT_D A: Fault type
(010 217) F T_DA : F lt.vol t. PG/P P prim
(010 199) FT_DA: F aul t curre nt P pr im
(010 216) F T_D A: F au lt curr. N pri m.
The parameters for the load data have been removed:
(004 037) FT_DA : L oad imped.pos t-f lt.
(004 038) FT_DA : Load angl e pos t-flt .
(004 039) FT_DA : Re si d.cu rr. post-f lt
The fault location may now be determined, based

solely on a ground starting condition (without a general
starting). For this the P437 determines all three phaseto-ground loop impedances and then provides the fault
location based on the reactance of the measurement
loop with the lowest impedance value.
THERM
With the new parameter THE RM: Re tain re pl ica

P Sx (009 019, 009 030, 009 032, 009 039) it can now
be configured whether the thermal replica is retained in
the non-volatile section of the devices memory so that
it will still be available after an interruption of the
supply voltage.
CBF
It is now possible to also use the residual current

(measured or calculated) as an additional criterion for
circuit breaker open.
The following setting parameters are new:
(022 184) CBF: Evalu ati on IN
(022 180) CB F: IN<
The signal (038 235) CBF : C u rren t flow N = Yes

flags that the residual current IE is greater than the
setting C BF: I N<.
LOG_2
There is a new function group LOG_2 (Programmable

Logic 2). It is identical to the previously available
function group LOGIC, but it offers only four logical
equations. These, however, have long-term timers,
settable from 0 to 60000 s (= 16 hours, 40 minutes).
LED
There is a new operating mode ES Alarmunit:

If this is set, the LED starts flashing with the first signal
edge of the assigned signal.
If this is acknowledged (i.e. the LED is reset), although
the assigned signal is still active, then the LED changes
to continuous light, and if the signal disappears later
on, then the LED goes off.
If the flashing LED is acknowledged (i.e. the LED is
reset) and the assigned signal is no longer present, the
LED immediately goes off.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
A5-41
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
The condition for signaling transmission channel failure

can now be set to match the application requirements:
P SIG: Bl k.f .t elcom.f lt PSx (012 246)

= Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty for 2- or 3-ended line
protection
= Ch. (A)AND(B) faulty for 2-ended line protection
with redundant channels
The send signal P SI G: Sen d (s ign al) (036 035) is

now raised even in 3-channel applications along with
any of the phase selective send signals, because it is
transmitted in the protocol according to IEC 103 as
compatible spontaneous message.
For unambiguous signaling an additional send signal is
implemented which is used along with a 1-channel
transmission:
A5-42
P SI G: Se nd (012 243)
LOGIC
The number of logic outputs (equations) has been

extended to 128.
DIST
The sensitive range has been combined with the high

range.
COMM4
The new function group COMM4 is available for devices

with a second InterMiCOM module. It features the same
setting parameters and signals as COMM3.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P437/EN M/R-11-A
Publishing: Schneider Electric

08/2014

MiCOM P437 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P437 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P437

Distance Protection Device

P437 -311 -412/413 -650

General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual

are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety

are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Changes after going to press

Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

General Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-5

Global Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-6

Configurable Function Keys ........................................................................................ 1-8

Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 1-9

Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-10

Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-11

Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1

General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2

General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2

Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................2-3

Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4

Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

Routine Tests .................................................................................................................................................2-7

Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 2-9

Measuring Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9

Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-10

IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-11

Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-11

Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-11

Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-11

Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-12

BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-12

Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-13

Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-13

PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-13

Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-13

IEC Communication Interface ...................................................................................................................... 2-14

IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-15

Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-16

Settings Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-17

Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-17

Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17

Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-17

Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-17

Power Directional Protection ....................................................................................................................... 2-17

Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-18

Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-18

Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-19

Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-20

Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-21

Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-21

Phase Currents System ............................................................................................................................... 2-21

Residual Current ..........................................................................................................................................2-21

Phase-to-Ground Voltages and Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ...........................................................2-21

P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650

Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-22

Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-22

Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-24

Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-25

General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27

Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-27

Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1

Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3

Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-5

Fault Panel .....................................................................................................................................................3-6